








kv 






















Y ^ 












V 



! 

THE | 

PRINCIPLES 



GREEK GRAMMAR; 



COMPRISING THE SUBSTANCE OF THE MOST APPROVED GREEK 
GRAMMARS EXTANT, 



USE OF SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES. 



, REVISED AND IMPROVED. 



BY REV. PETER BULLIONS, D. D., 

1} 3 3 

PROFESSOR OF LANGUAGES IN THE ALBANY ACADEMY; AUTHOR OF THE 

SERIES OF GRAMMARS, GREEK, LATIN AND ENGLISH, ON THE 

SAME PLAN J A GREEK READER, ETC ETC 



TWENTIETH EDITION. 



<i NEW- YORK: 

PRATT, WOODFORD AND COMPANY 

No. 4 CORTLANDT-STREET 

1S51. 



ffl25S 



[Entered according to the Act of Congress, in the year 1847, by 
Peter Bullions, in the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the 
United States, for the Northern District of New- York.] 



48 6555 

i 1942 



PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. 



This work formerly published as a new translation of 
Moor's Greek Grammar with additions, has undergone a 
thorough revisal. Many errors have been discovered and cor- 
rected, defects have been supplied, and many improvements 
introduced, which a daily intercourse in the class-room with 
students in almost every stage of progress has suggested. A 
close attention to this subject for many years, with favourable 
opportunities for observing the attainments made by many, 
wr.o had commenced their studies by different systems, has 
strengthened the conviction long felt, that a radical defect exists 
in the plan of most of the Greek Grammars now used in our 
public schools. However excellent the elaborate treatises of 
the German Grammarians are, and however useful the many 
compends of these recently published may be as books of re- 
ference, or as guides to such as commence the study of Greek 
in maturer years, and have resolved, from a sense of its impor- 
tance, to master its principles; yel on trial, I am persuaded^ 
they will be found but imperfectly adapted to the condition of 
the great mass of youth in this country who begin, and too of- 
ten end, their Greek studies at an early age. With such, it is 
believed, that no system of Grammar will answer a good pur- 
pose, which does not present the leading facts and principles 
in such a way as to be easily committed to memory, and so to 
be ready for immediate application when necessary. 

It is true that youth of ordinary capacity by knowing only 
the inflexion of words, with the aid of a dictionary, and mode- 
rate application, will, in. time, be able to guess at the meaning 
of a passage in Greek ; but this is about all. An accurate, 
philosophical, and practical knowledge of its principles will, 
in this way, seldom be acquired. And wherever a Grammar, 
in the form of a lecture or treatise upon the subject, designed 
to be read and studied, but not adapted, or but ill adapted for 
being committed to memory, is put into the hands of young 
students, such will seldom fail to be the result. 

To remedy this evil and to provide a comprehensive manu- 
al of Greek Grammar, adapted to the use of the younger, as 
well as to the more advanced class of students hi our schools 



IV PREFACE. 

and colleges, and especially of those under my own care, was 
the original design of publishing this work. To this end the 
ig principles of Greek Grammar are exhibited in ru!>?5, 
ttd brief as possible, so as to be easily ccrasmii* 
and, at the same time, so comprehensive and p< 
cuous, as to be of general and easy application. These being 
fust accurately committed to memory, and then constantly ap- 
plied in the inflection of words, and in analyzing their forms, 
soon become so thoroughly understood and fixed in the memo- 
hardly ever to be effaced, and to be always ready after. 
ts, to account for every form which words in their nume- 
rous changes assume, and to solve every difficulty caused by 
changes almost without an effort of thought. A student, 
though young, if thus exercised but for one year or two, has 
an immense advantage, in the future prosecution of his studies, 
over those who have not laid the foundation of their success in 
a thorough course of drilling. 

Several excellent elementary works on Greek Grammar 
nave been published within the last ten years, by men eminent 
for talents and learning, and to whose labours I freely own 
myself under many obligations. But none of these, so far as 
known to me, have adopted to any great extent the plan just 
alluded to. To carry out such a plan to a greater extent than 
has yet been done, has been chiefly aimed at, and it is hoped 
in some degree attained in the present work. But while the 
leading and fundamental parts have been reduced to rules brief 
and easy to be committed to memory by the younger student, 
a copious illustration of these principles, and of the exceptions 
and varieties of usage under them, with every thing important 
to aid the advanced student, has been inserted in its place in 
small in the form of Observations and Notes, all of 

which are numbered for the sake of easy reference. 

In the preface to the first edition a full statement was given 
principal sources from which the materials, here collect- 
ed, were drawn, and which need not here be repeated. Suf- 
that I have not hesitated to avail myself of every 
tance within my reach, and to gather from every quarter, 
specially from the ample stores of German Philologists, 
vcr appeared suited to my design. The; labour of con- 
ing and arranging, and to borrow a term from the prin- 
!he several parts with due regard to 
harmony and proportion, into one compact whole, has been verv 
edition extended to a much greater length 
than was intended. A special object in preparing this edition 



PREFACE. V 

nas been to reduce the size of the book without impairing its 
value. To attain this, nearly the whole has been re-written 
and condensed, some things unimportant have been omitted to 
make room for others of greater value. The number of para- 
digms of the decleusion of nouns, adjectives, and participles 
has been increased, and the verb has been thrown into the 
form of a table, so arranged as to present the whole of each 
voice at once to the view, and to render it equally convenient 
in studying it to follow either the order of the tenses under 
each mood, or of the moods under each tense. 

I would beg leave in this place to call the attention of stu- 
dents and of teachers, who have not yet examined the subject, 
to the method of analyzing and forming the tenses of the verb 
which is here exhibited. No part of Greek Grammar has 
hitherto proved so puzzling and harassing to the pupil as this. 
For want of understanding the few simple principles, on which 
the numerous changes in the form of the verb depend, they 
appear to him intricate, arbitrary, and incomprehensible to 
such a degree as to render the prospect of his fully mastering 
them almost hopeless. That this is owing, in a great measure, 
to the method of forming the different tenses by deriving one 
tense from another to which it has some real or fancied resem- 
blance, appears to me beyond a doubt. As there is no foun- 
dation in truth for this mode of formation, so almost every 
writer, following imagination as his guide, has proposed a dif- 
ferent theory upon the subject. One, for example, forms the 
perfect passive from its own future. Another with equal in- 
genuity forms the future from its own perfect through the me- 
dium of the first aorist passive! Another supposes he has 
simplified the whole matter by deriving every tense in the pas- 
sive voice from its corresponding tense in the active voice, 
by making the simple and natural change of -\pw into -cpdr\oofxai, 
-fai into -/O^rrouai, -xpu into -cpdi]v, -|« into -x^ r l v ^ ~ty a into 
-uuai, --/u into -yfiaty and -«« into -fiat, sometimes into -a{xai. 
Vnother still, in order to arrive, for example, at the first aorist 
passive, starts with the present active and, by a succession of 
stages, arrives at the end of his journey thus, uTgsya), svToeyja, 
OjToecfu. loToauuai, avToumui, l(Tiqa(fdi]v\ and when he gets 
there he finds he has missed his way after all, for the first 
aorist of this verb is not baToucpOijv but eoTgicpdijv, and to bring 
him thither, another rule has to be invented nearly as dark as 
the road he has already travelled ; viz. <• Yerbs which change 
e of the future into o of the perfect active, and into « of the 
perfect passive, take s again in the first aorist ; as, eaiQotTzmi, 

A* 






V) PREFACE. 

*/#//>•." What can be more perplexing and arbitrary 
than such a process? It is fortunate for the rising genera- 
tion that such a system is beginning to pass away, and to 
Professor Thiersch of Germany must we regard ourselves as 
chiefly indebted tor the deliverance. Throwing aside the com- 
plicated sj >f rules and exceptions which the above theo- 
ries had rendered necessary, he direcls to the more simple 
and philosophical method of observing and stating the fact, 
thai the root or stem runs unchanged, or but slightly so, through 
the whole verb, and that one part differs from another in form, 
only in the part prefixed and added to the stem, and that in all 
verbs these parts arc nearly the same. Instead, therefore, of 
forming one tense from another by a process much like the 
story of " the house that Jack built," every tense is formed at 
once immediately from its root by simply annexing the proper 
Tense-ending and prefixing the augment in the tenses that re- 
quire it. Thus for the sake of comparison, instead of the la- 
borious and clumsy process above; in order to form the 1 aor. 
all that is necessary is to annex the aorist iense- 
,> to the root <JTo6(p, prefixing the augment, and it is 
done, — you have bOTQicpO^f at once; and so it is with every 
other tense. 

The whole system of forming the tenses from the root ac- 
cording to this method is given in about ten lines at the foot 
of p. 102, and all its modifications as applied to the different 
classes of mute, pure, and liquid verbs occupy only about three 
, 107 — 109. By forming the tenses in this way, the 
Greek verb will be found a simple, regular, and beautiful 
structure, as all that belongs to the language is. And I hesi- 
tate not, again to say, after ten years' further experience, and 
examination of other theories, that in my opin- 
ion " this method, for beauty, simplicity, and philosophical 
surpasses every other system of analysis, 
and that a more minute, familiar, and certain knowledge of 
; be obtained with much more ease and in 
studying it in this way than in any other." 
. after examining the subject may be of a 
nt rain I. and prefer the method of forming one tense 
rules for the formation of the tenses, 
unquestionably the simplest and most perfect of their kind, 
•• found at p and can be learned either before or 

after the paradigm of the verb, as the teacher may direct. 
who ad nethod will, of course, omit from § 81 

to § 97, except § S7 and 88 on the augment. 



PREFACE. VII 



Hints respecting the method of studying this Grammar. 

Those who have had experience in teaching the Greek language will need 
10 instructions from me how to study this, or any other Grammar which 
they may think fit to use ; but still a lew hints as to the way in which it is 
intended to be used may not be useless to the young teacher, or to the Stu- 
dent who may be under the necessity of prosecuting his studies without a 
teacher. 

It is by no means intended that the beginner should study, and much less 
commit to memory, every thing in the book. It is presumed that he comes 
to the study of Greek with some knowledge of the English and Latin Gram- 
mar, and he will therefore throughout meet with much with which he is al- 
ready acquainted and which will require no new labour. In general, the 
definitions and rules printed in large type, together with the paradigms ot 
nouns, adjectives, pronouns, and verbs, is about all that should be attend- 
ed to at first, but these should be committed very accurately to memory and 
repeated so often in daily revisals as to become easy and familiar. If this is 
not done, the student's progress will be slow and embarrassed at every step, 
which otherwise would be rapid, easy, and pleasant. By youth of ordinary 
capacity this will generally be effected in the course of six or seven weeks, 
It is then time to begin to read easy sentences, simply with a view to fur- 
nish a praxis on the rules and paradigms previously committed. In this 
exercise every word should be declined and every rule belonging to its in- 
flection should be repeated till it can be done not only correctly and easily, 
but almost without an effort. Two or three lines a day will be sufficient 
at first — increasing the quantity no faster than the pupil is able thoroughly 
to analyze every word. Simultaneously with this as a part of each recita- 
tion, the parts of the grammar already committed should be reviewed re- 
peatedly, first, in shorter and then in longer portions, till the pupil is able 
to run over the whole in a recitation of fifteen or twenty minutes. All this 
may be effected in the space of three or four months. Longer lessons will 
then be proper, and along with this the study of the Grammar taking up 
the more important parts of what was omitted before, not to commit to 
memory but study so as to become familiar with them, and be able to refer 
to them at once when they may be needed. By going over the Grammar 
two or three times, in this manner, in the course of a year, ever} 7 part will 
become connected in the mind with the rules to which these parts belong, 
so as to be readily recalled by them. 

There are two or three points to which it is necessary for the pupil to pay 
special attention. 1st. The Rules of Euphony, § 8. To the Euphony of 
their language the Greeks paid the greatest attention. In order to avoid the 
harsh sound which would be the result of certain consonants coming toge- 
ther, they often exchanged a consonant in certain situations for another of 
more pleading sound, sometimes they changed their order, sometimes drop- 
ped one of them, or inserted another. To this is owing, in part, the appa- 
rent irregularity in the flexion of nouns and verbs, which has led to form so 
many perphxing rules for cases and ten-es. The rules of Euphony extend 
not to the flexion of nouns only, hut to the whole structure of their lan- 
gaa^e — to the composition and derivation of their word?, and even to the 
collocation of them in a sentence. These principles are few, thoroughly 
idtized, and very easy to be comprehended. They are exhibited in 
the sixth section, and occupy a little less 'ham five pa^es. This part, and, 
as fundamental to it, the fourth section should be thoroughly mastered be- 
fore proceeding to the 3d declension where they will be needed 



Viii PREFACE. 

Another thing requiring Special attention, and of almost equal importance, 
(B the rults for ami ruction. These should be studied in their place after the 
third declension § 3 1—10, or they may he omitted till the second revisal. 
These with the exercises on them occupy about six pages, and should also 
be thoroughly mastered. These rules account for the changes that take 
place in the form v\ a word when vowels concur, as the rules of euphony 
ilo in the case of concurrent consonants, and both together arc indispensa- 
ble in order to understand the forms which words almost uniformly assume 
under the operation of these principles. A perfect readiness in the rules 
of contraction renders a paradigm of contract verbs entirely unnecessary. 
Still as some may wish to have such a paradigm, it is furnished in the ap- 
pendix s n 218, 

The last thing to which I would invite special attention is the mode of 
teaching the Greek verb, which on account of its numerous changes, and 
these affected differently in different verbs by the rules of Euphony, accord- 
ing to the consonants of which it consists, or which concur in the course of 
inflection has been regarded as so intricate and difficult. First of all it is 

i\ to ascertain in every verb the Root, or stem, which, in certain 
cases, undergoes changes peculiar to itself. These, however, are few, and 
under a very few short and plain rules, § 82-85. On these the pupil should 
be drilled till he can with perfect readiness and certainty tell the root of any 
regular verb the moment it is announced ; and also its second and third 
forms, when they differ from the first. This may be the work of one or 
two days. To the root is prefixed the augment in certain tenses, the rules 
for which will be found in § 8S, and require no special notice. The next 
step is to commit the tables of terminations § 92 very accurately to memory, 
beginning at the top of each column and proceeding down the page, this 
will be much more easily accomplished than to commit the paradigm of the 
verb; and will answer a better purpose. All that then remains is to learn 
the method of forming each tense by annexing the Tense-endings, § 93, to the 
proper root, according to the rules for mute, pure and liquid verbs in § § 94, 
96, 97. This is an important exercise and should be persevered in, till the 
utmost accuracy, ease, and readiness is attained. 

The Syntax of the Greek language is a highly important part of the sub- 
ject, and should be diligently and carefully studied, but this may he post- 
ed year, as the rules of Syntax common to the Latin and 
Greek will be Bufficienl for the earlier stages. The subject of analysis and 
translation in the Appendix §21^, may be worthy of some attention. 

;i myself or this opportunity to return my grateful acknowledge- 

fbr the favourable notice taken of the former edition of this work by 
minent scholars, and for the friendly critical hints with which I have 

Lvoured by teachers and others. They will see that these have gene- 
rally been attended to in this edition. The third edition of the English 

i ir lii~ just been published. The Latin Grammar is in a state of 

, and will likely he published in the Spring, Thepe three will 

complete th< I i rammars, English, Latin, ami Gn ek, on the same 

plan, following th rrangement, and as near as practicable express- 

definitions and rules in the Bam< language. So that one will he a* 

rofitable introduction to another, and the perplexity arisiug from studying 

Engiisn Grammar by one system, Latin by another, and Greek by one still 

differ nt. may be avoided* 

ALBANY LCADKMY, * 

September 25th, 1840. J 






INDEX. 



PAGE 

Accents 5, 291 

Accusative of 3d decl. ... 26 
construction of . 228 
governed by a neu- 
ter verb ... 230 

Adjectives, of 44 

of the 1st and 2d 

decl. .... 44 
of the 1st and 3d 

decl 46 

of two termina- 
tions .... 49 
irregular ... 51 
comparison of . 53 
comparison of irre- 
gular .... 55 
concord of, with a 

substantive . . 183 
other words used 

as 184 

used adverbially . 246 
obs. on the con- 
cord of . . . 184 
pronouns, con- 
struction and 
use of. . . . 187 

words, related con- 
struction of . . 198 
Adverbs, of . . . . . . 163 

signification of . . 163 
formation and deri- 
vation of ... 165 
comparison of . . 167 
construction of . . 244 
Adverbial particles (insepara- 
ble) 167 

Alphabet 1 

Anacoloutha 261 

Analysis ; 310 



PAGE 

Apostropho 6 

Apposition 183 

Article 42 

dialects of .... 43 

construction and use 

of ..... . 192 

as a demonstrative pro- 
noun 43, 66 

as a relative and per- 
sonal pronoun 195, 67, 43 

Augment, of 93 

place of, in com- 
pound words . . 95 
observations on . . 96 
Auxiliary verbs 83 



Caesural pause .... 

Case, of 

Characteristic of the verb, of 
Circumstances, construction 

of 

of cause or origin 
of limitation . . 
of cause, manner, 

and instrument 
of place . . 
of time . . . 
of measure 
of price . . . 
of exclamation 
Comparison of Adjectives 
general rule for 
in -ioiv and -iotoj 
irregular . . 
defective . . 
dialects of . . 
Comparative deg., construc- 
tion and use of ... . 
crovernment of 



285 
15 
87 

237 
238 
239 

241 

242 

243 

243 

244 

244 

53 

53 

54 

55 

55 

56 

187 
212 



INDEX. 



Conjunctions, of 17'5 

construction of 269 
signification and 

use of . . . 174 

Contractions, of 34 

of the lstdecl. . 35 

of the 2d dec!. . 36 

of the 3d decl. . 36 

general rules for 37 

exercises on . 38 

special rules for 39 



Dative plural 3d decl. of m . 
construction of . . • 
after substantives . 
governed by adjectives 
by verbals in -r<5j and 

-t£os 

by verbs . . . 

by impersonal verbs 
Declension, general rules for 
first .... 
second . . . 
do. Attic form of 
third .... 
gen. of . . 
do. of adjec 

tives . 
accusative of 
vocative of . 
dative plural of 
dialects of . 
genders of , 
Deponent verbs . . . 
Dialects of the 1st declen. ■ 
of the 2d . . . 
of the 3d . . . 
of the article . . 
of comparison 
of the pronoun . 
of the verb . , 
of'Eip 

Duereeifl 

Diastole , 

Digamma 

Diphthongs ..... 



oology .... 
Euphony, rules of . . 

Figures affecting syllables 
Final letters of the active voice 
mid. and pass. 

of verbs in -^» 



28 
219 
219 
220 

221 
222 
226 
16 
17 
20 
22 
22 
23 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 

146 

19 

21 

29 

43 ! 

56 

70 

123 

141 

7 

7 

6 

2 

13 

8 

7 

98 

98 

129 



PAGE 

Future 1st active, formation . 299 

of special rules for . 299 

of pure verbs . . . 300 

passive, rules for . 301 

special do. for . . 301 

Future 2d, rules for the penult 

of 302 

special do 303 

verbs which want the . 303 

Gender, of 15 

Genders of the 3d decl. . . 30 

Genitive of do 23 

of adjectives of do. . 25 
obs. on construction 

of 205 

governed by substan- 
tives 207 

by adj. in the 

neut. gender 209 
by adjectives . 210 
by the comp. de- 
gree ... 212 
by verbs . . . 214 
Government of 204 

Imperative mood, Syntax of . 253 

Impersonal verbs .... 147 

construction of . 226 
Indicative mood, construction 

of 252 

Infinitive mood, construction 

of ....:.... 257 

as a verbal noun . 258 

without a subject . 258 

with a subject . . 260 

used absolutely . . 262 



Metre, of 




279 


Iambic . • • • 




281 


Trochaic . . 


, # 


281 


Anapaestic . 


. . 


281 


Dactylic . . 


. . 


282 


Choriambic 


. . 


283 


Antispastic 


, . 


283 


Ionic a majore 


• . 


284 


Ionic a minore 


. . 


284 


Paeon ic . . • 




285 


Metres compound, of . 


# . 


286 


tables of . . . 




286 


Mood vowels, of . . 


. . 


98 


Moods, subjunctive and 


opta- 




tive, construction of 


. , 


253 


Mutes 




4 



INDEX. 



XI 



PAGE 

New present, formation of . . 149 

Negatives, of 247 

double .... 243 

Nom. case, construction of . 201 

concord of, with the 

verb in number . . 202 

in person . . 204 

Nouns, of 14 

accidents of ... . 15 

Nouns, irregular, of . ... 31 

defective, of ... . 33 

of peculiar signification 33 

Number, of 15 

Numbers, cardinal .... 57 

ordinal ..... 59 

notation of ... 59 

table of 60 

Numerals, classes of . . . 57 

Paradigm of the active voice . 112 

of the middle . . . 114 

of the passive. . . 116 

of contract verbs . . 308 

of verbs in -/u . . 133 

Participles, of 85 

the construction of . 263 
for the infinitive . . 265 
with \avQavoi &c. . 267 
with elfxlj yivopai, &C. 267 
in the case absolute 268 
Particles, conjunctive and ad- 
verbial 167 

signification of . . 174 

Parts of speech ..... 14 

indeclinable, of the 13 
Passive voice, construction of 

cases with 235 

Perfect active, formation of . 300 
active, special rules for 

penult of .... 301 

passive, formation of . 302 

middle, rules for '. . 304 

Prepositions, of 163 

alphabetical list of 169 
construction of . 250 
in compo- 
sition . 251 
Pronouns, personal .... 62 
possessive .... 63 
construction of 191 
in apposition . 183 

definite 63 

reflexive .... 64 

reciprocal .... 65 



PAGE 

Pronouns, demonstrative . . 65 

construction of 188 

relative 66 

concord of. . 195 

attraction of . 197 
other words 

used as . . 197 

in the sense of 

other words 198 

interrogative ... 67 

construction of 191 

indefinite .... 68 

construction of 190 

declension of . . . 69 

correlative ... 69 

dialects of ... . 70 

Prosody 271 

Punctuation 13 

Root of the verb, of . ... 87 

of finding and changing 87 

of the second .... 89 

third ?0 

verbs wanting the 2d and 

3d 91 

of the tenses .... 92 

Sentences, simple and com- 
plex 181, 310 

Spiritus, of the 5 

Superlative degree, construc- 
tion and use of .... 187 

Syllables . ; 5 

Syntax 181 

parts of . . . . . . 182 

general principles of . 182 

2d part of 204 

of the verb .... 252 

Table of vowel sounds ... 3 

Tense-root 92 

Tense-signs . .... 92 

Tense-endings ..... 92 

table of 102 

Tenses, of ,.:... . 78 

obs. on the use of . . 82 
of mute and pure verbs, 

formation of . . . 102 
of liquid verbs, forma- 
tion of 109 

formation, examples of 104 

Moor's rules for . . 299 

tabular view of . . . 307 

of verbs in -/it, of . . 128 

formation of . . 130 



XI) 



INDKXc 



PAGE 

Tenses of verbs formed from 

the primitive .... 139, 139 

terminations of . . . 99 

table Of ... 99 

of verbs in -//» . 129 

Translation 312 

Verb, of 71 

different kinds of . . . 72 

inflection of 73 

auxiliary ...*.. 83 

characteristic of . . . 87 
augment of (see aug- 
ment.) 
termination of (see termi- 

tion.) 

mute, special rules for . 103 

pure do. do. . 107 

liquid do. do. . 109 

contract of 110 

paradigm of . . 308 

dialects of / .... 123 

of the 2d conjugation . 127 

in -fit, tenses o . 130, 139 

root of 128 

final letters, 129 

combination of . . . 130 

paradigm of • . . . . 133 



pagk 

Verbs, obs. on 137 

irregular and defective 139, 148 

inflection of ... . 140 

alphabetical list of . . 151 

deponent ...... 146 

impersonal 147 

of peculiar signification . 147 
conjugation of, through 
the primary tenses . . 305 

concord of 202 

rules and obs. 





concerning . 


202 


governing the genitive . 
dative . . 


214 
222 




accus. . . 


228 




ace. & gen. 


231 




ace. & dat. 


232 




two accus. 


233 


syntax of 
Voice, of . 




252 






74 


active, 


table of . 




112 




obs. on . . 


, 


118 


middle 


of. . ■ 




75 




tenses of. 


. 


76 




table of . 


. 


114 


passive 

middle 

obs. 


, table of 

and pass 
on • . . 


ive, 


116 
121 



:' 


BBMYJIATJUO™, 




in Ancient Greek M8S. Sc 


Editions 




u, 


.ZO&Tcs 


/^ 


TfVy 


/ -7 


cavra % \ 




a<. 


*£,£ 


Haiy 


tfi 


*9, 


«x 




Kara, 


TJ&4 


} <jdai, j 


M. 


aJ\)\ f 


>^£fc XsoaJ\a<oV) 


<no, 


a HyO, 




ar. 


/#• 


uo(> } 


car, 


<rx, i 


~w. 


dno, 


Uff} 


uzS, 


o~? 


<r<r, 


(wtHj 


avtfo 




/** v> • 


*; 


<r t, 


aery . 


a v rep, 


ujt>, 


pev, 


%> 


**%> 




r*«> 




usTa, 


9,% 


Tat, 


■><• 


7f> 








VfjVy 


C4 


vpaftsrai 


<$■>% 


0tOV,OV) 




*ye, 


d 


& 


®y 


0£, 


TO, 


t • 


n 


X,f&, 


ov, ov, 


Zov, 


jU. <!lr 


oia } 


rfoe, 


b0C y 


%pH, 


Tor, 


% 


$q, 


<*%?&, 


JtaOy 


&&, 


TOVS y 


-*,<} 


£i, 


*ty» 


vtaoa. 


j,/T, 


Tq, 


eO, 


s7, 


*f> 


JCCO, 




Tqo, 


fjivaij 


"tlttl, 


&€()<> 


IV, cJ, 


rip, 


Gsy{, 


8K, 


•Gty> } *$ } 


gefy 


JUr,t 


T&V, 


m- 


£>., «aX 3 


&tP> 


jvoa. 


s, 


v> 


ci'< W 


iv, 


<GT£p, 


JiroOj 


f 


VLy 


* h>4\ 


i%> 


T>fjp, 


JV()G), 


ni/j*-^, 


vv 3 


m 


eaeiom 


£**' 


oa, 




V&j 


fcktu/k 


£&€Vy 


e/> 


<>i, 


Iffi 


vjveo, 


eactj 


&' 


</<?, 


r ^tHT), 


U&0> 




eq> 


&>> 


QU, 


v*CCt, 


X a ? c > 


it 


c(trt , 


G*> 


&a< 


&», 


M<" 


t 


£V, 




<rav, 


of, 


a, 



GREEK GRAMMAR. 
PART 1. 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 



The Greek Alphabet consists of twenty-four 
Letters, namely : 



A, a. 


\^lg>a. 


Alpha. 


a, 


B, ft 6. 


J?rJTa. 


Beta. 


b. 


r, 7, r. l 


r&fifia. 


Gamma. 




J, d. 


dilw. 


Delta. 


d. 


E, e. 


'Eipdbv. 


Epsilon. 


e. 


z, t. 2 


Zr\ja. 


Zeta. 


z. 


H, v . 


*H%a. 


Eta. 


* e. 


0, &, 6. 


Qr\xa, 


Theta. 


th. 


J, ». 


' libra. 


I6ta. 


i. 


K, *. 3 


KtCTTTta. 


Kappa. 


k. 


A, *• 


AduSda. 


Lambda. 


1. 


M, fi. 


Mo. 


Mu. 


m* 


TV, v. 


m. 


Nu. 


n. 


s, ?• 


SX. 


Xi. 


X. 


O, o. 


' 0/LUKQOV. 


Omikron. 


6. 


77, 7T, 'S3'. 


77?. 


Pi. 


P- 


p, p. 


'PS. 


Rho. 


r. 


2, *, * 4 


SXyfia. 


Sigma. 


s. 


T 7 , i.7. 


Tav. 


Tau. 


t. 


r, *• 


'Yipdbv. 


Upsilon. 


u. 


#, 9. 


0T. 


Phi. 


ph. 


-X, *. 5 


XT. 


Chi. 


eh. 


V, v. 


m. 


Psi. 


ps. 


J2, w. 


'Sl/Liiya. 


Omega. 


6. 



i r before a vowel like g hard, as in got ; — before k, y, ^, or f> ft i s sounded 
like n% in sing, thus, ayye^os, dyKuv, pronounced ang-elos, ang-kon. 

•2 Z like dz sounded soft, as /uX^w, pronounced melid~zo, £dw, pronoun- 
ced dzao. 

3 K like k or c hard. 

4 Sigma at the end of a word is written ?, not at the end a. 

5 X is alwavs a guttural, like the German ch in buch. 

1 



DIVISION OF LETTERS. 

Letters are either Vowels or Consonants. 



§ 1. OF VOWELS. 

1. The vowels are seven ; viz. 

Two short, e, o. 

Two long, 7], co. 

Three doubtful, a, v, v. 

2. A, i, v, are called doubtful, because they are sometimes 
short, and sometimes long. Thus, 

a in TtuTriQ, is always short. 

a in ladg, is always long. 

« in"AQ7jg, may be either long or short. 
There are but five distinct vowel sounds in the Greek lan- 
guage, viz. a, e, i, o, v. The y, and co, are used to express 
the lengthened sound of* e and o. The vowel sounds then 
may be thus expressed : 

Short, e, o, a, X, v. 

Long, 7], co, a, T, v. 



§ 2. OF DIPHTHONGS. 

1. A diphthong is the union of two vowels in one sound. 
If the sound of both vowels be distinctly heard, it is called a 
Proper diphthong ; if not, it is called an Improper diphthong. 

Note 1. The first vowel of a diphthong is called the prepositive vowel; 
and I he second, the subjunctive vowel. 

2. The Proper diphthongs are six ; and are formed from 
tf, e, o, with i or v subjoined : thus, 

from u are formed a* and av, 
from e si and eu, 

from o ov and ov. 

3. The Improper diphthongs are also six. Three have the 
Subjunctive vowel i written under ; viz. a, 77, co. The other 
three are /, '■, o)v, w. 

Note 2. In the improper diphthongs a, 77, y, when the prepositive is a 
capital, tli»- t is written after it ; thus, At, Ht, 0«. 



§3 



PRONUNCIATION OF VOWELS. 



3 



4. A vowel, preceded by another vowel, with which it does 
not form a diphthong, is said to be pure. Thus, a is pure in 
yea and cpilia ; og is pure in noleog, gad tog, &c. 



§3. 



OF THE PRONUNCIATION OF VOWELS AND 
DIPHTHONGS. 



The ancient pronunciation of the Greek vowels and diph- 
thongs cannot now be determined with certainty in all cases. 
The knowledge we have of it is derived chiefly from Greek 
words that appear in Latin, and Latin words that appear in 
Greek ; — from imitation of natural sounds, as the bleating of 
the sheep, or the barking of the dog ; — from a play upon 
words, and other hints of a similar character. 

If uniformity in the pronunciation of the Greek is to be 
aimed at — and it is certainly desirable that it should — the 
Erasmian method, among all others now in use, seems en- . 
titled to preference as a standard, not only on account of its 
simplicity and perspicuity, but also as having the authority 
of the ancients, so far as this can be ascertained, decidedly 
in its favour. It is, moreover, the pronunciation that gene- 
rally prevails in Europe, and has been adopted in some of 
the most distinguished schools in America. The whole sys- 
tem is exhibited in the following 



TABLE 


OF VO 


WEI 


, AND DIPHTHONGAL SOU] 


Short a 


like 


a 


in Jehovah 


as 


7taTTf[Q. 


Long a 




a 


far, 


as 


nag. 


Short e 




e 


met, 


as 


yivog. 


Long rj 




ey 


they, 


as 


<%• 


Short i 




i 


tin, 


as 


c lva. 


Long i 




i 


machine, 


as 


iXiov, x 


Short o 







not, 


as 


jovog. 


Long oj 







note, 


as 


(p&g. 


Short v as 


French 


u 


tu, 


as 


[Ll&QTVQ. 


Long v as 


French 


u 


une, 


as 


xvvbg. 


«*, 


like 


i 


fire, or aye, 


as 


Tvxpai. 


ev 




i 


fine, 


as 


TVlpSL. 


UV 




ou 


our, 


as 


a^)j6g. 


ev 




eu 


feud, 


as 


etiqi. 


OV 




oi 


soil, 


as 


oh 


ov 




ou 


ragout, 


as olzoy. 


VI 




ui 


quick, or we, 


as 


vldg. 



4 OF CONSONANTS. § 4. 

§4. OF CONSONANTS. 

1. The simple consonants arc either mutes or semi-vowels. 

2. The mutes arc nine, and are divided into three classes, 
according to their strength ; viz. 

Smooth, 7t, x, t. 

Middle, G, y, d. 

Aspirate, cp, %, 6. 

3. By strength is meant the force of voice, or of breath- 
ing requisite in pronouncing, which is different in each of 
the above classes, — the smooth mutes requiring the least, the 
aspirates the greatest, and the middle a degree of force in- 
termediate between the other two. 

4. Each smooth mute has its own middle and aspirate, and 
these three are called mutes of the same sound, or of the same 
order, because they are pronounced by the same organ ; thus, 

i7-mutes, or labials, n, 6, cp. 
X-mutes, or palatals, x, 7, /. 
T- mutes, or dentals, t, d, 6. 
Obs. In mutes of the same sound, one is frequently changed 
for another. 

5. The semi-vowels are five, I, f* 9 v, Q, s. Of these I, ?i, 
v, o, are called liquids, because they readily unite with, or flow 
into, the sound of other consonants. 

6. The double consonants are three, ip, I, t, ; and are 
formed from the three orders of mutes with g ; thus, 

71, G, cp, \ i ip, i i ps. 

*> *h Xi > w i m $ makes < I, > equivalent to > x. 

h () > % i t z> ) y z - y 

7. In the declension of nouns and verbs, when a 7r-mute, 
or a x-mutc, would be followed by g, the double consonant 
ip or S is substituted ; thus, instead of "AqaGcrv or rclexcjca, 
must be written "AQaipi, nU^oa, &c. But a r-mute, coming 
before ?, must be rejected ; thus, for cxvvtow must be written 

tJOJ, &c. § 6. 8. 

8. In like manner a double consonant may be resolved into 
the mute from which it is formed, and g; thus, 

\p may be resolved into ng, Gg, or cpg. 

£ into *g, yg, or /g. 

J into tc, bg, or dg. 

This is done when, in the declension of nouns and verbs, 

it becomes necessary to separate the g frdm the mute with 



§ 5. OF SYLLABLES. 5 

which it is combined ; thus, lallaxp, by dropping the g becomes 
XaLXaTt' x6ga$ becomes xogax ; and so of other combinations. 



§ 5. OF SYLLABLES. 

A Syllable is a distinct sound, forming the whole of a 
word, or so much of it as can be sounded at once. To these 
belong certain marks and characters ; as, 

1. ACCENTS. 



^ 



Accents are used to regulate the tone of syllables over 
which they are placed. They are three : the acute ('), the 
grave ( v ), and the circumflex, which was first marked A , then 
* and lastly ~. 

The acute is placed on one of the three last syllables of a 
word, and indicates that the tone of the syllable is to be rais- 
ed or sharpened ; as, tvtctco, I strike. 

The grave is never placed but on the last syllable, and in- 
dicates that its tone is to be lowered ; as, t^, honor. 

The circumflex is placed on a long vowel or a diphthong, 
in one of the two last syllables, and unites the force of both 
the former, by first raising and then depressing the tone of 
the syllable ; as, ttoiu. 

2. SPIRITUS OR BREATHINGS. 

The Spiritus, or breathings, are two ; the asper, or rough 
breathing, marked ( c ) ; and the lenis, or soft breathing, mark- 
ed C). 

The spiritus asper has the force of the Latin H ; thus, 
uuu is pronounced Hama. 

Note. Anciently H was the mark for the aspirate, in Greek, as it is in 
Latin ; thus, lkoltov was written hekaton. 

The spiritus lenis only indicates that the spiritus asper is 
not to be used. These marks are used as follows : 

1st. A vowel or diphthong, beginning a word, has always 
a spiritus. In the diphthong it is placed over the second vowel ; 
as vifia, iy&, evoi, ovtoq. 

2d. u, or o, beginning a word, has always the spiritus asper. 

3d. o in the middle of a word, if single, has no spiritus, 
*)ut if doubled, the first has the spiritus lenis, and the second 
<he spiritus asper ; as ndgqa), porrho 

1* 



6 OF SYLLABLES. § 5 

3. THE jEOLIC DIGAMMA. 

The JEolic dialect, the most ancient form of the Greek 
language, had no apiritns asper, and it is seldom used in the 
Ionic. The want of it, in the former, was compensated, in 
all words beginning with a vowel, by a species of aspirate, 
now called THE JEOLIC DIGAMMA. 

This was originally a full and strong consonant having 
the sound of the Latin F or V. It was called di gamma, be- 
cause its form ( F) was that of a double r. It is thought to 
have been used by the ancients before words beginning with 
a vowel, and between two vowels, which, by its disuse at a 
later period, came together without forming a diphthong ; thus, 
oIvoq, suq, fe, oig, al&v, aogvog, &6v 9 and the like, were writ- 
ten, or pronounced as if written, Folvog, F&<*Q, Fig, oF*>g, &i- 
jFoj*', (jcFogrog, kFbv, from which the Latin vimim, ver, vis, ovis, 
crvum, avernns, ovum, &c, were evidently derived before the 
digamma disappeared. Between two vowels it was at length 
softened down, and even with the iEolians passed into v. 
Thus we have atfrjo, a-66g, for the common dijo, f\(bg. This ac- 
counts for the form of some words in the Attic and common 
dialects in which the digamma, softened into v, still remains, 
especially where followed by a consonant. Thus the ancient 
/eFo) passed into %6fo>, and lastly into yjw, which still retains 
in the 1st fut. #etfcr<w, the softened form of the ancient /sFcrco. 
So xlaUa, Attic y.l&o), has in the 1st fut. xhtvaw. In like 
manner vueg, the plural of vavg, still retains in the dative va-b- 
oi, the softened form of the ancient vaFvi. 

4. The Apostrophe (') is written over the place of a short 
vowel which has been cut off from the end of a word ; as 
dW . y<b for uIIul £y&. This is done when the following word 
begins with a vowel, and in compounds when the first part 
ends, and the last begins with a vowel. § 6. 3. 1. Some- 
times the diphthongs are elided by the poets; as, 6ovlofj? iyib 
for GotiXofiat ;yu ; and sometimes after a long syllable the 
initial vowel is cut off from the following word ; as, & 'yadi for 

Exc, Instead of the apostrophe, or cutting off the final 
vowel, the concurring vowels are sometimes contracted ; as, 
rtootioyov for nob igyou ; vjxx, for xal £x. 

Note The union, or contraction of such words, isindicated by thespiritus 
being placed over the vowel, at the place of junction, as in the preceding 

examples. 



§ 6. EUPHONY. 7 

5. The Diastole is a comma inserted between the parts of 
a compound word, to distinguish it from another word consist- 
ing of the same letters ; as, to,ts, and this, to distinguish it 
from z6r£, then ; o,n, what, to distinguish it from on, because. 
Sometimes they are written apart, without the comma ; thus, 

TO T€, 6 11, 

6. The Diaeresis (") is placed over a vowel, to show that it 
does not form a diphthong with the vowel which precedes it ; 
as, 6'i'c, a sheep, ngavg, mild, pronounced o-is, pra-as, 

7. The figures affecting syllables are as follows : 

1st. Prosthesis is the prefixing of one or more letters to the 
beginning of a word ; as, o-fuxgog for fjungog, ssUoov for 

ei'XOCFL. 

2d. Paragoge is the adding of one or more letters to the 

end of a word ; as, riada for ?)s; toXoi for rolg. 
3d. Epenthesis is the insertion of one or more letters in 

the body of a word ; as, ellads for llufis ; onnoxegog 

for bnoiegog. 
4th. Syncope, is the taking away of one or more letters from 

the body of a word ; as, i\l6ov for ^IvOov ; e^g^rjv for 

e-6q?]o<jcu7iv. 
5th. Jiphceresis is the cutting off of one or more letters 

from the beginning of a word ; as, oTsgonri for <xvts- 

Q07T71 ; OOTTJ for 600T7]. 

6th. Apocope is the cutting off of one or more letters from 
the end of a word ; as, da) for dwfia ; noveid® for i7o- 
oeidihva, 

7th. Tmesis is when the parts of a compound word are se- 
parated by an intervening word ; as, tinig zivb. e'xsiv for 

i)7XEgk'/ElV tlvo\. 

8th. JMetathesis is the transposition of letters and syllables ; 

as, Ircoudov for enagdov ; edganov for edagnov ; x&grog 

for xguTog. 

Ohs. The Ionians, by a species of Metathesis, change the 

breathing in a word ; as, y.lQ&v for %M<hv; ivdavTa for evxuvOa. 



§ 6. EUPHONY. 

In combining their letters into words, the Greeks paid the 
strictest attention to Euphony, or agreeableness of sound. 
This principle, indeed, pervades the whole structure of the 
language. From a regard to this, they carefully avoided 
every concurrence of consonants not easilv pronounced to- 



8 EUPHONY. § 6, 

or. The means by which this is effected may be sum- 
med up in the following 

RULES OF EUPHONY. 

,t Importance for the student to be very familiar with the following rules, 
and expert in applying them, before be enters on the 3d declension, as they are them 
required in almost every step To aid htm in this, a table of exercises is subjoined, 
in which he should practise till ha can correct the orthography, and give the rule with 
the greatest ease and readiness.) 

1. Words ending in at, and verbs of the third 
person in s and t, add v to the termination be- 
fore a vowel, or before a pause ; as, 

lluisiv elnev exeZvoic, for Tiaat sins tx ; also to the diphthong 
ei, in the pluperfect indicative active ; — the word si'xoai, 
(twenty), and the adverbs nsqvcn, navT&naat, voocpi, ngdaOs, 
djiiade, xs and w. This was called by grammarians v icpskxva- 
uy.6i>, because by preventing the hiatus between two vowels 
it, as it were, drew the second vowel to the first. Among 
the poets it is sometimes added to these terminations before 
a consonant, when it is necessary to render a final syllable 
long ; and sometimes by the Attic prose writers to give energy 
to the tone. 

Obs. 1. Sometimes c is added, on the same principle ; thus, 
outo) becomes ovwig. Also the particle ov is changed into 
ovx before a vowel, and into ov/ before an aspirated vowel. 

2. When two mutes of a different sound come 
ether, they must be of the. same strength; i. e. 

must be both smooth, or both middle, or 
both aspirate ; as into, aSS&ov, a%0og. 

If, by derivation or declension, two mutes of different 

strength would come together, the former must take the class 

ttter ; thus, the terminations -Tog, -dip', -dsi,g, with 

being omitted, form ygmtrdg^ you(nhji>, youy- 

two mutes already combined, one cannot be 

changed without a corresponding change in the other. Thus 

id 6xT(b, it' the t be changed into $, the n and x 

must be changed into// and y\ as, L/m/:, SSdofiog; o^tw, dyddog. 

:;. A smooth mute in the end of a word is 
changed into its own aspirate before an aspi- 
rate 1 vowel. This is done, — 

i.->t. In the composition of words; thus, from Irt and 



§ 6 EUPHONY. 9 

f t fiEQa comes tqrjiegog. So from e^rr^, by apostrophe, 
£ttt , and \uega comes eydiluegog ; from xaia and evd& 9 
xadevdw, &c. 
2d. When words stand together in a sentence; thus, ego" 

fyuv, ^utf' r it uag y ay? ou, &c. 

3d. When words are united by contraction ; thus, to lyA- 

jiov united become 6oiu&tioi> ; to tTegov, OccTsgov, &c. 

N. B. The middle mute d is never changed before an 

aspirated vowel ; as, •?*«#' Ixsadac- and 6 and 7 only before 

-d, and §w in forming the perfect and pluperfect active, 

§ 86 Obs. 2 — Ex is never aspirated. 

4. When two successive syllables would be- 
gin with an aspirate, the first is changed into its 
own smooth ; thus, 

UtcpO.rjxa, not cpeyllrjxa; Ogi%, Gen. TgL%bg, not Ogvybg ; so 
from the root Oge/ the verb is roe/co, not dgeyco ; from 6gsq>, 
Toecpoj. not 6geq:o) ; and from s/, £%& not £/w. (See below, Obs. 
3.) In like manner from Oacp, the root of O&mo), (R. 2.) is 
derived rucpog, &c. 

Exceptions. To this rule there are five excep- 
tions ; viz. 

Exc. 1. Compound words generally ; as, bgvvdod^gag : icpvq)^. 

Exc. 2. # or / before 6 ; as, (p&dt,, %vdr)vai. 

Exc. 3. When one of the aspirates is joined with another 
consonant; as, OacpOslg, anecpQidov, nvOeudai^ (but the rule 
Holds when g follows the first aspirate, as above in t^co not 
dgt/o). ) 

Exc. 4. If the second aspirate has been occasioned by a 
spiritus asper following it ; as, Wr}-/ 6 avOgomog for edrjrf ; 7ri- 

iq-ev/a for nbcpevy-d ; and so of others. 
Exc. 5. When the second aspirate belongs to the adverbial 
. terminations Oev or di ; as, TtuvxaybQEv, KogwdbOi. 

Obs. 2. Of three aspirates beginning successive syllables, 
the first only is changed ; as, r&dacpa for OtOucpa. 

Obs. 3. When the first of two aspirates is the spiritus as- 
1 j per it is changed only before /; thus, 60ev, 061, $\opu, &c.,pre- 
- serve the spiritus asper before the aspirates and 9, but e/to 
must be changed into e/o). 

Obs. 4. When the second aspirate is lost by inflection or 

1* otherwise, the first is resumed; thus, Ijjf©, 1st fut. t£a>; Tgi%&, 

OgbBo) ; TOLffo), Ogiipu ; and the derivatives Ogembg, dgeitziTibg^ &c. 

Obs. 5. The second of two aspirates is seldom changed. I 1 



10 EUPHONY. § 6. 

ia always done^ however, in imperatives in di ; as, xlben^ iiy- 
OijXi : for tided*, Tvqih^i. 

Obs, 6. A mute may be doubled, but if it be an aspirate, the 

first is changed into its own smooth ; as, 'AiOlg, noVAOOlg ; 

not B&x%OQ I MutOuXos not MadOalog; JZanyd not 

5. P at the beginning of a word is doubled 
when a short vowel is prefixed ; as, 

r Pin ro>, £u()i7tiov ; d^£7rTJ£ from « and ^t ( 7rcu ; Tteql^QOog from 
f*f£>i and q&w. 



1. THE MUTES BEFORE -^ 



6. A 7t-mute (tc, £, $,) before cr, unites with it 
and forms ^ ; as, 

leLrta), lelTTcrco, written Xetipco. 

7. A % mute (^, y 7 #,) before cr, unites with 
it and forms £ ; as, 

^fcw, ^*<7o>, written t}§oj. 

8. A r-mute (r, 5, 0,) before cr, is rejected ; as, 

cr&fiuat, for jtifiaTat, ; ofaw for G:#aa) ; qqvmti, for ogvidai. 



II. THE MUTES BEFORE M. 

9. A 7t-mute before ^, is changed into ^; thus, 

for t6tv71jlmu, T&TQiG{iai, ySygacpfiai, 
Write, Thvfi/uat, t£tqi[J{iou, y^yqa^ixav. 

10. A *-mute before ^ is changed into y\ thus, 

for Trlrtlrxuai, (tidor-yuui^ 
write ni.rlry/niu, C>£(josyuuL. 
Hence y before ,", remains unchanged ; as, Ulsy/nai. 

11. Air-mute before ft, is changed into cr; thus, 

for 7]rur//f/f, T\qri<)uai, n&TtsiOutti, 

write mtjmu, n&TtBiofiain 

Ob 8, 7. To these rules there arc some exceptions in sub- 
stantive forms, us, dtXfi'Qi not iy^; ndrfiog, not ndafiog. 



§ 6. EUPHONT. 11 

III CHANGES OF THE LETTER N. 

12. N, before a 7t-mute, and also before i//, is 
changed into ft ; thus, 

for fovn&vco, XavS&vco, evcpig, svipv/og, 
write fofXTt&voj, Xa/uSdvco, eftcpvg, s{iipv%og. 

13. N, before a se-mute, and also before £, is 
changed into y ; thus, 

for evxsificu, cpvvy&vw, tvv%&v(d 9 ttX&v^co, 
write eyxe^ucu, cpvyy&va), rvyy&voj, rtX&y}~Q). 

L4. N, before a r-mute, remains unaltered ; as, 

ivT6g } avvdico. 

15. N, before another liquid, is changed into 
the same ; thus, 

for £p/usvco, ervvXa/LiSavco, avvgdrtrco, 
write iupsvo), crvXXa/nSdvco, avgg&nTG). 

16. N, before a or £, is usually rejected ; thus, 

not dalfiovacy vvvtyyla ; but datfiocri, av'Qvyia. 

Obs. 8. N is retained before a only in a few words ; as, 
liovvg, EXjuvg, nicpavaai. In crw before cr, followed by a 
vowel, it is changed into a ; thus, avacrstico, (jvaaixla. Ev re- 
tains the v before g, a, £. 



IV. OF THE LETTER 2. 

17. When a would stand between two con- 
sonants, it is rejected ; thus, 

XeXeln-adow, TeTglS-adcu, Xsyiy-crOcocrav. 
without a, XeXeL7t-0o)v , TSiglS-Oai, XsXiy-dojcrav. 
combined, XeXetcpdoov, TSjgTcpOai, XeX6%0(ocrai'. 

And so from rjyeXcrda^ r\yyiXQai ; from iticpavudov^ rtiyav- 
dov, or Tttcc.aadov. 

Obs. 9. Also when or by inflection comes before a, one of 
them is rejected ; as, 

Perf. 2d. Sin. daycs^acr-aav. Plup. iaxsvacr-uo. 
become icrxsvacrou. ivxevaao. 



12 



EUPHONY. 



§6. 



18. When both v and a r-mute together, are 
cast out before c, £ preceding it is changed into 
ei, o into ou, and a doubtful vowel is lengthened ; 
but y; and cj remain unchanged ; thus, 



run becomes TvcpOeZvL\ 
data orreiuo) ; 

rrrc lioven ; 

TVmOl'KTl TVTTTOVCn '. 



Tv\j)uvi(ji becomes j-vipdcn ; 

yiyavjav yiydai ; 

deixvvvjcn delxvvcri : 

TVTtTOJVTOl T^OTlJbidi. 



Obs. 10. In some instances, and perhaps always in the nom- 
inative, this alteration takes place when v only has been re- 
jected ; thus, from hvg, jalavg, [leluvg, come elg, r&lag, 

field;. 

19. When two consonants meet, which are 
not easily pronounced together, the pronuncia- 
tion is sometimes relieved by inserting a third 
consonant between them ; thus, 

(jcvgog, by syncope for tiviqog, is relieved by inserting d ; 
as, (jcrdgbg. Sometimes by a metathesis, or transposition of 
letters ; as, enqadov for enaqdov. 

20. Table of words to be corrected accord- 
ing to the foregoing rules. 

(Lpt the pupil always give the rule for tnc correction.) 



elircr- '())' 


MOqx 1 6 


&6/Liat, 


lelrccrco 


l^Scrco 


tpaui ex — 


qjeqxxxoc 


GVVTtleXOt) 


ovvyovog 


enq&yQrjv 


ovg 


Oidevxa 


£i'6(it')'o) 


iv/ico 


Ev6 6.11b) 


ehte 


tiyvei 


(jwcpeqw 


(Tvv^ecx) 


1VTCJOVTUV 


TTUlCfl 


Ttlixaoj 


evipv^og 


£i>le[7T0J 


TvnOSvjcri, 


eldi 


ucpcruv 


IvxllVM 


aw/uiva) 


n iv 6 do fiat, 


Torrrpi 


nelOcro) 


/<'/Qi]U(Xi 


avvqioj 


liovxoi 




(JLWTOOV 


e/eig 


Gvvlr]\jJig 


%aiavT(Ji 


()•'/.<{ 10) 


Mkeitpai 


'Addlg 


TvipOat 


xqt6T(x> 



§ 7. PUNCTUATION. 

The marks of punctuation in Greek are, the 
comma (,) ; the colon and semi-colon (•) ; the 
period (.) ; and mark of interrogation (;). 



§ 8. OF WORDS. 33 

PART II. 



ETYMOLOGY. 

Etymology is that part of Grammar which 
treats of the different sorts of words, their various 
modifications, mid their derivations. 

§ 8. OF WORDS. 

1 . Words in respect of their Formation are 
\ either Primitive or Derivative, Simple or Com- 
| pound. 

A Primitive word is one that comes from no other ; as, 7taTg, 
&yadbg. 

A Derivative word is one that is derived from another word ; 
! 85, Ttaidela, dcyaddrrjg ; from TtaTg, tiyadbg. 

A Simple word is one that is not combined with any other 
word ; as, 6&Xha. 

A Compound word is one that is made up of two or more 
simple words ; as, £%6&llw, from ex and 6<kllw. 

2. Words in respect of Form are either De- 
clinable or Indeclinable. 

A Declinable word is one subject to certain changes of ter- 
mination, to express the different relations of gender, number, 
ease, person, &c, — usually termed in grammar Accidents. 

Obs. 1. In every declinable word there are at least two 
parts, the root or basis, and the termination. The root re- 
mains unchanged, except by euphony, in all the different forms 
which the word assumes. The termination is added to the 
root, and is varied by inflection to produce these different forms. 

Obs. 2. The inflection of nouns, adjectives, pronouns, and 
participles, is called Declension, that of verbs, Conjugation. 

An Indeclinable word is one that is subject to no change of 
termination. 

3. In respect of Signification and Use, words 
are divided into different classes, called Parts of 

Speech. 

2 



4 OF THE NOUN. s} 9, 10 

§ D. PARTS OF SPEECH. 

The Parts of Speech in the Greek language 
are eight ; viz. 1. JVoun or Substantive, Adjec- 

lin\ Article, Pronoun, and Verb, declined. 2. 
Advcro, Preposition^ and Conjunction^ undeclined. 

0/>.s\ 1. The participle, which in some Grammars is consi- 
dered a distinct part of speech, is properly a modification ot 
the verb, and may, therefore, be considered as a part of it. 

Obs. 2. In Greek, the interjections are considered by most 
Grammarians as adverbs. 



§ 10. OF THE NOUN. 

A Noun, or Substantive, is the name of any 
person, place, or thing. They are of two kinds, 
Proper a n d Common. 

1 . A Proper Noun is the name applied to an in 
dividual only; as, rt ' OurjQog 9 A6rpaf\ Homer, 

! ns. 

Among these may be included, 

Patronymics, or those which express one's parentage or fa- 
mily ; as, rioiuuldriQ, ike son of Priam. 

Gentile, or P atrial, which denote one's country ; as, y Adn~ 
vuToz, an Athenian. 

2. A Common Noun is a name applied to all 
things of the same kind ; as, dz^p, olxog, 6t6/\/)g, 
a man, a liouse 1 a booh. Under this class may 
be ranged, 

1st Collective nouns, or nouns of multitude, which signify 
many in the singular number ; as, Xadg, people. 

2d. Abstract nouns, or the names of qualities; as, uyaOoTvg, 
good 

3d. Diminutives, or in 'ins which express a diminution in 
the signification of the nouns from which they are formed; as, 
nat()l(fi', a little boy ; from naTg. 

4th. J&mplificative nouns, or those which denote an increase 
in the signification of the nouns from which they are formed 
as, %i(f//jAni'^ a person who has a large head; from xecp&lr]. 



§ 11. ACCIDENTS OF THE NOUN. 15 

§ 11. ACCIDENTS OF THE NOUN. 

To the Greek noun belong the Accidents of Gender, JVum 
ber, and Case. 

1. Gender means the distinction of nouns 
with regard to sex. There are three genders, 
Masculine , Feminine, and Neuter. 

Of some nouns the gender is determined by their significa- 
tion ; — of others by their termination. 

The Masculine gender belongs to all nouns which denote 
the male sex. 

The Feminine gender belongs to all nouns which denote 
the female sex. 

The Neuter gender belongs to all nouns which are neither 
masculine nor feminine. 

Nouns which denote both males and females are said to be 
of the Common gender, i. e. they are both masculine ancl fe- 
minine. 

The gender of nouns not determined by their signification 
is usually to be ascertained by their termination, as will be no- 
ticed under each declension. 

Obs. 1. In Greek lexicons and gram mors, the gender i? 
indicated by the article ; viz. 6 indicates the masculine, 17 the 
feminine, and to the neuter; as, 6 <jcvf\g, the wan, ^ ywr\, the 
woman, to '^ov, the animal. 

2. Number is that property of a noun by 
which it expresses one or more than one. Greek 
nouns have three numbers, the Singular, Dual x 
and Plural. 

The Singular denotes one; the Plural more than one. 

The Dual denotes two, and is most commonly used in 
speaking of those things which are produced, or are usually 
spoken of in pairs. 

Obs. 2. In the oldest state of the Greek language the dual h 
not used. It is not found in the iEolie dialect — in the New 
Testament — in the Septuagint, nor in the Fathers. It is mos* 
common in the Attic dialect, in which, however, the plural is 
often used instead of it. 

3. Case is the state or condition of a noui 
with respect to the other words in a sentence. 



16 OF DECLENSION. § 12. 

Greek nouns have five cases, the Nominative, 
Genitive, Dative, Accusative, and Vocative. 

1st. The Nominative case denotes the name of an object 
simply, or as that of which something is affirmed. 

2d. The Genitive connects with the name of an object, the 
idea of separation, origin, possession. 

3d, The Dative represents the thing named, as that to 
which something is added, or to or for which something is 
said or done. 

4th. The Accusative represents the thing named, as affected 
or acted upon by something else, and also as the object to 
which something tends or relates. 

5th. The Vocative is used when persons or things are ad- 
dressed. 

Obs. 3. The Ablative case is not used in Greek as in Latin. 
Its place is supplied by the genitive and dative. 

Obs. 4. All the cases except the nominative, are called ob. 
lique cases. 

§ 12. OF DECLENSION. 
Declension is the mode of changing the termi- 
nations of nouns, adjectives, &c. 

Words declined by cases consist of two parts, — the Root 
and Terminal ion. 

The Root is that part which remains unchanged by inflec- 
tion, except as required by the rules of euphony. It consists 
of all that precedes the termination in the genitive singular; 
thus, Gen. Tifi-i/g, Xoy-ov y kapnud-og. Roots, tip, Xoy, htfxnad. 

The Termination is that part which, by its changes, indi- 
cates the different cases and numbers. 

Nouns, &c. are declined by annexing the terminations or 
case-endings to the root. Except the accusative in v, of the 
third declension, § 24. 

In Greek there are three declensions corresponding to the 
first, second, and third in Latin. They are distinguished as 
follows : 
The first declension has the genitive in ag, or ??c, from feminine 

nominatives ; or in ov from masc. oom. in ag or tig. 
The tecond has the genitive in ov, from og or ov. 
The third has the genitive in og whatever be the nominative. 

The difference between these declensions will be seen at 
one view in the following : 



Fs 13, 14. FIRST DECLENSION. 

Table of Terminations. 



17 



First Declension. 


Second. 


TOrd. 


Nom. a, % «£, 


?Si 


og, neut. o*>, 


a, t, u, w, y 3 ?, o, g, y>, 


Gen. ag, r/c, ou, 


ou ? 


ou, 


°S> 


Dat. a, 5, a, 


3' 


0), 


h 


Ace. a*, ?/y, «*', 


7*, 


or, 


a, Exc.as§24,§13,2. 


Voc. a, >/, a, 


*• 


£, neut. or. 
Dual. 


like nom. Exc. as §2-5. 


N. A. V. a, * 




0), 


*, 


G. D. car. 




oiv. 

Plural. 


o**>. 


Nom. cu. 




ot, neut. a, 


eg, neut. «, 


Gen. ©*>, 




G)J>, 


G)^, 


Dat. a^, 




otg, 


OT, 


Ace. ag, 




ou^ neut. «, 


a?, neut, a, 


Voc. cu. 




ot, «. 


eg, neut. a. 



§ 13. DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 

GENERAL RULES. 

1 . The vocative for the most part in the singular, 
and always in the plural, is like the nominative. 

2. Nouns of the neuter gender have the nomi- 
native, accusative, and vocative alike ; and these 
cases in the plural end always in a. 

3. The dative singular ends always in z:, either 
annexed or written under. 

4. The nominative, accusative, and vocative 
dual are alike ; so also the genitive and dative. 

§ 14. FIRST DECLENSION. 

The First Declension has four terminations , 
two feminine, yj, a ; and two masculine, yjg, a$. 

Paradigm of Nouns in rj ; tiu^ honour. 



Sing. 

N. V. »jM* 

G. Ttu-rj;, 

D. TUi-77, 

A. Tl'l-'\v. 



N. 



Dual. 
A. Y. Titi-b, 

G. D. TIU.UXV. 



Plural. 

N. Y. Tiu-al, 

G. Tt>(l.GiV 9 

D. TifimaTg 9 
A. TLfi.&g. 



'8 FIRST DECLENSION. § 15, 16. 

§ 15. SPECIAL RULES FOR FEMININE NOUNS. 

1. Nouns in -a have the accusative singular 
in ~av. 

2. Nouns in -a pure* and -pa, retain a in all the 
cases oi' the singular. 

Obs. To these may be added a few words ending in da, 6a, 
and S circumflex ; and a very lew in la and /ua, in which 
cases a is always long; as, flnlou^la, Gen. flnlo/u^lag, &c. 



EXAMPLES. 



N.V. 3/oDor-«, a muse. 

G. Mover-rig, 

D. Movo-.rj, 

A. Movcr.av. 



N.V. epdt-a, friendship. 
G. cpdl.ag, 
D. cpill-a, 
A. cpiXl-av. 



N.V. ^uig.a, a day. 
G. -fiftig -ag 9 
D. fitiiq-q, 
A. tyig-av. 



J\ n ole. In the dual and plural all nouns are declined like n/ift. 



J 16. SPECIAL RULES FOR MASCULINE NOUNS. 

1. Nouns in ->/g and -ocg have the genitive in 
si ; and lose g in the vocative. 

0/;.9. 1. Some nouns in ag have the genitive in ou or a ; as, 
/i(tioe.,//Jilug, gen. najganlolov, or rcaTQanlota, a parricide. 
Some have a only ; as, 0co/uag, gen. Qm^iol, Thomas. 

2. -t>7$ has a in the vocative; but -aryjg has 
either >? or a ; as 7 

JIolvt^;, voc 7ron/7u; lrj(TTr\g, VOC. Itjgt^\ or Irjaxa. 
Obs. 2. Also nouns denoting a people or nation; as, 77^>- 
a Persian ; compounds in -rcrjg ; derivatives from fistg®, 
and t$16m. Also luypyg, Meval/fii]g y and nvgat//Li9]g 9 
hai <■ 'ii ( voa live in a. 

3. In the other cases masculine nouns are de- 
clined like the feminine, to which their termina- 
tions correspond. 



* i. c. a after a vowel, (§ 2. 4.) 



§17. 



FIRST DECLENSION. 



19 



EXAMPLES. 



Singular. 



Strides. 


Citizen. 


Youth. 


Pythagoras. 


N\ 'Argeld-Tjg, 


7TGMl-T]g, 


veavl-ag, 


Ilvdayog-ag, 


Q. \4lQ8ld-0V, 


ttoIIt-ou, 


vsavt.ov, 


FTvdayog.ov, 


0. y Argeld-7j, 


7r©A/T-7?, 


veavl-a, 


JJvdayog.q, 


A. 'Argeld-qv, 


7ro^r-?;yj 


vsavi-av, 


JUvdayog-av, 


V. 'At oe Id -77. 


7roArr-«. 


veavl-a. 


IIvdayoQ-a. 




Dual. 




N.i 








A. V^TOF^-a. 


7roX^T-a, 


vsavl-a, 












p.* > 'ATQStd-CUV, 


Tro^^T-at^ 


vsavl-aiv. 






Plui 


al. 




N. y AToeTd-av, 


Tro^tr-at, 


veavl-at, 




G. 'AjQEld-ibv, 


7TO/W-C0P, 


veavi.fhv, 




D. 'ATQetd-atg, 


7roA/r-«t^ ? 


veavl-aig, 




A. 'Argsld-ag, 


7roA/r-ac, 


veavl.ag, 




V y ATQeld-ai. 


TroAtr-a^. 


veavl-ai. 





Ohs. Since the termination -yg 9 belongs also to the 3d de- 
clension, it may be observed, that to the 1st pertain the nouns 
in -Idyg, -ddqg ; as, Qovxidtdqg/AlxiGi&drjg; the names of na- 
tions ; as, Hixelabi^g. Nouns in -rrjg, derived from verbs ; 
as, rcoirjz^g from TToiioj : compounds from ovovfiai, I buy; [istou, 
I measure ; iglSo), I rub, wear, train ; ttojIw, I sell ; and from 
words of this declension ; e.g. ' QlvftTtiGvlxqg, from vlxri ; &o- 
Xeblv.rig, from dlxrj. 



§ 17. DIALECTS OF THE FIRST DECLENSION. 

Besides the regular terminations exhibited in the paradigms, 
many words are found in different cases inflected according to 
Borne of the peculiar dialects. In the tables of terminations, 
K . denotes Aftlc, I. Ionic, D. Doric, JE. JEolic. But the dis- 
tinctions are not strictly observed in every instance, — the same 
peculiarities sometimes occurring in two, and sometimes in 
three dialects. The following words are exhibited as exam- 



SECOND- DECLENSION. 



§ IB* 



but it is not to be inferred thai each part of them will be 
actually ibund in the Greek authors. 





Singular. 






Nom. 


Gen. 


Dat 


Ace. 


Voc. 


in-n D. .3, 


-/}?, D. &$, 


-5, D. «. 


-/;!', D. at/. 


-i?, D. a. 


\lvOayop-a$, I. TX- ) 


-a j, I. 7??. 

( I. £0>. 


-77, D. a. 


> -ar, I. 77V. 


-a, I. rf 


-a, I. p. 


- 0t|/, I. 7?1/. 


. C A. as. 

_a ' | E. * 

-a, A. 77«. 


******* I SI. a. ) 


-ov, < D. a. 
( M. ao. 


-r?, L>. a. 


(I. ea. 

( L>. ov. 



Nom 



Ttu-at 



Gen. 




r L 


^a>r. 


3 D - 


ay, & 


\ 


awr. 


( JE 


awv. 



Plural. 
Dat. 

-cug> I. jjc, & 

D. & A. dial. 



-As 



Ace, 
I. 



f I. ^a 



S. 



Vo€. 



-a*. 



Thus, ur\niTr\g, JE. {LtrjTiha, a wise person; nrjlsldov, I. 
f77]l£ldeo), of P elides ; Alvelov, iE. Alvetao, of JEneas ; Orj- 
()(u;, I. Orfiyg, or GrjGfiai, in Tkebes ; bloa,l. dlorj, pernicious ; 
XQvata, I. zQvoh}, golden. For the genitive and dative in 
qpt or op^, see § 28. 



EXAMPLES FOR PRACTICE. 



ir£Lj^?7, J/ie moon. 
(rn<fKTTr]g, a sophist. 
7T :'/..-■ tu, a dove. 

tag 9 JEneas. 
yicpvQa, a bridge. 
h6aoa, frenzy, 
x 1 Quo 1 on);, a karper. 
AvaZaydQaQ) Jlnax- 
asora8. 



ylcbooa, the tongue. 
tiyoob, the forum. 
T8/rtT7]g, an artist. 
t)dor^ pleasure, 
yojvlu, an angle. 
(tux, force, 
avow, a breeze. 
&vlu, sadness. 
uyo)vioii)g,a wrestler. 



sl^vr], peace 
oocpla, wisdom, 
juilouva, black. 
juXavva, miserable, 
dlxri, justice. ■ 
@ovIy\, counsel. 
ft&Xcuga, a sword, 
cpqo v ijuu rtag, high- 
minded. 



S le. The learner should decline some of the 
fording to the different dialects. In like manner 
■> according to their dialects. 



words in this table ac 
n the second and thin* 



§ 18. SECOND DECLENSION. 

The second declension has two terminations, 
o; and ov\ ov is always neuter, oq rever. 



§ 13. 



SECOND DECLENSION. 



21 



1 . Paradigm of the Masculine and Femi?iine Nouns in og ; 

6 hoyog, ike speech. 



Sing. 
N. My-og, 
G. loy-ov, 
D. loy-cp, 
A. )*6y-ov, 
V. My-e. 



Dual. 
N. A. V. My.w, 
G. D. Aty-on'. 



Plural. 

N. tty-oi 9 

G. Aoj'-oj*', 

D. X6y-oig, 

A. tafy-ous, 

V. tty-oi. 



In the same manner also are declined nouns in o*>, observing 
the second general rule ; thus, 

2. Paradigm of Neuter Nouns in op ; phgov, a measure 



Sing. 






Dual. 




Plural. 


N. [uhg.ov, 
G. /usrg-ov, 
D. fthg-cp, 
A. [ihg.ov, 
V. /uhg-ov. 


N. A. 
G. 


V. juhg-w, 
D. fiirg-OLV. 


N. [ihg-a, 
G. /ufrg-cov, 
D. [ihg-oig, 
A. /usTg-a, 
V. fieTg.a. 


§ 19. DIALECTS OF THE SECOND 


DECLENSION. 


Singular. 

Nom. Gen. Ace. Voc. 


Aa/-6s, A. tig. 


-00, A. o5, 

I. & D. oTo. 


-6*>, A. (b^, & c6. 


-£, A. 65 & ©£. 


Plural. 


Nom. Dat. Ace. Voc. 


Xuy.ol) A. ©. 


-oZg 
I. & 


» A. Ss, 

D. oToi. 


-ouc, A. CO?. 

D. &£,& 6 

^. ofe. 


?• 


-0?, A. to. 



Neuter nouns in the Attic dialect have the same termina- 
tions with nouns in -og ; except that v is substituted for g. 

Thus it will appear that the Attic form, in which og is 
changed intowc, ov into ow, and 01 into cp, is the principal va- 
riation in this declension. Let it be observed, however, that 
a long and 77 before oc, are changed into s before o>g ; as, Xa6g 9 
Attic lecfe. a s/ior£ remains unchanged; as, t«-oc, Tu.cbg, or it 
is contracted with the into ok; as, dyij^aog, i\yy\gi*z. Foi 
the genitive and dative in yt or (pt^, see § 28, 



22 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



§ 20. 



EXAMPLES OF THE ATTIC DECLENSION OF NOUNS IN 0£. 







Singular. 




lay tig 


for layvg. 


rc-iog for *'(*o£, 


« ftp&yBwv for (jcptoyeov 


N. 


A(^j'(0;: ? 


J'£(0g, 


dcvuyecop, 


G. 


luyib, 


*>£C0, 


(jcp(bysiA) } 


D. 


Au] w ? 


^f(l) ? 


(xpihysto, 


A. 


Aaycft, or c5r 


red, or ^ccof, 


aptiyeojp, 


V. 


Xuycbg, or ^3 


j'£c6c, or vadg. 
Dual. 


dpiayewp. 


N. 


A. V. layw. 


V6(x), 


apibyew, 


G. 


D A«^o)j/ 


P€WP. 

Plural. 


apibyecpp. 


N. 


V. ^«/co ? 


red, 


&p(bye(x), 


G. 


lay&p, 


V8(bv, 


&p(byeojp, 


D. 


Xaywg, 


vsojg, 


aptiyecog, 


A. 


luycog. 


vecbg. 


(jtpcbysa). 



Obs. The Attics did not decline all nouns in og in this man- 
ner, but only a very few. The same forms occur also in the 
Ionic and Doric writers. The Attics often declined after this 
form, nouns which otherwise belong to the third declension ; 
as, MIpoj, Acc. for MIpojoc, from Mlvcog, G. Mlpwog ; yilwp 
Ace. for yilmu, from yilwg, yikmog. 



WORDS FOR PRACTICE. 



Gyyelog, a messenger 
tet6g 3 an eagle. 
Hdlog, a combat. 
aQlor, a prize. 
ftfineXog, a vine. 
fyyvgog, silver. 



tyytyiop, silver. 
tyyov, work. 
in]h)i>) an apple, 
pozog, the south wind 
oJxog, a house. 
TTuidtop, a child 



()6dop, a rose, 
uldijoog, iron. 
(ttquto;, an army. 
ynQTtop, a burden, 
yulxbg, copper. 
ZQvadg, gold. 

V 



§ 20. THIRD DECLENSION. 

The third declension has seven terminations, 

u y i y t/j o, — 1/, o, g : it has all genders, and increases 

the noun by one syllable in the oblique cases. 

Note. Nouns in £ and y< are considered as ending in $. 
§ 4. G. 



§ 21. 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



23 



1. Paradigm of .Masculine and Feminine Nouns. 
5 d-ty, the wild beast. 



Singular. 
N. <% 
G. 6qQ-6g, 
D. Otjq-I, 

% A. %-a, 



Dual. 
N. A. V. %.e, 

G. D. 6i]o.oiv. 



Plura 

N. OriQ-eg, 
G. 0r ( Q-&v 9 
D. 6)ig-ol, 
A. dfjg-ag, 
V. Orig-eg. 



In the same manner neuter nouns are declined. 



observing the 2d general rule 

2. Paradigm of Neuter Nouns. 
Singular, 

N. j%«. 



G. fir lt ua-Tog, 
D. firiua-Tt, 

A. ^.</«, 



Dual. 
N. A. V. |%ia-Te, 

G. D. §7\^6i.TOlV. 



B^ua, a tribunal. 
Plural. 

G. @1]{1&.T00V 9 

D. (%a-cr*(§6. S.) 
A. /?7] t a«-Ta, 

V. @T[IUa-T(X. 



Jfule. In the declension of nouns which take -roj, -<fos, or -florin the Geni- 
tive, rhe II; lie § 6. 8. must be particularly attended to in the Dative plural. 



§ 21. OF FORMING THE GENITIVE. 

GENERAL RULES. 

1. If the noun does not end in g, add -o$, or 
-rog, to the nominative; as, 

N. TiaidLv, G.Ttauav-og, pcean. 

/uifo, [xih-rog, honey. 

Zevocp&v, Zevoqicbv-Tog, Xenophon. 

2. If the noun ends in g, reject the g, and add 

-og, -ro$, -5o$, or -dog ; as, 

N. riQwg, G. ^ooj-o£ 5 a Aero. 

hdlaxp, "kallaTt.og, a storm. 

XiG-qg^ M6rj.jog^ a cauldron. 

uva$, arax-Tog, a ruler. 

laftTtag, lafind-dog, a torch 

oov eg, bqvi-dog, a bird. 

Note. Which of these terminations is to be added, can be learned onf 
ny practice and a good ear. 



^4 TI1IKD DECLENSION* § 22. 

Excvpthm. But if the noun ends in o$, insert 
e before it. All these are neuter; as, 

N. (tfjo?, G. Tel/.s-og, a ivall. 

pigog, [leq-e-og, apart. 

Q 0St — From the genitive formed by these or the following 

rules, take the termination og; what remains is the root. § 12. 



§ 22. OF THE PENULT 

If the final syllable of the nominative contain a long vowel 
or diphthong, it is often shortened in the oblique cases by the 
following 

RULES. 

1. A diphthong casts away its subjunctive 
vowel; as, 

N. fiacrds-dg, G. fiaadi-og, a king. 

@ovg, @o-bg, an ox. 

vavg, va.bg, a ship. 

2. A long vowel is changed into its own short 
one; as, 

N. noi/uty, G. Tioifiev-og, a shepherd. 

Atjtw, ArjTo-og, Latona. 

xuPiby, xavov.og, a rule, 

dgfxxojv, dgdxov-Tog, a dragon. 

aldwg, aldo-og, - modesty. 

TBTvcpfhg, Tsrvyo.Tog, having struck. 

3. t and v, whether long or short, are changed 
into g, in which case og only is added ; as, 

N. dvvafiig G. dvvcifjis-og, power. 

ndv ncue-og, a flock. 

Ohs. 1. Nouns in -ig and -vg when they change v and y 

into c, and likewise nouns in -evg, commonly take the Attic 

Lve in -eitit) (§ 27.) ; as, ndXig, G. ndlewg; 6aadei>g 9 G. 

SaoMcjg. Bui neuters in i andf have the common genitive 

on;, (i. tiUrreog, Also nouns in -ig have the At 

"jc .sq^j instead of-«w*, in the genitive and dative dual. Thi 



§ 23. THIRD DECLENSION. 25 

Ionic and Doric writers retain i in the oblique cases of nouns 
in -tg and i> ; as, nofog, G. 7t6foog. D. 7t6lu, &c. But even in 
these the dative- is usually contracted into si ; as, nblu, ndlsi. 
Obs. 2. All Greek words ending in c, which take v in the 
genitive, appear to have originally ended in vg, and the v at 
length was dropped for the sake of euphony; § 6. 16. But 
to maintain the former quantity of the nominative, the doubt- 
ful vowel was made long, and the short vowels were changed 
into their own diphthongs ; 

Thus, the original terminations avg, ivg, wg, evg, org, 
were changed into oig, i£, vg, Bug, ovg. 

But the oblique cases, regularly formed from the original no- 
minative, remain unchanged ; as in the following examples : 
N. ylyag originally yiyavg, Gen. ytyav-zog. 
delcpTg, deXcplvg, dehopTv-og. 

qogxvg, cpbgxvvg, cpbgnvv-og. 

xislg, Kzhvg, XTsr-bg. 

bdovg, bdbvg, odov-Tog, 

Obs. 3. Instead of rejecting v before g in the nominative, 
sometimes the g was dropped and the v retained ; and hence 
the double forms of the nominative which sometimes occur: 
as, delcplg or delylv ; qiogxvg or cpogv.vv. 

Obs. 4. Nouns in -n/o, having -regog in the genitive, are 
contracted by syncope in the oblique cases ; as, 
7taxr]0, a father, Ttarigog, Ttaigbg 
naiigi, TTargl, 
Ttazeg&g, Ttargkg. 
(Ut/t^o, a mother, ^rjzigog, firjrgbg. 
So also, av^g, a man, avegog, dcvdgbg. (§ 6. 19.) 

Note 2. But where such change would occasion obscurity by making the 
contracted word similar to another, it is omitted. Thus the accusative 
irareoa, and ^Hpa, remain unchanged, to distinguish them from narpa and 



§ 23. OF THE GENITIVE OF ADJECTIVES. 

Adjectives of the third declension form the genitive by the 
same rules as substantives ; but some form it from the mascu- 
line and others from the neuter gender ; and the genitive form- 
ed from either gender, is also the genitive of the other. The 
gender from which the genitive is formed may be ascertained 
by the following 

3 



THIRD DKCLENSION. <) 24. 



SPECIAL RULES. 



1. Adjectives in -ig and -ovg, form the genitive 
from the nominative masculine; as, 

(f( ajQig, I Q en ; t ; ve f both, wdojruroidog. 

2. Adjectives not in -t$ or -oi;g, form the geni- 
tive from the nominative neuter ; as, 

N. Masc. N. Neut. Gen. of both. 

Tigjjv, t&qsV) T&Qev.og, tender. 

ulijOi);, dlrjdsg, tili/Oi-og, true. 

fiela;, /uiXar, [lelav-og, black. 

XagLsig, %aqlev, xaglev.Tog, graceful. 

Obs. 1. This rule applies universally to participles of the third 
declension, and these have their genitive always in -xog ; as, 
N. Masc. N. Neut. Gen. of both. 

crzug, OT&J/, GT&V-TOQ. 

tvtcwv, Tvrtov, Tiunov.TOg. 

TVTttQV, TV7TOVV, TVTtOVV -TOg. 

jvcpdslg, TVCpO&V, TV(f06v.TOg. 

For the declension of adjectives and participles, see § 46 
and 47. 



§ 24. THE ACCUSATIVE SINGULAR. 

The Accusative singular of masculine and fe- 
minine nouns commonly ends in a. But, 

SPECIAL RULES. 

Rule 1. The genitive in-og pure, from ig,vg, avg, 
and ouj, changes g of the nominative into v] thus, 
Noni. Gen. Ace. 

'"i fkpt-og 9 <><fiv, a serpent. 

V' ; 5 ? frnou-og, (H)tqvv, a bunch of grapes. 

vu-bg, vavv, a ship. 

(tovg, (><)-< fiovv, an ox. 

Likewise Jtaog and yji^tq have v\ as, 



<^ 25. THIRD DECLENSION. 27 

Nom. Gen. Ace. 

Xaag, X&a.og, Xaav, a stone. 

y&gig. Z&Q*Tog, x&gw, favour. 

Exc. But Jig, dt-og, Jupiter, has dta ; and Xagvg, for one 
of the Graces, has Xagna, and ^o0g, the shin, has xg6 a, sel- 
dom /gov v. 

Rule 2. -t^ 5 -sog, and compounds of 7toiig, afoot, 
have ct or ^ ; as, 

Nom. Gen. Ace. 

&xvg, &x£.og, &xe-a, or cbxi)j>. 

dlnovg, dtno-dog, dlno-da, or dirtovv. 

Rule 3. Words in -ig and -vg unaccented on 
the last syllable, with the genitive in -og not 
pure, have a or v\ as, 





Nom. 


Gen. 




Ace. 






egvg, 


%gudog 9 


egi-da 9 


or 


%giv. 




xdgvg, 


xogv.Qog, 


xogv 


• da, 


or 


xdgvv. 


So also. 


xXelg, 


xXei-dbg, 


xXsl 


.da, 


or 


xXslv, 



§ 25. THE VOCATIVE SINGULAR. 

The vocative singular is for the most part like 
the nominative. But, 

SPECIAL RULES. 

Rule 1. A short vowel in the genitive, from a 
long vowel of the nominative, remains short in 
the vocative ; as, 

Nom. Gen. Voc. 

urj^g, lurjTsg.og, ^r\xeg 9 a mother. 

Exrwg, 'ExTog.og, 'Exiog, Hector. 

Exc. But nouns accented on the last syllable have the vo- 
cative long ; as, noiuty, Gen. nolixev.og, Voc. not^v ; except 
xatty, av^g, and da^g, which have the vocative Ttuxeg, up eg, 
and dasg. 

'jTidLiow, noo-rfitiv, and <ronr ( o, with the long vowel in the 
genitive, have the short in the vocative. 



28 THIRD DECLENSION. § 26. 

Rule 2. Nouns in -eg, -vg : and -evg, rejects in 
the \ ocative ; as, 

., V. fypi ; $&TQV$) V. ^orou ; fiuaiXevg, V. fiucnXev. 
Likewise, ftaig, y^affg, and (^ou£; Voc. 7r«r ? ^ouv, ^ou. 

Rule 3. Feminines in -og and -co make the 
vocative in -01] as, 

afJeb-:, V. (xldol ; 2u7tq){b, V. SunyoT. 

Rule 4. Nouns in -ccg, -avtog, (§ 22. 06s. 2.) 
have the vocative in -ai>; those in -e«g, -eim>g 
have the vocative in-ai> ; as, 

Nom. Gen. Voc. 

Al'ug, A"i<xv-toq, * Al'av, Jljax. 

2i{u6eig, 2iu6ev-Tog, 2i{i6ev, Simois. 

Note. In proper names, however, the poets often reject v ; as, AU foi 



A 



iav. 



Obs. yw^i has yvvav in the vocative ; and &va%, in address- 
ing the deity, has &va ; otherwise &va%. 

Rule 5. In adjectives, the vocative masculine 
is like the nominative neuter ; as, 

N. Masc. N. Neut. V. Masc. 

tilrjOfig, aXr/Okg, aXrjdeg. 

l/.st'^iu)i>) ilerjuovy iXirjfiov, 

dlrroug, dljrovv, dlnovv. 

/uiXug, f.dluv, /utXetv. 

'/aQleig, XVQtev, /agler, also /aQleig. 

Note. This rule docs not apply to participles. These follow the general 
rule ; as, N. &, V. tvtttwv, TVTrrovcra, tvtctov. 



§ 26. THE DATIVE PLURAL. 

SPECIAL RULES. 

Rule 1. Before -at the rejected vowel of the 



>mmat ive 


( ua. i.j 


IS 


resumed ; 


as, 


Nnin. 


Gen- 




Dat Plur. 




8ovg, 


fict(jt,Xiog f 
8o6g t 




pcKTiXevai, 

ftoval, 


a king, 
an o.v. 



§ 27, 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



29 



Exc. ttov;, xielg; ovdelg, fir/Selg, are excepted, which do not 
resume tlie rejected vowel ; thus, 

Norn. Gen. Dat. Plur. 

Ttovg, nodbg, noul. 

xxelg, xxevog, ureal, 

ovdelg, ovdevog, oddeac. 

{irjdelg, {urjdevog, jLUjdicri. 

Note. The three last can scarcely be called exceptions ; -elg being put for 
-lug. (§ 22. 06s. 2.) 

Rule 2. -ryjp -wpog, after a syncope has act ; as, 

TcuTr { o, srareoi, Ttargl, TraTQ&cn, a father. 
likewise db^g, uvegi, dcvdol, d.i~5gacn, a man. 
Exc. yaoTTig, yaoTsgi, yaairgcn, is excepted. 



§ 27. DIALECTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSIOJN. 

From the variety of terminations, in nouns of this declen- 
sion, it is impossible to exhibit them in one concise table. 
But the general principles are — The nominative and vocative 
Attic are alike, — The Attic genitive is in -eojg, instead of-eog, 
and-*o;, — The Ionic has rj in the penult, through the oblique 
cases, instead of e and a ; and makes .suv or -even instead of 
-o^, in the dative plural, with the poets. 

Singular. 

Dat. Ace. 



: 



Norn. 

M 

3aB- 



\-evg. ) 



6<p-tg. 

pavg. 



at 6- cog. 




-6og f JE. cog 



i. 



Plural. 



-vv, OVea. 



avv, I. rjvv or fja 
I. ovv 

JEi. WV. 



-6a 



Voc. 
-£v f A. got 

v, A. vg 
t, A. ig. 

av, A. avg. 

-or, A. 6e 



Nom. and Voc. 


Gen. 




Dat. 


Acc. 


( A. ijs. 

0a<ri\-ug. < Or r\g. 

( I. r,zg. 

v-aig, I r)eg. 


~f'(x)V, I. fjtOP. 

-cuavj I. ti<av. 


-evert, 

-aval, 


( I. fjai. 
\ P. f\za<n. 
C I. rival. 
\ P. macri. 


-sag, I. fjai.. 
-avg, I. rjas. 


ei X -ca 


-ciov. 


-«rt, 


( I. ecrai. 
) P. Ceaai. 


-za. 



Thus, Gen. ys'O.eo;^ of a lip, D. /ellevg ; Voc. Masc. dva 
3* 



THIRD DECLENSION. § 28, 29 




§ 28. ON THE PARAGOGIC q* or yw. 

Sometimes, and particularly in Epic poetry, the syllable yi> 
or tptv annexed to the word is used for the genitive or dative, 
both singular and plural. It is annexed in the 

I. Declension by changing -a or -?; into -w^ e * g- *£<p«^j, 
aecfuKiifi ; 6la y (ti)j(pi, or (Jlr/yiv. 

II. Declension by changing -og or -ov into -ogot, e. g. gtqu. 

TO;, (JTOUTOCplV. 

III. Declension by changing -og -eog into -eacpi, ; as, o^o£, 

A few deviations from this mode of annexing the <pt occur. 
This form of the genitive and dative appears to have had ori- 
ginally an adverbial signification like the endings dv, Oev, de. 
To render it more definite the preposition was often prefixed, 
as, Tiaou vavcpiv, near the ship, or ships ; and lastly, it was 
used for a case without a preposition, in the same manner as the 
ordinary forms of the genitive and dative ; thus, nlajdg nrvbcpiv, 
the breadth oj the fan, aylairjcpi Trsnoidcbg, confiding in valour. 

The termination Osv appears to be an appendage of a simi- 
lar nature, but is found only in the genitive ; as, £% otigavdOev, 
from heaven. So efiidsv for ipov ; akOsv for croD, &c 



§ 29. GENDERS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 

The Genders of Substantives of the Third Declension, so 
far as determined by the termination, are as follows : 





RULES. 


I. Nouns in evg, ag-av?og, av and vv, are always 
masculine; as. 


ag.avrog, u)<)oiug, 


Gen. o/iog, o, a clasp. 
drdhiuvTog, 6, a statue. 


up 9 Tzai&v, 


nixiui'og, o, a pecan. 
<p6gxvrog 9 o, a harbour. 



II. Nouns in aq-ahog, ryjg-ryjrog, avg, u } and ver 
bals in ~iq, arc always feminine ; as, 



§ 30, 31. 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



31 



ag-adog. 


laanag, 


Xaurt&dog, 


* 


a torch. 


T7]g.T71TOg, 


xuxoryg, 


xaxorrjiog, 


b 


wickedness 


civ g, 


vavg, 


vabg, 


4 


a ship. 


u, 


cpeidv), 


(peidoog, 


4 


parsimony. 


tg, verbal 


opvvig. 


cpvaeog, 


i 


nature. 


III. Nouns in a, 


i, v, ag-arog, og 


and op, are al 


ways neuter. 








«> 


(%*«5 


@i\uaTog, 


•ro, 


a tribunal. 


*> 


(tiXty 


/tiehrog, 


TO, 


honey. 


v > 


7T0JV, 


nxbeog, 


tA, 


a flock. 


ctg-ccTog, 


xgsag, 


xgiarog 


t6, 


flesh. 


•S* 


T£l/og, 


T£l%60g, 


TO, 


a loall. 


0$ 


dog, 


diogog, 


to, 


a sivord. 



Obs. 1. Nouns of other terminations are so varied in gen- 
der, that no general rule can be given respecting them. 

Obs. 2. Dialect frequently varies the gender in all the de- 
clensions, Thus, fiawg is masc. in Attic, otherwise feminine , 
and so of others. 



30. WORDS FOR PRACTICE ON THE PRE- 
CEDING RULES, FROM §§ 20—27. 



6 ayxdtv 


the elbow. 


TO 


ogog 




£/ie mountain 


! ^ arjd&v (o) 


the nightingale. 


c 



ogevg 




the mule. 


o ytgojv (ovt 


) the old man. 


fi 


q?M$ 


(r) 


the flame. 


6 d\g (e) 


the air. 


< 




xA v 




the goose. 


77 ilnlg (d) 


the hope. 


i 


Tioa^ic 




the action. 


t) egig (d) 


the strife. 


* 


&JS 


'(*) 


the cough. 


rj xogvg [6) 


the helmet. 


i 


o-&g$ 


(») 


the flesh. 


' to xv/ia (t) 


the wave. 


c 

n 


%l(bp 


(<0 


the snow. 


t ' l '\ v 


the month. 


6 


ltt(jcg 


(,T) 


the thong. 


tu avdog 


the flower. 


1 


nlxvg 




the pine. 


t6 yirog 


the race. 


6 


txo\vjig 


the seer. 


V) tells {v) 


the ray. 


6 


"ki[ii\v 


w 


the haven. 


6 TTSPTjg (t) 


the poor man. 


^ 


aft; 


(r) 


the goat. 



§ 31. IRREGULAR NOUNS. 

1. Some nouns have one gender in the singular, and ano- 
ther in the Plural ; as, 



32 IRREGULAR NOUNS. § 31, 

£1.) o BUpqoS) the ekariot-8eat ; b /no/lbg, the lever; 6 xul i] 
TaQtagbS) Tartarus; 6 tou/ijlbg, ike neck ; 6 aiaO^ibg, the sta- 
tion : 6 ft (Tftdg, the decree ; b vwiog, the back ; 6 eosTfxbg, the 
nar : 6 Evyte, the yoke ; are neuter in the plural; as, t& diepqa, 
flee. The three hist have also neuter forms in the singular, 
as. / " vmoV) &c.j hut with a variation of meaning. 

(2.) o decrpbg, the bond; 6 Iv/rog, the lamp ; b xvxlog, the 
circle : 6 <tf;nbg, the thigh ; d olrog, corn; have both a mascu- 
line and neuter form in the plural ; as, ol deo^ol, and tA bcoou, 
&c. 

(3.) i] xilsvQog, the way, has al xilevOoi, and rd xilavda. 

(4.) to creditor, the stadium, has ol uiadioi, and id aid^ta. 

(5.) yvrr), a woman; bdbg, a way; nblig, a city; %&Q, a 
Hand; feminines, have tw yvralxe, tw bd<h, rcb nbhe, and icb 
?$*£*, in the nominative and accusative dual. 

2. Some have more than one declension ; thus, 

(1.) 1st and 2nd, as *) az^cpuvrj, and b orecpavog, a crown, 
1st and 3d, as, MmG-qg, -ov ; and Mo)oevg,-eu)g, JWoses. 2d and 
3d, as, rb duxQv-ov, -ov ; and to daxQ-v, -vog ; ^Qivq-og, .ov ; 
fiuoi-vq, -vqog, a witness. 

(2.) Some have more than one declension in the oblique 
cases, from one form of the nominative ; thus, O&lrjg, gen. 
-ov, 1st, and -viog 3d, Thales ; "Jo-rjg, -ov 1st, and *eog and 
.rjTog, 3d, Mars; b and to o-koVoc, darkness; byog, a chariot; 
tlecg, mercy ; tdg^og, pickle ; oacrog, an eye ; have-of the 2d, 
and -cog the 3d. 

(3.) Some have the forms of different declensions, in cer- 
tain cases, though not regularly inflected through all the cases ; 
thus, 1st and 3d in the ace. sing. Jij^ood^p.rjg, ace. -i]v and -£«, 
Demosthenes; StuxQ&ttjg, Socrates, ace. ^Mxqax.vv and -ea ; 
iHlx. ?], fortitude, gen. -rjg, (1st) dat. -*, (3d); vo^Lpt], a battle, 
dat. vouti'ri and do/riV*,lst and 3d ; avdo&Ttodov, a slave, 2d, dat. 
pi. urfiou .[(')') tooi, 3rl Horn. ; yilug 6, laughter, G. yelAwToj, 
ace. 't'.'fjuia and yihor, after the Attic form of the 2d dec. § 19. 

(4.) Feminine nouns in -at, and -wg, of the third declen- 
sion, have generally the form of the second as if from .og, in 
the dual and plural, when their meaning is such as to admit of 
their being used in these numbers. 

3. Some from one form of the nominative, have different 
forms in the oblique cases, in the same declension ; thus, jL 
fQig, fl tiger, has .*og and-'£o£; Qifug, Justice, has -idog, .nog, 
and -tawg \ Xj&qoav^ ( 'haron, has .wvog, and -oviog • ybvv, a 

, a spear, have -wo; and-aro? : /oo);, /quibg, and 



§ 32, 33. NOUNS OF PECULIAR SIGNIFICATION. 33 

%govg, xgobg, the skin, have two forms of the nominative, as 
well as of the oblique cases, both of the 3d. 

4- Some appear to form the oblique cases from obsolete no- 
minatives ; as, tj.t«o, a liver ; r)uag, a day ; eldag, food; cpgiag, 
a well; uieag, fat ; xaoTjKg^ahead; ale icpug, ointment ; dsleag, 
a bait ; oreiug, a benefit ; ovdag, fatness ; vdwg, water ; ax&g, 
dirt; ydi'v. the knee; dogv, a spear; have the genitive in 
.arog, as if from -a$ ; thus, fytaTog, vdawg, ybvaxog. Ovg, an 
car, Cord; ; ydla, milk, yalav.Tog ; yvvij, a woman, yvvaiy.bg, voc. 
) i)ia ; Iijdovg, gen. ov, dat. ov ; ace. ovv ; voc. ov. 

5. Some are indeclinable, i. e. have no change of termina- 
tion in the different cases ; such as, 

(1.) Names of letters; as, to alepa, tov alcpa, &c. (2.) 
The cardinal numbers from nevrs to exaibp. (3.) Poetic 
nouns which have lost the last syllable by apocope ; as, to dw, 
for dtiua. (4.) Foreign names which are not susceptible ol 
G-reek inflexions ; as, b A6gaa[i, tov ASgaap, &c. 



§ 32. DEFECTIVE NOUNS. 

i. Some have no plural; as, aty, air ; nvg, fire ; elaiov, 
oil; yT], earth ; aid&g, shame ; akg, salt. 

2. Some have no singular ; as, cclcpna, victuals ; \4dr\vavj 
'Athens ; dielguTa, dreams ; and the names of festivals ; as, 
'TTuiadr^aia, Panathencea. 

3. Some occur in one case only, and are called monoptots ; 
as, finav, O friend ; S nonov, O gods ; to ocpelog, the advan- 
tage. 

4. Some have only two cases ; (diptots,) as, nom. llg, ace. 
/.?r. a lion ; nom. Zevg, voc. Zev, Jupiter ; to ovag, the vision; 
nom. & ace. 

5. Some have only three (triptots) ; as, nom. /uugTvg, a wit- 
ness, ace. uagivv, dat. plur. [lagTvcn. 

f>. The Poets sometimes cut off the final letter or syllable 
a word, which is called apocope ; as, nagij for nag-rjvov, 
ad. Such words are then indeclinable. (§ 31. 5.) 



§33. NOUNS OF PECULIAR SIGNIFICATION. 

Some nouns have peculiar significations, according to their 
terminations : as, 



34 OF CONTRACTIONS. § 34. 



01] 



1. Masculine Patronymics, (§ 10. 1.) commonly in $>/s or 
; as. ////. r,, Pelevs , IJeksidn^ P elides, or /Ae so/j 0/ Pe 

/r/rv ; l\jmt^. Saturn , Kqovfav or Kfpvidng, the son oj Saturn. 

2. Feminine Patronymics,tommon]y in -wc and-*?, -»wy and 

-tcfr^ ; as, ./yo'i'us and AtfUfatg^ from ylrjTw, Latona ^Ad^rjcntri] 
(rom^jidqnarog ; A/,o<'j'// from Nijoevg ; 'AxQioiwrt] from *AxqL 
criog, &.c. 

3. (1 entile Nouns, (§ 10. 1.) commonly in ?/£, oc, or end 
masculine; and «, «c 5 or ig, feminine; as, Znuoiy, Sparta; 
Snagxi&tng, a Spartan, Sotfi&qeia, Samaria; Zuftdgsing, a 
woman of Samaria* But many of these are inflected as re- 
gular adjectives. 

4. Diminutives, (§ 10. 2.) commonly in m*, toy, icrxog, o. 
Aos ; as, tt(xti)o, a father , naToidiov, a little father ; (a term 
of endearment;) srais, a 60?/ or g*tW , rraidlov, a little boy or 
gtrJ ; ncudtaxT], a young' daughter ; eqwg, love , igwrikog, a 
/////e lover, 

5. Amplificatives, (§ 10. 2.) commonly in //a, or a>y ; as, 
olxog, a house, otx^/ua, a large building ; Oq&crvg, bold , Ogdoo)*, 
a bull if. 

G. Verbal Nouns, From the first root of the verb, (§ 82.) 
are formed three nouns of different terminations and signifi- 
cation, indicating respectively the thing done, the doing, and 
the doer ; as follows, 



Verb. 


1 Root. 


Termin. 


Combined. 




noiio), 


7T01S, 


'/UU, 


!toh](ia, 


poem. 




note, 


-oig, 


7toli](jig, 


poetry. 




7T01S, 


.Trig, 


noii]Tr\g^ 


poet. 


nqdoao), 


Tzoay, 


-pa, 


nnayfia, 


thing (done). 




nquy, 


-dig, 


7inu$ ig, § 6. 


7. action or doing 




Ttqay, 


or .t?/;, 


TtqaKT^iQ, 


> doer. 



§ 34. OF CONTRACTIONS. 

In a concourse of vowels, if two syllables are 
converted into one, it is called a Contraction. 
Of these there are two kinds : 

1. A contraction without a variation of vow- 
els, is called Synceresis ; as, rei^eC, by Synaeresis 
ret%st. 



§ 35. CONTRACTIONS OF THE FIRST DECLENSION 35 

2. A contraction icith a variation of the vow- 
els, is called Crasls ; as, Arjuoadeveeg, by Crasis 
±y;uoodeveig ; teixjEa, by Crasis, teijoq. 

Note. A contraction is often made, but not always. 

Obs. If the first of the concurrent vowels has an accent, it 
is changed into a circumflex and placed over the contracted 
■syllable. If there be no accent on the first of the concurrent 
rowels, the contracted syllable will not have the circumflex. 

3. In the rules for contractions let it be re- 
membered that, 

the two short vowels, a, o, 

have their own long ones, yj, o, 
and their own diphthongs, ec, ov. 



) 35. CONTRACTIONS OF THE FIRST DECLEN- 
SION. 



In the first declension no contraction takes 
)lace, unless the first of the concurrent vowels 
s either a short vowel, or a short, and the nom- 
native contracted is then declined regularly. 

Rule 1. ea, without p before it, is changed in- 
;o */;. 

Rule 2. In pea and others, strike out the first 
rowel ; thus, 

1. 

y£a, earth, y% G. yr\g, D. yrj, &c. like Tiar\. 
Xgvoia, golden, XQ vo % G« X9 va ^ D. /ovcry, &c. 
' Eouiu^ ^Mercury/ Enur { ;, G. 'Eouov, D. c /fyu7^ &c. 

2. 
Ttogyvoia, purple, 7iogq>vga 9 G. nogcpvoug, D, noqcpv^^ ice. 
ankjT], simple, <j.nKr [% G. anlr^g, &c. 

'AOrjv&a, Minerva, 'AOqva, G. 'JOijrug, D. ^Adosv, &^ 
§ 15. Obs.) 
'ArekUrjg, Jpelhs,\-1;uU~r^^ G. 7 AneXlov n D.'^nfJ.krj, &c 



36 CONTKACTlONS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION. § 36, 3 

§ 36. CONTRACTIONS OF THE SECOND 
CLENSION. 



■ 



In the second declension no contraction takes 
place, unless the first of the concurrent vowels 
be short. 

RULES. 

1. If a short vowel follow, change them into ov. 

2. If the second vowel be not short, strike out 
the lirst ; thus, 

EXAMPLES. 

6 vdog contracted vovg, the mind. 



Sin 


g- 




Dual. 




Plura . 




N. Rule 1 


vo-oq vovg 




N. 2 vd.ot, 


vol 


G. 2 


vo-ov vov 


N. A. V. 


G. 2 vo.wv 


v&v 


D. 2 


VO-CO V(0 


2 vd-u via 


D. 2 vo-oi,g 


volq 


A. 1 


vo-ov vovv 


G. D. 


A. 2 vd.ovg 


vovg 


V. 1 


v6-6 VOV. 


2 vo oiv volv. 


Y. 2 vo-ov 


vol. 




to ogtbov contracted oo-jovv, the bone. 




Sin 


g. Dual. Plural. 




N. ocne.ov 


daiovv 




N. doxe-a 


data 


G. (JdTt.OU 


damd 


N. 4.. V. 


G. oaxi-cov 


oaxibv 


D. or/T^-O) 


OGTW 


do~i£ o) 6otg) 


D. OGTB-Oig 


oaxolg 


A. ooxi.ov 


OOTOVV 


G. D. 


A. d'Tid-a 


dena 


\ . box&.ov 


OVTOVV. 


6 


7li nw OOTOlv. 


" 


V. ooxLa 


oaxa. 



So r.lso ^ooc, a current ; nooqpvoiog, purple; nioog, naviga- 
tion ; dinXdog, double ; dqyu^iog 9 of silver. 
Obs. 66, of the vocative, is not contracted. 



§ 37. CONTRACTIONS OF THE THIRD DECLEN- 
SION. 

In the oblique cases there is no contraction, 
unless the first of the concurrent vowels is either 
short, or a doubtful taken as short. 

Hie following Rules are universal, being applicable, not only 
to contractions of the third declension, but also to those of 
ve»-bs. and of all cases in which concurrent vowels admit of 



§ 3S. GENERAL RULES. 37 

contraction, except such as fall under the preceding rules toi 
contractions in the 1st and 2d declensions. 



§ 38. GENERAL RULES. 

Concurrent vowels are contracted as follows ; 
viz. 

1. A short vowel before itself, into its own 
diphthong ; as, se into el ; oo into ov. 

Exc. 1. But £6 of the dual into rj. Verbs excepted. 

II. A short vowel before the other short, is 
contracted into ov. 

III. A short vowel before a, is contracted into 
its own long vowel ; as, sa into yj ; oa into q. 

m Exc. 2. But ea pure into a. 

IV. A short vowel before i is contracted by 
Syncsresis : as si into et ; o'i into ol. 

V. s before a long vowel or a diphthong is re- 
jected. 

VI. 1 . o before a loner vowel, is contracted 
into o ; as, 07 into o ; og) into o. 

2. before a diphthong, the prepositive vowel 
being rejected, is contracted by SynoBresis ; as, 
001 into ot, &c. 

jExc. 3. But oeti', t being rejected, is contracted by Crasis 
into ow. 

VII. 1 . a before or o, is contracted into o ; 
as, ouo or ao into o. 

2. a not before or 0, is contracted into d ; 
as, as into d. 

O&s. 1. a before a diphthong is contracted with the prepo- 
sitive vowel, the subjunctive being previously rejected. 

Obs. 2. v in contraction is never rejected, but in this as 
well as others is written under, except in oew ; as in Rule VI 

06s. 3. Neuters in ug pure and gccg 9 reject t from the ob- 
1 lique cases, and then contract the concurrent vowels. 

4 



38 



EXERCISES ON THE PRECEDING RULES. 



i)Z 



. 



VIII. If the former of two vowels is i or u, or 
a long vowel, the hitter is rejected ; as, is con- 
tracted i] ve into v] rp into >7. 

!. The contraction when the first of two vowels is long, takes place 
imly in verbs. 

JSTotc -2. Jdiot and rib*, jo/fc, when a contraction occurs, are contracted by 
the foregoing rules; thus, acioj, crus, VII. 1.; aaov, <tu)v, VII. 1.; <raa, <rd t 
VII. 2. ; acwus", crcos, VII. 1. ; ao'as, crcos, III. 



§ 39. EXERCISES ON THE PRECEDING RULES 
FOR CONTRACTIONS. 

The following table, containing the most usual concurrent 
vowels, promiscuously arranged, will serve for exercises on the 
rules. 

1, 66 9, &w 17, 6.7j 25, set, pure. 

2, ea 10, aot IS, si* 26, 60i 

3, 677 11, CC6 19, 66V 27, 0£ 

4, exo 12, oi' 20, i/e 28, 06v 

5, da 13, ^w 21, aov 29, 06iv 

6, eft' 14, rje 22, ^ 30, not 

7, oou 15, ts 23, on 31, eo 
S, (ty 16, sou 24, 00 32, as*. 



WORDS FOR PRACTICE. 



(Contract, give 

drjuo(r0h>66g 
J^'iocjOeveog 
yn; lea 
(fiKbU) 
dfjUCHrdepioiv 

TIUUOUFV 
7tU</J)UO* 

ntv 

7/0/.' 

K&QCtTOg, < 88.069. 

yj.ni/. 1 



the rule ; alter and 

drjiioudev65 

eao 

^trjuocrdei'sl' 

di]X6oL 
rifidco 

K&Qag-onos 

ftiorog 

uigi a 
tpe*d6o$ 
'.). K8Q&TO10 

V.' <HLUt 

HI nuiini 



place the accent. § 34, Obs.) 



Ar\j{)oq 


/U6hr66v 


<dr){ioo&£v6a 


ArjTOa 


Ar\i()C 


Jfouxkhjg 


dijlou) 


dr/X6rji6 


dijloou 


drjl6ri 


hiag 


iluae 


nfidfi 


JL[.l(X6ig 


ocpifig 


OCpil, 


Tiur'ji-v 


xiaota 


fdon 


fUQ66 


fl60h)V 


ndXe'C 


<p; i()oi 


(pFifida 


(pili'ri 


(pd&ov 


TIUU7I 


TIUCXOV 


dr/l6ri 


drjldoi 


v&og 


(r6ag. 



§40. 



CONTRACTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION 



^ 39 



§40. CONTRACTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 

Concurrent vowels are not always contracted 
in the third declension, but only as directed bv 
the following 



SPECIAL RULES. 



1. The accusative plural assumes the contrac- 
tion of the nominative ; thus, 

j N. TQrfgesc, > , N. hcpieg, ) ,, N. fidrgveg, 1 ff6 

A. Tgirfgeag, ) ^ re 'A. oyiag, ) ^ * A. fiorgvag, ) ^ ^ 

2. The genitive in -eog, from -975, -eg, -og, or in 
oos, not from ovg l and also neuters in ag pure and 

pag, contract the concurrent vowels in all cases. 

Example of the Genitive in -eog, from -yjg. 

t\ TQiriqrjg^ the trireme. 



Singular. 




Dual. 


Plural. 




N. TQi^Q-rjg 




N. A. V.. 


N. TQir\Q-eeg 


-El± 


G* iQi^o.eog 


-ovg 


TQir\Q.se -r\ 


G. TQiT { Q-i(x)V 


-6y 


D. TQLr { 0.£l 


.£1 


G. D. 


D. Tgn\g-eoi 




A. Tgt^g.ea 


•V 


TQLrjQ.&OlV -oXv. 


A. Tg^geag 


-e* & 


V. TQiriQ-eg. 






Y. TQiriQ-eeg 


-S*£. 


Example 


of the Genitive in 

to reTyog, the wall. 


-£°S? from 


"OS- 


Singular. 


Dual. 


Plural. 




N. reXy-og 




N. A. V. 


N. rely.ea 


-V 


G. telyeog 


•ovg 


xsly.ee -77 


G. reiy.dojv 


.(DV 


D. xeiy-ei 


.EL 


G. D. 


D. rely-eai 




A. TtTy-og 




jeiy.ioiv -oXv. 


A. rely.ea 


•n 


V. rely-og. 






V. rely.ea 


.7. 



Example of the Genitive in -oog, not from -ovg. 

7) uldtig, modesty. 



Singular. 




Du 


al. 




Plural 


N. txld-(bg 




N. A. 


V. 


N. 


ald.ol 


G. aid -60 g 


-ovg 


uld.ii) 




G. 


ald-&v 


D. fxld-& 


• OX 


G. D. 




I). 


ald-oXg 


A. ald-6ct 


-w 


C<2J-OZ> 




A. 


ald-otig 


V. aid-oX. 








V. 


ald-ol. 



40 



CONTRACTS OF Till; THIRD DECLENSION. 



§ 40. 

06*, 1. NounS in -m and -us have the singular only of the) 
third declension. The Dual and Plural are of the second. 
liem :e the contraction takes place only in the Singular, as in 
the above example* 

mples of Neuters in -ag pure and -gag. (§ 38. Obs. 3.) 



to Koiag, the flesh. 
Singular. 
N. A. Y. XQ&.ag. 

G. xge'-amg, -aO£, -a)£. 
D. xqLutc, -at, -a. 

Dual. 
N. A. V. xos-ure, -a£, -a. 
G. D. xqs-6ltoiv,-6lolV) -g>>. 

Plural. 
N. A. V. xgLaTu, -act, -a. 
G. tfoe-drwr, -dw^ 5 -co;\ 
D. xoa*-a<w. 



•to j^oag, f/ie 7iom. 
Singular. 

N. A'. V. X£0-ag, 

G. xig.awg, .aog, -W£. 
D. xig-uri,, -ai*, -a. 

Dual. 
N. A. V. nig-axs, -as, -a. 
G. D. xeg-aroi,v, -doiv, -wy. 

Plural. 
N. A. V. x6g-ara, -«a, «. 
G. neg-a.Tcor, -&lov, -<bv 9 
D. xeg.aat,. 



3. The Genitive in -eog not from ->?g, -Eg, -og; 
and also the Genitive in -tog, contract only the 
Dative singular and Nominative plural. Those 
in -sv$ contract also the Nominative Dual. 

Example of the Genitive in -eog, not from -yg, -eg, .og. 
6 ftacnXevg, the king. 





Singular. 


Dual. 


Plural. 




N. 


Baobk.sbg, 


N. A. V. 


N". fiacrd.is.Eg, 


&g 9 


G. 


8ao~ik.£atgy* 


fiucriX'ie, -fj, 


G. fiuoil.icov, 




D. 


fiumk-Bi, -el, 


G. D. 


D. ftuuil.evcri, 




A. 


QlliJlK Ul, 


ftuo-il-ioiv. 


A. Haoil-tug, 


.e?g 9 


V. 


ftaaik-sv. 




V. fiuinl-eeg, 


-6lg. 




Example of Lh 


e Genitive in -*0£, 


^ TToAt^j" //fC C? 


ty. 




Singolar. 


Dual. 


Plural. 




N. 


-i :. 


N. A. V. 


N. nol-ieg , 


-'ft 


G. 




7r<U-*s, 


G. tcoI.Ilov, 




D. 


rroP.w/, -t&-M, 


G. 1). 


)). 7i6X.t(n, 




A. 


: r ? 


Ttok.lOW. 


A. ndl.iag, 


-*fc 


V. 


rro/..i. 




V. n6X.t8g 9 


.^. 



5% ' >bs. I. 

I In : i'l Doric dialects, irrfXtf, has the Gen. n-dX-to?, in the Attic 

rdX-£Qf, and rA-*c*f. $ 22. Obs. 1. 



§ 40, CONTRACTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 41 

Exc. Adjectives in -vg, Neut. -v, with the genitive m -sog 
do not contract -ea in the plural. § 46. 3. 

4. Nouns in -vg -vog, and -ovg -oog, contract on- 
ly the nominative plural ; as, 

o Ixdug, the fish. 
Singular. Dual. Plural. 



N. ixO-tg, 
G. 1%0-tog, 
D. lyOvl, 
A. lyd-tiv, 

v. i/d-t. 



N. A. V. 
1/0 .tie, 
G. D. 



N. IxO-tsg, -vg, 
G. IxO'VMV, 
D. ixd'-vui, 
A. IxO.vag, -vg, 
Y. IxO-veg, -v$. 



feo o 6oi);, £/ie o#, G. fto6s, N. V. Plural, 6>o££, contr. #<#£, 

A. . . . 66ag, „ . #o£>£. 

5. Comparatives in qv reject v in the accusa- 
tive singular and nominative plural, and then 
contract the concurrent vowels ; as, 

fieljlwv, better. 

Singular. M. and F. 
Ace. Seljiova, 6eXitoa, contracted Selrta). 

Plural. M. and F. 

N. V. Selxloveg, Selrloeg, Selrtovg. 

A. fielzlovag* Selrloag, Oefalovg. 

Plural. Neut. 
N. A. V. 6elrtova, ftelitoa, 6elxi(a. 

6. The nominative contracted, is then declin- 
ed regularly ; as, 

sag, spring, by contraction %q, G. ^gog, D. \qt, &c. 

laag, a stone, lag, G. laog, D. lai, &c. 

Obs. 2. And if vowels concur in the oblique cases, the 

are moreover contracted in the usual way ; thus, c Hgaxlew\ 

Hercules, is contracted into c Hgaxlrig, and then declined ana 

contracted as follows, 

N. ' Hgaxlrig, 

G. l Hgw/.Uog, Contr. 'Hguxlovg, 
D. c Hgaxl£i, 'UguxXel, 

A. 'HgavMa, 'Hgaxlri. 

V. 'Hguxltg. 
4* 



42 



OF THE ARTICLE. 



§ 41, 42. 



7. In adjectives, the masculine and feminine 
assume the contraction ul' the neuter ; thus, 

u&iTosic,, made of honey. 



Noni. fisXn6i *£, 

conir. //. -'-A/ r< 
Gen. fxeXifjovvtog* 



fieXiTdeacriX) 

fjieh rovifou, 

peXiTOvaarjg, 



tipfeig, 1 honoured. 



I b5 

contr. u/mtJ;, 
Gen. iiai]i'io$, 



n^ao^g, 



fieXtjovr. 

fullTQVVTOg, &c. 



TCJU^BP. 
TlfjtT]P. 
Tl[lT\VTOg, &c. 



<> 41. WORDS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION TO 
BE DECLINED AND CONTRACTED. 

(N. B. The following method of practising on these exercises will direct 
the student in his preparation, e. g. zvatShs — Form the genitive ; — give the 
ru l e . — decline ; — wliat cases contract the concurrent vowels ? — give the rule ; 
— decline and contract, giving the rule for each contraction. This exercise 
should be continued till the student is perfectly ready and at ease in the 
whole process.) 

s^ae()i)g, pious ygoupevg, a painter, ald&g, modesty, 

(luclrojv, better. lleoixMrjg, Pericles, nsgcxg^ a limit. 



(TTu/ug, a spike of com. l%flvg, a fish. 
dtgsUov, more excellent, aoru, a city. 
loufvg, a shepherd. nletow, more. 
qpftJd), parsimony. 

s\ old age. 
,1/illr-v;, Jlchilles. 

>f>vi]g, excellent. 
tilyOkg, true. 
fivg 9 a mouse. 
(itQOS, (i part. 
nXblov, more. 



^wc, the morning. 
fiaOtig, deep. 
^Flrlutv. belter. 
TtFcdb), persuasion. 
fy5u, sweet, 
ntxng, a husband. 
r\0og, custom, 
xigug, a horn. 



TsT/og, a wall. 
dgvg, an oak. 
cpovevg, a murderer. 
a\vaidr\g, impudent. 
cpQ&o ig, diction. 
figog, a mountain. 
7T<j£u6ug, old. 
irde^g^ indigent. 
dioxlirjg, Diodes, 
snog, a word, 
dgo/usvg, a runner. 



§ 42. OF THE ARTICLE. 

The article is nn adjective word of three gen- 
ders. The terminations of the nominative are 
irregular. In the oblique cases the masculine 
and neuter genders are of the second declension ; 



6 43. 



DIALECTS OF THE ARTICLE. 



43 



the feminine is of the first, 
and is thus declined : 



It wants the vocative, 



Singular. 
N. 6, 3, to, 

G. TOV, r^g, TOV, 
D. TG), TTji, T<2>, 
A. TOV, Tl\l>, TO. 



Dual, 

N. A. 

tc5, t4, toj, 

G. D. 

jolr. Talv. jolv. 



PluraL 

N. oi, at, rd, 

G. TUP, T&V, T(OV, 

D. toZ"£, Talg, TOig, 
A. tou£, Ta£, T& 9 



Obs. 1. The Greeks spoke definitely, by placing the article 
before the substantive ; indefinitely, by omitting it or prefixing 
the pronoun rig ; as, 6 ardgcartog, the man ; arOgojTtog, a man, 
or tig ardgwirog, any man. 

Obs. 2. In grammar and lexicography, the article is used 
technically, to distinguish the gender of nouns, (§ 11. obs. 1.) 

Obs. 3. The enclitic $s annexed to the article through all 
its cases, gives it the force of the pronoun " this ;" as, ods 9 
r\de, ToJe, this, he, she, it; Gen. rovde, Triads, TGvds ; &c. In 
Homer and the other old Epic writers, the article itself is, with 
few exceptions, used in this sense. 

Obs. 4. The article 6, r), to, is sometimes used as a rela- 
tive. (See § 66. 2.) 

Note. The article 6, 77, ro, being commonly placed before a noun, is by 
f ime Grammarians called the prepositive article, to distinguish it from the re- 
lative pronoun ug, rj, d, which, from being generally placed after the noun to 
which it refers, they call the postpositive article. 



§ 43. DIALECTS OF THE ARTICLE. 



Singular. 



M. and N. 




Fern. 


N. 6, to. 




r/, D. d. 


G. TOV, A. I. P. T0?0 ; D. TCO, T6V ; P. 


T^Oi. 


T7j?, D. t5^. 


D. TCU. 




ttJ, D. t«. 


A. TOJ/, TO, I. T&0. 




t\v, D. Td*>. 


PluraL 






M. and N. 


Fern. 


N. ol, D. Toi. neut. t«. 


cct, 


D. T-d*. 


G-. to)*/, I. xkiav. 


TCOy, 


D. TOLV, Mi. T&biV. 


D. tol;, D. & L Tolcri, I. Tioiai, P. 


Tare, 


D. & I. TuXai, Tija*, 


tokHcti, and TOidirrao. 






A. tovc, D. to;, n&c. 


t«£. 








. . 



l, in 



. OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
Aa Adjective is a word used to qua- 
lily a substantive, or to limit its signification; 

as, & y a 6 6q av^c* a good man; \ila fifitQcc, 
V i 

1. The Accidents of the adjective are gender, number, 
and cose, and in most adjectives also comparison. 

2. Adjectives in Greek, as well as Latin, indicate the gen- 
der, number, and case, by the termination ; as, xaX-bg, masc. 

rem, noA-br, neuter, &c. 

Participles have the form and declension of adjectives, 
while in time and signification they belong to the verb. 

4. Some adjectives denote each gender by a different termi- 
nation in the nominative, and consequently have three termi- 
nations. Some have one form common to the masculine and 
feminine, and are adjectives of two terminations; and some 
are adjectives of one termination, which is common to the 
masculine and feminine ; such want the neuter. 

5. In adjectives of three terminations, the feminine is always 
of the first declension. In all adjectives the masculine is al- 
ways of the second or third*; and the declension of the neuter 
is always the same with that of the masculine. 



§ 45. REGULAR ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST 
AND SECOND DECLENSION. 

1. Adjectives of the first and second declen- 
sion have the masculine always in og, the femi- 
nine always in yj or a, the neuter always in ov) 
thus, 

xulbg, beautiful. 

Dual. Plural. 

N. A. V. N. koX-oI, -«i, .«, 

y.uX-u), -(i, -d), G. Hul-uM', ~6)i', -ojy. 

G. D. D. y.uX-iHQ^ -uTy, -otc, 

xal-oiv, -at>, -all. A. xuX-adg 9 -tic, -u, 

V. x<d-ol y -ul } -<x. 

Thi 'tidg, good ; *axb$ 9 bad ; g>lXog 9 friendly ; /«a- 

vhite; dr(log, manifest; unulbg, tender: 





Singular. 




N. 


naX'bg, -t), 


-br, 


G. 


naX-oV) Jr\g y 


-OV) 


1). 


y.if/.-i",, -r, 


.<p, 


A. 




- . 


V. 




•or. 



§ 45. 



REGULAR ADJECTIVES. 



45 



2. 


But og 


pure, anc 


[ pog 


, have a in tl 


ie f 


nine 


; as, 

Singular 








Sing 


ular. 




N. 
G. 
D. 


^adl-ov, 
K gqtdl co, 


-ag, 


.ou, 


N. 
G. 
D. 


cpavsg.bg, 
cpaveg.ov, 
cpaveg.®, 


-4, 


-6v i 
-ov 3 
4, 


A. 

V. 


'pdoVoi', 

pdJt-e, 

* r " 


-«3 




A- 
V. 


cpavsg.bv, 

CpOLV8Q-By 


-d, 


.6^ 



The "Dual and Plural like xakbg. 

Exc< The terminations -oog, and sometimes sog, especially in 
adjectives deaoting matter and colour, retain r\ ; as, oydoog, the 
eighth, dydoi] ; olobg, 'pernicious, blor^ ; xgvueog, golden ; XQvoiv; 
cpoutxeog, purple, cpoivixh]. Except where g stands before the 
vowel ; as, bdgoog, frequent, udgoa • ugyvgeog, silver, cxgyvgsa. 

3. The Attics often decline adjectives in -og ? 
especially derivatives and compounds, by the 
common gender, without the feminine termina- 
tion ; thus, 









Sing 


ular. 










Masc. 


and Fern. 


Neut. 


N. 


6 


i 




(kd&vawg, 


to, dQcxvaxov 


G. 


TOV, 


Trig, 


TOV, 


udavuTov, 




D. 


TG), 


i% 


T<2>, 


adav&T(p, 




A. 


TO V, 


Tf\V, 


TO, 


aQ&varov, 




V. 


7 

CO 






(xOuvars, 


(b, Cxd&VGtTOV 








Dual. 





JN. A. V. 



x&, 



d.davi!t,xia. 



G. D. tolv, tuTv, toTv, uduv&ioiv. 

Plural. 
JN. V. ol, 



G. TCQV, 
D. TOt£, 
A. T0L>3, 



cxl, 

TG>, 

TixTg, 
Tcxg, 



Singular. 
N. aOuvar-og -og-ov 
G. ij.0uv6.t-ov -ov -ov 
D. uduraT-(p -0) -G) 
A. cx06lvut-ov .ov-ov 

V. uOuVUT-6 -8 'OV 



0\Q6.VOLTOl, 
Tihv, uduVUTCOV, 

ToXg, o\6avuTOig, 
uOav&zovg, 

Or thus, 

Dual. 



Ttt, cxdavaTCt. 



id, adcxvaxa. 



Plural. 



N. A. V. 

uduV&T-O) -0) -0) 

G. D. 

<x6uv<h-0iv -OIV -01V 

3 



IN". u06lvut-oi> -oi -a, 

G. cxduvO\z-u)v -itiV -UJV, 

D. aOavur-Oig -oig -oig, 

A . uOu vex i-ovg-ovg-a, 

V. lcOuvut-ol -oi -a. 



; 



i6 ADJECTIVES OF FIRST AND THIRD DECLENSIONS. ^) 46 

In the same manner decline 

4, / 7%6ifiq)l\o$y in :v\jnyih)i\ from TtOiV and tyllog. 

6, ■', to ('a) i y.m\ from dixr\. 

u, i) nroieviug, to ovouribr, from OVQai'ug. 

6, )) ouooo;, to Sfiogov, from duog and ooo£. 

Note. Though this form of declension is most used by the Attic writers, 
it is not confined to them. Instances of it occur in Homer. 



§ 46. ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST AND THIRD 
DECLENSIONS. 

The masculine and neuter of all adjectives not 
ending in -og, are of the third declension. 

The regular terminations of these are, 

M. F. N. 



1. a$, 


cuva. 


av. 


2. £(£, 


£GG(X, 


ev. 


3. vg } 


E«X, 


v ; thus, 



1. Example of an Adjective in-ag,-ouva 9 -av. 
(zehxg, black. 

Singular. 



N. 


u£l-(tg, 


{Utl-aiva, 


(iiX-av, 


G. 


fiiX-avog, 


fiek-alvqg, 


{uiX-ai'og, 


D. 


ffil-UJ'ty 


nil- nil' ri, 


fi£X-avt, n 


k. 


I'd, 


tll-X-ULVUV, 


jLlH-(tV, 


V. 


" - r ? 


(liX-ai va y 


tltX-(XP. 



Dual. 

N- A. V. it ;').-(/. }\ r , fieX-alva, fi&X-av8 f 

G. D. pe%-&ro$v 9 itil-tdi'ULv, nv\-{/.voiv % 

Praral. 

N. \. " /•--".-. ii'l.-ifwia, idl-umf., 

(i. v 9 fieX-cup(tiP 9 ftf-l-uvou>, 

D. fiiX-acri, fiek-ulvuig, /uil-aai, § 6. 16. 

A. p&-mpag } [lel-ulvhg, /uiX-ava, 



§ 46. ADJECTIVES OF FIRST AND THIRD DECLENSIONS. 47 



2. Example of an Adjective in -ag, -eaaa, -ev< 
%apisLg, comely. 
Singular. 
N. xagl-sig, xaQl-euva, xaql-ev, 
G. yaql-svTOS) x a Q l '^ (T(J1 l^^ %olqI-6Vtoq, § 23, 2. 
D. xagt-evri,, %aqi-E(jori, /agt-evTi,) 
A* xagl-6VT<x, xaql-evcrav, %aql-ev, 
V. xaql-sv, x a Q l '- s<J(7a ? x a Ql~ ev » 
Dual. 

N. A. V. x a Ql- eVT8 ) x a Q l "£ (J0 ' a 9 x a Ql- £PT6 i 
G. D. %agi-£vTOiv, x u Q i ^ (J(JaiV ^ X a Q l -^ VT0VV » 

Plural. 
N. V. %agt-evTeg, x a Q^" S(J(Tav ^ x a Ql~ 8VTa ) 
G. x a Q L "^ VT0)V ^ x a Q l/ ~ e(J(J b )V > x a Q l "^ VT(av ^ 
D # x a Qi>- £liJ L, x a Q L " 8<JCfai ^^ x a Ql~ SLCr h § 6. 18. 
A. x a Qi- SJ/Ta z) x a Q L -^ G(Ta 9^ x a Qt- 6VTa » 

Obs. According to Buttman adjectives in -eig (but not parti- 
ciples) have -em and not -eiol in the dative plural. Prof. 
Anthon adopts the same termination. When so used it must 
be regarded as an exception to the general rule. 

3. Example of an Adjective in -vg, -eta, -v. 

rMg, siveet. 

Singular. 

fid-stag, 

f{d-eiq, 

rfi-e7av 9 

ffisTa, 

Dual. 

N. A. V. yd -is, fid.eta, 

rfi.elaiv. 

Plural. 

N. Y. fid-isg, contr. eTg, ifi-ela*, 

G. rfi-iow, fid-si&v, 

D. fld-iav, ffi-eluig, 

A. ffi-iag, contr. sXg, fid-slug. 



N. ^d-tig, 

G. fid-iog, 

D. fft-ii, contr. -el, 

A. fid-vV) or -^« 5 * 

Y" f\d--v, 

A. V. Vj<M£, 

G. D. ^-tW. 



fid.e'C, contr. -fit, 
^. 

-»7<Wa,not contr. t 
^<Wa,not contr. 



* Sec § 24. R. 2. 



t See § 40 R, 3 Exc. 



48 



DECLENSION OF PARTICIPLES. 



§47. 



After the same manner decline, 
1. 3. 



idX-Lcg^ 


-UIVU) 


-av. 


ylvx-tig, 
lyiia-vg, 




-4, 


urliTu-fig, 


2. 


-er. 


fiaq-vg, 
fiuO-tg, 


-eTa, 
-eta, 




u t >n' r eig, 


-Eoau, 


-EV. 


o?-*)c, 


-Cta, 


-V 



§ 47. DECLENSION OF PARTICIPLES. 

Participles are declined like adjectives of three terminations : 
those of the middle and passive in -og,are inflected throughout 
like xulug, § 45. 1. Of others, the feminine always follows 
the terminations of the first declension, and the masculine and 
neuter, those of the third, the genitive being always formed as di- 
rected, § 23. Obs. 1. The terminations of these are as follows : 





M. 


F. 


N. 




M. 


F. 


N. 


i. 


-wy, 


-ovaa, 


-ov. 


Gen. 


-ovrog, 


•ovenjg, 


-ovwg, &c. 


:>. 


-«c, 


-a era, 


-av. 




-ai>Tog 9 


-uorjg, 


-avwg, &c. 


3. 


-W£, 


-via, 


-&£• 




-6tO£, 


-vlag, 


-6roc, &C. 


4. 


-elg, 


-tl(JU, 


-EV. 




-EVTOg, 


-e/a?/£, 


-ivxog, &c 


f>. 


-o6g, 


-ovaa, 


-6p. 




-oviog, 


-ovcrrjg, 


-ovzog, &c. 


6. 


-*€, 


-£>cra, 


-bv. 




-vvjog. 


-varig, 


-vvrog, &c 



Of these the 1st and 3d are declined as examples; thus, 

1. tfiVttw, having struck. (2 Aor\ Act.) 
Singular. 



N. 


V. 


TV7t-0)P 


TVTT-OVOa 


TVTt-OV, 




G. 


TVTt-OVTOg 


TVTt-oucrrjg 


TVTt-OVTOQ) 




D. 


TVTC-OVTl 


TVIt-OVOfl 


TV7T-0VTI, 




A. 


Tvn-ovra 


TV7T-OVOUV 

Dual. 


TVTt-OV, 


N. A 


. V. 


l '.-OVJE 


TVTt.OlKJa 


TV7C-0PTE, 


G. 


D. 


TV7t-6viOt,V 


ivn-ovvuiv 
Plural. 


TV7l-6vTOlV. 


N. 


V. 




TVTt-OUUUL 


rvn-ovja. 




G. 


> K>>1> 


Tvn-ovutiv 


IV7T-<')V10)V, 




D. 


-■ vat 


ivn.nvvuig 


TVTl-QVUl) § 6. 18. 




A. 


i i :i-oi'Tug 


TV7l~0l)(JUg 


TVTt-OVia. 



In this manner are declined all participles which have v be 
fore -to£ in the genitive. 



§ 48. ADJECTIVES OF TWO TERMINATIONS. Ad 



3. tetvtp- 


cog. having struck 
Singular. 


(Perf. Ac 


N. V. 


TSTVty-tiis, -vice, 


-OS, 


G. 


TSTvcp-Qiog^ -vlag 9 


-OTO£, 


D. 


TSlVCp-OTl, -t/a, 


-6tl 9 


A. 


T£TvgD-6ra, -vTctv 9 
Dual. 


-bg. 


N. A. V. 


TSTVCp-OTS, -f/a, 


-6ts 9 


G. D- 


TSTvcp-oxoiv, .vlaiv, 
Plural. 


-6toiv. 


N. V. 


TSTvcp-OTeg, -vTai, 


-6l(X 9 


G. 


TSTVCp-OTWV, -Vlti)V, 


-6tqzv, 


D. 


TSTVcp-ouL, -vlaig^ 


-OOt, § 6. 8 


A. 


TSjvcp-OTocg, -vlag, 


. OTOi. 



The participle in -w£, after a Syncope, (§ 101. 7.) has 
If om. and Voc. -cb?, -waa, -cb£. G. -g)to£, -coo^, -cotos, &c. 



§ 48. ADJECTIVES OF TWO TERMINATIONS. 

Many adjectives of the third declension have but one form 
, for the masculine and feminine, and are therefore said to be 
declined according to the common gender. They are declined 
throughout like nouns of the third declension, of the same 
termination. The regular terminations of these are wv, i]v 9 rjg 9 
ig 9 vg 9 and ovg, (viz. compounds of itovg\) and they form the 
neuter according to the following 

RULES. 

1. Adjectives of the common gender in -cov, -yjv 9 
-vjg, form the neuter by changing the long vowel 
into its own short one ; thus, 

N. 6, 17, o~<brpqo)v 9 to aticpgov, prudent, G. acbcpgov-og. 
N. 6, ? c /, oigQrjv, to uggev, male, G. aggbv -0?. 

N. 0, ^. ulqQfa to ulrfihg, true, G. oU?;<% -og. 

So also some in -ojo ; as, 

N. 6, ^, fisyaX^rQiQ 9 to fj.eydcli^Tog, G. ^syal^Tog-og. 

Note. But TfcOT?^, tender, usually has the feminine Tigewa, 
aeuter tiger. 

5 



ADJECTIVES OF TWO TERMINATIONS. 



§48. 



2. Adjectives of the common gender in ig and 
v: } form the neuter by rejecting g ; as, 



N. o, r n el'/aotg, to evyaoi, G. evxtyi-Tog. 
N. o, ^, dldaxovg, to tidaxov, G. dt)\ixot-og. 



3. Compounds of itovg^ a foot ; have the neu- 
ter in -ovv ; as, 

N. 6, r[, dtnovg, to dlnovv, G. dlnod-og, § 23. 1 

Note. It is probable this word was originally ir6og ; whence 5, //, (Jitto , 
rd Siiroov, contracted tinovs, Siirovv ; and that the declension was afterward 
changed from the 2d to the 3d, as was done also in yrAws, and I'pws, from 
the ancient ycXaog, and spaog. 

Examples of Adjectives of the common ger- 
der.* 



1. 6 j h, ooxppuv, prudent. 



N. G&CpQ- 

G. OCDCpQ- 

D. (JO)q-o- 

A. (I(bcpQ- 

V. GbJCpO- 



Singular. 



0)1 'j 

ovog, 

OVi, 

ova, 
ov, 



-0)V, 

-ovog, 

-ova, 
-ov, 



-or, 

-ovog, 
-ow, 
-ov, 
-ov. 



Dual. 

N. A. V. 

cr&qpq-ove, -ovs, -ove, 

G. D. 

aojqpq-dvoiv, -bvoiv, -6voiv. 

Plural. 

N. ox-Vfo-orrc, ~ovrg, -ova, 

(t. (T(>KfO-6fU)V, .OV0)V, -/jVU)V, 

1). OXtXpQ-OGl, -no i, -00~l, 

A. fjdxpQ-OVaQ) -ovag, -ova, 

V. (ff'ufo-ovrg, -oi'f-g, -ova. 



2. 6. 



N. o\h]0- 
G. afojd. 
D. dlriO. 

A. oU?/# 



-eog, 

-it, 

.£a, 






Singular. 

^0£, 

Dual. 
N. A. V. 

• cS, -8E, -SSy 

G. D. 

■^0£*>, -BOW, .&01V* 

Plural. 

N. o\h]6Jeg, -£?g, -ia, 

G. ulriO-ijo)i>, -io)V, -iot)V, 

D. o\h]0.£ai, .icfi, -&gi, 

A. <xl)]OJag, -^«£, -^«, 

V. ulijO-ieg, Jrg, -6a. 






♦ These adjectives may be declined by means of the arlicle b, as d0ai/u- 

-o?, § 45. 3. Thus, N. o, ?'/, auxppov, to adj<j>pov, G. rw, rfjj, rov, aoi^povo^ L, 
ai, rj, ro^ vuifyovi, &C. 



§49. 



OF IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. 



51 



3. 


6, r i; e vzapig, acceptable. 


4. 6, Yij dSaxpvg, 


tearless 




Singular. 




Singular. 




N 


ev/ag-ig< .ig, 


•h 


N. Hdaxg.vg, -vg, 


-V, 


G 


sv/dg-nog, -nog, 


-nog, 


G. adaxg.vog, -vog, 


-vog, 


D 


ev/ag-iTi, -TOj 


-IT l, 


D. ccddxg-vT, .v'C, 


-v'C, 


. \. • 


sv/dcgura, -via, 

-IV, .W, 




A. adaxg-vv, .w, 


.v, 


V. 


efyag-i, -* 3 

Dual. 
N. A. V. 


-i. 


V. adaxg-v, .v, 

Dual. 
N. A. V. 


-v. 




etiy&g-iTS, -its, 


.ITS, 


dddxg.ve, -vs, 


-ve, 




G. D. 




G. D. 






ev/ag-lcoiv, -Itolv, 


.Itolv. 


ddaxg-vovv, .voiv, 


.6ot,v. 




Plural. 




Plural. 




:n. 


zv -/kg- it eg, -*T6£ 5 


-itu, 


N. dddxg-vsg, .veg, 


-vu 9 


B. 


ev/ag-Uojv, -Itcov, 


.trcov, 


G. ddaxg-vwv -vcov, 


-VOJV, 


D 


evyug-io-i, uav, 


.col, 


D. dddxg-vac, -vui, 


-VO~l, 


\. 


evyug.ttag, .nag, 


-na, 


A. dddxg.vag, -vag, 


-va, 


V. 


ev'/dtguzeg, .nsg, 


-via. 


V. d(M;^-f££, -vsg, 


-va. 



§ 49. OF IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. 

Every adjective not ending in some of the 
regular terminations already mentioned, is irre- 
gular. It always wants the neuter gender, and is 
declined like a noun of the 3d declension ; thus, 

N. 6, % agna%, 
G. tov, T?jg 3 agrru'/og, &C. 
06s. 1 The poets sometimes use the genitive and dative o r 
?uch adjectives in the neuter. Sometimes the neuter is sup- 
olied by a derivative form in -ov ; thus, dgnaxTux6v is used as 
:he neuter of 5ott«| ; 6laxrvx6v, as the neuter of 6ld%, &c. 

Exc. 1. Ix&v and uixwv, (by syncope ftxwv) are declined 
with three genders like participles ; thus, 

N. tv.-ihv, tx-ovacc, hx-6v, 

»G. tx.ovwg, ix.ovarjg, hx-bvTog^ &c. 

The adjective nag, all, is also declined like the participle in 
ag- thus, 



52 



ADJECTIVES TO BE DECLINED. 



§50 



\ . titers, Tiuaa, nay, 

G. navtb$ y jvjLVijg, naviog, &C. 

Exc. 2. ftiyag, great, and noXtig, many> are irregular in the 
nominative BUid accusative singular. The other cases are re- 
gularly ton nod from the ancient nominatives fieydXog and rtol- 
Xbg, of the 2d declension; thus, 
Singular. 

M. F. N. 

N. fii&yaQ) {leyulrj, piyu, 
G. (isydclou, ixsyuhjg^ juey&Xov, 
D. fieydX(p 9 fisydl^ /ncydckco, 
A. ftiyav, /uey&hjv, ii£ya. 

Dual. 

N. A. V. .aej^co, {uey&Xa, ueydtlw. I Ttolld), itokh^ nollti, &c. 
through the dual and plural, like xalbg. 

Note. Homer and other poets inflect 7ro\vg regularly, Gen. noXcos, Daf. 
iroXir, &c. It was afterwards changed, in those cases in which it would not 
be distinguished from the same cases of iroXis, a city. 

Obs. 2 Some substantives in -«£ and -yg 9 inflected in the first 
declension, are called by Grammarians, adjectives ; as, ^Sqio-j^g, 
an insolent man; rgavuaTlag, a wounded man ; but they are real- 
ly independent of any other substantives in construction. The 
same observation may be applied to several other words, called 
adjectives of one termination. 



Singular. 
M. F. N. 

7TO/TuC, Trolly 7T0li), 

nollovy ttoAAtjc, nollov, 
jtoIIw) Ttollrj, 7tolX(o 1 

TtolvPy 7toXX^V y TCoXi). 

Dual. 



§ 50. ADJECTIVES 

xux-og, .^, -o^, bad. 
TtU-ag, -aiva, -av, miserable. 
(lun-vg, -era, -v, heavy. 
t&Q7]p 9 ib rtoev, tender. 
-lg. pious. 
i ■•»*', -oy, belter. 

- '', honoured. 
- <;. -or, unjust. 

. -a, -o//, worthy, 

^patriotic. 
o, f r itoXimovg, -ow 9 many-footed 
6, ^, u&xafy happy* 

(?uO-vg, -a«, -u, deep. 
o, ?), pa/gof?, ~ov, greater, 



TO BE DECLINED. 

cpn(J£o~bg, -«, -o^, formidable, 
tbyadbg, -?], .6^, good. 
o, 17, (HxxQdxeiQ, long-handed 
6, ^, xulllix)i>, -or, more beauti- 
ful. 
(u/-v;^ -era, -i), swift. 
' { Z>\-< st,g,-eo<ra, -er, sonorous. 
(pll-og, -;/, -o^, friendly. 
o, ^, ii}>,\<u»v, -QV) mindful. 
<>. >), (jcdfi^g, -tg, unconquered 

i5 ( f / 7 <( ^ an exile, 

ylux-tig^-sla, -v, sweet. 
g&diog, -a, -oy, eas?/. 
o, ^ Cracow*/, -o?>, wus£. 



<§ 51, 52. 



GENERAL RULE. 



53 



§ 51. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 

Adjectives have three degrees of comparison, 
the Positive, Comparative, and Superlative, 

The Positive expresses a quality simply ; the Comparative 
asserts it in a higher or lower degree in one object than in ano- 
ther ; and the Superlative, in the highest or lowest degree com- 
pared with several ; thus, gold is heavier than silver ; it is the 
most precious of metals. Hence those adjectives only can be 
compared whose signification admits the distinction of more 
aud less. 



§ 52. GENERAL RULE. 

The comparative degree is formed, by adding 
-repog to the positive, and the superlative by add- 
ing -tatog ; thus, 



Positive. 
evrovg, 

KOLY.OVOVg, 

anldogAnlovg, 



Comparative. 

/uaxocg-zegog, 

Eijvovg-Tsgog, 

xaxovovcr-zegog, 

ajilova-Tsgog, 



Superlative. 

[iaxu.Q-T(XTog. 

evvoTug.Tajog. 

xaxovova-jawg 

dnlovcr-TaTog. 



SPECIAL RULES. 

i. -eig rejects i ; as, 

XugUig, /agisa.TSQog, %agiso~-TaTog. 

2. -og rejects g; and also, after a short sylla- 
ble, changes o into gj; thus, 

ugdbg, ogdd-regog, dgdo-Tarog. * 

dlxaiog, dixaid-Tegog, dixaio-zazog. 

TTOvygbg, novrjgo-zegog, Ttovrjgo-zazog, 

duvuuozbg, Ocxviiacrio-Tegog, 0avfxaaz6-zaTog o 

dialog, drjlo-zegog, drjlo.jazog. 



-og after a short syllable. 



aocpog, 

xevbg, 

fpoSegbg, 

Cpureqb;, 

XaXenbg, 



crocpoi-xago;, 

xevib-zegng, 

cpoOegw-xegog, 

ffji)'r'0(;')-Tcgo;, 

%aXe7t(b-T6Qog, 



ooqpto'Taxog. 

xevti-zajog. 

cpo6eg{b'ZUTog, 

cpuvFgd)-zuzog. 

/alfTTW-zazog. 



Obs. The change of into o>, is made to prevent the con- 
currence of four short syllables. Hence o, after a doubtful 

5* 



COMPARISON BY -imi' AND -KJTOg. § 53. 

vowel considered long, remains unchanged ; but if considered 

short, the is changed into to; thus, ei'iluog, has eyTt/udiEgog ; 

and Iffjpjpos has in/v/m-nog ; because i> and u are considered 

jkk has dyotcfceoog ; and Ixavbg, Ixavmegog, &c, 

the i and a are considered short. 

3, -. and -i>c, add to the neuter gender; as, 

. <c, ui-huvu, uO.ui' ; [isl&v-Tegog, &c. 

etioefifig, £ vcre6£g ; e-uaeG^cr-Tegog, &c. 

.' ; S" ? evguu, etigv ; svgu-Tsgog, &c. 

4. -co?; and ->?y add to the nominative plural 
masculine ; as, 

tiygu)i', N. P. dlcpgoveg, acpgovicr-regog, &c. 

Tegijr, m regivsg, jsgevia-Tsgog, &c. 

l?.rc. But n&nbiv makes Ttsnaiiegog, &c. and 7i/wr, — Ttv6iEgog, 
nidiuiog. 



§ 53. COMPARISON BY -to* AND -iotos. 

1 . Some adjectives in -o$, derived from sub- 
stantives, are compared by -/cw and -icnrog. In 
these the comparison is made, not from the ad- 
jective, but from the substantive from which it 
is derived ; thus, 

xrdng, beautiful, from x&llog, beauty, xalllcov, xdlloaiog. 

>;, inimical, ^%0dg, enmity, e/Olwv, h'/diaiog. 

>;, compassionate, oixxog, compassion, oixrlwv, ol'xnaiog. 
uia/oog, base, ala/og, baseness, alcrxtwv, aVa/iaiog. 

fjuxnog, long, wxog, length, /ut]xIujv, (n^xiaxog. 

2. Some in -vg are compared both ways ; as, 

(luOvg, deep, (jaduiegog, ^aQbiaxog. 

and fiaQlwv, fitiOccrTog, 

In like manner compare (tgudtig, slow ; ru/vg, swift; na^ug, 
thick; ylvxvg, sweet; foxtig, quick; &c. 

3. jki&og, ea8y } has paiov, paiarog] or, with t\ 
subscribed, pdcyi> : pqatog. 

Notr. Some of these, and of others compared in this way, are occasional 

y found compared \>y -renos and -rarog. 



* 54, bb 



DEFECTIVE COMPARISON. 



55 



§ 54. IRREGULAR COMPARISON. 



The following adjectives are irregular in their 
comparison ; viz. 

uyadmajog, from uuevbg^ pleasant, 
agio-jog, from"-4o7/£, Mars. 
@ikTicrrog 9 



auelvm', 

ugelow, 

(teXzlMi*, 

fcyactoc, °;ood,<( ,* , 



CpBQTSOOg^ 



I 



*«xdc, 6ad T , 



xguiiorog, 
XGcrTog, 

cpegioxog, 

CfSOTHJTOg^ 

xaxioiog. 
XslgioTog. 
ueyiaTog. 
TtleTcrTog. 
il<x/ioTog m 



from Sovloficu, I ivish. 
from xguTvg, brave. 
from Aco, for #e'Aw, I wish. 

from 9^w, J 6 ear. 



( y.uy.lojv, 

'liyag, great, fiBttfav, 

toIv;, many, nlsloji', 

iXu/vg, small, eXdcrocov, 

uixgbg, little, r^ocrcov, or peiwv, or {iixgoregog ; [iixgoTaTOy. 



§ 55. DEFECTIVE COMPARISON. 

Some adjectives in the comparative and superlative degree, 
lave no positive., but are formed from 







1. nouns ; 


as, 




^uadevg, 
<igdog, 

Bebg, 

i).t7TT7]g 9 

tvdog, 


a king; 
gain ; 
God; ^ 
a thief; 
glory ; 


fiao-ilevregog, 

y.sgdlwv, 

decbregog, 

xvdtojv, 


fiaailefaawg. 
xegdiaxog. 

xXsTtTloTaTog. 
ycvdiojog. 


'.Vb)V, 

Ur^Tijg, 
tot?;;, 


a dog ; 
a striker ; 
a drinker ; 


xunegog, 




nlyxTloiaTog. 
TtoxlaxaTog. 


frog, 


cold, rigor; 


grytojv, 




glyvoTog. 


Wj 


a thief ; 






qiojgoiaTog. 




2 


. pronoun ; 


as, 




<i)t6c, 


self; 






afiidTawg. 




3. 


PARTICIPLE 


; as, 




ggwiivo 


;, strong ; 


iggwusvioTegoQ, 


£ggo) i U€vso'TaTO<; 



56 



DIALECTS OP COMPARISON. 



§56 



>ra), 


up : 

im me diet 




near ; 




ou I ; 


KOTO), 


down ; 


i(HO, 


in ; 


U.lilTLO, 


back ; 




beyond ; 


7x6$ {)(*), 


far ; 


vipi, 


early ; 
highly; 


7T0O, 

fineg, 


before ; 
over ; 



4. adverbs ; as, 

d)'iO-TFQOQ, 

if ; ixyao-TFOog, 
I tyyv-TFoog, 
\ £yy-(m>, 
;"$«')- Tf-qog, 

XUTW-TFOOg, 

tcrdj-TFgog, 
dmou regog, 
negid-TFgog, 

7TOO ()(J)-J 800 g, 
7TQW'ial-T6Q0g, 



-TttTOg. 



i: 



jaiog 
voxog. 

-Taro£. 

-Tixiog. 

-TOCTOg. 
.TUTOQ. 

-jajog. 

-l.OLT0g. 
-TUTOg. 

vipioiog. 



prepositions ; as, 

ngd-jsgog, ngd-Tonog, whence itgmog. 
vnig-jsgog, vneg.Taiog, whence vrtarog. 

Some comparatives and superlatives are again compared; as, 

Xco'tojv, better, loYi'Tegog. 

(uetwr, less, /usioTegog. 

gawp, easier, to gatnegov. 

xakliojv, more beautiful, to xallidnegov* 

XSQsluv, > ^ i to xeqeib'TEQOV. 

-/slow, ) i and /sigoregov. 

"/tlqiOTog, worst, rj /sigioTOTig?]. 

xvdioTog, most glorious, KvdlaTazog. 

Ih'iyiOTog, least, ilaxiaioregog. 

nn&iog, first, ngwTloiog. 

Some words ending in rjg, of the first declension, are com- 
pared ; thus, (see § 49. Obs. 2.) 

vfiqujjrig, an insolent man, ■bftgiGTd.T&gog, Jiaxog. 

nleovixTrjg, an avaricious man. nlsovexxiaraTog. 



§ 56. DIALECTS OF COMPARISON. 

1. The Attics compare many adjectives in -og, -yg, and I, 
by -IfTTrnng -loTarog, .uiirnng .alxaxog, and-toreoog iaiaxog ; as, 

-. loquadoU8 9 htllrr-xcgog, -Tacrog, 

(p&OQ, friendly, ydal.Tegog, -Tuxog. 

cope, (plX-TSQog, -racog and (plhaxog. 

nnc nt, unovbinuj-iigng, -xazog. 



§ 57. NUMERALS. 57 

■ 

acpdopog, not envying, acpOovea-Tsgog, -raiog, 

nalcabg, old, nalal-regog, -Tarog. 

yegcubg, an old man, ysgal-Tsgog, -Tarog. 

dgTra^y rapacious, dgiray Lg-ts gog, -roaog, 

TrXeoveKTrjg, avaricious, nleorexria-Tegog, -Taroc. 

ipevdijg, false, ipsvdia.TFgog, -ronog. 

2. Dialects of particular comparatives aud superlatives, are, 
for xgelcraQji', I. and D. xgsaacov, better ; xelguv, P. xegelcov, I. 
dat. /eg*]!', ace. xsgiju, nom. plur. x^Q T l e ^ ; — ^I'C^v, I. (i&tmv, 
D. ii&oowp, greater; with others which may be learned by 
practice in reading. 



§ 57. NUMERALS. 

Numbers are of two classes, the Cardinal and 
the Ordinal. The Cardinal answer to the ques- 
tion, how many? as, one, two, &c. The Ordinal 
answer to the question, which of the number? 
as, first, second, third, &c. 

Distributives have no separate form in Greek. The mean- 
ing of these is expressed by the cardinal numbers, sometimes 
compounded with vvv ; as, avvdvo, ovvrgsig &c. ; bini, terni ; 
-and sometimes preceded by Kara, &va, &c. 



I. THE CARDINAL NUMBERS. 

1. EFg, one, has the singular number only, and 
is thus declined ; 

N. Big, iiia, ev, 

G. evbg, fjiag, ev6g y 

D. £W, ixia, kvi, 

A. £*>«, /uiav, ev. 

In like manner the two compounds, 

Q'dd-etg, ovde-utu, ovS-^iv, plur. ovd-evsg, -efilab, -era. 
(iTjd-slg, [Mide-iilu, /tajd-iv, ,, /UTjd.ereg, -e/ului, -&va. 

Obs. 1. From elg, one, is formed the adjective hegog, either, 
one, other; and from ovdslg, fiydelg, are formed ovdizegog, firj- 
dhtgng, neither. 

Obs. 2. Elg is sometimes used for the ordinal ngwrog, as 
Matth. 23. 1. Mark 16. 2. This is usually considered a He- 






NlTMIiKALS. 



§ 57. 



braism, but ii is Bometimea used by the Greeks also ; Herod. 
iv. 161, Thacyd. iv. 1 lf>. Also in Latin, Cic. Sen. 5. " Una 
et ootogessimo \ n no.^' 

2. Atto, two } has properly the dual only; thus, 

N. A. 9 fa. ) r „ , 

^ n * I i * ~ > for all senders. 
(t. u. Ouoii/ and oven*, J & 

06*. 3. The plural forms, G. dtw?, D. dval, are sometimes 
used ; dvo, two, is indeclinable ; aucpw, both, is declined like 
dfa>, 

3. Tprfj, £/wee, and Teororapsg, four, are thus de- 
clined, 

Plur. TQeTg, three. 
N. A. TQSlg, TQSlg, tqLcx, 

G. TQiibv, TQlWV, TQICDV, 

D. tqlo\, tqigI, tqivL 

Plur. Ticraaosg, four. 
N. riooaqeg, Tsoo-dosg, x&voaQa, 

G. T6UauQ(xH/, TSaCF(XOi>)P, TSOCr&QWVj 

D. Ticraaoai,, Tioaaocn, t£oouqo-l } 

A. riaoocQag, Tscroagag, ricraaou. 

4. The Cardinal numbers from Ttsj/fe, jfa;6, to 
txatbv, a hundred, are indeclinable. 

5. After szatbv the larger numbers are regu- 
lar plural adjectives of the first and second de- 
clension ; as, 

F. 

diuxuaiao, 
TQiaxdcnaij 

Oioylkiai, 
utoiai. 



M. 
diaxdo'ioir, 
TQiaxdawt 



d&crftdQiaij 



N. 




diax6oia, 


two hundred. 


TQIUKOOMX, 


three hundred. 


ylkva, 


a thousand. 


did'/llia, 


two thousand. 


/UVOKK, 


ten thousand. 


oiajUugiot) 


twenty thousand. 



Obs. 4. [n the composition of numbers, either the smaller 

des, and the two arc joined by xal ; or the greater pre- 

. in which case the xal is generally omitted ; thus, rtivre 

Hal etxovi) or etixoai nivTB, twenty-five ; ni^ntog xal sixoardg, 

or BlxtHrrdg rrifjutrog, twenty-fifth* When three numbers are 

reckoned together, the greatest comes first, and so on in sue- 1| 



§ 58, 59. ORDINAL NUMBERS. 59 

cession, with the conjunction xal ; as, vr\sg huxjbv xal sl'xoai, 
xal 67TT&, a hundred and twenty-seven ships. 

Obs. 5. Instead of the numbers compounded with eight or 
wine, more frequent use is made of the circumlocution kvog (or 
fuiag) diovrog, &c. thus vr\sg uiag diovoao el'xocn, twenty ships 
icanting one, i. e. nineteen ships ; erea dvwv ddovTa eixogi, twenty 
years wanting two, i. e. eighteen years. 



§ 58. II. ORDINAL NUMBERS. 

The Ordinal numbers are formed from the Cardinal. All 
under 20, except second, seventh, and eighth, end in .toq ; from 
20 upwards all end in -oardg, and, in their inflection, are re- 
gular adjectives of the first and second declension ; thus, 
TCQUTog, 7tgd)TT], ngcoTov, first. 

(ngoTsgog, ngoTEga, ngorsgov, first of the ttuo.) 
devregog, dsvrsga, dsvTsgov, second, 

jglzog, Tgiri], jglxov^ &c. third. 

Obs. 1. In order to express half, or fractional numbers in 
money, measures, and weights, the Greeks used words com- 
pounded of r\av, half, and the name of the weight, &c. {jxva, 
oSoVog^KxlavTov,) having the adjective termination ov, vov, aCov, 
appended to it, and placed before the Ordinal number, of which 
the half is taken ; as, rgirop rituT&lavTov, 2\ talents ; i. e. the 
first a talent, the second a talent, the third a half talent, and 
so of others. In like manner the Latin Sestertius, 2± Jisses 
by vSyncope from Semistertius ; the first an Jls, the second 
an As, the third a half Jls, (tertius semis). 

From this must be distinguished the use of the same com- 
pound word in the plural, preceded by the Cardinal number ; 
thus, iglu -fjuvT&lavTu, not 2 J talents, but 3 half talents, or one 
and a half. 

Obs. 2. From the Ordinal numbers are formed numerals 

I in -ulog, expressing " on what day ;" as, devregalog, on the 
second day ; TgiruTog, on the third day, &c. 



ire 



$ 59. OF THE GREEK NOTATION OF 
NUMBERS. 

The Greeks used the letters of the alphabet, to denote num 
)ers, in three different wavs. 
i 

,! 



NOTATION OF NUMBERS. 



§ 59. 



1. To express a small series of numbers, each letter was 
reckoned according to its order in the alphabet ; as, A, 1, £,2, 

24. In this manner the books of Homer's Iliad 
and I are distinguished. The technical syllable HNT, 

will assist the memory in using this kind of notation ; for if 
the alphabet be divided into four equal parts, H will be the 
iii st letter of the second part, that is 7 ; JV, of the third, or 13 ; 
and T of the fourth, or 19. 

2. The capital letters were used, in denoting larger series 
Of numbers, thus ; I, 1, /7 for nhxe, 5, 4 for di*a, 10, 11 for 
Hexatdr, 100, X for /llioi, 1000, and M for piQiot, 10,000. A 
large fl round any of these characters, except I, denoted five 
times as much as that character represented ; as, Q* 50. 

3. To express the 9 units, the 9 tens, and the 9 hundreds, 
the Greeks divided the alphabet into three parts ; but, as there 
are only 24 letters, they used <;', called erttarj^ov, for 6 ; Cj, or 
Z, called *o/r;r<x, for 90 ; and 9, called aavnl, for 900. In 
using this kind of notation, the* memory will be assisted by 
the technical syllable AIP ; that is, A', denotes 1 ; /', 10 ; and 
/ y , 100. It is to be observed, also, that all the numbers under 
1000, are denoted by letters with a small mark like an accent, 
over them ; and that a similar mark placed under any letter 
denotes that it represents, so many thousands. 



TABLE OF NUMERALS. 



Cardinal. 



1 


a' 


2 


V 


3 


y 


4 


6' 


6 


£ 


6 


? 


7 


t 


8 


n 


9 


0' 


10 


i 


11 


ia 


12 


iP 


13 


l Y 


1 1 


16' 


15 


u' 


16 


«r* 


17 


-r 


18 


iff 


[9 


i(T 


20 


K 


21 


KOL 


30 


X' 



Svo 
rpeTg 

ttcvtc 

H % 

£7rra 

6kt'j} 

ivvea 

tiUa 

cuScKa 

SojAckol 

TOlVKdlScKa 

Tcrj(rapccKai6cK(i 

~zvTr.KaihiKO. 

;~T(lK<liScKa 

uKT'^-'iiticKa 
IvvtaKdidcKa 
cXkovi 
cikovi clg 
rpiaKOvra 



Ordinal. 

irpcorog. 
tievrepog. 

TplTOS. 

Tcraprog. 

TTZHTTTOg. 
CKTOg. 

'l65opog. 

SySoog. 

epvarog. 

dexarog. 

tvSeKarng. 

fiiodeKdrog. 

TpMrxaiSeKaTog. 

TcaaapaKatScKarog. 

TT£VT€Kai6cKaT0g, 

iKKut()£Karog. 

liTTaKaiStKarog. 

<'>KTff)Kaif}i:KaTog. 

tvvca.KaiScKa.Tog. 

CiKoarSg. 

ctKocrrdg Tcpdrog. 

rpiaKOffros. 



NOTATION OP NUMBERS. 



61 



40/ ft 


TSGGzpaKOvra 


TSGGapOLKOGT&S-, 


50 


v ' 


Trsv-fiKOvra 


Tt£VTT]KOGr6c» 


SO 


f 


e^flKOvra 


l^rjKOGrdg. 


70 





i$8op.%korra 


b66oj.ir}KOGrd$, 


SO 


*' 


uySofiKOvra 


oySorjKoarog. 


90 


s 


Of Z^ , £VV£V73KOVT& 


£VV£Vr l KQGT6<;* 


100 


p 


Ikcltov 


£KaTOGTOS. 


200 


*' 


(HilKOGLOl 


8ia.KOGlOGT6$. 


300 


r" 


TOIUKOGIOI 


rpiaKOGioGTog. 


400 


»* 


T€(raapaK6ai(K 


T£GGapa.KOGLOGT&S a 


500 


¥ 


-zvraKOGioi 


TTEVTaKOGlOGTOS, 


600 


X 


£<;aK6aioi 


S^aKOGlOGTOg. 


700 


*F 


l-TCLKOaiOt 


iirraKOGioGTSs. 


800 




QKTGLKOGlOi 


dKrOLKOGiOGTOS. 


900 


3 


kvveajetiariot 


ivVSdKOGlOGTOS* 


1,000 


*, 


^i\iot 


^iXiOGTog. 


2,000 




di<j%i\ioi 


SiG^LniOGTOg. 


3,000 


£ 


rpiG^iXiot 


rpiG^iXioGTog, 


4,000 


o* 


T£Tpa.KC<T%t\lOl 


T£TpaKLG^tXlOGT6g> 


5,000 


£, 


TT£VTaKlG^lXlOl 


•KevraKiG^iXioGTog, 


6,000 


r, 


l^aKLG^iXiOl 


i^aKLG^iKioGTog. 


7,000 


c 


hrraKKTj^iXiot 


lTTTa.KlG%l\lOGT6g. 


8,000 


It, 


oySoKia^iXioi 


6y6oKiG^/i\iuGTog. 


9,000 


0„ 


£W£aKia^i\ioi 


hvV£OLKlG'%l\lOGT6g. 


10,000 


i, 


fivptoi 


fJLVpiOGTOg. 


20.000 


K 4 


SlGfXVpiOl 


OlGjlVpiOGTOg, 


50,000 


V ¥ 


7T£uraKiafivpL0i 


TtEVTaKlGfAVpiGGTOg. 


100,000 


f* 


Ssxa.KiGiivGt.oi 


S£KaKCG[.lVpiOGT6g. 



Thus the number 1841 is a c5 ^i d. 
Obs. From the Cardinal numbers are formed 



OTHER CLASSES OF NUMERALS ; VIZ. 

1st. The Numeral adverbs ; as, dig, twice, from dvo ; -Tgig, 
thrice, from Toelg ; and from the others, by adding the termina- 
tion -y>ig, -hv.ig, or -ruxig ; as, rscrcraoLcxig, e^dxtg, exajovjaxig , 
four times, six times, a hundred times. 

2d. ^Multiple numbers in nloog, contracted nlovg ; as, dinloog, 
two-fold ; zoLTiloog, three-fold ; TSToaTiloog, four-fold* 

3d. Proportionals in nldaiog* as, TQintecnog, three times as 
much. 

4th. Substantives in -ug, -tcdog, which express the name of 
the several numbers; as, [lovug, Gen. -udog, the number one, 
unity : Svug, the number two ; dev.ug, the number ten ; elxug, 
the number twenty ; joiuxug, the number thirty, &c. 

5th. The Distributives, answering to the question, in how 
many parts ? arc formed in -/« ; as, di/u, iql'/u, Tiroa/a, itiv- 
tu/<<, : in two parts, in three parts; &c, and connected with these 
are such adverbs ; as, Tot/r h trebly, t(m#o5, in three places, &c. 

6 



62 



OF THE mONOUN. 



§ 60 



§ 60. OF THE PRONOUN. 

A Pronoun is a word used instead of a noun. 
Pronouns may bo divided into Personal, Possess- 
Definite, Reflexive, Reciprocal, Dcmonslra- 
tir< . Relative, Interrogative, and Indefinite. Of 
these the Personal only are substantives; the 
rest are adjectives. 

I. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

The Substantive or Personal Pronouns are 
i yo) I, ov thou, ov of Jdmselfi of herself, of itself. 
They are of all genders; and are thus declined : 



Sing. 



syco, i 
Dual. 



Plural. 



N. tyto, 

G. tttov or fiov, 

D. iftol or //o/j 


N. A. vZii or v® 9 
G. D. v(Hiv or vGv. 


N. tyieTg, 
G. rifi&r^ 

D. fy*iv, 


A. tut or 


pi. 


av, thou. 




A. %(*£. 


Sing. 




Dual. 




Plural. 


N. V. v6, 








N. V. vpelg, 


G. (70V 9 

D. vol, 
A. ae. 




N. A. V. crcpw'C or 0"<£<5, 
G. D. aqpuJip or utp&v* 

ov, of himself 


G. tijLi(b)> 9 

D. $(*CVy 

A. tf,ua£. 


Singular, 




Dual. 




Plural. 


N. — 
G. ou ? 
D. 
A. 1 




N. A. crepe, 
G. D. o-cpiv. 




N. c7(peXg y 
G. o~q)&v 9 

D. 0(fl(7( 9 

A. cryag. 



06*. 1. Tin ]!!<»!K syllabic forms //oi), /«o/, //e, are always en- 
clitic. } 212. aud are never governed by a preposition. 

05*. 2. In Che dual, the forms v&, vQr, of the first person, 
and aqxa, '"/'"'"'- of the second, are Attic. Other dialects make 
pA and (>'f'' by Apocope for pcoi' and crqpfifc*. 

06*. o. The third personal pronoun, like sui in Latin, wants 
the nominative Singular, and is commonly used by the Attic 



§ 61, 62. THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUN. 63 

prose writers in a reflexive sense ; i. e. it refers to the subject 
of the proposition in which it stands ; or of the forecoinor, i»* 
the second be sufficiently connected with it. Thus used°it is 
translated o/W//, of herself , &c. In Homer and Herodo- 
tus, and the Attic poets, it is more frequently used as the pro 
noun of the third person, for the nominative of which they use 
the relative o S ; as, og l<p n , he said. This pronoun, however, 
is but little in use, the Definite aiibg, § 62. and the Reflexive 
eavmv, § 63., being used instead of it. The nominative (not 
now in use) appears to have been anciently I, from which was 
derived the Latin is. A neuter form of the nominative and 
Accusative plural, ocpia, occurs in Herodotus. 



§ 61. II. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 

The Possessive Pronouns are derived from 
the substantive. 

1. In Signification they correspond to the Genitive of their 
primitives, for which they may be considered as a substitute, 
thus, o udehpog t t uov, the brother of me, and 6 !,,!,; ddelwdg, my 
brother, are synonymous expressions. 

2 Inform they are regular adjectives of the first and se- 
cond declension, and are declined like xaUq, § 45. Thev are 
derived as follows, J 

From i t ue comes iftbg, 
oi, ads, 



e. 



S<r, 



V ^'h vGfireg-og, 

O(p0)'i, ocph)LTsg-og, 

ty*£i$ 3 ^uheo-og, 

fy«%, tifiireg-og, 

a( P^S, oq.sTeg-og, 

Doric ocp-bg, 





•bv 9 my, 
oov, thy, 
ov, his. 


-a, 


-ov, our, i. e. of us two, 
-ov, your, i. e. of you two 
-ov, our. 


-*9 

-a, 


-ov, your, 
-ov, their. 


Ay 


-ov. 



Obs. To this class also belong f^sSanog, one of our coun 
ry; tysdandg, one of your country. But nodanbg ; of tvhal 
oiintry ! more properly belongs to the interrogative ; and cUU 
odunog, one of another country, to the indefinite pronouns 

§ 62. III. THE DEFINITE PRONOUN. 
The Definite Pronoun avrbg is used to give 



64 



REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS. 



§ 63. 



a l'Iosi r or more definite signification of a person 
or thing. 

Tins pronoun has three different significations. 

1. In the nominative it adds the force of the English self 
to the word to which it belongs ; as, Hyio uvrbg, I myself ; crb at- 
7< v u\ than thyself; iwrbg, he himself. Also in the oblique cases 
when it begins a clause ; as, avrov kibouxa, 1 have seen the 
l>> rsoti himself. 

2. In the oblique cases after another word in the same 
clause, it is used for the third personal pronoun, and signifies 
him. her, it, them; as, ov% hihqanag avibv, Ihuu hast not seen 
him. 

3. With the article before it, it signifies the same ; as, 6 atf- 
to; urOoo);jog, the same man. 

Obs. In the last sense when the article ends with a vowel, 
it often combines with the pronoun, forming one word ; thus, 
Tttvwv for tov avrou ; Tavrrj for ir\ avjr^ ; laviu. for ra aviu, &C. 
When thus combined the neuter ends in ov as well as o. The 
combined iavrr { and juvru. must be carefully distinguished from 
raviy and tavia, parts of ovto*, § 65. The former has the 
Spintus lenis (') over the v, the latter has not. 

4. umbg is thus declined. 



Singular. 


Dual. 


Plural. 


N. avr-b;, -/], -o, 


N. A. 


N. atfr-oi, -«J, -a, 


G. uvi-ov, -r\g, -ov, 


avi-LOy -u, -w ; 


G. avT-Coi', -(br } -<hv, 


D. uvt-Q, -r n -<J>, 


G. D. 


D. uvi-olg, -ulg,-oTg, 


A. aur-ur, -y',-0. 


uvi-olt', .uXv, -oTv, 


A. uvi-ovg,-ug } -&. 


Tn the same manner are declined : 


I 


(illog, ull/j, alio, 


another. 


8?, % 8, 


who, which. 


ixeU'og, 


ixelvij, ixeli'o , 


that. 



§ 63. IV. REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS. 

Reflexive Pronouns are such as relate to 
the subject of the proposition in which they 

stand. 

1. The Reflexive pronouns are formed from the accusative 
singular of the personal pronouns with the oblique cases of 



§ 64, 65. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 65 

wvjog, They are suavzov, of myself ; asavTov, of thyself; 
tavTov, of himself and are thus declined. 

Singular. Plural. 

G. kavT-&v. -coj\ -coy, 



G. 


tavr-ov, 


-Vh 


-o£> 


D. 


§avr-q>, 


-?' 


-«?, 


A. 


euvT-ur, 


-7^, 


-o. 



D. savi-olg, -cag, -ot£, 
A. eavT-ovg, -d?, -d. 

2. In the same manner are declined e/uaviov and osaviov, 
but, in the Singular number only. In the Dual and Plural 
the parts of the compound are used separately, as, tymv «*}rcaj>, 
of ourselves. 

3. Homer never uses the compound form even in the sin- 
gular ; but, eus atiibv ; oh avruv, &c. 

4. The contracted forms aauTov and avzov, &c, are often 
used for oeuvtov and eaviov, 

5. Sometimes in the Singular, and often in the plural, £av- 
tov is used by the Attics in the first and second, as well as in 
the third person. They are all used as the, 



§ 64. V. RECIPROCAL PRONOUN. 

The Reciprocal Pronoun indicates a mutual 
relation between different persons, expressed in 
English by the phrase one another. 

This pronoun is formed from dlldg, wants the singular, and 
is thus declined : 



Dual. 




Plural. 






G. fj.)Xr).-oiv^ -acv, -oiv, 
D. dJJ»f { ).-oiv y -aw, -oiv f 
A. ulh\l-o), -«, -w. 


G. 
D. 
A. 


o\Kh]k-0)v , 
(xllijl.oig, 


-MS, 


-WJ>, 
-Of. 


The Dual is seldom used. 











§ 65. VI. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 

The Demonstrative Pronouns are such as 
point out with precision a person or thing alrea- 
dy known. They are, 

OVTOg, (XVTrj, TOVTO, } . . , , • ., 

cxj. a * r* ? this, the latter, the one. 

cue, rjOf, ToOf, ) ' 7 

ixelvog, ixelvtj, ZxtZvo, that, the former, the other* 



66 



RELATIVE mo NOUNS. 



§ 66. 



1. 9 0di . /'<', r6da s this, is simply the article u, ^, to, render- 
ed emphatic by the enclitic ds annexed through all its cases, 
S 42. 06*. 3. 'Exaivog is declined like ?6x4£, § 62. 4. outos, 
like the article, takes the initial / in the oblique cases, and is 



iims declined : 




V 










Singular. 




N. 


V. 


ovrog, 


(XV* IT], 


70VT0, 




(.'. 


toi ' iou, 


TUV11JQ, 


TOUIOV, 




1). 


TOUFG), 


Tuviri, 


TOjVrq), 




A. 


I0V10P) 


Dual. 


TOV JO. 


N. A. 


V. 


tov rw, 


zwuroc, 


TOVTCOy 


G. 


D. 


lobioiv, 


iahxu.ii' 
Plural. 


TOUIOIV. 


N. 


V. 


OUTOl, 


avicu, 


Ttxvia, 




G. 


TOVTWP) 


TOLTOi^, 


TOVICOV, 




D. 


TOVTOtg, 


javzcxig, 


TOVTOLg, 




A. 


TOVTOVQ, 


Tuvrag, 


ravTct. 



Obs. The correlatives Toaovrog, joioviog, and TijhxovTog, have 
either ov or o in the Norn, and Ace. singular neuter ; thus, 
N. looovrog, ToaavTT], tovovtov or TOOOVTO, 

G. Toaovrov, &c. 

2. Among the Attics the demonstratives were rendered em- 
phatic by adding v to the termination ; as, otixoo-l, jovzovl, wv- 
vat, &c. But when the final vowel is «, or o, or s, it is drop- 
ped, and fc put in its place ; thus, tide, tovto, ruvra, with the 
emphatic i are written 6dl, toutI, tuvtI. When ye or de follow 
the demonstrative, the i is placed after them, e. g. jovi6 ye 
with i becomes rovioyl. A similar emphasis is expressed in 
Latin by annexing the syllables -met, -/e, -pie, -ce ; as, ego- 
met, lute, meapte, hicce, &c. The i added by the Attic and 
Ionian writers to the Dative Plural, however, is not emphatic 
but merely euphonic. 

3. The emphatic t, is annexed also to the compounds of 
outo;, and a few of the correlatives; such as joooviog, toiovtoc, 
TijUxowtog, idoog, &c, making loaovToal, &c. 



§ 66. VII. RELATIVE PRONOUN. 
The Relative Pronoun \h one that relates to 






;, 67 



INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN. 



67 



a noun or pronoun going before it 9 called the an- 
tecedent. 

• 1. The relative §s, r\, o, who, which, that, is declined like 
m3r<k, (§ 62. 4.) It is rendered emphatic by adding the en- 
clitic syllable neq ; as, ucftisq, r\7T£Q, qtxeq. 

2. The Ionic and Doric writers, and the Attic tragedians, 
instead of og, use the article 6, % to, as a relative. 

3. Instead of og, the compound pronoun Sang is used as a 
relative alter ?rag, or any word in the singular expressing an 
indefinite number ; and ouov, after the same words in the plur- 
al ; as, nag o<mg, every one who ; itavTsg o<roi y all who. 



§ 67. VIII. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN. 

The Interrogative Pronoun is used in asking 
a question. 

1. The interrogative Tig, xl ; vjho ? which? what? has the 
acute accent on the first syllable, and is thus declined : 



Singular. 
N. rig, Tig, tI, 
G. Tlvog,Tlvog,rlvog< 

D. TiW, Tlvi f tIw, 

A. tIvu, tIvol. t/. 



Dual. 

N. A. 

tips, tIvb, rive, 

G. D. 

tIvqiv . tIvoiv. tIvoiv. 



Plural. 
N. Tlveg, Tivsg, xlva, 
G. t(i>ojv 9 tIvojj>,t.Ivoi)V 9 
D. Tlcn, tIgi, tIvi, 
A. Tivug, Tlvag, tIvul* 



In the same manner decline ong, ovn.j and t u^Tig. 

2. The interrogative Tig has its responsive oaTig, which Is 
thus used, Tig tnolrjos ; who did it? ovx oldv. ocrrig ZtcoIjios, 1 
know not who did ti. The responsive oTTig is declined as 
follows : 

Singular. 





N. 


OVTIS, 


rjug, 


0,TI, 




G. 


ovTivog, 


YjdTlVOg, 


obTiV6g y 




D. 


(j)TLVl, 


it 
r^vTiva, 


&TIVI, 




A. 


dviLva, 


o,u. 








Dual. 




N 


A. 


(])Tive^ 


UTLVS, 


iOTIVS, 


G, 


D. 


OiVTWOlV, 


Cfj-VTIVOIV, 


olvTIVOlV 



6S INDEFINITE Tito NOUNS. § 6& 







Plural. 




N. 




kiii/'.s;, 


arivcx, 


<;. 


r I I i • 


tMr 1 1 ) in,\ 


Corrtrci))^ 


D. 


■ llTl, 


(donor, 


old t i at, 


A. 


' ' «£, 


'rag, 


UTWU. 



3. Instead of van;, Homer ikses ong, declined like rig as 
above- 

4 There appears to have been among the ancient Greeks 
another interrogative pronoun, nog, n^ no, and its responsive 
. ni), or™, which have become obsolete, except in two cas- 
es, now used adverbially ; viz. nov, where ; Try, in what way? 
and hence the responsives otiou and uny. From these are 
termed the interrogative noreoog, -«, -o^, which of the two ? 
and its responsive ohotf oog, -a, .oy, which of the two; with 
several other adverbs and adjectives still in use; each inter- 
rogative having always its own responsive ; as, 

INTERROGATE VES. RESPONSIVES. 

Adj. noZog, of what kind? onolog, of iv hat kind. 

Tiooog, of what number ? . bnoaog, of what number. 
TTiJUxog, of what age? bnifklxog, of what age. 

rrortoog, which of the two ? bnojsQog, which of the two. 
Adv. nag, how ? Snug, how. &c. thus, 

Ilrjltxog tarl;of what age is he ? otix oWu vm/.hiog, I know 
not of what age. In the same manner the responsives are 
u>cd without an interrogation preceding ; as, influOeTo arming 
■ he forgets of what kind he was" To these also may bo 
added Txodunbg, of what country ? 



§ 68. IX. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

The Indefinite Pronouns are such as denote 
oersons or things indefinitely. They are: 

ilg, rig, rl, some one. 

iva t feivoiy oelva f some one, such an one. 
:, (Dli h SHo, another. 

/ , other, a different one, another,, 
"*o wnieh may be added the following negatives; viz. 
/'., o9n 9 

tele, or/)-',- 

, ' V no one, 

"V- M n $t ! tr t n > 

prfil fila, ><> t <)iy y 



§ 69. 



CORRELATIVE PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 



69 



1. The indefinite rig has the grave accent on the last sylla* 
ble, to distinguish it from tig interrogative, whichhas the acute 
accent on the first, the former is enclitic, § 212, the latter is not. 

2. The indefinite dslva, some one, of all genders, and al- 
ways with the article prefixed, is declined like a noun of the 
third declension ; thus, 



Sing. 

N. delva, or delg, 
G. delrccTog, or dsTvog, 
D. delvuiL, or deTvt,, 
A. delva. 



Dual. 

N. A. delve, 
G. D. delvoiv. 



Plural. 

N. delveg, 
G. detvwv, 
D. delav, 
A. delvag. 



delva is sometimes indeclinable ; as, G. tov delva, D. tg> deTva 
Allog is declined like afabg, § 62. 4 ; eiegog like cpavegbg, 
§ 45. 2. 

Obs. 1. All words used interrogatively are also used indefi- 
nitely, but generally with the accent changed ; thus, 



INTERROGAT1VES. 



INDEFINITES. 



Tzuaog ; how great ? how many ? novbg, of a certain size or num- 
ber. 
noTog ; of to hat kind ? noibg, of a certain hind, such, 

nrjllxog ; how old ? how large 1 nrjllxog, of a certain size or age. 



§ 69. CORRELATIVE PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 

1. The Greek language has likewise correlative pronouns, 
each pair of which has a mutual relation. The latter of the 
two is expressed in English by as. 

ibaog, oaog, (Lat. tardus, quanius,) so great, as. 

roTog, olog, (Lat. talis, qualis,) such, as. 

TTjXlxog, fj.ixog, of the same age, as; of the same size, as. 

2. When the correlation is more expressly designated, ex- 
pressing just as great as, exactly as great as, the former 
pronoun {r6aog 9 Totog, zijtixog,) has de, or oliog attached to it. 
and the latter has ore* (from o^y,) prefixed ; as, 

Tovovde. ) i , loioode. ) . m irlixoade. } ( ,, 

> vTtoaog. _ > onoiog. , ' , onnUxog 

TOOOVlOg, ) TOLOVTOQ, ) T)j/*lXOUTOg, ) 



70 



DIALECTS OP THE PRONOUNS. 



§ 70. 



£ 70. DIALECTS OF THE PRONOUNS. 







'/<:;..>, /. 








Ionic. 


Doaic. 


iEoLic. 


POETIC, 


Sing. 


N 

G. tficTo Ifieo. 
ifitOev. 

D. 


iycbi', £y<6i>r7. 
cy^'jyii, £yoVya. 

yjiiu. 

tfxlv. 


sya), eycxyv. 
B. 1 cb, toy a. 

B. £fiJV~g. 
h'fX'Jl, B. IfXV. 


'ycu. 
Ifddev. 


Dual. 
Plur. 


N. \. 

N. ///<££C. 






ufifiE, a.fxfisg 




G. i)fi£(ov. 
D. 


tij-UV, UjXLV. 




r)fX£LOJV. 
)}LiLU. . 




A. ))[xcas» 


djldSf due, anfx£. 

^ 7Vion. 


aHjiemu. 
aiifiag, dfxfxiag. 


/j/xfiias. 


Sing. 


N. V. 


rO, 7-UJ//7, ruya. 


rovvrj. 






G. asToj atOy oiBev. 


T£U, r£Uf, T£)i)s. 


cT£t>, aedeu. 


geioOcv. 




D. 


rot, rij/, rstV. 


rivff. 






A. 


T£, rt>. 


rlvf rei'v. 




DuaL N. A. V. 

Piu IV N. V. vfxug. 


fyt£J, Vfifi£g. 




VfxLxs, Vfifxes* 




(Jr. Vfxeuv. 


V[l(OV. 


VfXfiosv, vixfxiwv. 


vpeiav. 




D. 


Vfxlv, vfuv. 


VLif.lL, VfXfXLV, 

Vfxix£oiv. 






A. Vfxiag. 


vfxag, Vfil, v/ifxs. 

°0g, He. 


vjxfxag, Vjifieag, 


Vjxuag. 


Sing. 


Ur. tio, oio, zoio, 

£0, £0£V. 
D. £0L. 


CV. 


eOeu, yWev, 


rioOev. 


Dual. 


A. /ui> 

N. A . '(rfU. 


vlv 

<T(bo)£, V<f>0). 


fiXv, v\v. 


££, C<pl, 


Plur. 


Gr. c(p'<j)v. 


(T<ftS. 




<j(j>£T£g. 

G<p£L(xiV* 




I ). c^ij/, o<p\. 




aa<pt. 


(p\v. 




A. ctycag. 


afs, xpt 


ca>ig, ucr(j)£. 
f.UV, viv. 


G(f>uag. 

G(j>£. 



()hs. 1. utv and W^, are used for the accusative in all gen- 
ders and number 8 ; so also is enjpi, am mg the poets, i. e. for 
-•.I', -v',-0, and atii.oug, -d s vd. 

Oo.v. 2. The adjective pronouns arc inflected in the differ- 
out dial *cta according to the models of the first and second 
Other peculiarities may he learned by practice ; 
mr; D. dubg, -d, -6v ; for tiufoBQog, 
. !). <*'(<>;, for qHtivo;, A. Srov, D. Srey, 
.'. Il ■. P . for (5r*w, A.. SrG), T. ortw; for feva, A. 

• ; for ihn; and mi,:, \. iov } ]. rio, D. Tfii; ; for 
r/rt and ttfij A. oy. I. ricp; for llvtav, I. T^o/y ; for tt<n. I. x&ua* ; 



§71. OF THE VERB. 



71 



for Ttrd, A. ana, D. acraa ; for &6g, o^, o6>>, thy, D. reefe, tb& 
Teov;{ Y og, \ 6V, L fife, fcfc £oV, to, & c . . t h[ s f orm Qccurs 
only in the singular number. 

§ 71. OF THE VERB. 
A Verb is a word used to express the act, 
being, or state of its subject. 

Obs. 1. The use of the verb in simple propositions is to 
affirm. That of which it affirms is called its subject, and 
if a noun or pronoun, is in the nominative : But when the 
verb is in the infinitive its subject is m the accusative. 

1. Verbs are of two kinds, Transitive and In- 
transitive* 

2. A Transitive verb expresses an act done 
by one person or thing to another. In Greek it 
has three forms, Active, Middle, and Passive. § 74. 

3. An Intransitive verb expresses being, or a 
slate of being, or action confined to the actor. It is 
commonly without the passive form § 74. Obs. 2. 

Obs. 2. The verbs that express being simply, in Greek 
are three, sty*/, yU'ouu^ and vnao/w^ signifying in general to 
be. The state of being expressed by intransitive verbs may 
be a state of rest ; as, evdw, I sleep; or of motion ; as, r\ vavc, 
nUsi, the ship sails ; or of action ; as, Tge/w, I run. 

Obs. 3. Transitive and Intransitive verbs may always be 
distinguished, thus: a transitive verb always requires an 

* These two classes comprehend all the verbs in any language. Ac- 
cording to this division, Transitive verbs include those only which denote 
transitive action ; i. e. action done by one person or thing to another, or 
1 which pastes orer,as the word signifies, from the actor to an object acted 
upon; as " Caesar conquered Gaul, 1 ' or "Gaul was conquered by Ceesar.' 
Intransitive verbs on the other hand include all those which have nothing 
transitive in their meaning — nothing passing over from one person or thing 
to another, and consequently no relation 10 anything beyond their subject 
which they represent in a certain state or condition, and nothing more. 
. Instead of the terms active and neuter formerly used to denote these two 
classes of verbs, the terms Transitive and Intransitive are here preferred as 
being more expressive and appropriate, and in order to relieve the term 
"active " from the ambiguity created by using it, both as the designation of 
a class of verbs and also as the name of a particular form of the verb called 
the active voice. To the latter of these only it is now applied in this work. 
Still, however, should any prefer the terms Active and Neuter, to designate 
these classes of the verb, they can easily be employed. Eng. Gr. App. III. 5. 



12 DIFFERENT KINDS OF VERBS. §72. 

object to complete the sense; as, I love thee; the intransi- 
verb does not, but the sense is complete without such 
abject : rs, I sit ; 1 run. 

Obs. !. Many veins considered intransitive in Greek are 
translated by verbs considered transitive in English ; as, 
\kvdbvi , / i naxdvh), I obey; urrelOu), I disobey; I/otq£/£<h, 

I hit>, vo/lto, I trouble; &c. In strict language, how- 

ever, these and similar verbs denote rather a slate than an 
etc/, and may be rendered by the verb to be and an adjective 
word ; as. I am pleasing, obedient, disobedient, &c. 

Obs. 5. Many verbs are used sometimes in a transitive, 
and sometimes in an intransitive sense; as, pftrdi, Tr. 1 
destroy; Intr. I sink, or decay; gptf£o>, Tr. I put to flight, 
Intr. I flee. This change from a transitive to an intransi- 
tive sense, however, is generally indicated by a change 
from the active to the middle form of the verb ; as, cpulvw, 
Active Tr. I shew ; (fulro/uui, Mid. I shew myself, i. e. Intr. 1 
appear. — See § 74. Note. 

Obs. 6. Verbs usually intransitive become transitive when 
a word of similar signification with the verb itself is intro- 
duced as its object ; as, iQexwpsv ibv uy&va, let us run the race. 

Obs. 7. When a writer wishes to direct the attention not 
so much to a particular act, as to the employment or stale 
of a person or thing, the object of the act not being impor- 
tant, is omitted, and the verb, though transitive, assumes 
the character of an intransitive: Thus when we say " the 
boy reads," nothing more is indicated than the present state 
or employment of the subject " boy," and the verb has ob- 
viously an intransitive sense. Still an object is implied. 
But when we say " the boy reads Homer," the attention 
is directed to the object "Homer " as well as to the act, 
and the verb has its proper transitive sense. 



§ 72. DIFFERENT KINDS OF VERBS. 

Though the division of Verbs into Transitive and Intran- 
titive, compr all the verbs in any language, yet from 

something peculiar \n their form or signification, they are 
characterized by diffi rent names i ive of this peculi- 

arity. The . imon of these are the following: viz, 

Regular, \r\ D / ective, Redundant, Tm 

. Desiderative, Frequentative and Inceptive. 



§ 73 INFLECTION OF REGULAR VERBS. 73 

1. Regular Verbs are those in which all the 
parts are formed from the Root or stem, accord- 
ing to certain rules, § § 93 — 97 7 and 106 — 107. 

2. Irregular or Anomalous Verbs differ in 
s :>me of their parts from the regular forms. § 112, 
116, 117. 

3. Deponent Verbs under a middle and pas- 
sive form, have either an active or middle sig- 
nification. § 113. 

4. Defective Verbs want some of their parts. 

5. Redundant Verbs have more than one form 
of the same part. 

6. Impersonal (or more properly Unipersonal) 
Verbs are used only in the third person singu- 
lar. § 114. 

7. Desideratives denote desire, or intention 
of doing. § 115. 1. 

8. Preventatives express repeated action. 
§ 115. 2. 

9. Inceptives mark the beginning or continued 
increase of an action. § 115. 3. 



§ 73. INFLECTION OF REGULAR VERBS. 

To the inflection of verbs belong Voices, Moods, 
Tenses, Numbers and Persons. 

The Voices in Greek are three, Active, Mid- 
dle and Passive. 

The Moods are five ; the Indicative, Subjunc- 
tir. Optative, Imperative, and Infinitive. 

I The Tenses, or, distinctions of time in Greek 
seven, the Present, the Imperfect, the Future, 
the Aorist, the Perfect, the Pluperfect, and, in the 
7 



74 of voicl. § 74 

passive voice, the Paulo-post-future or Future 
I\ rfect. 

The Numbers are three; Singular, Dual and 
Plural. 

The Persons are three ; First, Second and 
7 7 A ird. 

The Conjugations or forms of inflection, are 
two, viz. the First of verbs in -co and the Second 
of verbs in -ut. 

O65. Some verbs appear in both forms ; as, deixvvM and 
chixicui, I show. Some verbs are partly of the first conjuga- 
tion and partly of the second ; thus, &atrv 9 I go, of the first : 
2d Aorist, Wt}v, I went, from 6r\ai of the second ; yvyvcbaxLo, I 
know ; 2d Aor. Sfyycw, / knew, from yvtbfu of the second. Such 
verbs as these, however, though regular in each form, are gen. 
erally reckoned among the irregular verbs. 



§ 74. OF VOICE. 

Voice is a particular form of the verb which 
shows the relation of the subject or thing spoken 
of to the action expressed by the verb. 

In Greek the transitive or active verb has 
three voices, Active, Middle and Passim, 

Obs. 1. In all voices the Act expressed by the Transitive 
verb is the same, and in all, except sometimes the middle, is 
equally transitive ; but in cach,thc act is differently related to 
the subject of the verb, as follows : 

1. The Active Voice represents the subject 
of the verb as acting* on some object ; as, rrnrcd 
as, I strike you. 

2. The Middle Voice represents the subject 
of the verb as acting on itself, or in some way 
for itself; as, nrvTtropait I strike myself ; eSTua^d- 
uyjv tbv 7to8a, I hurl my foot ; (ovyjadftyjv innov, T 
bought me a horse. 



§ ? 4 op voice. 75 

5 3. The Passive Voice represents the subject 
of the verb as acted upon ; as, riwropot, / am 

j[ struck; 6 Ttovg i6M$6v, the foot—his foot— my foot 
was hurt. 

Obs. 2. Intransitive verbs from their nature do not admit 
a distinction of voice. They are generally in the form of the 
Active Voice, frequently in that of the Middle or Passive; 
but whatever be their form, their signification is always the 
same ; as, Ov^axca or dvtfoxofiai, I die, 

Obs. 3, The Middle Voice, in Greek, is so called, because 
; rt has a middle signification between the Active and Passive 
..Voices, implying neither action nor passion simplv, but a 
. union, m some degree, of both. Middle verbs may 'be divi- 
[i ded into Fife Classes, as follows : 

i 1st. In Middle Verbs of the First Class, the action of the 

. verb is reflected immediately back upon the agent ; and hence 

verbs of this class are exactly equivalent to the Active Voice 

joined with the Accusative of the reflexive Pronoun ; as, Xoim, 

1 vash another; lot-op™, I wash myself; the same as Xo6a> 

6UUVTOV. 

2d. In Middle Verbs of the Second Class, the agent is the 
i (remote, object of the action of the verb, with respect to whom 
, it takes place ; so that Middle Verbs of this class are equiva- 
lent to the Active Voice with the Dative of the reflexive Pro- 
noun (i/utvnf, oeaviSj, kavzS) ; as, atqelv, to take up any thins 
*for another, in order to transfer it to another; aioelodat, to 
<ake up in order to keep it for one's self, to transfer it to one's 
if/ 1 , ^ e . rice verbs °f this class carry with them the idea of a 
; Jungs being done for one's self. 

, 3d Middle Verbs of the Third Class express an action 

vhich took place at the command of the agent, or with regard 

, o it; which is expressed in English by to cause. In other 

vords, this class may be said to signify, to cause any thins; to 

me aone; as, yg&qm, I write, yg&yo/iat, I cause to be written ; 1 

we the name, as of an accused person, to be taken down in 

ng by the magistrate before whom the process is carried, 

|>r simply, I accuse. 

\ 4th. The Fourth Class of Middle Verbs includes those which 

lenote a reciprocal or mutual action ; as, OTiivdeoOui, to make 

ons along with another, to make mutual libations, i. c. to 

naki a league; SiaUeoden, to dissolve along with another, to 



76 OF MOODS. § 75. 

To this class belong verbs 

to contract" '- to quarrel" " to contend" &c. 

.. The Fifth Class comjfcebends Middle Verbs of the 

w, When followed by an Accusative, or some other 

: in other words, it embraces all those Middle Verbs 

which denote an action reflected back on the agent himself, 

and which are at the same time followed by an Accusative, or 

other case, which that action farther regards; as, ayaftp&oOui 

ill any thing to one's own recollection. 

. From the reflected nature of this Voice, many verbs, which areac- 
transitive in the active voice, may be rendered by a neuter or intran- 
sitive verb i'i the middle voice; as, crHWw, 1 send, (viz. another ;) ortAAo^at, 
' myself, i. e. 7 go ; dpyi^to, I provoke another; opyi^o^ai, I provoke my- 
e. I am angry; irAQta, I persuade another ; ireiOonai. I persuade myself, 
i. c. ! yltld, or obey. In many instances, however, the relation to self is not 
so clearly distinguishable. This is particularly the case with the later 
writers, as, Plutarch, Herodian, £cc. In the writings of the Ancients, He- 
rodotus, Xenophon, and others, the distinction of the active and middle 
voices is much more strictly observed. 

Obs. 4. The Future Middle has often an active, and sometimes, 
especially among the poets, a passive sense. 

Obs. 5. The Present, the Imperfect, the Perfect, the Pluperfect, 
an 1 Future-Perfect Middle are the same as in the Passive, or, 
more strictly they are the passive forms in a middle sense. When 
the Middle Acrists are unusual or wanting, their place is supplied 
ny the Passive Aorists in a middle sense. Sometimes, when the 
Middle Aorist is used in the ordinary sense, the Passive also is 
used as a Middle, hut in a peculiar sense; as, Mid. (jTtllaa&tu, 
to air ay one's self. Pass. (jrul^va^ to travel. 

Obs. 6. The 2 Perfect and 2 Pluperfect Active (called by the an- 
cient grammarians the Perf. and Pluperf. Middle) are of rare 
occurrence, and, when used, are completely of an active signifi- 
>n. In a few instances, it is true, they incline to an intransi- 
tive and reflexive sense; as, tiLioi&u, I have 'persuaded myself 
i. e. / am confident But still it is certain that in all cases in 
which a verb can have a middle sense, that sense is expressed, 
in i'i. a, only by the Perfect and Pluperfect Passive in their 

middl 



§ 75. OF MOODS. 

Mood is the mode or manner of expressing the 
signification of the Verb. 



§ 75. OF MOODS- 7? 

The moods in Greek are five, namely; the 
Indicative , Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative, and 
Infinitive. 

i. The Indicative Mood is always used to 
express a thing as actual and certain; as, cpiXsu, 
I love. 

Obs. 1. Hence the Indicative is often used in Greek where 
the subjunctive would be used in Latin ; as, yiyv&uxeig rig ecru ; 
do you know who he is ? Latin, Jin scis qui sit ? 

2. The Subjunctive and Optative Moods 
never represent a thing as actual and certain, 
but as contingent and dependent : that is, they 
do not represent a thing as what does, or did, or 
certainly will exist, but as what may, or can, or 
might exist. 

The Subjunctive represents this contingency 
and dependence as present; — the Optative, as 
past. 

Obs. 2. The Subjunctive and Optative moods involve a 
^complex idea including — 1st and chiefly, the general idea of 
liberty or power, expressed by the English words, may, can, 
t, &c, from which the secondary ideas of contingency 
and futurity are derived ; and 2d, the modification of this idea 
by the meaning of the verb common to all the moods ; thus, 
-He may, or can, expressed in Greek by the subjunctive form, 
represents the person he in possession of the general attribute 
of liberty or power. Combine with this the meaning of the 
verb, and then we have the general attribute expressed by the 
subjunctive form, restricted to the particular action or state 
expressed by the verb ; as, he may write ; he can walk ; he 
may be loved. 

Obs. 3. The future indicative is often used in a subjunctive 
and also in an imperative sense, and hence in the futures 
there is neither subjunctive nor imperative mood. See Syntax, 
§ 171. 5. and 172. Obs. 3. 

Obs. 4. The contingency of an action conceived of as past 
is not absolute, but relative to the knowledge of the speaker , 
hus, in the expression ye/^gpjj, he may have written, the act, 
if done, is past, but of the fact the speaker is uncertain. 



73 OF THE TENSES. § 76. 

3 The Imperative Mood commands, exhorts, 
sntreats ] i)\- permits ; as ; ypa<pe, 'write thou ; ho, let 
him 

5, In the past tenses the Imperative expresses urgen- 
cy of command, expedition or completion of action ; as, 
have done. In the perfect, moreover, the idea of per- 
•ni and completed action is implied; as, e/u()e(>ki](r6u), let 
him h east, i. e. let liim be cast speedily, and effectual I //, 

and continue so ; ?> (){ou xrxlelodot, let the door be shut, and 

he pi so. 

lion. The future indicative, the subjunctive, and the 
infinitive, are sometimes used imperatively. See Syntax of 
the^e moods. 

1. The Infinitive Mood expresses the mean- 
ing of the verb in a general manner, without any 
distinction of person or number; as, to read, to 

speak, to be loved. 

Obs. G. Besides the common use of the Infinitive, as in Latin 
it is completely a verbal noun, of the neuter gender, § 173. 

Obs. 7. Hence the Greek Infinitive supplies the place of those 
verbal nouns called gerunds and supines in Latin, § 173, Obs. 3. 

Obs. 8. The Infinitive, with a subject, is usually translated as 
the Indicative, § 175. 

Obs. 9. The Imperfect and Pluperfect exist only in the Indicative. 



§ 76. OF THE TENSES. 

Tenses are certain forms of the Verb which 
serve to point out the distinctions of time. 

The Tenses in Greek are seven, — the Present, 
the Imperfect, the Future, the Aorist, the Perfect, 
the Pluperfect^ and, in the Passive, the Future- 
feet or P<ntlo-post-future. 

I: n. In some Verba the Perfect and Pluperfect Active, the Aorists 

in ni I tin- Future in the Passivr voice, have two different 

ly distinguished as first and second, but of the same si^nifi- 

cond Future In- no existence in the Active and Middle 

: that which >, lied by the ancient grammarians, is only 

first, § 101. 4 (1.) 



§ 76. OF THE TENSES. 79 

I. The Present tense expresses an action hot 
completed, but going on at the present time ; as. 
yqacpco, I write, I am writing. 

Obs. 1. The Present Tense is used to express general truths; 
as. sW« Tos/si, animals run. In historical narration it is used 
with great effect for a preterite tense. 

II. The Imperfect tense represents an action 
not completed, but going on at a certain past time ; 
as, typacfov, I wrote (yesterday) ; / was writing 
(when he came). 

055. 2. From its expressing the continuance of an action, 
it is frequently used to express what was customary, or con- 
tinned from time to time ; as 6 Ircrcoxouog jovlnnov Irgtfig, nal 
zxTSi'i'^e tcuuu; f^uequg, the groom kept rubbing the horse 
every day. 

Obs. 3. For the same reason it is used instead of the aorist, 
to expfessapast action, without reference to any specified time. 
When the action is continued, and not momentary, and when 
actions of both kinds are mingled in a narration, the continued 
action is often expressed by the imperfect, and the momentary 
by the aorist ; as, i^edoaus xal xuduMxiei, He ran forth (the 
aorist,) and continued barking at them, (the imperfect,) 
tov; ukv ol)V Tteliaozug edUgavro ol 6u.q6v.qoI) kuI e^u.yovj.0' arcEld' 
iyyv; r^ouv ol otcIitixl ztqixtiovto, v.al ol TcelTaaTai svOvg e2novio e 
The barbarians received (aorist) the peltastoz and fought 
(imperf.) luith them. But when the heavy-armed soldiers were 
near, they turned (aorist,) and the pel last 02 immediately fur- 
sued them, (imperf.) 

Obs. 4. When the action represented by the imperfect as 
begun and continuing, in past time, does not succeed, or fails 
to be completed, it expresses only the beginning of an action, 
or the attempt to accomplish it ; as, KlsuQ/og de rovg or^aTKu- 
xug ISv&ICjbto Xevui, Clear chus attempted to force the sol- 
Hers to go. 

III. The Future tense expresses an action not 
completed, but continuing in future time ; as, 
ynuifjco, I shall or will write. In the Passive voice 
it has two forms called, the first and second 

Obs. 5. Other varieties of future time are expressed by means 
xiliary verbs. See § 77, Obs. 1. 



BO OF 11IE TI'NSES. § 76 

l\. The Aorist represents an action simply 
as past : as, tyQctif/cc, I irrolc. — This tense, in all 
the voices, has two forms,called the first and second. 

. When the time to which the Imperfect and Pluperfect refer is 
manifest from the context, the Aorist is often used instead of them. 

06*. 6. From the indefinite nature of this tense, it is used 
by the Greeks to express what is usually or always true; and 
i dried by the English expressions, ' usually,' < to be wont J 
t to use;' , i&p (favlojv avvrjOelag dllyog /oo^og diiluos, Jl 

short time commonly dissolves Ike confederacies of ike wicked. 
htjg edldaZs iov; tiuOrjjug duioOl, Socrates was wont to 
TEA( H his disciples without any charge. In this signification, 
however, it differs from the imperfect, (Obs. 2.) inasmuch as 
the aorist denotes what is always customary ; the imperfect what 
was customary during a specified period oftime. 

Obs. 7. As the aorist does not, like the imperfect, express 
continuance, it is often used to express momentary action, and 
that in the same construction in which the imperfect is used to 
express continued action. (Obs. 3.) 

N. B. Though in the paradigm of the verb the full form of both the first 
and second aorist is usually given, it must be observed that when the first 
aorist is in use, the second is usually wanting, and vice versa. In a very 
few words only are both forms to be found, and even in these, the two forms 
for the most part belong to different dialects, ages, or styles. 

V. The Perfect tense represents an action 
completed at or before the present time ; as, ys- 
YQacpcti I have written. In some verbs the Active 
voice has two forms, called the Perfect, and 2 Perf. 

Obs. S. This Tense implies that at or in the present time the 

! by the verb is completed, but does not indicate at 

wha( point or period oftime prior to the present it was completed. 

/ iyQCKpa j)\v inifjTohr\v % I hare written the letter, does not 

i the letter was written, but only that it is now written* 

Hence it is that this tense connects the action, either in its 

pletion, or. in its continuance as a completed act, with the 

lit timej thus, ysydfiijxa, in Greek means not only, I have 

rried (without saying when the event took place), 

hut that. Ihe married state still continues, i. e. / am married 

EIen< generally used to denote a lasting oi 

permanent state or an action finished in itself] and therefore often 



V) 76. OF THE TENSES. 81 

occurs in Greek, where, in English, we use the present ; as, 
itfi<pt8e67]xag, thou protectest, (i. e. thou hast protected and still 
coniinuest to protect.) The continued force of the perfect ac- 
companies it through all the moods ; as, slnov xf\v Ovoav xs. 
xleTadou, they gave directions for the door to be shut, and to be 
kept so; 6 tier Ir^ii]; ovrog £g toy Jlvgicpl eye dona £(.i6e6h' { o0<ji, 
Let this robber be cast into the Pyriphlegeihon, and continue 
there. 

Obs. 9. In several verbs the perfect tense is always used to 
denote only the finished action, whose effect is permanent, 
and therefore, in English, is translated by the preset of some 
other verb, which expresses the consequence of the action con- 
tained in the Greek verb. Thus, xalaw, 1 name, perf. pass. 
Y.iv.h]iiai, I have been named, and continue to be so, but com- 
monly rendered, / am named, or my name is. So also, from 
Kiaoaai, I acquire for myself i xixiijuai, I possess ; (i.e. I have 
acquired, and the acquisition continues mine ;) {iv&oiiai, I call 
to my recollection, lABavrjfjiai, I remember. 

VI. The Pluperfect represents an action 
completed at or before a certain past time ; as, 
iytygacftcv^ I had written (an hour ago). — This 
tense, like the Perfect, in the Active voice has 
two forms, called the Pluperfect, and 2 Pluperfect. 

Obs. 10. The Pluperfect bears the same relation to the 
perfect which the Imperfect does to the present ; and hence 
whenever the perfect is rendered by the present (06s 9.) the 
pluperfect will of course be rendered as the imperfect; as, da- 
dotxa, I fear, sdeuoUeiv, I feared. « 

VII. The Future-Perfect, or Paulo-post-Future, as it 
is sometimes called by Grammarians, is, both in form and 
signification, compounded of the perfect and future, and de- 
notes, 

1. The continuance of an action, or state, in itself, or con- 
sequences; as, 7) Tio'uxbiu. Tslsuig xexoaiurio-erut, The city will con- 
tinue to be completely organized ; iy'/gdapsTaL, lie shall con- 
enrolled. In thus expressing continuance, it agrees in 

siguin* cation with the perfect, and hence, 

2. It is the natural future of those perfects which have ac 
quired a separate meaning, of the nature of the present (Obs. 
9.); as, Xileimat,, he has been, and continues left, i. c. he 
remains: Paulo-post F. XeXeli/fsrat, he shall remain; xixTT]ficu % 



Sfl GENERAL OBSERVATIONS ON THE TENSES. § 77. 

J have acquired and contintu to retain, i. e. I possess; Paulo 
post future xi xiyiotici, I shall jtossess. 

:». It is frequently used to intimate that a thing will be done 
speedily; as </v'0 *«! stenspdlera*, speak arid it shall be done 

immediately. 



§ 77. GENERAL OBSERVATIONS ON THE 

TENSES. 

Obs. 1. Time is naturally divided into the Present, Past, 
and Future ; and in each of these divisions an action maybe 
represented either as incomplete and continuing, or as com- 
pleted at the time spoken of ; thus, 

/ Action continuing ; as, yo&cpo), I write or am writ- 
Present. < ing. 

\ Action completed ; as, ysyqacpa, I have written. 
p { Action continuing ; as, eyQcccpov, I was writing. 

\ Action completed; as, bytyqetcpeiv, I had written. 

I Action continuing; as, yquipw, I shall ivrite. 
Future. < Action completed ; as, yeyq&cpu); eaoficu, I shall 



have written. 

Of these six divisions of time, it will be observed, that all 
except the last are expressed by distinct forms or tenses of 
the verb ; and this last is also expressed by a distinct form 
in the passive voice, called the Paulo-post future. It may 
also be noticed that in each of these three divisions of time, 
by means of an auxiliary verb and the infinitive, an action may 
be represented as on the point of beginning ; thus, 

Present, /uillv) yodcpFiv, I am about to ivrite. 

Past. I'/aeIXov yqucpEiv, I was about to ivrite. 

Future, fisXX^crai ynucpetv, I shall be about to write. 

Obs. 2. Besides these, the Greek has the advantage of a 
it< tense under the division of past time, to intimate 
simply that the action is past without reference to any partic- 
ular point of time at which it took place, and hence isdenom- 
i the Aorist, i. e. indefinite. This tense is rendered into 
English and Latin by the imperfect and perfect tenses in an 
indefinite 

Obs* 3. The ti uses, divided as above into three classes, in 
respect of time, are farther, with regard to their termination 
and use, divided into two classes or series, which may be de- 



§ 78. AUXILIARY VERBS. S3 

nominated the Chief or Primary, and Secondary tenses ; 
thus, 

Chief, or Primary. Secondary. 

Present. Imperfect. 

Perfect. Pluperfect, 

Future. 1 Aorist. 

Fut ure-passive o 2 Aorist. 

The chief tenses are employed in the direct address, to ex- 
press actions as present or future. The secondary are used 
in the recital of these actions as past ; and hence are some 
times denominated the Historical Tenses. 

Obs. 4. In the English expression of the moods and tenses, 
&c. great precision cannot be expected. Their signification 
often varies according to the conjunctions and particles with 
which they are joined, and hence, a corresponding variety of 
translation becomes necessary. In consequence, also, of the 
number of independent forms being greater in the Greek verb 
than in the English, it is necessary to express certain tenses 
and moods, in the former, by a circumlocution in the latter; 
and sometimes, in order to give the precise idea of the Greek 
tense, a totally different construction must be adopted in the 
English sentence by which it is translated; thus, having no 
imperative in the past tense in English, the full force of the 
imperative forms, in the past tenses in Greek, must either be 
lost in the translation, or preserved at the expense, often, of 
a clumsy circumlocution. (§ 75, Obs. 5.) In like manner, 
if we were required to give a strict translation to an aorist par- 
ticiple, according to the idiom of our language, we must use, 
not a participle, but a tense of the verb ; thus, tovto noi^oag 
anr\Wev, is commonly rendered, having done this, he departed ; 
when, in fact, it should be, when he did this, he departed. The 
ordinarv rendering of the moods and tenses is the same in 
Greek as in Latin. This, as well as peculiarities of usage, is 
fully illustrated, §§ 75, 76. 



§ 78. AUXILIARY VERBS. 

Although the Greek language is richer than any other in 
ndependent forms, nevertheless a circumlocution is frequently 
nade use of, by means of the auxiliary verbs elvai, xvoali'^Ttdo- 
*biv, i/eiv, &c., in connection with a participle or infinitive, 



84 AUXILIARY VERBS. § 78. 

uartly to supply deficient, or to avoid inharmonious forms, 
partly to strengthen the signification, and partly to express, 
with more minuteness and precision, the time and manner of 
action or state expressed by the verb; thus, 

1. The subjunctive and optative in the perfect passive, are 
generally formed with efrat and the perfect participle; the inde- 
pendent forms being rarely used. The same construction is 
sometimes used in the active voice. 

:2. To express a purpose of doing, or the proximity of an 
event, ftMw, d&ha and Idaho, with the infinitive, are used ; as, 

byTc fiilkeig Itysir, whatever you are about to say. 

S. Continuance, or a permanent state, combined with the va- 
rious circumstances of commencement, simple existence, priority, 
energy, or accident, is expressed by ytvo/uai, elfnl,-6n&gxco, xtou, 
e%co, Tvy/vcvb), with a participle ; as, iyivero avOgconog dcneo-ial- 
(itro;, there ivas a man sent. 

4. The completion of an event is expressed by elfil, with a 
past participle. With such a participle, el/ul in the past tense 
is equivalent to the pluperfect, but is much more emphatical; 
as, touc ovxoy&tnag ttj£ noising fy dicb^ag, he WAS AFTER DRIV- 
ING the informers from the city. In like manner, ecro/ictt in the 
future, with a past participle, expresses the future perfect in the 
indicative; the subjunctive and optative of which is supplied 
from the aorists and perfect ; as, Trenoi^/iiivov I'otolv, it shall have 
been done, or it shall be done quickly. 

5. Anticipated performance is expressed by tyddvu or ngo- 
>'», with a participle ; as, 2£vvTl6evjai qjOaoav tI dg&aavreg 

1) TiuOelr, they conspire to do something to avoid suffering. 

G. Secrecy, so as to escape not only the knowledge of 

others, but even a person's own consciousness, is expressed 

by hwOuru), with a participle ; as, eludov Tivhg ^evidoavxEg 

, some persons entertained angels unawares. 

7. A variety of other circumstances are expressed by join- 

ipriate adjectives and participles, with sty/2; as, q>ave- 
i'-t (I openly. 

8. Strong and earnest desire is expressed by the imperfect 
•ond aorist oftypaUw, agreeing with its subject, and com 

monk followed by the infinitive ; the particle die is sometimes! 
ioined with it and sometimes not; as, 

/{! t nift ).<>}■ rixqp, J wish that I had not conquered. 
AfB fapelop nfirai, Would to God I had staid. 



§ 79, 80. PARTICIPIAL ADJECTIVES. b5 

9. Imperious duty or necessity is expressed by verbal adjec- 
tives in -reog, (§ 80.) either agreeing with their substantives, 
or, what is more usual, having their agents in the dative, and 
governing their objects as the verbs do from which they are 
derived ; as, 6 ayadug fiovog xcujpsog, the good man alone must 
be honoured. 

10. In some cases there appears to be a pleonasm in the use 
of certain auxiliaries, where there is really none ; for by ana- 
lyzing the expressions, we shall find every word having its own 
distinct force; thus, snap elvai sTuXadouerog, is incorrectly 
translated forgetting willingly. The full force of the words 
may be expressed in English, thus, wiUing to be after for geU 
ting, according to the ancient Celtic idiom. (See No. 4. also 
Construction of the Participle.) 



§ 79. PARTICIPLES. 

The Participle is a part of the verb, and ex- 
presses its meaning considered as a quality or 
I condition of an object ; as, 

r t ).&e 3 1 e n w v , he came see ing. 

gt ag xutw&sv in)}VEi avzov, standing below he praised him. 

Participles are varied like Adjectives, by gender, number, and 
case, to agree with Substantives in these accidents. If the idea 
of time be separated from the Participle, it becomes an Adjective. 

Every Tense in Greek, except the Imperfect and Pluperfect, 
has its Participle, — a circumstance which gives the language a 
decided advantage over the Latin, which has no Present Partici- 
ple Passive, nor Past Participle Active. 



§ 80. VERBAL or PARTICIPIAL ADJECTIVES in 

-r6g and -riog. 

The G-reeks have verbal adjectives, which both in significa 
ion and use, nearly resemble participles. They are formed 
y adding the syllables -xdg and Mog to the first root of the 
erb; thus, 

8 



66 Of CONJUGATION. § 81 

Root Verbal Adj. 

Xiyio, I saij, lay J 6s> Xexidg, said. 

yo«y- vig 9 yintJiTog, written. 

(pMto, I /,...- (jp/Af- Tt'o;, <fih}Teog, to be loved. 

Those derived from liquid verbs add Mg and -riog to the 
second roots as, 

rcOo*, / exiend, 2d R. tci*- tj?os, t«t^o£, to be extended. 

. In those derived from pure verbs the vowel preceding the termina^ 
i sometimes lengthened, sometimes not ; thus, from ^iX£o>, the adjec 

tivc is ptXqrlof, but from alpha, aiperoq. 

Obs. 1. The verbal adjectives in -r6g havecommonly a pas^ 
sive signification, and either correspond to the Latin perfect 
participle passive; as, noiyxog, foetus, made; %vj6g, aggestus, 
fftgsmdg, flexus; or, they convey the idea of ability and capa- 
city^ expressed by the Latin adjectives in -His ; thus, 6o«tos ? 
visibilis, visible ; uxovotoq, audible, &c. Frequently, how- 
ever, they have an active signification; as, Y.alvnxdg^ conceal- 
ing; fiepnibQ) blaming, &c. 

Obs. 2. Those in riog correspond to the Latin future parti- 
ciple in -dus, and convey the idea of duty, necessity, or obli- 
gation ; as, qtdrjriog, a?nandus, who ought to be loved ; noiiog^ 
bibendus. which ought to be drunk. 

Obs. 3. -Ttov, in the neuter, (among the Attics more com- 
monly -xia in the plural,) corresponds to the Latin gerund.; 
thus, 7roTfc'oj>, (Attic tzotIu) IotL, bibendum est; nolefivi^a tort, 
bellandum est. 

Note. For the construction of these adjectives, see Syntax, § 147. Obs. 2. 



§ 81. OF CONJUGATION. 

The Conjugation of a verb is the arranging of its different 
moods and tenses according to a certain regular order. 

There are two conjugations in Greek, the first of verbs in 
m\ and the second of verba in ^t.* 



* A >, after full examination, prefer the more common 

i of for min deriving one tense from another, will find!; 

the Rules in the Appendix. They will of course pass over this part of the. 

Grammar, I >7 inclusive, except §§ 87 — 90, "On the Au#i 

ment" which is thfl same in all methods of formation. 



§ S2. OF THE ROOT. 87 

The changes which a verb undergoes by inflection to dis- 
tinguish its different voices, moods, tenses, numbers, and 
persons, may all be referred to three heads ; the Root, the 
Augment, and the Terminations. 



§ 82. I. OF THE ROOT and its CHARACTERISTIC. 

1. The Root is that part of the verb which 
remains unchanged throughout, (except as re- 
quired by the rules of Euphony, § 6,) and serves 
as the basis of all the different forms which the 
verb assumes. 

2. The final letter of the root is called the 
Characteristic, because the verb is denomina- 
ted pure, mute, or liquid, according as that letter 
is a voicel, or a mute, or a liquid. 

3. In all primary forms of the verb the charac- 
teristic is the letter next the termination in the 
present indicative ; thus, y in %eyo ; n in tpsTto ; 
v in Xm; v in reivo, &c. 



'• 



jExc. But if of two consonants the last be 
either r or a liquid, the first is the characteris- 
tic ; thus, n in rvnrcd and fidpnrcd ; % in riwta ; (i 
in rsfivo ; hence the following 

GENERAL RULE FOR FINDING THE ROOT. 

4. Strike off from the present indicative all that 
follows the characteristic; what remains is the 
-first root; thus, ?Jy-u, rtpn-cj, fidpTt-rcd, are?^?uo 7 
-vu 7 &c. 
Obs. 1. Many verbs have a Secondary form in the present 
lod imperfect, which has come into general use, while theon- 
linaJ form or theme, has become obsolete, § 116. The root 
}f the theme nevertheless remains the proper root of the verb 
n the other tenses, and will be found in the first future by 
striking orf-ow. If the letter next preceding be aconsonant, 
it is the characteristic of the verb. If it be a long vowel, either 



66 OF THE ROOT. § S2. 

that or its corresponding short vowel is the characteristic. 
But if it be a short or doubtful vowel, the characteristic is 
either thai vowel itself, or a r-mute, which has been rejected be- 
fore -ow for the sake of sound. § 6. 8. This 06*. applies 
1st, Verba in -trera (-7-™), or £cd, are secondary forms, derived 
m primary, whose characteristic is a x-mute (commonly/)! 
when the future 1 ads in 5»,« or a z-mute (commonly d) when 
the future ends in oio. The characteristic being substituted 
<-<r. (tt), or £ gives the primary form. Thus, 



Secondary form. 


Future. 


Char. 


Primary form. 


Root. 


m (ttu>), 


7T0W|(W, 


r> 


TTQUyb), 


Tigay. 


Tth'idiSiO (ttco), 


TiXcxaWj 




xgdyWy 
Tilddw, 


xgay. 
TiXad. 


CfQi'^O), 


cpqdoWy 


<5, 


(pQ(xdb), 


cpgad. 


OLQfld'Qojy 


( aQTiddbOy 




agnayw, 

C/.Q7ldd(ti, 


(XQTiay 
agnad. 



2d. Most verbs in -cntca are secondary forms from pure verbs 
in co (§ 116. I.) The primary forms will appear by dropping 
ux; thus, yijodcrxw, primary form yrjguw, Root, yr^ga. 

3d. Many verbs, irregular in the pres. and imperf., are se- 
condary forms from obsolete verbs which furnish the roots for 
the other tenses. See §§ 116 and 117. In nearly all such! 
verbs the first root will be found by taking -aw or aofiicu from 
the future as found in the Lexicons ; thus, — 



Secondary form. 


Future. 


1 Font. 


Primary form. 


hiu?)if.vo) ) 


Itjipofxat, 


h jt 3y 


Xriftb). 


).arOixvo}, 


h]d(xiy 


M&, 


kr)&co. 


-i 1 1 ftdvofiai, 


nsvcrofiai, 


718V&, 


nevdeo. 


fiuiVbiy 


fiijaofifxi, 


fia, 


ftaoj. 



Rem. In reducing secondary into primary forms in this manner, the: 

vowel before -<tu and o-o/iut in the future, made long by § 96, R. l.,must bf 

shortened ; and the r-mute, rejected by § 94, R. 2, must be restored, tq 

give the proper form of the root ; as in QaCvca, and \avBavoy, above. The 

pioper characteristic in mute verbs concealed by combining with -o-w, &c,' 

will ah een in the 2 aorist, or 2 perfect. Thus in \av&avoi the 2 aor,i 

is tkaBov showing the characteristic to be 0, and 1 root, consequently, XriO. 

Obs. 2. The letter 1 is frequently added to the root before 

termination in the present and imperfect, apparently ta 

strengthen the sound, as in vinna. The characteristic, if I 

middle or aspirate mute coming before this t, is of course 

aged into its own smooth (§ 6. 2.); thus, Gay before -p\ 

beco r- and the verb, 6dni(a. Hence in order to findl 

the root, the characteristic changed by Euphony must bef 

restored as in the following words ; 



§ S3. OF THE ROOT. . 89 





OF 


THE 


ROOT. 






61am co, 


by Euphony 


for 61ci6tco, 


Charac. 

4 


Root. 
6US. 


XgVJTTCO, 
TCttlvTtTCO, 


55 






xgwia), 
xalvGrco 


*, 

G, 


xgvS, 


am co, 

6ci7TTC0 9 

Oamco, 


55 
55 
55 






acpjco, 
GacpTCo, 

d&CpTCO, 




ago. 

Gacp. 

O&cp. 


oxamco, 
dgvmco, 
g i n no, 
gamco, 


55 

?5 

5> 

55 






(jxacpTco, 
dgvcpico, 
glcpTWy 

QClCpTCO, 




trxacp. 
dgvcp. 

Q&Cp. 



Also a.uv/co and ipv/co have their roots ufiby. and ipvy. 

Note. The above list contains all the words to which this observation l 
applicable. 

Obs. 3. Many verbs change the form of the 
root in the second tenses, i. e. in the second fu- 

I ture passive, and second aorist ; and in the second 
perfect, and second pluperfect active. These 
forms, for the sake of distinction, may be termed 
the second and third roots — the root of the 
present being the first root. 



§ 83. OF THE SECOND ROOT. 

The second root is always formed from the Jirst 7 
according to the following 

RULES. 

1. A long vowel in the first root is changed 

into a in the second; thus, 

Verb. 1st R. 2d R. 

arjrao, cr7J7T- octTt- 

tooV/w, toco/- rgay. 

2 In diphthongs, a is retained and s is reject- 
d ; as, 
Verb. IstR. 2d R. Verb. 1st R. 2d R. 



cpalvo), tpalv- cpuv- 



"kelTico, Xsln- "kin- 

cpeiyco y cpstiy- <p v y- 



8* 



90 OF THE ROOT. § 84. 

Kxc. But liquid dissyllables change et into cc, 
polysyllables into e; as, 

Verb. 1st R. 2d R. 

Dis<. TtfPQ), tfIp- lav- 

Polvsyl. ityf/ooi, (tye/£- aysq- 

8. Jn dissyllables not pure, s before or after 
a liquid, is changed into a; as, 

Verb. 1st :t. 2d R. Verb. 1st R. 2d R. 



ilu »'((>, 


Tt(t - 


ruu- 


(jieIXuj, 


OT&l- 


crraX- 


de(jxt<) f 


deux- 


daox- 


nlexu.), 


nXex- 


rcXax- 



Exc. But e remains unchanged after A, in Myca, (tUnco, 

4. Pure verbs in -dej and -sq reject the a and 



*; 


as, 












Verb. 


1st R. 


2dR. 






/uvx&w, 


[AVXU- 


/ilVX. 






OTvyici), 


crivyi- 


envy. 



§ 84. OF THE THIRD ROOT. 

The third root is always formed from the se- 
cond, according to the following 

RULES. 

1. e, of the second root, is changed into o in 
the third ; as, 

Verb. 1st R. 2d R. 3d R. 

X6yQ} } Xiy Xey- hoy- 

uysl o<>), &yi(o. dyeq- c\yoQ- 

2. rx, of the second root, from e or et in the 
first, is changed into o in the third ; as, 

Verb. 1st R. 2d R. 3d R. 

nXlxot, 71I0X- Tthtx- nlox- 

'ji>). In- crnuo- gtcoq- 

reliu^ nir- iav- jov. 

xiflVbi, l£u- TU/H- TOJU- 



§ 85. OF THE ROOT. 91 

3. t of the second root, from ei of the first, is 
changed into ql ; as, 

Verb. 1st. R« 2d. R. 3d. R. 

4. a of the second root, from yj or at of the 
first, is changed into 97 in the third ; as, 

Verb. 1st. R. 2d. R, 3d. R. 

crrJTrw, <jt\jt- Gait- urjn- 

cpalvw, cpaiv- (pav- q)7]v- 

(ikewise d&llw, (hi- 6al- fiql. 

xA&£w, nlay- xlay- xl-qy. 



$ 85. VERBS WHICH WANT THE SECOND AND 
THIRD ROOTS. 

Many verbs want die second tenses, and perfect and pluperfect 
middle, and consequently the second and third roots, (§ 76. 
Obs. 7. N. B.) These are as follows, 

Rule 1. Pure verbs want the second root. 

Exc. 1. The following primitives are excepted; yodco 9 andoa, 
fAvrAoiiut) ytjQico, dovniw, ktvttbco, Qiyiw, mrviiD, arvyiw, Togiot), 
Itjxiu), doge®, ajegia), (r%6a) } daico, xctlcn and a few others. Axoixo 
has the third root uxo, but no second. 

Exc. 2. A few dissyllables in fa and tfwhave the second and 
third roots the same as the first. 

Note 1. Several of these are reckoned with anomalous verbs. § 117. 
Some verbs derive their second and third roots from obsolete presents ; 
such as, dlpeai and many verbs in -aw and -C:vo { iai^ for which see the same 
section. 

Rule 2. Derivatives in -ei'tj, ~g£g), -z'£g), -aiva, 
-wo, want the second root. 

Note 2. Primitives in these terminations usually have the second root 

Obs. 1. Several verbs which have no second root, and con« 
;equently no second aoristin the first conjugation, derive the se. 
cond aorist active and middle from forms in the second conjuga- 
tion : thus, dvot, 2 a. edvv, from JYMI; Saivw, 2 a. Wtjv, from 
BHMT; yiyvdxrxw, 2 a. fyv&p, from FN JIM I, derived from yvOw. 



or the root. § 86 

Oba, 2. Many verba not included under the above rules 
the second tenses; others have them only in the 
re voice; others again are used in these tenses only by 
certain writers. — In such a variety of usage, it is proper to as- 
sume that all verbs not included in the above classes form the 
Q<] and third roots according to the rules in § 83 and 84. 



§ 86. OF THE TENSE ROOT. 

The Tense-root is that part which remains 
unchanged in all parts of the same tense. It 
consists of all that precedes the termination, ex- 
cept the Augment. 

Obs. 1. In some of the tenses certain letters are inserted 
between the verb-root and terminations. These are called the 
Signs of the tenses to which they belong, because they serve to 
distinguish these tenses from others. These Tense-signs added to 
the verb-root form the Tense-root in these tenses ; and prefixed 
to the terminations they form the Tense-endings, § 93. 2. 
Hence in the tenses which have no sign, the Verb-root alone 
is the Tense-root, and the termination alone is the Tense-ending ; 
as, s-h7x-ov. (Obs. 4.) 

These letters with the tenses to which they belong, are ex- 
hibited in the following 

TABLE OF TENSE-SIGNS. 

1. In mute and pure verbs the Tense-signs are in the 







Act. 


Mid. 


Pass. 


1 Future, 




-cr- 


-a- 


-<V- 


1 Aorist, 




-<7- 


-&- 


-0- 


2 Future. 




— 





-rjo 


Perf. and 


Pluperf. 


-'- or -*-. 


— 


— 



'A. In liquid verbs the tense-signs arc in the 

1 Futui -£- -S- -0//(7- 

1 Aori — — -0- 

— -7/(7- 

P< r£ and Pluperf, -*- — — 

Obs. 2. If the characteristic be a 7r-mute or a *-mute, me 

sign of tne p< d pluperfect, active is the spiritus asper, 

ing with the mute before it (§ 6. 3.) changes 



§ 87. 



OF THE AUGMENT. 



93 



it or S into cp ; y. or / into /. But when the characteristic is 
cp or / the spiritus asper disappears. 

Obs. 3 If the characteristic be a vowel, or a T-mute, or a 
liquid, the sign of the* Perfect and Pluperfect active is x. 

Obs. 4. In all the Tenses except those in the above table, 
i. e. in the second Aorist through all the voices; — the 2d 
perfect and 2d pluperfect active, and the perfect and pluper- 
fect passive, — and also, in liquid verbs, the First Aorist ac- 
tive and middle, the Tense-root and the Verb-root are always 
the same. So also in the present and imperfect in all voices 

Exc. But irregular verbs, and those which fall under the 
Exceptions and Observations, § 82, have the Tense-Root in the 
Present and Imperfect different from the Verb-root — though 
like other verbs it consists of all that precedes the termination 
in the present indicative. Thus, for example, in ngdaaix), the 
Tense-Root in the Pres. and Imperf. is ng&ocr-, while the Verb- 
Root is 7i gay. In XauS&vuj the Tense-Root of the Pres. and Im- 
perfect is lauGav-, while the Verb Root is Irfi ; and so of others 



WORDS FOR PR 

tittto), / strike. 
Uycx), I say. 
%ai do), / rejoice. 

CFTTElOOJ, I SOW. 

Toscpo), I nourish, 
ayco. I lead. 
xgu'Zo), I cry aloud, 
gullo), I cast. 
txeLQo)) I persuade. 
ahcw, I praise. 
anei6o), I change. 
doooj, I plow. 
O'/.etio), I see. 



ACTICE ON THE PR] 

Xelnu), I leave. 
ttXs'aco, I fold. 
TOibyoj, 1 eat. 
dtysilb), I owe. 
u&ottto), I seize. 
7xg6.G(j'o)^ I do. 
(pg&'Cu, I say. 
cpalpu), I shew. 
(xoTi&'iito, I ptlunder 
tyeigci), I awake, 
dvco, I sacrifice, 
-/.alio), I call, 
aetou). I shave. 



ECEDING RULES. 

deldoj, I fear, 
didavxw. I learn. 
T<j67iu), I turn, 
liiaivix)) I pollute. 
ne t U7C(o, I send. 
weVoj, / remain, 
vsiib), I assign. 
TToitw, I make, 
oielloj, I send. 
{Lislgco, I divide, 
neig&'^a), I try. 
oigrfiu), I burn, 
galvco, I sprinkle 



§ 87. II. OF THE AUGMENT. 

1. The Augment is prefixed to the rootinihe 
Preterite Tenses. 

2. Of these the Imperfect and Aorists have 
the augment in the indicative only. The Per- 
feet, Pluperfect, and Paulo-post Future retain it 
through all the moods. 



94 RULES FOR THE AUGMENT. § 88 

3. The Present and Future have no aug- 
ment. 

-1. When the augment prefixes a syllable to the verb, it is 
called the syllabic augment. When it only lengthens the ini- 
tial vowel, it is called the Temporal augment. The first is used 
when the verb begins with a consonant, the second, when it 
begins with a vowel or diphthong. 



§ SS. RULES FOR THE AUGMENT. 

1. If the verb begins with a consonant, the 
augment e is prefixed; as, vvrtto, ervntov] pintcd, 
eppLTtrov, § 6. 5. 

2. The perfect also reduplicates the initial 
consonant; as, nVtrcj, perf. rervepa. 

Exc. 1. The aspirate reduplicates its own 
smooth ; as, 0au^d£b, perf. tedavfiaxa ] <paiva 7 
perf. nefyevyxa, § 6. 4. 

Exc. 2. Verbs beginning with p, yv 1 <pQ, or a 
before or after a consonant, do not reduplicate ; 
thus, 



yv- 
q>6- 


yv6a) 9 




da- 




etrjxa. 
sansvxa 


7t(J- 


yjfudio, 


eipevza. 


ax- 


(JT£<pu), 


%(7TS(p(X. 



Ohs. 1. Sometimes also verbs beginning with *r, and m, do 
not reduplicate ; as, 

xr- ktsIvm, txrayxu. xtI'Qoj, exiiv.ee. 

7TZ> TirOLO), L.lIVt]X((. 

And sometimes, though rarely, those beginning with y\ Gk 

3. When the perfect reduplicates the initial 
consonant, the pluperfect indicative receives a 
second augment; as, ntaro, perf. ?£-?v<pa) plu- 
perl uv. 

Otherwise not ; as, £frrfa>, perf. %QQiq>a, pluperf. eoyicpeiv. 

4. If the verb begin with a, e, o, or with av 7 ou, 



§ 89. AUGMENT OF COMPOUND VERBS. 95 

ot, the initial vowel is changed into its own long, 
and t of the diphthong is subscribed ; thus, 

a, dvvo), I perform, ^\vvov. 

s, eXni'Qb), / hope, r\kra'C ) ov % 

o, ott&^co, I afford, thitatpv, 

av, afiZ&pa), I encrease, rjv$avov 

av, ai'goj, I raise, fiQ 0V * 

ov, oixl^oo, I build, (DKL^OV. 

Exc. 1. E is often changed into its own diph- 
thong ; as, 

e/co, I have, etyov. 

The verbs which change e into si are the following: Mw, 
s'^ouai, sdl^co, eltacroj, sIkw, sIjcsco, elxvo), tXe'w, elw, tnofxai, ena), 
(this verb retains the augment through all the moods) £g&w, 
igea), eg7T.co, egTTv'C.oj. egvw, ^orrj>cco, eanduo, e%a), and sco, 20. 

Exc. 2. If the verb begins with a>, the s is un- 
changed and the o augmented; as, iopta^cd, aopra- 

So also some 2d pluperf. active ; viz. from the 2d perf. 
soXttu. pluperf. eiblrcetv ; — soma, mneiv ; — Mogya, s&gyeiv. 

Exc. 3. 'Am, I blow ; uio), I hear ; ay Qi a aw, I am unused; 
dujdltppaiy 1 loathe; retain the initial vowel unchanged; as 
also some verbs derived from oixog, ofrog, olurbg, and ol'a% ; as, 
olvf^cD, I smell of wine, oXvi'cpv ; and also perfects middle when 
the root begins with oi ; as, oXda, plup. ol'devv. 

5. If tiie initial vowel is not a, £, o, or av, at, 



ol, it is not augmented: 
made long ; as, 

i, Xxouui, Txdfirjv. 
v, vSoi'^o), vftgi'Qov. 
Tj, rtfio), r\xeov. 
ca, &do), &0ov. 


but i and v short are 

ei, slna^o), eXna^ov \ 
ev, etigtaxa), svgiaxov 
ov, otiT&to), otiratyv. 
See Exceptions, § 90. 4. 5. 


§ 89. AUGMENT OF 


COMPOUND VERBS. 



1. When the verb is compounded with a pre- 
position, the augment comes between the prepo- 
sition and the verb ; as, npoa-fyepcd, 7tpoo-s-<pepov. 



90 OBSERVATIONS ON THE AUGMENT. <§ 90. 

Ohs. 1. The prepositions drop their final vowel before the 
augment b\ as, daioxpalv^ dmi<paivov\ xaia8&XX&), xowtGaXko* ; 
— Bui, 

2. nsgl before - remains unchanged ; ngd usually com- 
bines with it by contraction ; thus, 7tQoi6tjv becomes ngoiuSrjp. 
. [I. 

IVhen >\ in the prepositions erri* and iv^ is changed 

into another consonant, by the rules of euphony, § G. 15., it 

ioyered when separated from that consonant, by the aug- 

B- thus, UvXXiyoa^ avrtleyov ; crvyy^qno), ovrtyouyop • £jU« 
utruu lv& flavor. 

2. Verbs compounded with df? and etf, take the augment 
after the particle, when the simple verb begins with w, e, o, or 
with aw, at, 0/ ; as, £f ottos (TTtu), dvar^qiaxeov ; evooxeu), svcbgxeov 

3. But if the simple verb begin with any other vowel or con- 
sonant, due is augmented, ftf remains unchanged ; as, dvcrTv/io), 
idvorv/eov, deduaivxijxa ; 6Xjtv%i-oj, sviu%?]xa. 

4. Other compounds generally take the augment at the be- 
ginning. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

The exceptions from these rules are but few, and will be 
best learned by practice. Some writers augment certain com- 
pound verbs in the beginning, and others in the middle; 
while other verbs are sometimes augmented in both ; as, inla- 
in.uu.i, I understand) tpttOT&nriv ; upoqOoo), I erect, riv&gOovv , 
xuOeudo), I sleep, xuQtjvdov or ixuOevdov ; IvoyXiw, J disturb 



§ 90. OBSERVATIONS ON THE AUGMENT. 

1. In the early Greek poets the use of the augment is very 
fluctuating, the same word sometimes occurring with the aug. 
menl and sometimes without it ; as, itZicpeos and TxepFOF^ ha 
la6e and I66e 9 he look ; fyev and Hyep, he brought 
I dexjo, he had received. 
Oh*. 1. From the antiquity of the Ionic, this has been usually 
idered a peculiarity of that dialect ; but it occurs frequently 
in th writers, particularly in choruses; as, ovOrj for 

, he was driven : yeyivijro for iyeyivyro, it Lad been; o\\>h- 
Unco for Arijlowra, / have §j 



§ SI. OF THE TERMINATION. 97 

2. Id Homer and Hesiod, aorists often receive the redupli- 
cation, which remains through all the moods ; thus, xaxdfua for 
xuuu). I shall have laboured; lel&Seodca for l&SeoQai, to have 
>'eccived. 

3. In all dialects, verbs beginning with I and t a frequently 
take el or el as the augment of the perf.; as, eVkrjcpa for liltjcpu, 
I have taken ; 8ntaoTcn for iiiuaQiou, it has been decreed. 

4. The Attics often change the simple augment s into v, 
and augment the initial vowels of verbs beginning wither and 
sv : as, ri$vp&[tj]p for edvv&pifv, I was able ; fixator for e^xatpv, 
I assimilated ; r^/6/mjv for ev/o/ui^v, I prayed ; rfieiv for el'dew, 
J kneio. 

5. In verbs beginning with a, e, o, or with av, at, oj, the 
Attics sometimes prefix s instead of the usual augment ; L e. 
they use the syllabic instead of the temporal augment; as, £«£«, 
for r^u; &&hx)xa for r\l^xa. Sometimes they use both; as, 
bgcta), I see, hihguor, k&gaxa. 

6. When the verb begins with a, e ? or o, followed by aeon- 
sonant, the first two letters are sometimes repeated before the 
ordinary augment. This is called the Attic Reduplication ; 
thus, 

ayeigu, I assemble ; ijysgy.u, Attice, ay-r\y£gxa. 
6'; co, / smell ; (bdu, bd-wda. 

oouaaco, I dig ; tbov/a, o^-coou/a. 

Obs. 2. The pluperfect sometimes takes a new augment 
on the initial vowel of the reduplication ; thus, ccK-TJ^oa, fa. 
yxoeiv, 

Obs. 3. This form of the verb frequently changes a long 
vowel or diphthong into a short or doubtful vowel in the third 
svllable ; thus, ulr { Ucfa for ^letcpa, and alr^li^ai for r\leifi^iav, 
from u).£ Iff u : uy.v^oa for \/.ou, from uxovo). 

7. Rule. The simple augment is confined to the indicative 
' mood ; the reduplication remains in all the moods- 



§ 91. III. OF THE TERMINATION. 

1. The terminations are added immediately to the tense 
root, and by their changes serve to distinguish the voices, 
moods, numbers, and persons. See § 213, p. 299. 

2. In verbs of the first conjugation the termination gene- 
rally consists of two parts, the mood-vowel, which serves to dis- 

9 



98 



OF TUT. TI.UM1NATION. 



§ 91. 



tinguish the moods, and the final Idlers, which indicate the 
voice, Dumber and per* 

The Mood*vowel is (be first letter of the termination, and 
in the indicative mo. d is always short or doubtful; (except in 
the pluperfect act and mid. which have always ei ;) in the sub- 
junctive it is always long, and in the optative always a diph- 
thong. 

4. The Final Idlers are divided into two classes, Primary 
and Secondary; so called because the former are always used 
in the indicative of the primary tenses, (§ 77. Obs. 3.) and 
the latter in the indicative of the secondary, and because the 
secondary always correspond to, and are derived from the 
primary. They are as follows : 





ACTIVE 


VOICE. 






* 




Primary. 




Secondary. 






1. 2. 3. 






1. 


2. 


3. 


Sing. 


-o, .ig, -i, 




Sing. 


-"> 


'Si 


> 


Dual. 


, -7(U', -WV, 




Dual. 


5 


-TOV, 


-TT]V, 


Plural. 


•fl8V f -7f, -VTUV. 




Plural. 


-[lev, 


-TS, 


-*>. 




MIDDLE 


AND PASSIVE. 








Primary. 




Secondary. 






1. 2. 3. 






1. 


2. 


3. 


Sing. 


-fiat,, -crat, .Tui) 




Sing. 


•M 


.00, 


-TO, 


Dual. 


-ueQov, -oOov, -adov, 




Dual. 


./Lie6oi\ 


.crOov, 


-oOrjV, 


Plural. 


-u;Qu, -ode, -viav. 




Plural. 


-iiisOoc, 


-uOe, 


-V10. 



5. These final letters with the mood-vowels prefixed, make 
up the terminations through the whole verb in the indicative, 
subjunctive, and optative moods. The subjunctive mood ai- 

takes the primary final letters, and the optative the se- 
condary. The final letters and mood-vowels of the imperative 
and infinitive will be seen in the following tables. 

6. N. B. The indicative mood vowel o. or the subjuno 
■■<. combining with the final letter o, makes <>>; with -vroi, 

they mak< tnd -(»ut, § 6. 6, nud 1G, and IS. In the 2d 

Middle and Passive, the primary final letters 

" ; combined with the mood vowels e or ?/, they make 

and -'/""• which by elision and contraction become r { , 

§ ] 1. 8 So also the secondary -<n> with s prefixed, makes 

-r"o, and by elision and contraction -ou. The other combina- 

understood. See § 101. 8, as above. 



§ 92. 



TABLES OF TERMINATIONS. 



§ 92. TABLES OF TERMINATIONS. 

I. ACTIVE VOICE, 





INDICATIVE. 




Primary Tenses. 


Pres. and Put. 


1st and 2d Perfect 


S. -co, -eiQ, -ei, 


-a, -ag, -e, 


D. -STOP, -8T0V, 


-awv, -azov. 


P. -ouev, -ere, -ovai. 


-a/uer, -are, -acxt. 



Imperf. and 2d Aor. 

S. -OV, -*?£, -5, 

D. .stop, -ixr\v, 

P. a 0{l8V, -£T£, -ov t 



s. 


- 03 -ys> t?' 




D. 


-WTOV) -rjTOV, 




P. 


-(J)/L18V, -7jTS, -COCT^. 




S. 


-oiui, ~oig, -ot, 




D. 


-OlTOV, -olTTjV 


i 


P. 


.Ol/USVj -OITS, -oiev. 




S. 


-£, -^TCD, 




D. 


-£TO*>, -6jGtVy 




P. 


-ere, -iroKrar, 
or -6vio)v. 





Secondary Tenses. 
1st and 2d Pluperf. 

-eiv, -Big, -£t, 

-SLTOV, -SCl7]V, 
-Sl/USr, .8LT8, -8t,0~(XV. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

The same as 
first column. 



OPTATIVE. 

The same as 
first column. 

IMPERATIVE. 

The same as 
first column. 

INFINITIVE. 



1st Aor* 
-a, -as, -e, 

•a/Lisv, -one, .av. 



The same as 
first column. 



.aiTOV, -atrrjv, 

■GCLfiSV, -CUTS, -0U8V. 



-arov, -&t(Dv, 
-are, -(/tcoo"«j>, 

Or -&VT(i)V. 



PARTICIPLES. 



JN. -cor, 


-ovcra, 


-or. 


-d>S, 


-via, 


-bg. 


G <ovto;, 


-OvUTJQ, 


&C. 


-070£, 


-v(ag, 


-OTog. 



■«ffj 



-aaa, -a?', 



-oc^Tog, -c*a?/c, -avwg, 

Obs. In the above table, all the terminations in the first column, 
after the indicative, belong to the present, the future, and 2d aorist. 
All those in the 2d, to the first and second perfect; and all those in 
1 the 3d, to the 1st aorist. 



100 



TABLES OF TERMINATIONS. 



§ 92, 



II. MIDDLE VOICE. 

INDICATIVE. 

Primary Tenses. 

MIDDLE AM) PASSIVE. 

PreS* and Fid. 

S. -Otllit, -t], -FTIU, 

]). .u'i: '">>. -i-oOop, -EoOop, 
P. -dfisOa, -tods, -or Tin. 

Secondary Tenses. 



Imperf. 2d Aorist. 

S. -6uip\ -OV. -670, 

D. -oueOop, -eoOop, -eodrjp, 
P. -oueOa, -sods, -ovto. 



1st Jjorist. 

. <£////*', .0), -a to, 

-upsOov, -gcoOop, -6lo0t)V) 
-&{j,eda, -aoOs, -gcpto. 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



S. -capiat, -77, -TjTCa, 

D. -iotnOov, .i]odo)', -Tjodop, 
P. -o\ueO(z, -jjoOs, -uptoh. 



The same as 
first column. 



OPTATIVE. 



S. -OlUTjV, -010, -OITO, 

D. .oltisflor, -oloOop, -oioOnr, 

P. -oliieOlt, -OLoOs, .OiPTO. 



-U(U7]P, -OUO, -<MTO, 

-al/uedop, -moQoPj -(xloOi]v y 
-aljusda, -ixiode, .clipto* 



s. 

D. 
P 



-Of, 

-eodop^ 
-eoOf, 



BoOai 



IMPERATIVE. 

-eoQo), 

J(jQ(DP, 

-boOcoouP. 

INFINITIVE. 



-o» 3 Aoda>, 

-aodop, -(xoQcdp, 
-aode, -&o0u)O(xp. 



.(xoOai. 



V LRTIC1 PLES. 



\. -i'.'{hrn:, .OtlkPY], .nurror, 
Gr. -0/ 



|/OJj ~UUipiJ 9 -fylEPOV) 

'pov, -(tutpr/Qj-afiApov, 



Obs* In the above table of the middle voice, the termina- 
tions of I Pluperf. are omitted, being the same 
throughout as those of the Peri", and Pluperf. passive. 



$ 92. 



TABLES OF TERMINATIONS. 



101 



III. PASSIVE VOICE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Primary T ] crises. 



PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. 



Perfect. 



's. 

D. 

P. 


-uoa } 
-ueOov. 
-lie 6 ex, 




-acU, 

-ador, 
-oQe, 


.Tat,, 

-ado i', 
-vzav. 














Secondary Tenses. 










Plupt 


irfecl. 




1st a 


nd 2d Jlorists. 


S. 
D. 
P. 


-uedoV) 
-ueOa, 




-ao, 

-ador, 
-ads, 


.TO, 

-adyv, 

-VTO, 


~y p * 

-Wsv, 


-vs 9 

-rjTOV, 

-1JT8, 


-r\Tyv, 
-yaav. 










SUBJUNCTIVE. 






S. 
D. 
P. 


-uerog 
-pip®, 

-/usrot, 




JS 9 

t]tOV, 


1 

t)tov, 
faau. 


-fbfxev, 


-ftg, 

-r\TOV, 

-n t8 > 


-rjrOP, 
-(bat,. 










OPTATIVE. 






S. 
D. 
P. 


-uivo; 
-ii&vov 


elrjv, 


ei'rjTOP 
eXi]TS, 


sty, 

, Sl-f(TT]V 9 

el'yaav. 


-eiyv, 
.slyjbtsv, 


-elyg, 

-Eir\TOV, 

-Sll]T8y 


sty, 

-sir\Tyv, 
-slyaar. 










IMPERATIVE. 






S. 
D. 
P. 






-ao, 

-adov, 

.ode, 


-aOco, 

-adav, 

-aOojaav. 




-id', 

-TjTOVy 

- V T8, 


-Tjrowav. 










INFINITIVE. 












-aOoa. 


1 

PARTICIPLES. 


-rivca,. 




N. 
G. 


M. 

-uivog : 
-u&vov 




F. 


N". 

-p&vov, 

, -uivov. 


M. 
-elg, 

-s'vTog, 


F. 

-el a a , 
.elcrtjg, 


N. 
-£pto$„ 



For the terminations of the pres. imperf. 1st, 2d, and 3d 
\ fut. of the passive voice, see theterminationsin the first column 
of the preceding table. 

9* 



102 FORMATION OF TTIE TENSES. §93 

FORMATION OF THE TENSES IN MUTE 
AND PUKE VERBS. 

I. General Rule, 'n lc Imperfect is formed 
from the Present, and all the other tenses from 
their Verb-root by adding the tense-endings (^86). 

Obs. l. The 2 Future and 2 Aorist add the tense-endings * 
to the second root, the 2 Perfect and 2 Pluperfect Active to the 
third root, and all others to the first. 

. 7 o67w. TyHfw, and tTTQiqxa, in the Perfect and Pluperfect 
Passive, have the second root. <I>£vyco and xiv&a in the 2 Perf. 
Active, have, sometimes the first instead of the third root, ndfi- 
iroi, xAfTTTco, tqstiw, lAyta, and TQscpci), in the Perfect and Pluperfect 
Active, change £ of the first root into o. 

2. TABLE OF TENSE-ENDINGS. 



Tense. Active. 


Middle. 




Passive. 


1 Future, -a-co (liq. -i-w) 

2 Future, 

1 Aorist, -a-a (liq. -a) 

2 Aorist, -or 

Perfect, -x-u, or --«, § 94. 


-a-opai 


(liq. 
(liq. 


-i-opou 


~&i]-ao^ac 

-TjCF-OfKXL 

-r\v 


-OfirjV 

-fllXL 


Pluperf. -x-eiv, or -siv 

2 Perfect, -a 


-jjir]V 






-Utp> 


2 Pluperf. -uv 

Fut.-Perf. or Paulo-post- fut 


-(T-0//«t 






-cr-Ofiat. 


3. RULES 


FOR EACH 


TENSE. 




Active Voice 









Imperfect. Prefix the augment, and change -o) into -ov. 
Future. Add -o~w to the 1st root. 

id. Prefix the augment, and add -era to the 1st root. 
2 Aorist. Prefix the augment, and add -ov to the 2d root. 
Perfect. Augment, reduplicate, and add -xa or -a to the 1st 
i, § 94, R. 1. 
Augment, &C, and add -y.uv or -uv to the 1st root. 
2 l J gment, reduplicate, and add -a to the 3d root. 

2 Pluperf. Augment, &a, and add -siv to the 3d root. 

Middle Voice. 
Imperfect Prefix the augment, and change -ofiai into -6int\v. 
Future* Add -aouat to the 1st root. 



§ 94. SPECIAL RULES FOR MUTES. l03 

1 Aorist. Prefix the augment, and add -ad^v to the 1st root. 

2 Aorist. Prefix the augment, and add -ofurjv to the 2d root. 
The Perfect and Pluperfect are the same as in the Passive Voice. 
Put. Perf Augment, reduplicate, and add -vopai to the 1st root. 

Passive Voice. 

Imperfect. Prefix the augment, and change -opou into -o^v. 

1 Future. Add -ftrpopai to the 1st root. 

2 Future. Add -rpop.u.1 to the 2d root. 

1 Aorist. Prefix the augment, and add -&t]v to the 1st root. 

2 Aorist. Prefix the augment, and add -rjv to the 2d root. 
Perfect. Augment, reduplicate, and add -pou to the 1st root. 
Pluperf Augment, &c, and add -fir^v to the 1st root. 

Fut. Perf. Augment, reduplicate, and add -aofiai to the 1st root. 



§ 94. SPECIAL RULES FOR MUTES. 

Rule 1. When the characteristic is a 7t-mute 
or a ac-mute, the perfect active is formed by- 
adding - c -oc, and the pluperfect by adding --uv ; 
all others add -xa, -xslv, (§ 86. Obs.3.) thus, 

leiTtco. Root leln- perf. U-lsm--a, combined Uleupa. 

pluperf. ils.lelTt-'-eiv, „ eleletcpsiv. 

nlixo), Root 7ilex> perf. 7t£.nlex--a, „ niitkexa. 

pluperf. irte-nUxJ-siv, „ liteixU%eiv. 

Rule 2. When the characteristic is a r-mute, it 
is rejected before a consonant in the active and 
middle voice, and changed into a in the passive ; 
thus, 

•Active, Ttsldoj , Root 7ts id- 1 Fut. Ttel-aco, perf. ninsi-yin. 
Middle, 1 Fut. 7tcl-G0 t uav, 1 Aor. ^Ttst-cr&UTjp. 

Passive, 1 fut. nsia-dJiaofuxt, 1 Aor. ineicF.drjv, perf. ninem-iiou,. 

Exc. The T-mute is rejected in the passive also, when a 
liquid precedes it ; as, tteqO-o), 1 f. p. nso-Or^ooiiai, perf. n£- 
Tzsg-ucxi. Also a 7i- mute before fxm ; as, tIott-o), perf. p. [i-reg-pai. 

Obs. JTeudo), rievw, tev%g), and ^e'o, (§ 96. Exc. 2. third,) 
have v instead of ev before a consonant in the passive ; as, 



1 04 EXAMPLES OF THE FORMATION OF TENSES. § 95. 

nvo-Qi\ooimti, (wtT-0)\uoinci, (§ 96. R. 2.) &c. ; cpevyw has either 
U or en ; as, :n\f ij-uid, or niyevy-fixtt. 



§ 95. METHOD OF FORMING THE TENSES. 

Tico, I honour. 

This Verbj requiring no insertion or change of letters for the 

sake of euphony, affords the simplest example for showing the 
formation of tenses. A second and third root (ti) and the tenses 
formed from them are here assumed, though they do not exist in 
the Verb, to show the manner in which these tenses are formed. 

Active. JMiddle. Passive. 



Pres. 


j[-co, 


Tl-O/LKXV, 


Ti-o^iai. 


Imp. 
Fut. 
2 Fut 


8.TL-OV, 

tL-g-co, 


i-Tl-OfltJV, 


TL.O^a-oiuai. 
Ti-ricr-Ofiat,. 


1 Aor. 


£-7t-0~.«, 


i-Ti-a-oc/urjv, 


£-tI-0-t]v. 


2 Aor. 


E-TL-OV, 


e-Ti-o.uijv, 


£-tI-t]v. 


Perf. 


TS-TL-X-OC, 


T&-TI-IIU.I. 


T&-xi-iiai. 


Pluperf. 
2 Perf. 


L-TE.ll-K-BlV, 
TS-Ti-a, 


£-te-tL-[miv. 


i-TsM-iiriv. 


2 Pluperf. 


Z-te-tI-elv, 






P. P. Fut 




It-Tl-O-Olltxt,. 


js-Tl-u-oftca 



ns l6w, I persuade. 

2. This verb has the first Root neiQ-, the second tuO-, the 
third Ttoid-, and its characteristic being a r-mute, it comes un- 
der Rule 2. § 94. 

Active. Middle. Passive. 

Pres. ttfIO.o), 7Tel6-o t uui, TtelQ.o/uat,. 

Imp. t8id-0Vj £-7T8i6*6<n/i\ £-7tFi6-6[iT]v. 

Fut. T6f-Cr-Q), 7T£l-(J.0{J(U, 7l£l(J-Ql\v-0[iai,, 

2 Fut niQ-y\o-oii{n. 

1 \or. .o, i <T-<'/M)jv^ e-neby-6-rjv. 

2 \or. & md.6[l7]V } Lntd-rjv. 
Perf. / X-a 9 n£ 7iti<ru(a. n&nsiv.fiOLi. 

Plliperf. •'-''' --'-' '■/ -X.M',t.7TE-7lf-l(T-U7jV. l.7lE-7XEl(T-^T)V. 

Vif. iotS.a 9 

2 Pluperf! i-TE'7rotd.8iv y 

P. P Fut 7lE.7lFt-(T-0[iarj. TIE 7TEl-(J-OUWi. 



& 95. 



EXAMPLES OF THE FORMATION OF TENSES. 



105 



3 The following examples fall under Rule 1, § 94. They 
are exhibited with the parts divided and then combined, to 
show the effect of the rules of euphony, § 6, in combining the 
parts. It will be a profitable exercise for the pupil to apply 
these rules for every change. 





The characteristic a n- 


■mute. 




he Inco, I leave. 




Roots, 1. Ism-, 2. Int., 


3. loin.. 




ACTIVE VOICE. 






Parts divided. 


Parts cojnbinea 


Pres. 


Xein-o), 


letno). 


Imp erf. 


e-lsiTT-OV, 


si e mo v. 


Fut. 


Xslrt-a-oi), 


lelipw. 


1 Aor 


e-Xei7T-(r-a, 


els up a. 


2 Aor. 


e-fort-or, 


sllTCOV. 


Perf. 


l.i-k€l7l--tty 


leleiya. 


Pluperf. 


S-ls-Xeht- -eiv ^ 


sleleiq)Siv. 


2 Perf 


li-loin-u^ 


leloinoc. 


2 Pluperf. 


i-Xe-loln-eiv, 

MIDDLE VOICE. 


slsloinsiv 


Pres. 


IslTt-o/uai, 


Isinoptai. 


Imperf. 


E-lei7t-6fj,r}v a 


^Xetrrtdfiyv. 


Fut. 


Islix-v-opai, 


letipof.iav. 


1 Aor. 


S-lsiTt'CT.&firjV, 


slenpa/uijv. 


2 Aor. 


i-kL7T-6{l7]V, 


simony v. 


Perf. 


le-lsLTt-fiai,, 


lilsi^u/uai. 


Pluperf. 


i-ls-lslrt-urjv, 


slelsipc^v. 


P. P. Fut. 


Is-IsItt-u-ouul, 

PASSIVE VOICE 


Isle Lipoma i. 


Pre-. 


IsCn-o/Liaiy 


Islrto/uai. 


Imperf. 


e-Xei7T-6{Li7]v, 


£lei7iopLi]v. 


Fut. 


Isiit-dr^o-oiiui^ 


leicpdriaofiai. 


2 Fut 


Xt,7t-T[(J-0/UGU, 


lmr\(jo{iai,. 


1 Aor. 


s-lsin-d-rjv, 


tlslepdrjv. 


2 Aor. 


l-ltjT-TjV, 


slimy v. 


Perf. 
Pluperf. 


Xi-lein./uui, 

i-Xs-lelTT-IUTjV, 


lelsipLpiui. 
elelelfj^irjv t 


P. P. Fut. 


Xe-Xeln-a-ofieu, 


Islslipojuui. 



1U6 



EXAMPLES OF THE FORMATION OF TENSES- 



The characteristic a x-mutc. 

n Xi x co, I fold. 

Roots, 1. nXtx-. 2. nXax-. 3. ttXox- 



ACTIVE VOICE. 





Parts divided. 


Parts combined. 


Pres. 


nlix-u), 


nXixo). 


Imperf. 


I'-nXsx-ov, 


tnXexov. 


Fut. 


7lX£x-(T-<j), 


nXiZ®. 


1 Aor. 


v-nXex-a-a, 


IVrtafa. 


2 Aor. 


e.nXax-ov. 


znXaxov. 


Perf. 


7l£-7lXe,X--(X, 


TTSTiKe^a. 


Pluperf. 


8-np-TiXtx- -f d>, 


£7T8nXi/eti\ 


2 Pen 


TtE-.iX <X u. 


TiinXoxa. 


2 Pluperf. 


i.ne-nXdx.Eiv, 

MIDDLE VOICE 


tnenXoxeiv. 


Pres. 


nXix-ouui, 


■nXixnuai. 


Imperf. 


\6X-6fl7jV, 


inXsxouijv. 


Fut. 


TtXix-u-ojutt,, 


nXiSofiut,. 


1 Aor. 


■<-:il(-x-(J <jLjn t >', 


inXe^'Jc t tniv. 


2 Aor. 


i-TtXaX'6/uijv, 


ijiXax6ui]v. 


Perf. 


ni-7iXex-[Mt, 9 


ninXey (mi. 


Pluperf. 
P. P. Fut. 


i .. ./. -.llbX-iUjPy 

7i6.7iXix-(j-o(j,uiy 

TASSIVE VOICE. 


L-TETzXtyiLiqr. 
TTcnXitouat,. 


Pres. 


nXbX-ofjua^ 


TtXsxouoa. 


Imperf. 
Fut. 
2 Fut. 


t-TiXex-oiurjV, 
7tkex-d^(j.of*ai) 

TrXux-v^y-oiiai) 


iTrXsxoftrji/. 
nXe/Or'ifTO/Lt.a^ 

nXaxi^oouai, 


1 Aor. 

2 \m\ 


£-7iXix-(j-iji>) 

$.7lX&X-T]V , 


InXi^Oriv, 

irtXuxiji'. 


Perf, 


ni-TtXsx-fiaij 


7tinXeyjLtcu. 


Pluperf. 

P. P. Kut. 


L-7Tf -7lltX-ltr]V, 

ne.nXix-v-ofjLui,^ 


InenMy ^r\v '. 
TtBTcXi^oaai 



$ 96. SPECIAL RULES FOR PURE VERBS. 10? 

§ 96. SPECIAL RULES FOR PURE VERBS. 

N. B. In the rules for the Moods and Tenses of verbs, let 
it be remembered that, 

The three short vowels, #, e, o, 
have their own long, 77, 77, w, 

and their own diphthongs, ai y ei, ol. 

Rule 1. Verbs in -do, -aa, and -gg> 3 change the 
short vowel into its own long before a conso- 
nant ; as, 

<£)tA&J, Root $6/l£-j 1 filt. fy&TiGQ, perf. 7tE<pi?WpC(L } &C. 

Exceptions. 

1 . -do after e or 1 retains a ; and -video and -pdeo 

after a vowel ; as, I do, idaco ; xoTtido, xommo] 
ye?*dtd, j/£/ld<7G>. 

Likewise dissyllables in -doj which do not pass into -37^; as, 
xXdoj, ^Aacrw. Bat those which pass into -r^xi have 77, ex- 
cept cpOuoj. 

The following also retain « ; viz. axgo&o/ucu, rtST&co, da/udca^ 
y.QEuuo), and vqAu) ; diqxbw has a or 77. 

2. Te/i in -coj retain s ; viz. &x6m, uiio), do^eo>, £o>, ew^co, vEiniw^ 

|£Q), 6A6C1), T£^£C0, Toeco. 

Likewise those which form new presents in -wva, -vvv[u, and 

-cr*G); as, uqsoxcd from 6oe'a> ; hvvlM and irvvfu from £«, 

retain f. 
Sixteen in -to have s or ?/ ; viz. aidiouai, ctivsio, axeouai^alcpiG), 

a/Oiofuai, Jt'co. KaJUcD, xrjdiw, xoot'co, uu/souul, o££G), (o^co) 

nodi®, 7tov£(o, rjrso8(D, cpooboi, cpooi'soy ; besides a few others 

seldom u<od; as, Korica, tfP.ew, ;/oo£co. 
&'# in -£W have £u ; viz. nvi&, nleat^ yiw, ()ia), I flow; Ota, 1 

run; and via, I swim; but <>£w, / speak; 6tu, I place; 

and Wo, J spin, have 7/. 

3. In primitive verbs, -6co retains ; such as, ago®, tfoco, edda, 

6u6(j), o?'oo. Likewise tho.se which form others in -vvo) 
and -crxoo, have 0; but those which pass into -awe, have 
o) ; except dld&fu, which has in the 1 filt. and 1 aor. 
passive; as, dodfooficu 9 id60r]v. 



108 



SPECIAL RULES FOR PURE VERBS. 



§ 96. 



•i. The anomalous verbs uala and xluuo change a* into av ; as, 
xato, l i'ut. Km 'm », &c. 

6« AXy . and "/<'<•>>, (for !/«,) retain s before only; as, 

dfoofiai) ulgiOrjVy luni^um, &c. 

Rule 2. Pure verbs which have s, or a doubt- 
ful vowel, or a diphthong before a consonant, in 
the active and middle voice, insert a before a 
consonant in the passive; as, 

Perf. Act. 1 Fut. Pass. 1 Aor. Pass. Perf. Pass. 
uXfc-o), fjXe-xa, &Xao-0fooftai 9 ^lia-drjv^ ^lecr-iucci. 

'.-v.U) yelacr-d^UQfiat,, iy elder. Oi]v 9 yeyilacr.[icu. 

7TOI-W, 7187TOI X0t } 7TQL(T-dl\GO^ca 9 e\TtQlO-6l]V, TTSTTQia-flCU, 

ciri'-O), r{vv~xu, <ivvv-Or\(jouui, ?putr-#?/i>, ty'va-pat,. 

nal -a), 7ie7T(tt-xu, sToa(7-#?j ao/zat, lrcalu-Q-i]v ^ n^Ttaicr-fiav. 

xAu/-G), x£xluv-xa, xlavcr-Ofiao t uai, sxlavcr-drjv, xixlava-jua^ 

So also verbs in -efo, -sum, -o/co, and -ouco. 



EXCEPTIONS. 



To this rule there are many exceptions ; as, 

1. Five which have e before a consonant do not insert a; viz. 

cclreu, av/ew, £//to), igito, oXt'co. 

2. EiglU which have a; viz. uxoo&ouou, de&o/uai,, l&o t uai, xovi&to, 

(kKi©, TTFlQUOUCXl, 7TFOU0), (jDWodcO. 

3. One which has *; viz. t/w. 

4. Eleven which have v ; viz. 6cqt6q), tfouco, <%ct>, duco, Idgva, 

5. Settefl which have ev ; viz. devu^ revw, r^w, (yedcrca) 7r*^u>, 

(nv&ivia) o,'(o, (^l'(to)) ratio, /^w, (#ei5or©). Also many 

verba in -fvo, derived from nouns; as, Gacrdeito. 

t>. One which has ov ; viz. Aotfo, as, lovO^cro^uv^ &c. 

7. Fifteen verbs sometimes insert a before a consonant in the 

e, and sometimes not; viz. d^o), Jodo), ^w, 

xato, gep&a, Kvdo), koo.-.Yj, //i'f/o), fifjgv(D } o^oo), 7tuvto 9 

/?tifc 3. -do, forming verbs in -[it, inserts a be- 
fore a consonant in the passive voice; as, yv&fii, 
yvuCidrpofioUj (fee. 

Except <n(v',i'vnt from ffWxo, and did^v from <?(5o), which 
have fTTouj^/ i (T(m(u ) doOi\rjouui, &c. 



$ 97 OF LIQUID VERKS. 109 

§ 97. OF LIQUID VERBS. 

Liquid verbs differ from mute and pure verbs 
in forming some of the tenses, as follows : 

1. The First-Future shortens the root, if it 
contain a diphthong, by rejecting iie last of the 
two vowels; and instead of -co ana -aofiac, adds 
-ao and -eouai, (contracted -co and -oi[xu)] as, 
Verb. R. 1 Fut. Act 1 Fat Mid. 

(leva, fiev- /usv-ea, contr. [ibv-m, {is v -so pat,, contr./uev-ov/Licci. 

ZSll'U, T6LV- TSV-ito, „ T€V-&, T6V-4of&ai, „ TSP-OVflOCL. 

<puh'(D, opavv- cpav-e®, „ cpav-fb, cpav-eo^ua^ „ (pav-ov/uat,. 

2. The First Aorist lengthens the short root of 
the 1 Future by changing e into &, and lengthen- 
ing the doubtful vowels ; and instead of -croc and 
•Gauyjv, adds -a and -dfiyjv] as, 

Verb. I Fut. 1 Aor. Act 1 Aor. Mid. 

TblVbi b T8V-6M, %-TSlV-a, £-T€lV-(k{LlTlV « 

yalvo), (pav-eoti, e-cpav-a, i-q)av-&[i7]V. 

Rem. The Attics often change a into r\ ; as, ecpqva, icprjv^^v. 

3. The Perfect and Pluperfect Active, and all 
the Passive Voice, except the Present and Imper- 
fect, add the Tense-endings to the Second root; as, 
Verb. 2. R. Perf. Act 1 Fut. Pass. 1 Aor. P. Perf. P. 
orre/ooj, <77r«o-, s-crnag-xa, unv.o-Qr\o ofuai, l-on6.Q-Qr\v^ s-anag-fia^ 
yah'O), opuv.) ns-qay-xa, cpav.6r((JO/Licu } i-y&v.dqv, ni-cpafA-nou. 

Exc. Verbs in -/ua) form the Perfect and Pluperfect Active and 
the 1 Future, 1 Aorist, Perfect, and Pluperfect Passive, from the 
first root by interposing r\ before the Tense-endings ; as, 
Verb. 1 R. Perf. Act. 1 Fut Pass. 1 Aor. Pass. 
*£fUD, v£f- 1 -, ve.vifi.rj.xoc y vefi^-d^oofiui, LvefJi.ifi.Orjv, &c 

So also 6 &)*).& and fiero)* 

Note. The tenses which interpose 77 are probably formed regularly from 
obsolete forms in -ecu ; thus, NEME'fi, j/s/i^o-co, vEyifir\Ka, &c ; but while the 
ab'»ve tenses thus formed remained, the others have given place to the liquid 

rrms now in use, 
10 



110 OF CONTRACTED VERUS. § 98 

4. Dissyllables in -e/m, -mj, -mj : reject v before 
a consonant ; as, 
Verb. 2 11. Perf. A. I Fut. P. 1 Aor. P. Perf. P. 

m,-, ri-ra-Xa, xa-frtyjofiaity t-iu-Oijr, ii-T(t-[t(ixt, &c. 
i ■-, xi-HQi-xa, xoi>-()i\oo(tui, s-xyl-Ofjp, x£-XQL-[tai, &c. 
Ouv-) /. -0v-x«, tu-Qi\(j-ouui, l-iu-Oi/Py t£-0v-imxi, &c. 
E.rc. But sometimes xied'to and nlvvw retain >'. 



do, 


-&v, 


-d:£t, 


-<fy 


-<£oj, 


-dov, = 8. 


©, 


-a, 


-ft 


-£, 


-<?, 


-0), 


■io, 


-*ft 


-^*, 


-£7f, 


-^0*, 


-^ov, = 8. 


•ov, 


-^ 


-ee, 


-> 


-or, 


-ov, 


■00, 


-o>, 


-($£*, 


"^J 


-6o*, 


-oou, = 8. 


■ov, 


-to, 


-Ot, 


-or, 


-Ot, 


-ov. 



§ 98. OF CONTRACTED VERBS. 

Verbs in-dw, -&o and -tko contract the concurrent vowels 
in the Present and Imperfect in all the voices, according to the 
general rules of contraction, § 38. See paradigm, § 218. 

All the concurrences of vowels to be found in these verbs 
are the following; viz. 

1. Verbs in -dw, -da>, -ae, 
contracted -6>, -«, 

2. Verbs in -&»,-&*, -££, 
contracted -to, -£*, 

3. V erbs in -6w, -6w, -oe, 

contracted -«, -ov, 

Ofo. 1. Of the above concurrent vowels (No. 2) dissylla- 
bles in ico contract only ss and set : thus, nlee, nlsziv, niseis &c, 
are usually contracted nisi, nlslv, nltlrs, &c, but nlsoa, nlsofisr, 
&c. are never contr. Exc. Jaw, to bind, commonly contracts all. j 

Obs. 2. Four verbs in -rtw, contract as into ??, and ae* into 
ij. These are Saw, rm?'aa>, di\p&o), and /quo/ugh, ; thus, 

Indie. !^*£, £<fe*, £dsToy, 8£ae£, #fae, &c. Inf. £ae**>. 
contr. L'^c, fjf, Rjw, %£, gjj, „ jjji^ &c 

And so of the others. 

DORIC AND IONIC FORMS. 

06$, 3. The Dorics, who in other cases use a for r/, in 
make use of/,, without t> subscript, instead of all con- 
tract :■ I and / . / : as. 6(fir for 6q^p ; xo(rfir\v for xofrfielv. 
/UsOj f was usually contracted by them into ry; as, toA^ts for 

roA//< 

The Ionic dialect often converts «, in verbs in -aw, into 
e; as, 

oocoi, (loiout-y, for ooaoj, tydo/te? ; XQiejvu for /oasia*. 



Y 99 EXPLANATION OF THE FOLLOWING TABLE. Ill 

HOMERIC FORM. 

Obs. 4. The Epic writers, on account of the metre, often 
insert the kindred long or short vowel before the contracted 
vowel; as, 

bgocew, contr. ooav, Poet, ogdav ; oq&co, contr. 6oc5, Poet, ogoca. 
Participle fern, ffidovva, contr. ffiwo-a, Poet, ^cowaa, &c. 

This, from the frequency of its occurrence in Homer, is 
sometimes called the Homeric form. 

Note. By a little attention to practice and applying the rules (§ 38.) to 
the preceding contractions, a paradigm of contract verbs is wholly unne- 
cessary. 



§ 99. EXPLANATION OF THE FOLLOWING 
TABLE. 

1. The tense-root in the Subjunctive, (being the same as in the indicative 
but without the augment) is to be prefixed to the " Terminations" in the op- 
tative, imperative, inhnitive, and participles. 

2. Whenever the accent (') falls on the termination it is marked in the 
following table in its proper place. When it does not fall on the termina- 
tion, its place will be the third syllable from the end of the word, if the last 
syllable be short, or the diphthong ai, which is considered short. But if the 
last syllable be long, the accent will be on the syllable next the last ; as, 
rirvfya, rervtpcj, &C. 

3. In the Perfect and Pluperfect passive, the characteristic n in all the 
moods is put with the termination, to show the changes it undergoes by the 
laws of euphony, when combined with the initial consonant of the termina- 
tion. In combining the root in these moods with the termination, Rules 
2, and 6, and 17 of § 6, must be observed. See also § 101. 10. But if the ta- 
bles of terminations, § 92, and the method of forming the tenses, § 93, is 
thoroughly committed to memory and rendered familiar to the pupil by tho- 
rough "drilling, it will hardly ever be necessary to take him into this table 
at all. The students under the author's care have not been required to 
commit the table of the verb for the last ten years. 

4. The numbers 1, 2, 3, &c, to be found in the following table, refer to 
the s;une numbers, § 101. 

X. B. Bv inspection of the table it will be seen that the terminations of 
the subjunctive mood are the same in all the tenses, and those of the opta- 
tive and imperative are nearly the same in all except in the 1 aorist; at- 
tention to this will greatly lessen the labour of committing the verb to me 
mory. 







I. T 


I B : . 1 '. <> 


v THF 


VERB. 


§ 


100. 






I. TABLE QF 


THE ACTIVE 


VOICE. 








ftTDIGA iivi:. 








SUBJUNCTIVE. 




Tenst 


'TOQt. Terminations 




T-root. 


Terminations. 






1. 


o 


3. 




1. 2. 


3. 




S. 


TVTTT -U), 


-e/s, 


-6l| 


TVTTT 


-ft). -J7S, 


■tf> 




D. 




-€TOV, 


-€TW, 




-77TOJ/, 


-7}TOV, 




P. 


-OfXZV, 


-€T€, 


-ou<n. 




-(a/Ji€V, -77T6, 


-OOffl. 


Imp. 


S. 
D. 


%-TVTTT -OV, 


-es, 

-€TOJ/, 


-err;*/, 










P. 


-o/iev, 


-6T6, 


-ov. 








Fut. 


S. 


Tirty -a>, 


-6iS, 


-61,4 


rinf/- 








D. 




-€TO^, 


-eToy, 




Wanting. 






P. 


-Ofiev, 


-ere, 


-OU(Tt. 








1 Aor. 


S. 


e-rvty -a, 


-a?, 


-e, 4 


rinf/ 


-ft), -7?S, 


'V* 




D. 




-cltov, 


-am\v y 




-7^TOJ/, 


-r)Tov t 




P. 


-afiev, 


-are, 


-av. 




-WflCV, -7)T€, 


'COO" 1. 


2 Aor. 


S. 


€-TU7T -OV, 


-€S, 


-€, 


TVTT 


-o>, -r?s, 


'V> 




D. 




-6TOJ/, 


-eT??*/, 




-77TOZ/, 


-7)T0V, 




P. 


-0/J.CV, 


-€T6, 


-oj/. 




-(Ofl€V, -7)Te, 


-W(TL. 


Perf. 


S. 


re-rvcp -a, 


-as, 


-6, 


T€'TV<f) 


-ft), -??s, 


'V> 




l>. 




-arov, 


-aTov, 




-7/TOJ/, 


-TJTOV, 




P. 


-afJL€V, 


-aTe, 


-a<n. 




-ODfl€V, -7/T6, 


-coo- 1. 


Plup. 


s. 

D. 


i-T€-TV(p -€U>, 


-eiTov, 


-eiT97J/, 










P. 


-€(^U6l/, 


-€IT€, 


-eio~av. 








2 Peri 


T6-TL/7T -a, 


-as, 


-e, 


Te-Tl/7T 


-ft)> "?7S, 


-v> 




D. 




-aroi/, 


-aroz>, 




-T7TOJ/, 


-TtTOV, 




P. 


-afxev, 


-aTe, 


-aen. 




-cafxev, ~r]Te, 


-vocri. 


2 Plup 


. S. 
I). 


t-Tf-TVTT -£IV, 


-eis, 


-tlTTJJ/, 






— - 




P. 


-€i/xev 


, -€tT€, 


-eirrai/. 

























§ 100. 



TiV THE ACTIVE VW€F. 



113 



1. 

"OtfU 



TABLE OF THE ACTIVE VOICE, CONTINUED. 

OPTATIVE. IMPERATIVE. 

Terminations. Terminations 

2. 



-OLS, l -01 
-OITOV, -OIT7]V, 
-Ol/iL€V, -OLT€, -Oiev. 



'OlfXL, -OlS, -01, 

-oltov, -o'lt-hv, 
-oifxsv, -oire, -oiev. 



INF. 

Term 



-€, -erw, 
-erov, -etcov, 
-€Te, -ercoo-ai'.' 



-aifu, -ais, -at, 

-airov, -aiT7}v. 
-aijiev, -aire, -aiev. 



"OlfMl, -ols, -oi, 

-OLTOV, -0LT7]y, 
•OljlGV, -OLT€, -OIEV. 



Wanting. - €l j, f 



Olfll, -OlS, -01, 

-oltov, -oir-nv, 

OL/J.EV, -OlT€, -oiev 



-ov, -area, 
•arov, -dray, 
-are, -drcocav. 



iifu, -ols, -oi, 

-oitov, -oir-nv, 
nfj.ev, -olte, -olev. 



"€, -ETO0, 

~etov, -etoov, 
•ere, -eV (caav. 



-t, -erw, 

-ETOV, 'ETCOV, 

-ere, -ETcocrav. 



-6, -era), 
-etov, -etcov, 

-ETooaav. 



-ere, 



-elv, 3 



PARTICIPLES. 

Terminations. 
M. F. N. 
N. -cov, -ova- a, -ov, 

-OVTOS, -OVO-#]S, -OVTOS, 

D. -ovti, -ovcrn, -ovtl,&lg. 



N. -03V, -ovaa, -ov, 

Gr. -OVTOS, -OVO-nS, -OVTOS, 

D. -ovti, -ovary, -ovtl,&,c. 



-elv, 



N. -as, -a.o~a, -cut, 
G. -avTos, -do-ns, -avros, 
D.-avTi, -do-T), -avTt,&LC. 



N. -qjv, * -ovaa, -6v, 
G. -Svros, -ovo-ns, *6vros, 
D. -6vti, -ovan, -6vti,&,c. 



N. -cos, -via, -6s, 
G. -6tos, -vias, -6tos, 
D. -oTi, -via, -6ti,&,c. 



N. -o;s, -via, -6s t 
G. -6tos, -v?as, -6tos, 
D. -otl, -via, -6ti» 



114 



IT. T\m,E OP THE VERB. 



§ 100. 



[I. TABLE OF THE MIDDLE VOICE 

INDICATIVE. 

Tense-} Terminations. 

1. 2. 3. 



S. Tvjrr -OfUU, -y, 6 -erai, 

D. -A/JLeSoV, -€(T$OV, -ta&OV, 

P. -6/uL€&a, -€(T^e, -ourat. 



IlllJ). S. i-TVTTT -6jJ.l]V, ~OV. S -€TO, 

D. -ojiebov, -ecr&oy, -€a^rr\u, 

P. -6/j.^o,, -ea&e, -ovro. 



Flit. S. TV\p -OLiai, -7), -6TOL, 

D. -6fx&ov, -ea&ov, -ta&ov, 

P. -ofx&a, -etr&e, -ovrai. 



1 Aor. S. €-TV\p -CL/JLTIV, -o>, 8 -aTo, 



D. 
P. 



-d/jL€&ov, -aa&ov, -da^v, 
-a/xe&a, -ao~&€, -auro. 



2 Aor. S. i-rv7r -6/jltjv, 



D. 
P. 



-6/J.C&OV, -COT&OV, -4(T&7)V, 

-o/xeda, -ea&e, -ovro. 



Peif. S. re-ru -fj./j.ai, -xpai, -trrai, 10 
D. -fifi&ov, ~(j)&ov, -(pSov, 

P. -jjLfjL&a, -(p&€, -/a/jl€i/oi elcrL 12 



Plup. S. i-rc-rv-/j.firju, -xpo, -tttu, 
D. • fxfx&ov, -(pdov, ~(p^7]U, 

P. -/x/AtSa, -(p&e, -fifxevoi i)(Tav. 



P.P.F.S. rt-rv^ -ofxai, -y, -crac, 

D. -6/xedov, '«r^oy,'€o^oUf 

P. -6/j.edo., -eade, -ovrai. 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 
T-root. Terminations. 
1. 2. si 



TU7TT -OOjACLl, -7},* -7]Tai, 

-<bfj.&Qy, -rjo-^ou, -r,(j&ov, 



rinp- 



Wanting. 



-u>/jL€&ov, -na^ovrW^oVt 



TV7T -OO/JLCll, -77, ° -7]T<Xl, 

-cv/jLeSov, -i]0 , &op,-r)(r&ov, 
-wfxc&a, -r](r&€, -copra 1 , 



re-TU -fi/meuos &, jjs, y, 

-juL/neua), i]Tov, r)rou^ 




§ 100. 



IN THE MIDDLE VOICE. 



115 



TABLE OF THE MIDDLE VOICE, CONTINUED. 



OPTATIVE. 

Terminations. 

1. 2. 3, 

-gI/jltjv, -olo, s -Giro, 
-oifjL&ov, -oio-frov,-oi(T&r l v, 

"Gl/X€^a, -QlO"&e, -QLVTG. 


IMPERATIVE. 

Terminations. 

I. 2. 

-ov, s -ecrdxo, 
-eff&oy, -eafreov, 
ecr&e, -60~&a)o~ay. 


INF. 

Term 


FARTIC1PLES. 

Terminations. 

M. F. N. 

N. -6/xeyos, -7], -ov, 
G. -ofityov, -7)S,-ov, 
D. -ojxivcp, -r), -a>. 












-ttt/X71V, 
-01/JL6&0V, 


-OlO, 2 -OLTO, 

-oioSov, -oicr&rjv, 
-Qia&e, -qlvto. 


Wanting. 


-ecr&ai. 


N. -6/X6VGS, -7J, "OP, 
Q.-OfXZVOV, -7]S, -ov, 
D. -ofxevcp, -r], -(p. 


- 

i.-atfinv, 
-aifji&ov, 


-aio, 8 -euro, 
-cucr&ov, -aicr^y, 
-aio~&€, -aivro. 


-at, -dc~&cc, 
-aoSov, -dcr&cav, 
-ao-&e, -da&cacrav. 


-acr&ai. 


N.-diJ,evos,-7], -ov, 
G. -a\x4vov, -7)s, -ov, 
D.-a/u,ev(p, -7j, -q>. 


-0i/jL7]V, 

-QL/J.€$OV, 

-oifjLtda, 


-010, -OLTO, 

-oi(rfroi',-oio'&r l i/, 
-oio~&e, -oivTo. 


-ov, 8 -ecrSco, 
-eo-^oy, -4cr&o}V, 
- zcrSe, - eo-frcocrav. 


-eVd-cu. 


N. -o,uez/os, -77, -ov, 

G. -OfJLZVOV, -7}S,-0V, 

D. -ofMeycp, -rj, -a>. 


-fi/jLtvos e?7}v, 

-flfXCVU), 


-efrjs, -ehi, u 
-el7]Tov, -€ir)r7]y, 
,-efyre, -etyo-av. 


-xpo, -<p&0t), 

-<p&ov, -(p&cay, 
-cpSe, -(p&ooo'av. 


-<p&ai. 


N. -flfjLeV0S,-7), -ov, 
G. -fJLfJLeVOV, -7}S, -ov, 

D.-fifxevcf, -7], -cp. 










'O'lMV, 

-oijA&ov, 


-oio, -olto, 
-qig&ov, -oicrfrqv, 
-oiff&e, -okvro. 


Wanting. 


-etr&ou. 


N. -Sfievos, -7], -ov, 
G. -0/j.evov, -7]Si -ov, 
D.-ofAevcp, -7j, -(p. 



116 



III. TABLE OF THF VF.RR. 



ii!. SIVE VOICE. 



§ too. 



Tense -root. 



D. 
P. 



INDICATIVE. 

Terminations. 
ft. 2. 3. 



-ofieSov, -eo~&ov,-e(r&ov, 
-6pe&a, -ea&e, -ovrai. 



Imp. S. fc'-ru7rr -o\xn\v, -w,Q -ero, 

D. -6ljL€&OV,-6(T&OV, -€0~&T}V, 

P. -^e^a, -ecr&e, -ovro. 



1 Fut. S.Tud)3-^(r-OjU.ai, -??, 3 -ercu, 
P. s^ -o^uefra, -6(7^6, -ovrai. 



2 Fut. S. TVTn'lC -OjJLOLl, 

P. -6fj.€&a, 



■r},* -erect, 

€(T&OV,-€(r&OV, 
€(T&€, -QVTCLl. 



1 Aor. S. i-rvcp^r-rjv, 
D. 
P. 



ypev> 



~ris, -y, 

-7JT0V, -7)T7}V, 

-rjre, -rjcrav. 



2 Aor. S. 6-TU7T -7]V, 

D. 

p. -t]^v, 



-r?9, -7], 

-rjTOJS, -T)T7)V, 

-TTre, -Tjcrau. 



Perf. S. T6-TU -/J./ULCU, 

D. -fjL/j.e&oi', 

P. -/JLfjLeSa, 



TVTTT 'CO fiat, 



-tyai, -nrai, I0 

-Cp&QV, -Cp&OV, 

-tp&s, -/jL/j.evotelcrl. 1 ' 2 



Plup. S.£-rc-r6-/tfujj's 

D. -fijJLeSov, 

P. -ju/xe&a, 



\pat, -7TTO, 
'Cp&OV, -<p&7}V, 

•fpSe, -imzvoi -f\(Tav. 



P.l'T. S. re-rity -ofxcu, 

D. -6/j.f^ou, 

P. -rfpc&a, 



■77, -CTUt, 

■crr^f^y -ovrai. 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 

T-root. Terminations. 
1. 2. 3. 



-TJTCLt, 



-wfiei&ov, -7)<jSov, -r}(r&av : . 
-cv/j.e&a, -r}tr&€ -covrai. 



rvtpfrncr- 



Wanting. 



TU7T7J(r- 



Wanting. 



TvcpS-o), -r)s, -77, 

-777W, -7JT0V, 
-QOfJLSV, -71T6, -&>CTi. 



-co, ~]7S, -#> 

-7)TOV, -7}T0V, 

-00/j.tv, -77T6, -COCT*. 



re-TV- fifxevos cc, m$ ?>, 

-fljlQVtO') T^TOK, ^TOIf, 

-IA/UL€VOtd)IJLGJ/, 7^T€, 5(Tl. 





re-ruij/- 



Wanting. 



§ 100. 



IN THE PASSIVE VOICE. 



117 



1. 



TABLE OF THE PASSIVE VOICE CONTINUED. 

OPTATIVE. 

Terminations. 

2. 3. 



OlfiTJV, -010, S -OLTO, 

-oifiebov, -otabov, -oiafrqv, 
~oi/j.€da, -oio-&€, -oivto. 



IMPERATIVE. 

Terminations. 
2. 3. 



-ov, -eV&o>, 
-€ar&ov,-car&cov, 



INF. 

Term. 



ea&at. 



-olnnvy 'oto, s - 0lT0} 
-otpe&ov, -oicr&ov, -oia&7] V , 
-oi^ba, -oicrbe, -oivto. 



PARTICIPLES. 
Terminations, 
M. F. N. 

N-'6fl€VOS, -7], -ov, 
G.- fi€VOV, -7] Sy -OV, 

OfAevy, -77, - w . 



D. 



'Oljl-nv, -010, s . QLT0) 
'oipeboi/, -oia&ov, -oia^nv, 
-oiiie&a, -oio-Se, -oivto. 



Wanting. -ta&ai 



-eij)TOV, -eL7}T7]l/, 

-ei-nnev, -einre, -eirjaav. 



-cinv, 



-eiys, -e/77, 



T)Tl, '7]TC0, 
■7]T0V, -TjTQOV, 

•7?T€, -TjTeoo-av. 



"GtrjToj/, -€it)t7]v, 
•citi/icv, -eirrre, -e( W av. 



■pfievos &nv, efys, eirj, » 
W*P0Ls(7)fxei/,d7)TG, sl-qaav. 



-7]T0}, 



-T)TOV, -TJTCOV, 



■cp&ov, -(p^OOV, 
(p&e, -(p&ttxrav. 



r/W* -oto, -OITO, 

ripebov, -oca-Sou, -oio-&7)i/, 
iifie^a, -oiade, -olvto. 



Wanting. 



Wanting. 



N .-6fJ.€VOS, -77, -ov, 
G.-OfJLEVOV, 

D.-o^aeVw, 



f]s, -ov, 



N.-6/bL€VOS, -7], 

\'*<r&ai.\G.-ou€vov, -vs 

Dt ' 

.-o/xeva, -rj s 



-ov, 



-7)V<XL. 



'ijvai. 



-<p&cu. 



N.-€LS, -€?0~a, -€V, 

G.-4pros, -eio"r}s,-4vTos 
D-evrt, -star}, -evri. 

N.-ek, -eTo-a, -4v, 
G.-€VTos, -eio-ns,-4vros, 

D.-eVTi, -€10-7}, -4vti. ' 



N.-fififroS, -7], -OV, 
G.-flfxhov, -7JS, -OV, 

~D.-Wevo>, -77, -y. 



\N.~6n€vos, -77, -ov, 
■€<r&cu. \G.-ofievov, -tjs, -o v , 

\D.-OjUeVOJ, -y, -(p. 



IIS OBSERVATIONS ON TilE THREE VOICES. § lUl. 

§101, OBSERVATIONS OX THE THREE VOICES, 

The following Observations are designed to point outmore 
particularly, certain changes in the terminations of these parts 
which Frequently occur, and which, without explanation, might 
perplex and retard the student in his progress. Farther infor- 
mal inn respecting these and other changes will be found in 
the table of dialects which follows. 

ACTIVE VOICE. ****^ 

OPTATIVE. 

1. In the optative mood, instead of the usual terminations 
- "<<, -01 ;, -ot, &c. the Yttic dialect has the following: 

Sing. Dual. Plur. 

-oh])', -oltj;, -oh]; -ohjxov, -ol^ttjv ; -olrjiisv, -ob^xs, -olrjoav. 

This form is also used by Ionic and Doric writers. 
In the optative of the 1 aor. active, instead of the common 
termination .uiui, -at£, -ou, &c. the iEolic has as follows, 

Sing. Dual. Plur. 

fau, -eiu;,-eis ; -etuTOV, .8i6lii]v ; -slafiev, -stare, -siav % 

The Attics, as well as the Ionians and Dorians, use this 
form in the 2d and 3d pers. sing, and in the 3d pers. plural. 

IMPERATIVE. 

2. In the 3d pers. plur. of the imperative, in Attic writers, 
the termination -6vto>p is more common than Jtwouv ; thus, 
in the pres. tVTtidytcop for ivmhowuv. For other varieties, 
see Table of Dialects, § 102c This form is also met with in 
Doric writers 

INFINITIVE. 

The infinitive, in the ancient dialects, ended in -i/usvoa. 
It wa !. in the Ionic, into -8(iev\ and afterwards, the 

'/ being rejected, was contracted by the Attics into -sw. 

1 FUTURE, AND AnUISTS. 

■1. The Eolians and Dorians use a peculiar form of the 

ml aorists, which is made by adding 

the syllable -xop t i > the usual form of the 2d pers. sing, and then 

inflecting them like the imperfect; thus, instead o£%TU7iT.ov,-eg y 

-f, &c. ; it makes ittttreox-ov, -as, -i , &c. ; in the 1 aor. M- 



§ 101. OBSERVATIONS ON THE THREE VOICES. 119 

yaax-ov, -eg, -s, &c, and in the 2d aor. fr-viteax-ov, -eg, -e, &c. 
Hence the same tenses in the middle voice, and the imperfect, 
to the passive, make eTvitTsax-our^, -ou, -exo, 3d pi. -ovio, &c 

Obs. 1. But before the terminations -xov, -xeg, -xe, &c. in 
contracted verbs, diphthongs reject the subjunctive vowel, and 
in verbs in pi the long vowels are changed into their own 
short ones ; as, 2 sing, snoielg, Znoleoxov ; eTldrjg, irldsaxov, 
&c. 

Obs. 2. This form is used only in the indicative mood ; it 
usually rejects the augment, and is scarcely to be found, ex- 
cept in the singular number and 3d person plural. It is used 
only to express repeated action. 

The 1 Future in the dialects has the following varieties : 

( 1 . ) The Attics often reject a from -daw, -saw, -law, -oaco, con- 
tracting the remaining vowels when that can be done ; as, 
tluaco, I will drive; eMw, contr. ilw ; Skdasig, el&etg, contr. 
elq;. &c. So xalw for xaleaoj, I will call; oIxtlw for olxxlaot), 
I will pity ; in the middle voice o^ovfxav for opdoopai. 

(2.) Attic Futures in -iw are inflected like Contract Verbs in 
-€6o (§ 98. 2. or § 222.), thus, -lw, -ceig, -islj -iutov 

(3.) 2 is sometimes elided from the 1st future of pine verbs, 
especially among the poets, even when -aw is preceded by a 
long vowel or diphthong ; as, pres. /sw, 1st fut. zeticrw, or 

/£V0). 

(4.) For -aw, the Doric termination is -|w; as, ysM^o) for 
yelccau). 

(5.) Verbs in -«w, .vw, have the first future Ionic in -eco un- 
contracted ; (see § 102.) as, rs/niw for vs/liw; usvico for psvw. 

(6.) Verbs in -gco, in Homer, commonly insert a; as, ooaco 
for ooti, I will excite; sometimes also verbs in -^w; as, Maw 
from elo) ; xelao) from xelkco. 

(7.) The Attic and Ionic termination, particularly of liquid 
verbs, is often -r\aw ; as, 6alh\aw for 6alw, I will cast ; x ai Q^- 
au> for ^«ow, J will rejoice. 

In mutes, xvitT^aw for tlh//o>, J will strike. 

PERFECT INDICATIVE. 

5. Some verbs suffer a syncope in the perfect; thus, 
xuIlo), I call ; xuXtysw, xex&lrjxu, xixlrjxa. 

In like manner, dsde[ir]xa, ded/urjxu. 

xsxuurjxu, Xbxurjxu, &C» 



[20 OBSERVATIONS ON THE THREE VOICES. § 101. 

Some perfects in -/,*«, from verbs in £&), strikeout n before 
a, and (except in the participles) change >/ into ; thus, 

from &fa», 6s6ijHa 9 6i6ua. 

from />.uu>, TerXtjXit, ihlua, &c. 

Oi' the vowels thus brought together, the hitter is sometimes 
rejected; as; 

SeStytafieV) GeGdafisp, by syncope 6i6a(Asv. 

n ■■i).i i xi-rui 9 TSTXdceroa,, by syncope lixkavai. 

Iii other verbs the Attics sometimes change e into o ; thus, 

Tyenct), I turn ; t^j//w, lirooya. 

A similar change has taken place in the Iono-Doric leloyxu, 
from (^ij^w)j WyjlfM (iay/dy»)j analogous to I^Gm, Xd/uGoj, Xix/u- 
66.vw. Thus also ninoo/ 8 is found for n&nauxs. 

PERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE, &C 

b\ The subjunctive and optative of the perfect are some- 
times made by a periphrasis of the perf. participle and the 
verb elul, I am; thus, subj. -leTvcp&g co, ^g, rj, t8tvoj6t6 i\tov 9 
&c; opt. TFivcp&g sl'ijv, etyg, eh]. And sometimes the indica- 
tive; as, TSTucpwg Hoofiou, I shall have struck. 

PERFECT PARTICIPLE. 

7. The participles sometimes change rj into #, and some- 
times not. 

In either case, by a syncope of the former vowel, rjdg and 
awe are changed into -<$£, which remains also in the neuter; 
and the feminine, which otherwise ends in m, becomes waa 
and in the oblique cases of the masculine and neuter w is re 
tained ; thus, 

Uncontracted. 
GeSrjM&g, 6s6a-d>g 9 -via, -6g 9 
vtjX&g, TeOvq-<bg 3 -via, -6g y 

The 1" Attica insert e before -w? ; thus, tare-tig, 

-. G. -<oo,. But in the poets the ordinary termina- 
tions frequently remain after the contraction ; as, -k<ne-&g,.vTa $ 
6g 9 Gr. §<fw »6rog, \:c. 

The perfects in which these changes most frequently occur 





Contracted. 




GsG-wg, 


-coaa, -co^', G. 


-coro£. 


redf-tig, 


-WffM, -W£, „ 


-mog. 


hai-tig, 


-waa, -d^ „ 


-WTog, 



101. 



OBSERVATIONS ON THE THKEE VOICES. 121 



are Tijhjxa, TiOvTjxa, pi6 V xa 9 Zariba ; and in these the regular 
form is more common m the singular, and the contracted form 
m the dual and plural. 

MIDDLE AND PASSIVE. 

2d PERSON SINGULAR. 

k S. The 2d pers. singular present indicative originally ended 
in -6a«* In the Ionic dialect, the a being rejected, it became 
-£«/. by diaeresis -'eat, and was afterwards contracted into ri • 
ft 8S. R. III.) sometimes by the Attics into si. In the same 
manner, in other moods and tenses. In the subj. - w <u be- 
came -7}a h and then -5. In the imp, the indie, imperf. and 2 Aor 
*oo became -so, contr. -ot/; and 111 the 1 aor. mid. -aero became 
-«o, contr. -a>. In like manner, in the 2d sing, of the optative, 
0100 became 010, and, being incapable of farther change bv 
contraction, remains in this form. 

IMPERATIVE, 3d PLURAL. 

9. Iii the third pers. plur. of the imperative, the Ionic, 
Doric and especially the Attic writers, use the termination -o>, 
instead of -wcrav ; thus, Tvmiadojv for Tvm&oOwvav. See Ta- 
ble of Dialects, § 102. 

PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT PASSIVE. 

10. The terminations of the perfect and pluperfect passive, 
cannot be correctly represented in any paradigm of a mute 
verb oecause the termination, combining with the final mute 
of the root, undergoes various changes, according to the laws 
ot Euphony, (§ 6.) which causes an apparent, but not a real 
variety in the terminations of these tenses. For the termina- 
tions alone, see § 92. III. 

(1.) The terminations preceded by a *r-mute,as in thepara- 
fcgm, according to the laws which regulate the combination 
3t consonants, combine with it as there exhibited; viz. 
3. lirvfifiai § 6. TiTvyjat, § 6. 6. rirvma^ 

U. lejCuuedov, do. Tixvydor, § 6. 2. & 17. T&rvcpOov, 
P. TBTtweda, do. Tirvcpde, do. tbtv^voi slat. 

(2.) Preceded by a x-mute, they combine as follows: 
ua> UlsZa h § 6. 7. »ismu, § 6. 2. 

ueOov, UU X 0ov 9 § 6. 7. & 17. UU x Qov 9 
,'udu, UXsxOe, do. leksyudvo* elal. 

11 



ONS ON THE THREE VOICES. ^ 101 

(3. consonant in the passive voice, is 

changed into <>. and combines with the terminations of tht 

rfect without chai apt where the te*« 

naina ith ■■>. in which case one o must be dropped. 

• 9) 
(1.) in the the Attics change the characteris- 

tic v before /' into cr; as, .-./>•>,"<", ne^ar^tdov^ ne^dafieda,* 

. :j: (futturfhr, necp&piueda. 
, NOTIVM AND OPTATIVE OF PKRF. PASS. 

11. It" the termination in the pert*, and plupeif. passive is 
preceded by a vowel, the circumlocution in the 3d pers. plur. 

in the subjunctive and optative moods, as exhibited in the 
idigm, becomes unnecessary; thus, in the 3d pers. plur. oi 
the indicative, instead of neytbjucioi eIxtI, 7i8<piXrjvTai> is used. 
But 

Obs. 3. In the Subjunctive, the vowel preceding the termi- 
nation is dropped, and the term i nations of the present subj. 
annexed; thus, peri. nFqtllq-fHU, subj nstpd&[un % -]}, -tJto*J 
&C. ; perf. xixQifiat ; sui)j. xexo-Couui, -rj -rfTai. 

Exc But verbs in -oco. frequently retain w, as a mood- vowel,] 
through ail the numbers and persons ; as, dedifttijucu, -a>, -wra/, 
&c. 

Obs. 4. The Optative adds the terminations rfirjv, -o, (viz. 
from ao y ) -to, to the characteristic of the tense, with i inter- 
! alter a 3 and subscribed with y or ra; thus, 

xeXQl-[i7]v f xtxoi-o, x&xol-to, &c. 

/. '/.i'-'/^'j Itlu-o, r Hlv-TOy &C. 

ixial'firjVj exruL-o, exrau-io. 

de()t t lu-iup', ded^lco-o, dedrilw-io. 

Note. Both in the subjunctive and optative, however, these forms are but 
seldom used, the circumlocution being generally preferred. 

IONIC AND DORIC FORMS. 

12. In the Ionic and Doric dialects, " before -rat and -to, 1a 1 
'nations of tl 1 the 3d pers. plur. is changed 

into '-. bo thai -vtat becom •- -atou, and -^to, -ojto ; thus, Ulvrl 

7<u l> '/o, hh'uuo, &c. 

06*, 5. A 7r-mute or a x-mute before -arou and -«ro, for -vxA 
and -yrOj Lti changed into its own aspirate; as, larvy-onou, lm 

ll/-urm. ; : -I'Tut, llliy-viui, &c. 



§ 102. DIALECTS OF VERBS IN CO AND (11. 123 

Obs. 6. As the circumlocution TeTv/u/usvot, elal is used to 
avoia the cacophony of the regular termination, ThvcpvTM, 
this being removed by the change of v into a, the circumlocu- 
tion in the indicative, of all such verbs, becomes unnecessary. 
Thus, TSTuuuei'oi sial, is changed into TSTvcpaTcu-, lelsy {xivoi 
elal, into leUyaxai^ &c. 

Obs. 7. If a (changed from a r-mute, § 94. R. 2,) precede 
the termination, it is changed into d or 6 before -arau and 
-«to; thus, crxsvd'Cco, perf. eaxevacr/Lifxt,' 3 pers. pi. Ionic iaxev- 
&daTai ; nl/fiix), perf. pass. ninljjcrjLia.i,, 3 pers. pi. nsnekyfiaxai 
for TtbTikr^a^ivoi elol. 

Obs. S. In pure verbs, ?? or £* before -^«t is usually changed 
into e before the Ionic -cctgu and -aro ; thus, neyll-^vKu and 
-77*70 are usually changed into necpd-iaTai and -^aio. In like 
manner, a before .aiai and -«to is changed into £ to avoid the 
duplication of the a; thus, avaTttTavxai,, from cb^aTTfTdw, becomes 
dyaTisiiaiao. 

Obs. 9. In like manner, v before the termination -to, seldom 
before -t«*, in the indicative and optative of the other tenses, 
but never in the subjunctive, is changed into a ; thus, for Tito- 
toivto we have rvmoLajo ; for yhoivzo, ysvotaTO, &c. So also 
in verbs in fit ; as, Tidiajai for TlQevzav ; laTeaiav for lojavTai. 
In these forms « and o before * are usually changed into s ; 
as, iSovleuTo for sSovlovio, &c. 



§ 102. DIALECTS OF VERBS INwand^. 

A principal difficulty in learning Greek, arises from the va- 
riety of terminations in verbs, according to the different dia- 
lects. These can hardly be reduced to any general principles; 
tilt a pretty clear idea of them may be formed from the follow- 
ing table. It must be observed, however, that many of the 
same terminations occur in all the dialects, although that one 
only is mentioned in which they are most usual. Besides the 
final syllables, of which this table chiefly consists, the Ionians 
used to insert a vowel before the last syllable, which the poets 
often changed into a diphthong ■ as, tvttw, I. Tvnio), P. jvirelo). 

o q>vy flv, I. (fiy-bSiv ; ^o-o>0£, I. @o-6o)(ji ; 6g-dg, I. ng-uag. 
But as this does not affect the inflexion of the final syllable, it 
is not noticed in the table. § 98. Obs. 4. 

These moods and tenses of the middle and passive voices, 
which agree in termination with the active, and are not here 



12 i DIALECTS OF VERBS IN W AND Ul. § 102 

specified, are subject to similar changes in tnc different dia- 
lects with those having th< same terminations in the active 
voice. The same is true respecting the terminations of verbs 
in -/// : so that this table is genercd f applying to the tcrmina- 
tions here specified, whether they belong to verbs in -m or-<(i. 
The dual is omitted in the table, as it but seldom occurs. For 
other changes by dialect, see § 101 throughout. 



-9 Table exhibiting the most usual Dialects of the termination* 
of Greek Verbs. 

I. ACTIVE VOICE. 

FINITE MOODS. 

SINGULAR. 

1 Pers. -VPh -®« -W^ ; D. -e^tand (if from- to)) *ajit ; 

as, tIO-fjuui for -?/ ( ^; for-a^t for <W- 

rjfii. 
-elv, I. -sac, D. A.-j?; as, exe^rjy.?/ for -eiv. 

.oT/lu, A. -air]*, D. -<jJ7]v ; as, q>ik-oli]v for -oI/«. 

-g)/k*, A. -6r]v ; as, Tifx-iorjv for -co^t. 

-oir\v, A. -q5?/^ ; as, did.b)i]v for did-olrjv. 

And so on through all the persons. 

2 Pers. -**£, D. -eg, JE. -?/?; as, tiue'ly-eg for -£*£. 

-ag, -?/£, A. -aoOuf-rjoOu- as, tcp-ijcjOu for -rg ; o»'J- 

aada, contr. ol'uOu for oldag, 
-«*c, iE. A. -£<a£ ; as, Tvip.eiug, tor -oag. 

-g$, A. D. --jjc ; as, qpotr-r/g, for -<?g. 

3 Pers -6t * preS ' D * "*' *• " ?/; aS ' f * 7rT "? for "*'• 

1 ( pfap- A. -?;, I. -££; as, faejixp ?/ for -£t. 

-ca, iE. A. -ete ; as, Tuip.eie for -at. 

-r ( , I. -yn; as, rbnx-rfji for -ij. 

-a, -f7, I). -?], -77 ; as, oo-jj for-?. 

D. -Tt ; ag, ii' ! i r n for -at. 



-at, 



I'LUKAL. 



1 Pe?\s. ^wy, 1). -/**£; as, idnjo-fteg for -^e^ ; zvip -ov 

fieg or - D^eg for -o^ey ; (piX-bvfieg for 
/ /• ; dqX-odjieg for •ovjtsv, 
-TjfiEv, \. -//< By ; as, ilyOeb-fiep for ivcpO^t-^fisp 



DIALECTS OF VERBS IN CO AND M. 125 

-??t£, A. -T£ ; as, TvcpOei-is for Tvq6st~r]ts. 

~Gi, D. -*>T£; as, ddr\x-avTL for -acu; ex-torn 

for .wo-t; Xiy-ovTt, for A^-oi>a*; TeA- 

fvirt for -ovai; cpiX-ovvii for -o£i<7£ ; -r/0- 

£^rt or -7/^rt for 'Blcri ; dld-upii for -ova* 
B. into ^ ; as, isTvcp-av for -«<7t. 
-5<t/, -vol, -eXoi, I. -saai, -vuul. -taut, ; as, de,vKv.vacr< 

for -C5crt ; rid-eixcri for -elai. 
-overt, I. -even ; ~6uai j D. -oro*£ ; as, did-oatr 

for .ova*. ; cpiXe-oKji for -ouat. 
-o^, B. -ocr«y; as, ea^d^-oaa^ for -o^. 

.ecrccv, -7](j(xr, -oaav, -(Daav, P. -ei>, -a*>, -o^, -co^ ; as, 

liO-ev for -eoav ; ed-o^ for -Ocr«y ; $yj>- 

-co*> for -wo"«^. 
-etaav, A. I. -soap ; as, elKr^cp-eoav for -eicrav. 

-rjxttOT., -dtfaat, JE. A. -aot; as, jeOv-aai for -rjjcao^. 
-cuev, 2Ei, A # -£*a^ ; as, Tvyj.etav for -aiev. 

1. 2. 3. 3. 3. 

-drcoaa*', -hcocrav, -stjojoav^ -OTCnoav, -otfrcocra*', A. 
into 

1. 2. 3. 

-d^Tco^, -cWa>*>, -ovvtcov ; as, TVVJ-&VTCDV 

for -dTOja«^ ; Aej'-oVtc^ for -eTcoaav ; 

Xvn.ovvTOJv for -sItcoocxv. 

-&ov. contr. -raj/, ) -^ T - > ~ r 

. «. 7 > JJ. 1. -£t>^ : as, rivafT-evv tor -cay. 

-£oy, contr. -ou^, ^ ' • M 

INFINITIVE. 
-S^, -SVCU, I. '"/U8V, A. D. -£[JISVCU,-£VV) Mi. -SV, -7jl> ; 

as, eW-epevai for -e**' ; dfiely.ev for 

-£^ ; ild-euev and -euevai for -evai. 
-a*, 1. D. -iuevui\ as, Tvip-e^evai for -<**. 

-ay, A. D. -A/Herat,, -ifv, iE. -jy*, -?ys, .cat, , as, 

£fy for £?v. '(§ 98. O65. 2.) 
-ow, A. D. -6[ievcu 9 X\.-evv,-(bv, iE. -o?£ 3 -oI> ; 

as, ()iy-(bv for .ovj>. 

PARTICIPLES. 

.ovcru, D. -oXau, -evau ; as, £aT-£wa for £^t- 

oi)<7«. 
-ot£, -«a«, -«v, D. -«*?, -caaft, -ca^ ; as, (ilip-uig foi 

-«g, &c 
11* 



126 



DIALECTS or VERBS IN cu AND H*. 



$ 102. 



•fft<.<&S, I -rh<, -o,\ A. -u)c, -wau, -u)£ ; as, ear-dj; for 
-««-<)>£, ♦ -v^w;, § 101. 7. I. -ecog. 

-u>c, ./E. -ai*; as, rsrvy-otv, G.-ovTog, for -o>£, 



1 Pe 



2 Pers. 



1 Pers. 
3 Pers. 



II. MIDDLE AND PASSIVE. 

FINITE MOODS. 

SINGULAR. 

-ojitocc, 1 f. D. -o£//at; as, rvip-ov/biai for .o/za* 

-ovuui, D. -fvfiut, ; as, ftuO-ev/ucu for ovpai. 

-/'?/>', D. - ( ua^ ; as, irvTrrd-fiav for -^r/*'. 

-j7, A. -£*, I. iridic. -e«t, subj. -^a* ; as, 

fiovl-et, for -if. 

-oif, I. -co, D. -ev ; as, n^x-ey for -ou. 

-w, I. -ao ; as, £kvG-ao for -w. 

PLURAL. 

-eda 9 D. -EdOa ; as, Ixdu-eaOa for -e#a. 

-vtoli, -ivov slat, 1. -aTa* or -iaxai ; as, K&aaai for 
xeIvtoii,' elgv.aTaifor -vxav ; ta^s^-aTa* 
for .y/uivoi slat, (§ 101. 12.) 

-vto, -^ot ^aa^, I. .«to or -£«to ; as, nEvOoi-aio for 
-oivxo ; iysv-iaio {or -ovzo ; £*0Tu:A-aT0 
for -fiivov r\(jav, (§ 101. 12.) 

-rjaav, Mt. -ev ; as, dvvrjQeZ.ev for -ycrtxv ; ervyO- 

EV for -TjGCCP. 

.coouv, A. I. D« -0)*> ; as, IeZ&vO-wv for -wvav. 



-rival, 



INFINITIVE. 
D. -r\jU6va^ JE. 
for -?p«&. 



-rtfiEv; as, lsKp6-rnu6> 



-ovuevog, 



PARTICIPLES. 

D. JE. .Evfievog ; as, (piX.svjUEvog for -ov 



1 



^ 103 SECOND CONJUGATION. 127 

§ 103. SECOND CONJUGATION. 

3. Verbs of the second conjugation end in ^t, 
and are formed from pure verbs of the first, as 
follows : 

1. -co is changed into - t % and the short vowei 
before it is changed into its own long, or the 
doubtful vowel lengthened; thus, 

From g6s(x) is formed vSr^u, I extinguish, 
yvooj „ yv&ju, I know. 

(paco „ <prj[il, I say. 

xlvco „ xkv t ut, 9 I hear. 

2. Regular verbs in -db, -so, -6co, reduplicate the 
initial consonant with i in the present and im- 
perfect; thus, 

From dico is formed dt.drjui, T bind, 
6i(o Tl-dijui, I place. 

d6(o dldoQt.i^ I give. 

But nUco makes Ttlunl^ui, I Jill. (§6. 19.) 

3. Verbs beginning with a vowel, prefix t, 
which is called the improper reduplication ; thus, 

From so) is formed ¥-i}{u, I go. 
eco ^-?y ( a^, J send. 

Obs. 1. Also verbs beginning with ox or m prefix v with 
tiie aspirate ; thus, 

From <tt(£w is formed l-o-xrjfiv. 

71T&0) „ l-TCZTjfU,. 

4. The reduplication is not used in verbs in 
t^t, nor in those whose radical primitive has 

more than two syllables; thus, 

From y-kvoo comes xlviu, I hear. 
iauo) „ Vcrrjfu, I know, 
ovio) w ovrjUL, I assert. 

Likewise some other verbs ; as, 

cpdcoj VWh I say, &c. (No. 1.) 

Obs. 2. Some verbs which begin with a vowel repeat the 



128 OF THE ROOT AND AUGMENT. § 104 

first syllable, after the manner of the Attic reduplication, § 90. 
6 , thus, dXrjfu and tiMtXyfU] &X T lf u ail d (i*(£/^*. 

Obs. 3. Some pure verbs add rvv to the root before-^ and 
some mule and liquid verbs add vv in order to pass into -fit, ; 

as 

trusd&Qi} R. axedcx- oxedd-vpv-fii. 

delxo), deix- delx-vv-ui. 

&ow, do- "AP. NY-MI, &Q-vv-[mi,. 

5. Verbs in (u have only three tenses of that 
form ; viz. Present, Imperfect, and 2 Aorist. 
The other tenses are taken from the primitive 
in o, and are of the first conjugation, § 110. 
Verbs in -v(u want the second aorist, and also 
the subjunctive and optative. When those 
moods are needed, they are borrowed from forms 
in -vo. 

Obs. 4. Several verbs form only the 2d aor. according to 
this conjugation, § 85. Obs. 1.; in such cases verbs in -tfco 
have the 2d aor. in ~vv ; as, 



fiidvw from 


(JOCOJ, 


Root (?«- 


2d aor. Wrjv. 


yiyvdjaxo) ,, 

dl'O) ,, 


yvdu), 


5, yvo- 

5, dv- 


55 eyvuv 

55 fiJlf*'. 



06s. 5. Many verbs of this conjugation are deponent, hav 
ing only the passive form, while their signification is active or 
neuter; such are dvvufxai, I can; xsT/uav, I lie; dl'Qrifia^ I 
seek; ohfiai,, I think. 



§ 104. OF THE ROOT AND AUGMENT. 

1. The Root of verbs in .in has but one form, and is the 
same with the firs! root of the; verb from which it is derived ; 
thus, tattifit from trnfam, ft. tna-\ Udrjfu from Q&n, R. Oe-, &c. 

2. In V< rbs that reduplicate, (§ 103. 2.) the reduplication is 
prefixed to the root ID the present and imperfect only. 

3. The imperfect and 2d aorist are augmented in the same 
man ii< r as in rerba of the first conjugation. 



ft 105. 



OF THE TERMINATION. 



129 



§ 105. OF THE TERMINATION or FINAL 
LETTERS. 

1. In the first conjugation the terminations consist of two 
parts, the mood-vowels and final letters, § 91. 2. In the se- 
cond the mood-vowels are wanting and their place supplied by 
the last letter of the root, which sufficiently distinguishes the 
moods by the changes which it undergoes in combining with 
the final letters. 

2. The Final letters in all verbs belonging to this conjugation 
are the same. They are divided into two classes, Primary and 
Secondary. The Primary belong to the present indicative 
only. The Secondary to the indicative of the imperfect and 
2 aorist, and to the optative in all the tenses. They are join- 
ed immediately to the root, and so far as they can be separated 
from it, are as follows : 

I. ACTIVE VOICE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 



PRIMARY TENSES. 



Sing, .(ll, 

Dual. 



-TOV. 



Plur. -</£J>, -T£, 



-VTO-t,. 



SECONDARY TENSES. 

-"> -ft 5 

, 'TOV, •T ; V P 9 

-fiev, -re, -cray. 



Sing. 
Dual. 
Plur. 



IMPERATIVE. 

, -0l 9 -TO), 

, -TOV, -TWV, 

— , -T6, .Tcocrav. 



INFINITIVE. 
-vat,. 
PARTICIPLES. 

N. -vxg, -vTaa, -vt, G. -VTog 9 &c 



II. MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



PRIMARY TENSES. 

Sing. -ucu, -o~ui, .rat, 
Dual. -fi€$ov 9 -adov, -udov, 
?lur, -fieda, -ade, -vtui. 



SECONDARY 
-t*T]V, 

-juedov, 



-fieda, 



TENSES. 
.cro, -to, 
-aOov, -aOrjv. 
-ads, -vto. 



Jmg. 
3ual. 



IMPERATIVE. 

— , -(jo, -a6o, 
— , .vdov, .o6o}v, 
— , -ade. -cfOohjuv. 



N T . 



infinitive. 
-g0ul. 
participles. 
-/uevoc, - t u6vi], -/uevoi 



i 



C(TTTJ-V, -£, , 

terra — , -tov 9 -tt]v, 
icrra-uev, -re, -guv. 



eoiT]-v 9 -g, j 

i(TT1] , -TO*', -TTJV, 

eairj-fisv , -T£, -day. 



L3Q FORMATION Of MODUS AND TENSES. § 1(J6. 

S S 100, FORMATION OF MOODS AND TENSES 
IN THE ACTIVE VOICE. 

In the present and imperfect through all the 
moods, prefix the Reduplication in verbs that 
reduplicate, and then — 

1. For the Indicative. 

Rule Change the short vowel of the root into 
its own long* in the singular of the present and 
imperfect, and in all the numbers of the 2 Aorist, 
and then add the final letters. § 105. 2. ; thus, 

PRESENT. IMPERF. 2d AOK. 

S. 2(JIT]-Ut,, -£, -0"£, 
D. 2<JIU , -TOV,-TOV, 

P. Idia-jxev, -T6, -at,. 

Exc. 1. In the 2 aorist, Tldr^a, dldw/Lu, and 2rjfu, have the long 
vowel in the singular only. 

2. For the Subjunctive. 

Rule. Change the final vowel of the root into 
the subjunctive terminations, -o, -??g, -p, &c. § 92. 
I. ; thus, 

luTTjui,, R. ara- Suhj. Pres. ?or-fo>, -t]g, -77; -t]tov 9 -tjtov, &c. 
2 Aor. or-o>, -rjq, -tj; -rjTOv, -tjtoj', &c. 
Exc. 2. But verbs in -m/m, retain w through all the persons! 
and Dumbers ; as, 

didoiuv from dow, R. do, Subj. Pres. did-G, -w?, -<2> ; -wxov, &C- 

2 Aor. (?-q>, -o>£, -q> ; -Znov 9 &c. 

3. /*V the Optative. 
Rule. Change the final vowel of the root into 
Its own diphthong, and add the secondary final 
letters with yj prefixed; thus, 
Pres i 

Im > ' ( [<nul -'i v ) m W9 -'h &<'• Tt>0tl-Tjv 9 -?/£, -77, &c. didol-rjv, &Cc 
2 Aor. mal-r]r, -qg 9 -77, &c. Oel-rjv, -77;, -77, &c. J0/-77*/, &c. 



♦ See & 96. N. R 



§ 107. FORMATION OF MOODS AND TENSES. 131 

4. For the Imperative. 

Rule. In the Present Ten'se, add the 
final letters to the root ; but in the 2 Aor. change 
the short vowel into its own long; thus, 

Pres. & Imp. tara-Oi, -rco, -top, -tojp, .ts, -Tojaap. 
2 Aor. 0T7J-#t ? -ioj, -top, &c. 

Exc. 3. In the 2 Aorist, tIOiijlu, dldooiu, and lr\ui, retain the 
short vowel and add -g instead of -0* in the 2 pers. singular; 
as, Oe-g, -toj, -top, -tgjp, &c. ; db-g, -to>, -top, -tcop, &c. So also 
anr\ui, q)QT][u, and ^xWh hi the Pres. and Imp. have anhg^ 
<pgsg, cr/sg. 

5. For the Infinitive. 

Rule. In the Present Tense, add the 
final letters to the root, and in the 2 Aorist change 
the short vowel into its own long ; thus, 

Pres. and Imp erf. luTo\-pav, 2. Aor. uvr\-vai. 

Exc. 4. In the 2 Aorist Tldrtfii and Ir^xi change the short 
vowel of the root into si, and dldoo/ui, into ov ; as, 

QsT-vai, sX-vaVj dov-vou. 

6. For the Participles. 

Rule. Add the final letters to the root, and 
then combine by the rules of Euphony, § 6. 18. ; 
thus, 

luTu.PTg, -PTcru, -p, combined lo-T-ag, -aa«, -o\v. 
TiQh-PTg, -ptO(x,-p, „ Tid-elg, -elcra,-8V 

dido-PTg, -ptoul, -p, „ dtd-ovg, -ovoa, -op. 

dtLXPv-PTg,-PTO-a,-p, ,, deixp.vg, -vaa, -tip. 



! 



107. FORMATION OF MOODS AND TENSES IN 
THE MIDDLE AND PASSIVE YOICE. 

Prefix the reduplication in the present and 
mperfect in verbs that reduplicate, as in the ac- 
ive voice; and then, in all the tenses, — 



132 FORMATION OF MOODS AND TENSES. § 107 

I . Fhr the Judicative, Imperative^ hifuiilwc, and 
Participles, 
Rule, Annex the final letters to the root, 
(§ 105. 2,1k); **, 

I ndiral ivr, m lu-iua, -au(,-Tou, &c. Imp. loTo\-nr\v^ -oo, -to, &<"♦ 

Imperative) lata-oo^ -o#a> 5 -crOov,»crdu>r, &c. 

Infinitive, °ujtu-oQul. 

Participles, laju-iierog, -{dvii,-{ievov. 

2. For the Subjunctive. 

Rule. Chcange the last letter of the root into 
the subjunctive terminations, -ci^ou, -$, -yjrat, &c 
§ 92. II. ; as, 

ivTtjui, R. otol- Subj. Pr. & Imp. IvT-wficu, -yj, -tjtcc*, &c. 
2 Aor. or-G^at, -77, -rjxat, &c. 

JE;rc. Verbs in -ftya retain w through all the numbers and 
persons, as in the active ; as, 

dldojjAi, R. do- Subj. Pr. & Imp. did-w/uat,, -co, -cotou, &c. 
2 Aor. d-w/uai, -co, -cotcu, &c 

3. .For £/ie Optative. 

Rule. Change the last letter of the root into 
its own diphthong, and add the secondary final 
letters ; as, 

l(Jir}[ii, R. ora- Opt. Pr. & Imp. laral-iurjv, -ao, -to, &c- 
2 Aor. o-iat-/ui]v y -ao, -to, &c. 

(Jbs. o is usually rejected in the 2d pers. singular ; making, 

ICTTuL-firjV, -O, -TO, &C. OTul-f.U]V^ -O, -TO, &c. § 109. 8. 

N. B. As the root of verbs in -pi ends in «, a, o, or v, these 
vowels combining with the final letters cause the appearance 
of four different forms of termination, and for this reason foui 
ligms have usually been given, though there is in facJ 
only one, This can tend only to perplex and obscure the sub- |i 
ject, and to impose unnecessary labour on the learner. If their 
( hangi - which affect the root are carefully studied according I 
to the preceding rules, § 106, 107, this conjugation will be 
d even more simple than the first The following table 
will show that in whatever vowel the root end, still there is but 
one foj in of inflection. 



§ ^08. PARADIGM OF VERBS IN -[It. 133 

§ 108. PARADIGM OF VERBS IN -Ml. 

ACTIVE VOICE. 

PRESENT TENSE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD, § 106. 1. 

Sing- Dual. Pl ur . 

for?/ 

ride f 

TOP, -TOP , 



ridri 
Ma 



icjTa 
Tide 
dido 
delxpv 



./USP, -T8, 

^^ (del* 



%(JTaov a 
tIQsuji. 
didovac. 



Iut 
xid 
Sid 



tfJTal 

ridel 
Sidol 



SUBJUNCTIVE, § 106. 2. 



-6, -9^ -w, 



"7^ -?£> "% 



-7JTOP, -7JT0P, 

-mop. -mop. 



Sfisv, -7JT£, -wo v. 
-(Q/uev, -me, -©at. 



OPTATIVE, § 106. 3. 



-7/TG^ -tfTTjV, 



-rjfiev^ -T]T6 9 .rjaav 



-TOP. 



-TWP. 



IMPERATIVE, § 106. 4 
l(TT(X -0t,3 

Selxpv.di, 

INFINITIVE, § 106. 5. 

fare/: 



-TS, -TW(7a*'.$ 



! 

I 

I 

0~TT] 
'Tt6 V 

dido 
delxvv 




PARTICIPLES, § 106. 6. 

lar-ag, -aaa, -dp. 
Tid-elg, -elua, -iv. 
did-ovg, -ovacc, -6p. 
Oeixp-vg -vera, -vp. 

IMPERFECT TENSE, § 109. 6. 

INDICATIVE MOOD, § 106. 1. 

Dual. Plur. 

Iotcx, \ 

hide f 

bdeivv ) 

The other moods in the imperf. are wantino-, 
'V° te - Tk * J mbers 1, 2, 3, &c. refer to the same numbers in § i09. 

* § 6. O65. 5. — 

12 




134 



PARADIGM OF VERBS IN ~fU. 



§ 108. 






PARADIGM OF VERBS IN .ML 
ACTIVE VOICE. 

SECOND AORIST. 

INDICATIVE MOOD, § 106. 1. 



Sing. 



S> —9 




Dual. 



-TOf, ~T7jV 9 



Pi jr. 



-a«^. 7 



SUBJUNCTIVE, § 106. 2. 



or 
6 


{ -&, '% '% 


-r\TOv, -t\top, 


-0){LtSV, -^jT£, -G)(/* t 


d 


5 


-&TOV, -tblOV, 


-(ofier, -fore, .ok/fro 



OPTATIVE, § 106. 3. 




'W, -vs> ~v> 



-7JTOV, -^T?]V, 
IMPERATIVE, § 106 4 



-7][J,SV, -t]T6, -IJUCtV. 




-TOV. -TO)*', 



-76, -T0)(7«?, 



INFINITIVE, § 106. 5. 



crrr] 

5o 



! ! 



■VUl, 



PARTICIPLES, § 106. 6. 

falg, 6eT vet, Oh. 
dovg, dovvix, d6v. 



Note 1. The numbers, 1,2, 3, &C, refer to the same numbers in § 109. 
in these tables as in the tables of the first conju 



§ il ^. PARADIGM OF VERBS IN JUL. 

PARADIGM OF VERBS IN -MZ. 
MIDDLE VOICE. 

PRESENT TENSE. 



13d 



INDICATIVE, § 107. 1. 

Sin g- Dual. 



icrra 

dido f -iU(*i,.oa h -T(x h 

delxiv 



-fiedov, -odor, -udov % 



did .wz/a^-toj-Sra^ 



SUBJUNCTIVE, § 107. 2. 



Plur. 
•usda, -ad6 9 -VTcu. 



>d)ue6a, -riaOs, -aviat* 



-(hueQov, -t\o~6ov, &c. 
(buedov, -(badop, Szc.^ueda, -wads, -uvtou 

OPTATIVE, § 107. 3. 
Icrral \ 

udet \ -urjv, -o, (ao8)-TO, 
didoi ) 



lot a 

Tide 

dido t -°°>* - g6 ^ 

delxi'v 

Lnfinitive, § 107. 1. 

-Odea. 



■[leQov, .(j6ov,-o-dr]v, 
IMPERATIVE, § 107. 1. 



•/tieda, -<7#£, -VTO. 



-, -udov, -oOuv, 





-ade, -vdwaav 

PARTICIPLES, § 107. 1, 
[tevog, -[zevrj, -fievov. 



Sine 



rid 

Till, 



IMPERFECT TENSE. 

INDICATIVE, § 107. 1. 

Dual. 



-pedov, -odov .(jQqv, 



) lf )6 > -Wy-voyt-to, 

)eixji' 

The other moods of the imperfect are wanting 
Hole. The numbers S, 9, refer to the same numbers in § 109. 



Plur. 
ueda, -crdsy -vto. 



J 36 



PARADIGM OF VERBS IN fU. 



§ 108. 



PARADIGM OF VERBS IN -ML 
MIDDLE VOICE. 

SECOND AORIST. 

INDICATIVE MOOD, § 107. I. 

Sing. Dual. Plural. 



ids ^ m Wy " ao > " T0 9 

m 



-/lieOov, -adov, -(rOyr, 



•{LieOa, -ade 9 -vto. 



SUBJUNCTIVE, § 107. 2. 



I - 



a > -cottar, -77, -rjrat, 
d -aJ,uat,-a5,-C0Tfa, 



-(bllls0oV,-l\(T0oP, &C. 

-to/Liedov, -Cocrdov, &c. 



-(b t ueda, .c5o~#£, -co^ra*. 



OPTATIVE, § 107. 3. 



OTCcl 



tiol 



(JKjC } 

Oi i -ao* .crflai, 
36 S 



ftieOov, -oOov, .(t6t]v, 

IMPERATIVE, § 107. 1. 
-odov, -rrduiv, 



-[leOa, --aOs, -vto. 



-ads, -oOwoav* 



INFINITIVE, § 107. 1. PARTICIPLES, § 107. 1. 



i v 



01 \ -oda*. 

M ■ s 



CTT'X \ 

0i \ .[ievog f .ftivr], 

d6 j 



fXSVOV. 



Tb tfT and imperfect passive arc like the pre 

IENT and IMPERFECT MIDDLE. The SECOND AOR. PASS. IS\ 

wanting. 

N&U . \ : <>< the other teases of verba in pi, sec §§ 1 JO and J 11, and for thet 
rtieJecto, j i02. 



§ 109. OBSERVATIONS ON VERBS IN ft*. 137 

§ 109 OBSERVATIONS ON VERBS IN p*. 

ACTIVE VOICE. 

1. The final letters of the 3d pers. plur. are properly -vtoi-, 
and these, combining with the preceding vowel, according to 
the rules of Euphony, (§ 6. 18.), become -aav, -eiui, -ovgi, 

vuij -cocn. 

2. In the optative, r\ is often dropped before the final letters 
of the plural making- 

~cauev, -ouT8) -aiev ; -eifxev^ -ene^-siev ; -oifxsv, -cure, -ot,sv, 

instead of 

ah;uev 9 -al)]TS. -alrivav • -ehjiusv, &C. 

3. lctttjui, has sometimes tor^ for 2cna6v in the imperative ; 
and in compounds oia is commonly used for ovr\dv\ thus, ava(j- 
ra for dpacTTrfic; tcuouotu for 7TaQaaT7]di, &c. 

4. So also tIOtj/u, dlduui, and 2i][u, have sometimes rldsi^di- 
dovy 2si>, for Ti'#6Tt, dldodt,, isdc; but these are properly contracted 
forms of the primitive verb with the reduplication, used in the 
Ionic and Doric dialects ; thus, r^e'co, imper. rldes^ contr. 
ildei. 

5. As in verbs in -co, (§ 101. 2.) so also in those in /u, svt&v 
is used for -sTQcrav in the imperative 3d pers. plural. 

6. The primitive in -oj, with the reduplication, is sometimes 
used instead of the form in -fM in the present and imperfect ; 
thus, 

Present, 

Tjfito), -ietg, .set, contr. -co, -et£, -et, for tL0t]jlu, -rjg, -iquv^ &c. 
i(TT(xu). -uecg, -6lei, contr. -co, -ac, -a, for t<JTf]fM 9 -qg, -rjOL, &C 

Imperfect, 

UlOeov, -fee, -ee, contr. -ou^, -etg, -£^, for hldrjv, -?/c, -?/, &c. 

hrough all the moods. 

7. The terminations -uvuv, .evuv, &c. in the 3 pers. plur., 
Pf ire frequently shortened by syncope; as, ?ot«j> for frjrairwj'; 

hidsv for ixiOtrruv ; £6W for fflifvav, 

3IIDDLE AND PASSIVE. 

8. In the 2d pers. sing, of the imperfect indicative, mid. 
.nd pass, a is often rejected, and the concurring vowels con- 

12* 



TEN98B rOMraO PROM TH* PRIMITIVE. § 110, 

ad : thus, fared for ftrcaao ; rfflou foriflfetro, &c. So in the 
v Bom , for forroora*. Also in the 2d pers. 

. of the optative, a is rejected, but the vowels, being inca- 
pable of contraction, remain unchanged. 

The same contraction takes place in the imperative ; but 
in the 2d aor. Oiao is contracted into Oov only in compounds; 

:i<. rtaO&Oov, v.inOov, &c. 



§ 110. TENSES FORMED FROM THE PRIMITIVE. 

Verbs in fu have only three tenses of that form; viz. the 
Present, Imperfect and 2d Aorist. All the other tenses are 
formed from the first root of the primitive, as in the first con- 
jugation, (§ 98. 2.) and are inflected as the same tenses in 
verbs in -co ; as, 

TiOrjiu, from flew, has 1 fut. O^aco, O^cropai, &c. 
dldu)ju, from dou), has 1 fut. Sucrco, dwvo/uai,, &c. 
Icrjrjfu, from cridtu), has 1 fut. orrjaw, 1 aor. lanjaa, &c. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

1. First Future. Some verbs occasionally retain the re- 
duplication ; as, didihaco from dldwiu, and verbs from deriva- 

in -ty(o and -wv® form the future from their primitives ; 
thus, delxvv/m from detxruo), has the 1 Fut. defi-a from delnu. 

2. First Aorist. Tifimii, dldwut, and 2i]fic, have ~xu and 
-xaptjp instead of -era and -uaix^v in the 1st aorist indicative; 
as, 1 aor. eOrjxa^LfJr/xfx/it^v ; td(oxu 9 td(oxu t ui]v, &c. In these verbs 
the other moods of this tense are wanting. 

?> Perfect and Pluperfect Active. Verbs in -jut from £w com- 
monly have Bt before -*a of the perfect; those from db> 
i, or '< ; as, ildijfii from Oew, Perf. iWeixu ; ?ot?//u from 
trraw, P ■ /; . i !• tnnxa. ]n these tenses ?cm//u aspi- 

3 lii" augment, and, except in the singular of the in- 
a Syncopated form which resembles the pre-j 
I ■</.<<[}/)■, by .' , soT<x[jier y &c. inf. 

; participle, as § 101. 7. 
Ofa. The | <<//,/// has a present signification ; J 

thus, HoTijua, I standi plup. Saitjxet*', I stood. In the pres., j 
Imp., Fut., and 1 Aor. cities to place, to cause to 

stand. Jn tfc e throughout, £o be placed. The 2 Aor. 

Middle is not in U5" 



<* III, 112. IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS IN fit. 139 

4. Passive voice. The short vowel of the root remains 
short before a consonant in the passive voice ; as, dtdwfit, 1 
Futpass.&>-0TJo-o/*a*, 1 Aor. ido-Orjv, Perf. dedo-uai, &c. But 
€t before -xa in the perfect active returns before -fmi in the 
Perf. passive ; as, Perf. Act. ridst.xa, 1 Fut. Pass. TeS^ao/uat, 
(§ 6. 4.) Perf. Pass. TeQsL-fiai. 

5, Tenses wanting. Verbs in ,^ want the second and third 
roots, and consequently the tenses derived from them ; viz. 
the Second Future Passive, the 2d Perfect and 2d Pluper- 

t Active, and the 2d Aorist Passive. 



§ 111. TABLE EXHIBITING ALL THE TENSES 
OF VERBS IN MI. 



ACTIVE. 



Present. 2o-Ttjfu. 
Imperf. loxnv. 






1 Fut. 

2 Fut. 

1 Aor. 

2 Aor. 

Perf. 



OT7J(7G), 

%UTT] GCC 9 

Z(JT7\V, 

ear ana or 



MIDDLE. 
tarafiac, 

ICFT&flTjV, 

ajr\uofiat. 
i(TT7](r&fiJ]v 9 

£(TT<kfl7]V, 



PASSIVE. 

tojafiat. 
lax&firfv. 

UTad^GOflOti. 

loi&Qnv, 



•rjxa, 



Pluperf. hcrT&xetv or elo-T&xeiv. — , 

Verbs in MI to he conjugated 



ecnafiat. 

ko~T&flJ]V. 



lr ( ut. from ©w, I send. 

] ° 6 /r< \a3iu, I extinguish. 
ohtvvvui, \ ' 



tsvyrvfu, 

dlSrjfit, 

ImrifU) 

VVfUy 



££ityoj, I join. 
di% I bind* 

TCTUO), I jhl. 

drew, I help, 
dfioo), I swear* 



7i I firth} fri, from ntevi* I Jill* 
hence 7iM\6(o. 



olivet,, 

vlXTjftt, 
Cpljfll, 

xlvut, 



ota'w, I destroy, 
vtx&at, I conquer. 
(jAa, I say. 
xlvw, I hear. 
q6g>. I strengthen. 



§ 112. IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS 

in p*. 

The Irregular and Defective verbs in fit are usually reck- 
oned nine, viz. slut, I am; et/u and hjfu, I go ; trjfit, I send; 
eTfiut, I clothe myself; \*mi, I sit ; xslfia*, I lie down; q>tjfil 9 I 
ay ; and T&ifii, I know. The parts in use are as follows : 



140 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS IN ft*. 

I. Eif*', lotto. 

ACTIVE VOICE. 



§ 112 





PRESENT TENSE. 






Indicative. 




s. 
I). 


el/il, elg or el. 


ioidv, 


p. 


ia/Ltkv, icne, 

Subjunctive. 


elol. 


s. 


7\T0V y 


i 

7lT0V f 

(hen. 


L). 
P. 




Optative. 




S. 

D. 
P. 




Sty, 

eirjaav. 




Imperative. 


Infinitive. 


Participles 


S. 


£(70, £0"TW, 


slvav. 


M. ft*, 


T). 


Mcriov, eanov, 




F. ovaiXy 


P. 


I'ors, sGKaaav. 




N. 6V. 




IMPERFECT TENSE. 






Indicative. 




S. 
1). 
P. 


fa 




% or fa 



The other moods the same as in the Present 
MIDDLE VOICE. 

IMPERFECT. 

Indicative. 



tufa, 



too, 



^T0, 

^a6ijv 9 

f(VTO. 



1 FUTURE tense. 

fndie. toojuat, OpL ioot/iiiv, Inf. taeodcu, Part. £<r^ti£rog, regular 



§ 112 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS IN [U. 

THE CHIEF DIALECTS OF elfiL 

ACTIVE VOICE. 

PRESENT. 

Indicative. 

1. 2. 3. 



141 



Sing. 


ElfU, D. £/i/U, 


s7s, or £?, I. sets j P. hi, 


£OTl, D. £vrt, fiVi. 




M. tfit. 


saal. 




Piur. 


£(T(l£V, Upss, 

P. efj.lv, elfxev* 


l(TT£, P. £>£. 

Subjunctive. 


£tatj D. £i/ri, JE. ep«, svv- 
ti, P. I'acn, saaai* 


Sing. 


c5, I. eo), P. £io>. 


jfr, I. £7J£, P. £i^J. 


J, I. i'77, £<tj, wi, irjat 9 

P. filV*. 


Plur, 


upiev, D. u/xeg, 
P. 8i(*)jj.£v, £io/<£»>. 


ijrs. 

Optative. 


cocri, I. eoiai. 


Sing. 


etrjVj I. soi/xi. 


UrjS, I. £otf. 


EITJ, I. £0C. 


Plur. 


eirijievj I. tlfitv. 


£t»7r£. 

Imperative, 


Etrjaav, I. A. £?£y. 


Sing. 




£(70, P. £CTO-0, A. t(T0t. 


sarco. 


Plur. 

1 




£crr£. 


sarcoaav, A. saroiv, r»lov 

TOiV. 



Infinitive. 

ilvai. I. £//£v, £?ju£v, D. h*nevai, i^iy^es, £7ju££, ./E. e^fx£vai f P. efijiev. 
Participle. 
Fern, owa, I. £3wo, D. 



M. wi/, I. £a>v, iE. £t?. 



Sing. »ji>, I. £a, ija, P. IVj 

£t/?V, Wj fW, 7]&f, 

egkov. 

Du. 



« 



'iur. i)u£i>, D. v[i£g : P. £/^' 



Mu 



Sing, ecoaai, D. eaovfjai, 

£<T£VfXai, P. £CT<7> 

/iai. 
ur. fo6p£0a,/E,. IcojxzcTOa. 



, 



fiutra, eoicra, £a<rcra, 
JEi. ucra, £acra. 

IMPERFECT. 

Indicative, 
rjg, I. ££?, £££?, P; Jfo, 

£tff, £CT/C£?, iE. )V" 

0a, srjzQa. 
r\TOV) zE. £crroi/, P. £TOJ/, 

/JT7-0l\ 

i^r£, I. £a-£. 

MIDDLE VOICE. 

IMPERFECT. 

Indicative. 

FIRST FUTURE, 

Indicative. 

£T7J, A. £i7£{, I. £(T£ai f iff' 

F£/U, D. £<rJ7, leaf/, 

P. £<TGT). 

e<reade. 



Neut. 6V, I. £oV, iE. lv 



?, or J|i», I. D. fc, fo, P. 

£cr>c£. 
rJTYjv, A. ^aT^j/, P. errrrjv. 
qaav. P. IWi/, £<xaav. eokov. 



, I. £i 



aro, £iaro. 



ZcrST.ii, D. laeirni, £<7(tu* 
rai, P. lateral. 



Tnfin. iaeaQaij P. IffffeoQcu. 

I 



Icrovrai, I). loovvTOLl, 
Particip. lao/ievas, P. £?<76'u£i/of. 



1 42 ULREGULAH 4ND DEFECTIVE VERBS TN {/!, §112- 







U. AV/c/, J#0« 








ACTIVE VOICE, 








1' RESENT TENSE. 






ulav. 


Dual. 


Prtirdl. 


Indie. 


hui. slg or Bij 


e7<Tt 3 IVov, Ito?, 


tyter, Trf, r<rt or IW* 




/"<... 


///, YijTOi. Yi^'ov, 


I'wpsv^ /'^Tf, ?'ax7t. 




'//. f(>/C, 


mm, Yoitov^ ioItt}V 9 


loiter, ions, loiev. 




— r#*, 


tiai, /ro*', ito)?, 


frfi, I'Twvav. 


Infin. 


«&Y<a. Part. 


Jew, ioi'(Ta, iov : Gen 

IMPERFECT. 

Indicative. 


iovTog, iovayg, &c 


Sing. 


ijei? or //«, 


tjSlQ OP ?)fi(7L>« 3 


?jst, 


Dual. 




fftiTov or ?)tov, 


fjshrjV or /?t^, 


Plur. 


fjeifiev or f//u«', 


?J*IT8 or ?}t€, 


yeaaVj Ion. ffiaav. 



Middle VQicE.~T&ficct, to hasten. 

Indicative. 

Present, l-spai, -taai, -etcu, -tpeQov, &c. 
Imper/. i-ifit)V) -£(to, -cto, -t^ndov, &c. 

0/>5. 1. The Attics, anil sometimes the Ionians, use the Present 
of h,u/, in the Indie, Inf., and Part., in a Future sense, " I will go? 

Qbs. 2, The ancient Grammarians have another form of the Im- 
perfect, viz. hV, ngj str—Vtov, \xi\v — I'fisv, Irs, Xaav\ — and of the 
second Aorist, Xov % ng, Ye, &c; hut, except the third persons fe, 
tnpf i and i'auv. peculiar to epic writers, no such forms are found. 

III. c I/]jlu, to send, from ! EQ. 

ACTIVE VOICE. 



Indir. iitfU, u r \ u t (TL, tVror, I'sTOy, IV/iH', Em, lacr*, or feicrf. 
OpL Ulrp . Ulrjg, & c, 

<. 'ill ('a Hi), lino. I ;r, &Tf, UTUXTOCV. 

Infin. itri/.i, Participles, lug. luvi/^ ttV, 6Vjn. fcfiVlo?, &c. 



§ 112 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 143 

IMPERFECT. 

Indie, hor, ts*& tsi. ft, c , « « « 

t , > t?TOK l£T«V, t£,tt£V. l£I€, t6cra*>. 

Coiitr. tovi; tug, iu< \ ' . ' - ' 



frtcfoc. 7,'fJ-CO, -£££, &C. 

fntftc. t/^-a, -ac, &c. 



FUTURE. 



1 AORIST. 



2 AORIST. 



frolic. Same as \<t Aor. stro^, sj/ngv, £t/./S3>, sits, euro?. 

>SW.//. CO, //C, fa &c. 

OjU/. F«/>', EllfC, fi^. 6tTO*', flV?/^ ffytSV, ftTSj EISV. 

Imper. Ic, IVco : etov, I'tow Its, etckktuv. 

Infin. uvea. Participles, mg, etcol, IV, 6re7z. IWoc, &c. 

Perf. fb-a, -w£, &c. Pluperf. £«*-£«>, -eig : &c. 

MIDDLE VOICE. 

PRESENT. 

Indie, ufiaij iWcti, Eetcm, Ufie&ov^ &c. 

*Sz/Z>/. iwfiai,, If). Irjai. Icn^e&ov^ &c. 

0/)£. lolfir t v : &c. Imper. hoo or i/ou. /ra/iw. mv&ou. Part. U(isvog,&,c. 

Indicative. 
Imperf. w^v, IWo, &c. Fut. rjo-ofiou, &c. 1 Aor. fjxdfirjv, &c. 

2 AORIST. 

Indie. Hfirjv, sicro, sIto, ufis&ov, siaxrov, ctcrth^, eifie-d-ct, &c. 

iSi^y. CO|U«t, ^, 7/TOW, &c. 

0/)£. ofytjV. oio, olio, &c. rarely uixi]v^ elo &c. 

Imper. oi/, I'cr^co, &c. /w/zra. ea&cu. Part, E(iEvog, -rj, -ov, 

Perf. Indie, sifiou, sivai, &c. /n/m. uv&cti. 
Plperf. /weZi'c. a]u?7*>, ucro, &c. 

PASSIVE VOICE. 

Future. Indie, e&r^ofxai. 

1 Aor. Indie, u&tjv. Part, s&slg. 






144 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. ^ 112 

IV. Elficei, 1 clothe myself. 

This Verb comes from se^ to grc i«/o, to be sent, or, p?^ fata. — 
Middle, to put one?* y< if into, to clothe one?* self; and it ia the 
same in the Present Middle, and Present and Perfect Passive; thus, 

PRE8. MID., AND PRES. AND PERF. PASS. 

Indie. S. u-[aui, -am, -toll and -aiai. — 3d PL eivuxi. Part, H^ierog. 

FIRST AORIST. 

Indie, na (ftfo"-, ktia) -d[xr}v, -e»), -aio, &c. Part. i(S(rd^vog % 

PLUPERFECT. 

Indie. «£/u^v, dao, and iWo; sJto. eiaro, cotto, and coro. 3d PL firro 

V. Eloa, did set, did place. 

Elect, a poetic defective verb signifying to lay, viz. a founda- 
tion ; to erect (a building); to place (an ambush), has the fol- 
lowing parts. Active Voice. 1 Aor. Indie, eiaa; Imper. uvov; 
Infin. Hcroa-, Part, siow?, and eaag. Middle Voice. Indie, slad- 
fitp ; Part, s laufisvog ; Future, eiaoficu, seldom used. The de- 
fective parts are supplied from tdgvoa. — The Perfect Passive, 
having the force of an intransitive Present, is as follows, 

VI. Tfycu, I sit. 

This verb may be regarded as a perfect passive from ao, 1 
pnl, place, or set ; Plup. p. / have been placed or set, and re- 
mainso; i. e. 7 8& It wants the subjunctive and optativf 
except in the compound x&Oijfiab, which has x60(* t uat 9 xadolfinv. 
&c. and is more common than ^mi. 

pres en y. 

Indie. 7 r uui.-(;<u,-T<nA-ut0ov, -aQov, -(jOovA-urOa, -ode, -viau. 

. -Of), -(jOul.i , -(jQoi' 9 -(T0(*>l>,\ , -vOh, •(rOoKJU!'. 

i dcu. 

. ''■' ''".-, ',, 'OP. 

IMPERFECT. 
) 9 \-fAeBov 9 -oOov, -crOnr, \-fieda, -crds, -vw. 

Ob u the Ionian rat, and the Poets sta- 

and for ^vto in like manner tare and e&rre. So also 
for *&0qrtat and Kcfcfyj [onic forms are uatiurai asii3 

taziaio. § 10t. 12. 



§ 112. 



IRREGULAR AND EEFECTIVE VERBS. 



145 



VII. Kaftan Hie down. 

This verb may be regularly derived from xsia, for ew by 
prosihesis of xe ; xeia becomes xhjta in the 2 conj. and in the 
middle, xe'fuca, by contraction, xsT/aca. It has the Ionic forms, 
ueaiai and examo for xeXvxai and f.xslvto. § 101. 12. 



Singular, 
indie. xeI-uui, -crat, -t«£, 

/;if. xeigOuu. 

Part, xztuevog, -7/, -o^. 



PRESENT. 

Dual. 

- t ueOov, -odor, .aQov, 
, -adov,-odwV) 



Plural. 
-/Lieda, -o^e, -VTai. 



IMPERFECT. 

Indie. &xel-fAt]v 9 -oo, -to, \-{ie6or,-crdov,-adrivA-u8d<x } -ads,-yTO. 

FIRST FUTURE. 

Indie, xelcr.ouou, -rj, -stou, &c. regular* 

VIII. <£>yj[iL, I say. 

&nfit, except epijg, in the 2d sing. pres. ind. a. is like ?(ttijiu. 
It appears to have had an ancient form fy//, whence, prob- 
ably, we have the forms of the imperfect, \v y f[g, ^, frequently 
used in familiar language with d' sycb and d* 6g ; as, i\v d" eyw, 
"said J," r\ d y oc, "said he." The infinitive cp&vou, is always 
used in the sense of the past time ; as, qpccvcu jbv Swtcq&tt], 
[ Pthat Socrates has said." When the present infinitive is re 
quired it is supplied by Uysw. 

IX. Old a, I know. 

ACTIVE VOIC£. 

PRESENT. 

Singular. Dual. 

\'(JT.0V, I'otop ; 



Ind. old a, oiada*olds; 
Subj.eidu, £^c, eldrj >' &,C. 
Opt. eldehjv, elSelrjg, eldeti] ; &,c. 
Imp. icrdi, I'cftoj; 



Inf. eloivuv. 



lQ-top, i'cnojr; 



Part, eldtig, -vXa i -6g 



Plural. 

l'o[isi> f I'o-Tsfoao-t, 

-, I'cnefoiiticrav. 



* oltug, with the paragogic 6a, oidaoQa, by syncope ola&a. 
Attic form olacug. 



Old 



13 



140 DEPONENT VERBS. § 113. 

r IMPERFECT. 

jffo«C,(Com.if& i >(>«, AtLydiivOu^ifdei, Att. ?/%, 

Dual. j[&i 1 />)/', // de n /, ; 

Plur.tfdt I'd i ,(r,r pa/* y,) iffotTf, (or^ore,) 7j(5f*o-(jc/',(or rfcrav.) 

>''<<, more rarely fii<5ijcrw, I shall know y experience. 
Vt rbal adj. Neat, iaiioj . 
The aorists and perfect are supplied from yiyvwcrxoj. 

Obs. I. OJfta is strictly a 2d perf. from e¥6w,Isee. Perf. 
I hart set », or p< ret hud, i. e. i know. In this sense it is used 
as a present only, and its pluperfect as an imperfect, as above. 
For Xa(ABv t the Ionians have fd/iev ; and for tidevai, the Epic 
writers have Xdfievai y and f^iev. 

Matthiee and the older grammarians derive the above forms, begin- 
with /, by syncope from an assumed verb i'Gtjfii, of which in the 
Doric dialect the forms iaap.ii t'o'^, fooTi, and the part. iW?, are 
extant On the other hand, Buttman, Kahner, and others, think 
these forms all belong to. olda, or ei'dw — that i'ouzr, according to the 
ordinary method of derivation, is formed from the Ionic ftfytey, (§6, 11.) 
which manifestly belongs to Et'dco, and not to I'a^/ni ; while Xarov, utte, 
are, by a similar analogy, from Ltiruv, uJts, from the same, by dropping 
ood vowel ; and that the imperative termination, £*, is substi- 
tuted for the ordinary termination, as is usually done when the mood | 
vowel is omitted, as in yJy.na/Qt, uvwxQi, &c. This is probably the | 
true origin of these forms. (See Buttman's Gr. § 109, III.) It is 
certain, however, that, so far as usage is concerned, the above mixed I 
paradigm of olda is the only correct one. 

For a catalogue of irregular and defective verbs, see § 117. 

§ 113. DEPONENT VERBS. 

1. Deponent verbs are those which under a middle and 
rive form have either an active or middle signification. 

2. Deponent verbs have the middle form, except in the per- 
fect, pluperfect and Paulo-post future, in which the forms are 

Their perfect has sometimes both an active and 

rba have also a passive form of the first 
future tind first aorist, always used in a passive sense. 

t. 'i ;, of deponent verbs are : the Present, Imp er- 

ect, and Paulo -post-future of the passive 
i First Aorist of the middle form ; 
and the Fir$t Future and First Aorist h\ the passive form, and 

- ( )16ai with the paragogic Ou becomes oXoaoOa, and then by syncope olaOa. 
op abfl 



§ 114, 115. IMPERSONAL OR MONOPERSONAL VERBS. 147 

with a passive sense. A few have a second aorist middle. 
They are usually conjugated by giving the Pres. and 1 Fut. 
Mid. and Perf. Pass. ; thus, di%opat, deSoiuai, dedeyiicu. 

SYNOPSIS OF DEPONENT VERBS. 





Indicative. 


Subjunctive. 


Optative. 


Imp. 


Infin. 


Part. 


Present, 
Imperfect, 


cey-o[.iai, ) 
eSs'v-6[.n7i>, ) 


r%-a^au, 


-01/177 J/, 


-01J, 


-saOai, 


-6[,ievog< 


Perfect, 

Pluperfect, 


^eSey-j-iai, ) 
eSsSsy-firjv, ) 


SeSsy-fisvogcoj 


-fxivog efyv, 


-cro. 


-adai, 


-fxsvog. 


1 Future 3.1. 


Sit-opai, 


wanting, 


-GifjyjVj 


wanting, 


-evdai, 


-SpEvog. 


1 Aorist M. 


eSe^-dfirjv, 


Se^-cojJLatj 


-ainrjVf 


-ai, 


-aadai, 


-auevog. 


1 Fut. Pa??. 


Se^dfiG-onai) 


wanting, 


-oi/Ariv, 


wanting, 


-sadai, 


ojisvog. 


1 Aor. Pass. 


cSi^d-rju, 


oV^A-co, 


-filJJV, 


-nrtj 


-rivals 


-etf. 


P. P. Fut. 


6e6i^-ojxai, 


wanting, 


-oi/jirjv, 


wanting, 


-Etrdai, 


-Sfisvog. 



JVbfe. In the above table the imperative and infinitive of the perf. Sicey-co 
and dsSey-cdat are changed by euphony into di8e!-o and 6eSexdai, § 6. 7. 17 



, 



§ 114. IMPERSONAL OR MONOPERSONAL 
VERBS. 

Many verbs are occasionally taken impersonally ; as, doscr- 
*£<, it pleases ; agxel, it suffices; ovjucpsgsi,, it is profitable, &c. 

The following are those which are chiefly taken impersonal- 
ly; viz. 

1. no tree i, it is becoming; eTTQens, it was becoming; ttq&- 
neiv, to be becoming; to ttqsttov^ that which is becoming; pi. 

XU TTQETtOVTa, 

2. uilei, it concerns ; MfteXs, fisl^ae^ fisjiiilnxs and ^e/Liyls. 

3. doxsl, it appears ; tdoxsi, (from doxsoj) ; Mo|e, ( doxo) ; 
id doxovvra. 

4. del) it behoves ; edei, Jerjort, dslv 9 to diov 9 rd diovia, 

5. '/Qvi, it is necessary ; l/g^r, %qt\g6i 9 XQ^ va h and XQ^\ V \ to 
XqIojp. contracted for %giuov. Subj. XQV- 



in 



§ 115. DESTDERYTIVE, FREQUENTATIVE, AND 
INCEPTIVE VERBS. 

1. Desiderative Verbs are those which denote a desire or 
intention of doing. They are commonly formed by adding 
geLw to the first root of the primitive ; as, 

ycAdoj, / laugh ; 1 R. yela- yah/veto), I desire to laugh, 

toXeuio), I make war ; ,, nobe/us- nols/ui^crelo^ I desire war 



148 IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. § 1 16. 

Another form of tkeiderativee is that in -doi or -/<*u>, properly || 
fronj substantives ; as, from Oavaxog^ death; davataut, I long 
for death ; fnoomffbg, a general; inyuiifi'Kxb), I wish to be a 

.//. Also from verbs, by first forming substantives from 

'ii ; as, 

. to buy; [Covi,!)^.) bvTjTt&to) I wish to buy. 
*Xal(a } I weep; (ithxvoiQA xlavoaxio, I am disposed to weep. 

2. Freq,uein i\\Tivi> arc those which signify repeated action. 
These comment) end in -£co ; as, QMTa&w, (from Qlmsiv,)to 

throw from one place to another, Mid. to throw one's self this 
way and thai) to be restless; otbv4lC£w % (from ot&veiv^) to sigh 
much and deeply ; so, from uheTi^ io demand ; all its ir, to beg ; 
n\ to creep; iojiu^eiv^ to creep slowly. 

3. Inci.ptives are those which express the beginning or 
continued increase of an action. These commonly end in 
-a*w ; as, yepeLuoxM, to begin to have a beard; rfiaoxo), to 
grow to manhood; (the same as ysvei&'Qix) and -rjtfciw) ; in part 
transitive; as, (xeOvoxb), to intoxicate ; from fiedvw, I am intoxi- 
cated. 



§ 116. IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 

In many of the Greek verbs, a variety of forms, and an apparent irregu- 
larity in the formation of different tenses appears. This is occasioned partly 
by the adoption of new forms of the present and imperfect tenses, which 
aroused either jointly with their primitives, if they are still in use; or in 
if they have become obsolete, while the other tenses continueas 
irly formed from the primitive verb ; and partly by the use of tense3 
taken from synonymous verbs of a different theme, in the place of those 
which have become nearly or entirely obsolete ; and thus, as it were, out of 
the fragments of two or more verbs, whose other parts have disappeared, is 
formed a new whole. The parts of this whole, being all that remains in 
(roots, considered by themselves are really defective 
gularly formed from their own themes, 
■ to which they are attached, but from 
som ► rel ited t'> it io form or signification, the whole verb is not 

improperly termi pdar* This appellation, then, properly 

1 iture, and perfect, do notfol- 
low t!i j ugation. A few examples will illustrate 

. baa (Juj/w, ri>/a, and 6v<jK0i, all different 

future, and the tenses derived from it, 

jolaily formed fi > and the second aorist iSw from 



§ 116. 



IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 



149 



the form in -jjli. Again, Trda^co, I suffer, has lut. nafl^o-co, and p. neTT&OtjKdi, 
from the obsolete present, naBcM • the 2d aor. ettclQov, 2 p. iri-nnQa, from tho 
obsolete xfiOco; and the 1st f. m. Titiaofiai, (§ 6. 18.,) and 2 p. a. -ni-novda, 
from the obsolete 7rev9oi. In this latter example, Trao-^w, the only present in 
use, with its imperf. eTraa^ov, is a defective verb, having no other tenses de- 
rived from them ; in like manner, the other parts from their respective 
themes are so many defective verbs. But, taken together, and as attached 
to -ac^fd, a theme from which they are not formed, according to the com- 
mon analogy of conjugation, they form what is called an anomalous or irregu- 
lar verb. 

In most irregular verbs the irregularity is caused by the 
adoption of a new present and imperfect, formed by certain 
changes on the root of the verb in these tenses, while the other 
tenses continue to be formed regularly from the primitive root 
or theme. Thus from AH'BSl, is formed the new present 
hiu6(h'(S), imperfect, ilaiSuvov, while the Future, A^i/yw, and 
all the tenses following it are formed regularly from the Root 
AHB. 

In this way new presents are formed from old root* as 
follows : 

I. By the addition of certain letters to the root; thus 



Theme 

1 dox(D, 

2 x/o>, 

3 ccyco, 

80), 

5 IXaoi, 

6 6oeco, 

7 yr,Q<xo), 



Root. 
dox- 

Tl- 

ay- 

tge- 



let. add. 

e< maki 
99 



V 9 

vv, 

VVV, 

eiv, 
ax, 



jj 



New Pres. 


Fut. 


doxi-to, 


66%oo. 


rlv to, 


t/otco. 


dyvu-b), 




8WV-(S). 


£<7C0. 


ilavv-w, 


eldaw. 


sQseiv-o), 


£07]aco. 


y?igaax-o), 


yi]gda(D 



av, 

ax, 
ax, 

ax, 



ujh/.otuv-O), cc ( a(/orrja(0 



II. Of roots that end with a vowel, some drop it before the 
iadded letters; some change o into w, e into ?/, and others 
change b or o ino i ; thus, 

Theme. Root. R. changed, let. add. New Pres. Fut. 

1 U//C/OTc'o), UUUOTS- CLUUOT. 

2 toidho, ioide- £oid- 

3 l'oo>, 'Co- £©- 

4 uh)io), tilde- &Xdq- 

h r\Q'o(Si, 8$QS- FVOI- 

6 <i/.oco, v./.o- uXi- 

7 6i6o), do- ()io)~ 

III. Of roots that end with a *-mute or a r-mute, the final 
mute is sometimes dropped before the added letters ; thus, 

13* 



egidalP- 

'CO)VVV-{Si, 

uldr^ax-o), 
eihlax.o, 

<).il(JX-U>, 

Giowx-a, 



£gidi\aa). 
t&ao), 

evQr^ao), 
6cX(ba(o. 

(jidjau). 



[ 



150 ntnEGur.vR and deftbctivi verbs. § 1 16 

T • '..."•'. .V 10 Pres, Fnt. 

1 -7" TtQft- oo, coo-U), rtocifo). 

Ida*?- <//<<- troTj lif'aKT.v), luuoix). 

1 (m . gr>oa#- qp£ot- £, (fH'^Z-oK qpodow. 

Oryx- Orij- ox, 0m' { ox-M, Oi'r^o). 

IV. Some form a now present from the second root changed 
before the added letters by inserting v, which before a Tr.mute 
becomes p ; thus, 

IR. changed, let. add. New Pres. Fut. 

1 i^diti, hid- h/.rd- av, htvdav-w, A?jcrw. 

2 ).t'/hd, ht(l- lau(>- av, hxu(j&v-w } X^ipb). 

V. By Syncope or contraction ; as, 

New Pres. 
Oeliu), by Syncope, Oiku), Fut. Osl^ou. 

: ow, ,, w "ETPSl, 2 Jior. M. t^qoiaijp. 

lew, by double Syncope, ocplu, Fut depsl^m. 

VI. By Reduplication, viz. of the initial syllable; of A hc 
initial consonant with t;and of t, commonly called the impro- 
per reduplication ; as, 

Theme. New Pres. Fut. 

Sya>j by Red. of initial syllable, tiyuytd, a|o>. 

,, „ consonant with *, didta, d^oo). 

TlltU), ,, „ ,, TTljUnXeO),* 7iXi\a(o. 

o-iuo), improper Red. loi&w, orijo-w. 

VII. By Metathesis or transposition of letters, which how- 
ever rarely occurs; as, 

Thane Rout. New Pres. Fut. 

fiioxoi, diqx- by Metathesis, doilx- dotx-to, diggw. 

VIII. By J) pit oirrsis, or cutting off the initial letters; as, 

leu, by A phoresis becomes 6H&. 

„ ,, OiiS). 

IX. In several, two or more of these modes of variation 
combiue to form the new present ; thus, 

1 By VI and II, yrnto he yr('xrxu), Cut yvtioo). 

2 By \ I and I, dffSua becomes <)t<)o'/jjxu), „ do(xoo). 
'> J > By \ I and III, ftfe^cu becomes iMdaxw, „ dMl-ta. 

I. 19. 



§ 117. LIST OF IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 151 

4 By VI, uirco becomes {it/ueiw, and by V, /ul^rco, fut. /uevim. 

5 By VI, tsxuj becomes titsxoj, by V, t/tkco, and by VII, tIxtu, 

fut. re'lo). 

6 By T, faw becomes ixtivoo, by V, fo^co, by I, twity Ixviopav, 

fut. 2fto. 

7 By VIII. o-^w becomes /sco, by VII, ^w, fut. both SSwatfd 



§ 117. ALPHABETICAL LIST OF IRREGULAR AND 
DEFECTIVE VERBS. 

EXPLANATION. 

In the following Table, the words in capitals are the roots from which cer- 
tain tenses are formed, but which are themselves either entirely obsolete, or 
are merely supposed, in order to derive from them by analogy the forms in use. 

When there is but one form of the root, the numbers 1, 2, &e. are omitted, 
as in ayco. 

The capital R after a tense indicates that the verb is conjugated regularly 
from the tense after which it is placed. 

A. 

Ayajuat, to admire : a passive form from ayrifii, Th. dydo>, (1 R. dya-,) ; pr. 
and imp. like ivrapai ; ayd^ofxai, S. S. — fut. dyaoofxaij R. 

'Ayi/vw, aywui, to break : from ayco, (R. ay-,) 1 f. «£&>, &c, R. 1 a. cafa, 
2 a. p. Idynv, 2 perf. eaya, with a passive signification. It com- 
monly takes the syllabic augment, probably owing to its having 
anciently had the digamma as the initial letter ; thus, pr. Fayw, 
1 a. eFafa, and then ta'^a ; &c. 
" m ASoi ; See avSdvco. 

'Ayw, to lead ; (R. ay-,) f. u£a>, &c. R. It has a reduplication in the 2 a. 
riyayov, perf. rjx a ) an d w * tn the reduplication, dyriox^ (poetic, 
dyvaj, dyivoi. ) 

Ae|a> ; See avi-dvto. 

Ato£w, £o £a&2 : (1 R. a'pe-, 2. eX-, from EA£2,) f. at^o-w, or -£<ra), &c. R. 
fut. IA<3, 2 aor. el\ov, mid. eiXdfj.Tjv, Alexandrian form for sfkSpw 

A.i<rddvojiai t to perceive : (1 R. aiaOe-, 2. ahO-,) f. m. aiadfiaofjum, &C. R. from 
AIS0EOMAI, aor. 2. ^%^. 

AXcaii/w, dX<?rJff>coj, Jo nourish: (1 R. dXde-,) f. dX<5j5<ra), &c. R. from AA- 
AEO. 

AXc|w, fo avert ; (111. dXs|s- and dX^c-,)f.dX£^<rw, &c. from AAEJ3E& ; 

II aor. m. <£Ae£a/iipr, &c. from AAEKS2. 
'AXcfti/o, d\eo[iai, to shun : (1 R.dXeij-, from 'AAEY'12,) 1 a. ?i\£v<ra, 1 a.m. 

tXemfirtv and /iXfa/xnv, by elison of a for r)\svcrdnr}v. 
'AXivSeut, to roll : (1 R. dXi-,) f. dXtiro), &c R. from dXiw. 



152 LIST OF IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. § 117. 

A\iff,ud, to take : (1 EL u\u-,) f. (Uuirw, &c. R. from AAOS2, 2 aor. JaXw*, 
«m AAS2MI. This verb has a passive signification 

in the aorists and perfect active. 
' I 'v a . \ : - - I; (1 R. dXt5v-,) fut. d\vfa, &c. R. from AAY- 

Iv \ 
\\\<paii(.o, (d\$av<it t dXfaCto,] to gain: (1 R. dApe'-,) fut. dXf>r)ao), &c. R. from 

AA&EO. 

. /o ttT : (1 R. aiiapre-,) fut. afiaprfjaa), &.C. R. from afiaprco). 
' A/ifXfaru, to miscarry: (1 R. d/i5X<5-,) fut. d/^Xwaw, &c. R. from d^^Xdw. 

, •), and iiitTt(T\i'i.onai. Sec £%«. 
See ivvvjii. 

See yn'o'xrvo). 

'Ai oAfaret, /o ?Yfl(/ ; See d\i<TKCo. 

AvJdvcj, /o ;)/f«?e ; (1 R. £#-, 2. a£-, 3. <£(5-,) fut. a<5>/<ra>, &c. R. from a<5cw, 
2 a. 'iatiov for >j<W,2perf.2a<5a, with the syllabic augment, s. s. ns Ww. 

'Avciyvva), dpotywfit) from dvoiyo), (d^a and th'yw,) Jo open : (R. ot'y-,) f. 
di/offw, p. dj/£w^a, &c. R. often with both temporal and syllabic 
augment ; as, imp. dj/£6jyo^2perf.dmoya, &c. 

'Aj'w^ o, to order : (1 R. dj^wy- and dvwyi-,) f. di>w|a>, &c. R. or, f. di>w- 
y/ieru, &c. R. from dz/wyefo ; hence, prcs. imperative, dvw^Qi, dj'to%- 
Ou), See. by syncope for dvtiyriOi, dvoyyfjra), &c. as if from AN12F- 
HMI,2perf.^wya. 

'Air^^Odvofxai. See l^Qavoj.iai. 

'Aravpaw, /o /f/Ae awr/?/ ; (from drro and A YPS2, 1 R. ai'p-,) imperf. R. 
drrrjvpaov, 1 aor. dirfivpa, m. d-rjvpajJLrjv, from d7ravpcj. From this 
verb, or more probably from ATIOYP12, (the obsolete Th. of 
ixovpigw, to dispossess,) comes 1 aor. inf. d-rrovpai, part, drovpag, 
and dirovp&fievost used by Homer, Pindar, and Hesiod, in the 
sense of"/o rob;'* " to plunder ;" "to encroach on the limits or 
]>)t perty of another." 
\ - 'Wvin. See SWvfxi. 
'ApcfrKco, to please : (1 R. dpi-,) fut. doeao), fipeKa, &C. R. from dpea). 
'Apu, to fit, or adapt : (1 R. an-,) fut. do&3 and aoo-o), (§ 101. 4. (6.) ) p. 
\< . R.2perf.r^apa and aprjpa, with the Attic reduplication 
from 

Base: (1 R. atf#-,) fut a?)^™, &.c. R. from AYE- 
liki wise, dcfa», 3;E£2. 

(I R. d^c-,) fut. dftOfaonau or.tao/xai, &c. R, 
from dyBtopai. 

B. 
. /3ao<<-), P % • ■" ,) 1 ful. Pfjvofuu, p. ftcSnKd, &c. R. from 

BA&2; 2 aor. M**, from BHM1 ; imperat #J0<, in compounds 
u N. B. A'/'/ao;, in the fut. act. and ctfr/aa, 
ni Pi cat ion, to cause to go. 



§ 117. LIST OF IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE \ r ERBS. 153 

BaAAw, to throw : (1 R. /?aA-, and $i\Z-, 2 3a\-, 3 in compounds 0o\-^ fat. 
/?aAw (Poet. /?aAAifra>) @e/3d\inca, &c. R. as if from BAAE& ; 
hence, by syncope, BAE8, from which {3\f}m, of the 2d conj. 
BidJaxoifto live : (I R. 616-,) fut. Bidoa^, &c. R. from /?idco ; 2 aor. eeji'cov, 

from 6iiO[ju, (all in use.) 
BXa<rrdyw, to 6«d : (1 R. SXaare-,) fut. /?Aa<rr^cra) 3 &C. R. from BAADTE12. 
pfoitu, fo /eed : (1 R. 6o- and £;o-vs-,) fut. /?a5(r«, &c. R. from /?da) ; and 
f. PocrKJJara), &C R. from Pogkew. 
at, fo tot// : (1 R. /?ouAs-, 2 0ov\~,) f. Pov\fi<jo[.iai 1 &c. R. from BOY- 
AE12 ; hence also,2perf./?£6ouAa. 
BpcjoKtt, ,8i6pc6<xrG), to eat: (1 R. ^oy-,) fut. fipcoaco, &c. R. from 0p6w f 
2 aor. iSpuv, as if from ^ow^. 

r. 

jj rapiio, to marry : (1 R. ya//e-, and y«/*-,) fut. ya/xjfao), and -£(ra>, &c. R. 

1 aor. syd^aa, N T. ; and sy^a,as if from TAM12, or THMQ. 
j r^ro, in Homer, /je foofc : probably for sXcro ; y being put for F, and v for 

A, as in the Dor. rjvds for ?j\ds ; thus, FsAsro would become yivsro s 

and by syncope, yivro. 
j VripavKO), fo groto o/ti : (1 R. ynpa~, and y/?o-,) f. yripdoco, &c. R. from y77° 

pdcj ; 1 aor. syrjpa, from THPQ ; yrjpdvat pres. inf. from yfipn^f- 
Uiyvouai) yivofxai, to become : (1 R. ysvi-, 2 ysv-, 3 yoi/-,) fut. yevfiaropaiy &C* 

R. from rENEQ,2perf.yfiyoi/a. N. B. Allied to this verb is 
reivopat, to be bom : (1 R. yet*-,) usea " in the pr. and imp. ; the first aor. eyei- 

vdfxriv is used actively, to beget, to bear ; hence, oi ysivdfievoi, pa- 
rents; yeivdfxevr), a mother, 
yViyvuJaKO), yivdjffKOJ, to know : (1 R. yvo-,) fut. yycocrco, p. syi/co/ca, yvaxrdfiao- 

fiaij eyvcoofjiai, R. from TNOQ ; 2 aor. eyvcov, from yvcofxt, sub. 

yi/a>, opt. yvoirjv, imper. yvwQi, inf. yvcovai, part. yyofo. 

*■ 

A«t*w, £o Zearn : (1 R. <Jae-, 2 <Ja-, 3 <Ja-,) fut. oWa), &c. R. from AAEO, 
by epenth. from 8da) ; whence p. SeSaa, (§ 101. 5.) 2 aor. p. lddr)v } 
or act. from Sdrjjxt, from Jaco comes Jacr/cw, and, by reduplication, 
<5i<3a(TK-a>, £o teach, 
iub), Jo divide, to feast, to entertain : (1 R. oaf- and c$a<5-,) f. datcra), more 

frequently Saw, p. ScSaKa, &c. R. from AAZ£2. 
Au'.j, to burn : (1 R. Sat-, 2 <k-, 3 J??-,) second perfect tieSm, through all 
its moods. 
to bite: (1 R. oVfr-, 2 oW-,) fut. c^, &c. R. from AHKG ; 2 aor. 

SSOLKOV, 

), to sleep (1 R. SapOe-, 2 otyO-,) fut. Sapdn^ujiai, &c. R. from AAP- 



QE<2 ; 2 aor. £e$a, 
XUidu. to fear: (1 R. o'a<5-, 2 

ocitroj, p. <$£<$£ IKtt, 



<5«5-, 3 Joe*-, also 2 &-, 3 dV, from A10,) fut 
or <Je*oWa, 2 perf. ^fJa ; also from A12 



lO~k LIST 01 IB R AM) DEFECTIVE VERBS. §117. 

utuci; fee. and imper. (JI«Ji0t, with a present sense, to fear ; the 
middle dfo/iat, with its derivatives SsSiaKOfim, ScSiaa-onai, See. have 
an active signification, "to frighten." 

Atu» i'u>, fcfov/ii, to sht w : (1 It. to- ,) P. &*£«, c^e. R. from AEIKQ ; Ionic 
AEK&2, hence 6i{<a t &.c. 

(1 R.&£-, from AEE'OMAI,) fat. format, &c. R. In 
thee ii is used impersonally; as, for, fotfo-a, &c. See 

Impersonal Verbs, § 1 11. 

A«5(io-A:cjj fo teach : (1 R. JtM^- and SiSavki-,) f. Ji(3a£<y, (and SiSaoKfja-o),) 6c 
difiax'i, && R. § 116. IX. 3. 

AiSpaaxco, to escape : (1 R. fyd-,) fut. Jp.xo-w, &c. R. from Jpau, a regular 
verb in use;) 2 aor. ctfplv, (from APHMI,) for which also ct5,oai/, 
-as, -a, &c. N. 13. This verb is used in composition only. 

Aovea>, to think : (1 R, Soks- and Jd/c-,) f. <5d|a>, &c. R. from AOK& ; — also 
fur. SoKfjatp, Sec. R. but less in use than the other forms. 

Avvafxai, I can : (1 R. Svvd-,) like icrra/xai, f. Svufiaofjtai, &C R. from AY- 
NAOMAI ; 1 aor. pass. ISwaadnv and iSwfjOriv. 

Avcj, (JtVo), £o enclose, to go into : (1 Re <&-,) fut. Svaa), JetJu/ca, &c. R. ; 2 aor, 
ftw, from AYMI. 

E. 

'E<5o>, e<rflo>, and ivQ'uo, to eat : (I R. eSs-, 2 £<5-, 3 £<5-, also 2 R. <pay- from 
<l>ayco,) fut. gftsW, p. pass. iS^ecjxai for iidsajxai ; 1 aor. pass. 
riSeadriv from gjsw ; f. m. s^ai and iioyfxai ; 2perf. flcJii, Attice 
ISrjSa, p. a. jjf&wa, (by change of vowel, for rjficxa, ) Attic, eSri- 
dotca, 2 aor. act. etpiyov, from ^<iyaj ; (Zdjfxai is rather the presenl 
used in the sense of the future.) 

'EOcAw, OcXw, OfXcw, I icisli : (1 R. OeXe-,) fut. OcX^aui, TeOi\r}Ka, R. 

'EOcj, iron iponJ : only with epic writers; 2 perf. awOa, Ionic £w0a, in tlr, 
same signification. tt&Oeiv, 7 ions wont. 

*ElJn t to see, (1 R. ctd-, rift-, 2 f J., 3 otd-,) an old verb, which, in the 
active voice, has only the 2 aor. si'dov and i'dov, used as a 
substitute for the aorist of 6q<xo3, to sec — a verb which has 
only the present o^uco, the imperfect wo^r, Attic Iwqgjv, and 
the perf wQafiat, the other parts beinp 

made up from o iroftai, and BFfo>, as Iicre. In the middl; 
and pnssivc, ttSm \vi* the present el'do/iai, the imperfect 
•",', 1 aor. , (.^/a.ai/j,) like the Latin vid&ri, 

to a j)j) car, to resemble. 
ut t r, or Idupyr, the ~ nor. mid. is also used in an 1 
actr i ly by the Attics, in the impera 

ti\< interjection, see, lo, behold. 

Of tlii< verb the 2d perfect oltu, strictly / have seen, 
perceived, or comprehended, is never used as a perfect, but 



§ 1]?. LIST Oi IKREuLLAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 155 

only as a present, meaning / know, having the pluperfect 
ijdsir, as an imperfect / knew, and the future m. eVao/tai, 
rarely sld^ou), I shall know, or experience. The other 
parts, viz. the aorists and perf. are supplied from 
yiyicooxw. — For the parts of olda, see § 112, IX. 
EIKS2, I resemble, I seem, (1 R. dx-, 2 IK-, 3 olx-,) is used only in 
the 2 perf. olxa, Ionic toixa, Attic £t*«, employed as a 
present in the sense of / am like, I seem, I resemble. Inf. 
slxirai, part, dxcbg, via, 6g. Hence the adverb alxoro)g. 
From this verb comes el'axw-and Xoxw, to compare. 
EUto and al'AAco, to roll up, press together, more commonly eUt'co or 
s[Xta), (1 R. six-, siXs-, or s(?.s-,) F. - t -ow, &c. 1 Aor. inf. 
sXoat, Uloai, part. sXoag. Perf. pass. I'sX^iai, 1 Aor. p. 
iahjv, Inf. atijvai, or orA^«vcfl, part. aXsig, all of which 
have sometimes the spiritus asper, and sometimes the 
spiritus lenis. 
||E«fu, J am: (1 R. «-,) from E£2 ; f. m. eo^at, imp. >>• See § 112.1. 
But 

E7/ii, J^o : comes from I £2, f. m. Efoofiat, p. e?a, Attice Jfr'a. See § 112. II. 
EIIIQ or EIIS2, to say : used only in the aorists ; 1 aor. etna, 2 efaov, 1 aor. 
mid. Eiirafxriv. The initial tf- is retained through all the moods. 
Compounds used by the poets are Ivsiro), evearro), Ivicrrcoi. The 
other parts are supplied from ep<a t which see. 
EXavi/o), to drive: (1 R. i\a-,) fut. Vkaow, p. qXamz, &c. R. from cXaw, also 
in use. The Attic future is eXw, e\ag, eXS, &c, for eXaaco, «Xa- 
cretj, &c. 

T5i/<50a>, £o sfazfce, Jo agitate : (R.-n/o0-,)2perf.ih>o0a, Attic evtivoda : used chief- 
ly in compounds ; as, Trdp-tvfjvodw, dv-ffvoQzv, &c. 
•Evwp, to eJof/ie : (1 R. I'-,) fut. 2o-w ; p. pass, e'ifjai, and also IV/zcn, from 
E12 ; dfj<bi£vvvpi has Attice d[i<j)i6} for dn^ieaa) ; dn<piagai and dfj$iaKU) 
are rare forms of the same word. 
Era), see ffrra). 

E-w, to be actively employed: (1 R. lit-, 2 cttt-,) mid. lirppai y to follow, fut. 
eipo/mi, has the 2 aor. eottoi/ and fonSpriv, as if from LIIE12. See 
l%u\ to be found chiefly in compounds. 
Epitaivo), to cojitfnd : (1 R. ipide-,) fut. iptSfjaa), &c. from EPIAE12, per 
epenth. fromEPlAQ: hence spi^o), s. s. fut. gpio-co, &c. Reg. 
. see £j5o>. 
E^/iw. to g*o autai/ : (1 R. *■(>'£-,) f. Ippfiffto, &.c. R. from EPPEO. 
EovOaCvo), to make red : (1 R. epvOs- and spevO-,) fut. epvOfiaa), Sic. (It. from 
EPY0E<2,) and also ip&w, as if from EPEYGS2. 
fX (l ^ ai i i° S 9 •' (1 ^" £ Xcv9-, 2 iAvfl-, 3 cXu0-,) fut. cX£VG-0/i'«,2perf. f?Xt>0«, 
Attice i'xfiXvOa, from EAEY0Q ; whence also 2 aor. act. >JX0oi/, 
by syncope for HAY90N. In some tenses elm ls more m use 
than tpxpixa, 



^n 



156 LIST OF IkRl.GULAK AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. § 117 

'EPQ, by m tat . Bia v and by penth. ip<«#j alsocfpw, by cp. apeo), from 
i f which the tenses in use are regularly formed; 
{\ R. ln- } pi-, and Ipt-j 2. ty-,) thus, from fy<o, 1 aor. m. vpaLirjv, 
from ^-(d, fut /'//da), and 1 aor. p. ipjufinv and IppiQnv ; from 
dfl&ij, fnt. t'). -no, p. elprixa, p. pass. ctyr^af, fut. £pw, 2. a. m. 
»}p(J/ir7»/; and probably from ft'peto, comes the fut. eipfjooLiai. 
u, m the sense of to iwJfc, occurs chiefly as an aorist to Ipur&a). 

'Ec-0ia>, to cat i used in the prcs. and imp. for edco. See eSoi. 

to si, <p ; (1 R. sv&-,) fut. eidfjaco, &c. R. from EYAEO, augments the 
initial vowel, thus, r$£ov ; so in compounds, KaOrjvSov, &c. 

\Lvoi(iKU } to find: (1 R. cvpc-, 2 £»V,) f evpfjaw, &c. R. from EYPE&, by 
(penth. from EYP£2 ; whence a form of the 1 aor. m. cvpdLir\v. 

'K^davofiai and direxOavopai, I am hated : (1 R. £%#£-, ) fut. c^Otfo-o/mt, pcrf. p, 
fixOn/tai, R. from lxd£opai t from e%0w, poetic, and used only in 
the present. 

r E^w Jo have : (1 It. fy-, andc^i-, 2 o-^-,) fut. ^w, (with the aspirate,) or 
o^acu, p. ZaynKOL, &c. R. from SKE12, also vyiQu. This verb has 
another form of the present and imperf. to-^oj and to-^oi/, in the. 
sense of to hold, which has the future oxf™, &c. ; so also a^eOa). 
ecx.edov. In the compounds observe the following varieties : 
viz. dy£%co, (for which also dvaaxt-Ooj) in the middle has a double 
augment in the imperf. and 2 aor, rjveix^i^v, iiveaxofinp : ^l xn ^X co i 
to enclose, has f. d^0^o>, 2 aor. rt^-nurxov ; mid. d/x7r£^o/xat or 
dprto-^eo/iat, to wear ; fut. d^£|o/icu, 2 aor. rjLnritTx^M v 5 vni<rx~ 
veofiai, to promise, fut. i)7roo-^J7cro^at, &C. R. 

Eycu, *o cook : (1 R. ftp*-,) fut. £i//»j<ra>, &c. Reg. from E^I'Eft. 

E£2 ; to place : (1 R. c-,) Defective, 1. a. ac-a, 1 f. m. e'Laojiai, 1 a.m. clad^v., 
The derivatives from this root are, 1. ^ou, JsiJ, (perf. for eJfxai.) 
§ 112. VI. ; 2 ffofioi, to set doivn, (whence i'^wand KaQigw, R.) ;, 
3. cj/j/u/ii, /o clctUp ; i-nd, 4. Ityu, /o semZ, fjo-w, aVa, R. 

z. 

£dw, to live: (1 R. fa-,) f. m. gr'iaojiai ; 2 aor. egrjv, as if from ZHMU 
Sec § OS. Obs. 2. To supply the defective parts of this verb,, 
borrowed from /?«5w. 

favyvvr-) and givyvvjii to join: (1 R. gevy-, 2. <fuy-,) f. gcvtco, &c. R. from 
ZEYrft, "J a. p. l^vynv. 

6o)vvvo), £<an*y «, (r fird .- (1 R. £o-,) f. ^waw, && R. from £o'a>. 

H. 
o#, to aftatH (fa i rfy : (1 R. »V?d-,) f. i^?/}™, &c. R. front U 

II<*o>, e: (1 R. r'M-,) f. fyrw, &c. R. s. e. as foddva 

wlii< sh 

H,«i, ,0 lit; 166 Eft, ;m<) S US. VI. 



§ 117. LIST OF IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 157 

*Efyf, by Aphsresis for typ( t I say : likewise vv, #, for fyriv, e<£i?. See 
§ 112. VIII, 

e. 

t)£>o>. See £di\a). 

9HII0, (Poetic) to he amazed: (1 R. 6tjtt-, 2 frr7r-,)2p erf. reQrpca, 2 aor. sra- 
(pov, by metathesis for sBanov, of which the part. Ba-nuv is in use. 

Qrjy&va), to sharpen: (1 R. dfiy-,) f. Bfifa, &c. R. from Bijyco, s. s. 

Qiyyava), to touch : (R. Sly-,) f. 0t|«, &c. R. from Biyoi ; 2 aor. eBiyov. 

Qvijo-KG), to die : (1 R, fea- and Bav— , 2 dav— ), f. 1XL Bavovjxai ; p. rsOvrjKa, 
and by syncope, re'Bvaa, whence the common forms, Hdvapev, 
Tsdvdaiv, Ttdv&vai, &c. (§ 101. 5.) ; fromOANO comes 2 f. m. 0a- 
vovfxaij and 2 aor. a. sOavov. From the p. a. reBvrjKa, comes a new 
present reOvrjKG), 1 f. Tsdvfifa. Parts also occur as if from a form 
in -y.i ; thus, rtdvadi, rzBvaiv,v, as if from Tedvrijii. 

Qopvvu), 06pvviii, BpcocrKOi, to leap : (1 R. dope-, 2 Bop;) f. Bopfjao), &C. R. from 
dopeo), f. m. Bopovfiai, 2 aor. act. eBopov. 

L 

^Spvvoij "Spvfii, to establish : (1 R, !<5p-,) from tfyuo), f. ISpvarcs, &c. R. 
*I^avfe>, £o set : (1 R, t£a-, and tJ-,) 1 fut. Igfto-o, &c. R. from l^dco ; and iVa), 

&c. R. from i'^cj and 10. In like manner KaBig&vu, KaBi$a), &c. 

See"E& 
*1tj/k, to go : pres. m. tepai. See § 112. III. 
1jj/«, to send : (1 R. I-,) f. ?]<raj, p. Jra, 1 aor. rjxa, 2 aor. ^v, from EG. 

§ 112. IV. 
*l/ccu/6>, iKveojiai, to come : (R. ?*-,) from ?*:a>, s. s. R. whence they have f. 

m. r i£o[iai, perf. pass. "y/*a<, 2 aor. t/cd/x/71/. 
^aaKOfxai, to propitiate : (1 R. <X<z-,) f. iXdarofim, &c. R. from tXaa* ; whence 

"IAHMI, of which some parts occur in Homer. 
'I-ra^/ai. See Tre-opai* 
'Io^/xt, to knew : m. Xa-a^iaL, used in the singular number by Doric writers 

fonly. See elS<a. 
f I<r X o>. See s X *>. 
K; 
KAZ3, KAA12, KAAE2, £o cause to yield : (1 R. *a3l-,) fut. KAAH2& 

p .p. f. KeKaSfjarofxai, Horn. 
Ka6e£o/>iat, <o s££ : (*ara and egofiai, 1 R. H-, 2 1(5-,) fut. KaBedovfiat, 1 aor. p. 

iKaBea-OrjVj, 
K.i\o/iai, to order : (1 R. xeXe-,) f. KsXrio-ojiat, &C R. from Kekeouai. 
K.iTjjai, to lie : see § 112. VII. 

Sxpawooy, Kepavvvfii, to mix : (1 R. Kepa-,) fut Kspao-o), &c. Reg. from icepaa. 
Sometimes it inserts a before -Owo/iai, in 1 f. pass, sometimes 
not. Hence also Kipvdo, from which Kipvrifii, s. s. imper. kIov% 
for icipvadi. 

14 



15S LIST OF IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. § 1 i V' u 

l\.tpdaivu>, to make gain : (1 H. Kep8*lv- t and K£p^u-,) t. KcpcWdJ and Ksp?ifi<ra> j 
ftjicck 
*, to i<rtrt(ihc : (1 R. «ri^<-, 2 *"*%-,) f. K<x>/ora>, &c. R. from Ki^ea); 

2 m . and fWyr/j-, from K1XHMI. 

i-,) t'u!. xpfi 003 ) & c - R« from %ptfo>. 
lv.Vi£u>, to cry aloud: (1 It. vAayy-, 3 AtA/jy-,) f. /cAay£o>, &c. R. from «A«y- 

ya>;2perf.«vA»jya, as if from kX^oj. 
KXvoj, /o //aic : (1 R. (cXu-,) Reg. except the imperative pres. kX€>6?«, as if from 

KA1 
KopmnJo), Kupii>vvf.u } to satisfy: (1 R. Kopi-,) f. Kopeaco and /cop/aw, &c. R. 

from koocco. 
Kpdgco, to crow : ( 1 R. Kjoay-,) f. /rpafw, &c. R. exe. imper. perf. K&cpa^flc 

Kpeuavvva), Kpe\iavwixi< and KpfijivrjiJi, to hang: (1 R. Kpefjid-,) f. Kpsfxiaro}, &C. 

R. from KPEMAG. perf. p. xqiiiau ai without the augment. 

Kraj>o>, £o fcttt; (1 R. KTciv-, 2 Kvav-, 3 ktov,) fut. /crfvw. &C. R. ; 2 aor 

iicravoV) and skt/jv from KTHMI. 
Kt»AiV<Jcj, fo rflM : (1 R. kuXi-,) fut. kvAicto), &c. R. from vvXtw, s. s. 
Kv»/£w, Jo kiss ; (R. kwc-, and /cu-,) fut. Kwfjcuy, &c. R. ; also ktjo-w, &c. R. 

from MM. 

A. 

Aay^avo), £o receive by lot: (1 R. X#%-, 2 Aa^-, 3 Acy^-,) f. X^w, &c. R. 

from AHX£2. 2 aor. e\a^ov t perf. XiXoy^a. § 101. 5. 
Aa/i5a»/a>, to take : (1 R. At?5-, 2 Aa#-, 3 Xrj$-,} f. m. Xfiipojxai, p. elXrjcpa, &C. R. 

from AHB12. Ionic pert'. XeXd6n>ca ; likewise f. Aa/*i//o^cu, &c= 

R. as if from AAMBO. Also of the same signification, — 
Aa^w, Xagvco, and Xagvpi. 
AavQavro, to be hid : (1 R. A/J0-, 2 Aa0-, 3 A>?#-,) f. Afaw, &c. R. from AtjGoj ' 

in the middle voice, — 
AavQdvonai, to forget : f. Afjao/tat, &c. from the same. 
Ai'£o>, lo Afca : (1 R. Xtyy-,) f. A£y£a>, &c. R. from Aiyya>, s. s. 
Aouw, to wash : (1 R. Aw-,) in the Attic dialect generally omits by syncope 

the short vowel after -ov- ; thus, cXov, ^Aou/^*, Aofyai, Xovadat, Sll. 

for cXot'c, eXovofjicv, Xovojiai, XovcaOat, &C. 
Aovta), in f s occurs in Homer. 

M. 

MayO^u, / i R. paft-, 2 //aft-,) fut. /iO0//ffo/ia», p. /^a0j;Ka, &C Rj 

rrora M 1 or. f/iafor. 

lojigfll : ( 1 R. /'aye-, 2 /'ay-,) ful. iia^fiaoijat and /xai^ortfiju, &d 

ilAI. 

M^wo. . ///.0-5-,) f. neOvtray, t^c. from /^£0va>, s. S. 

M£Aa>, lot.. ifXI-, 2^X-,3 /^X-,) 1 f. //cXr?™, from MEAE12I 

' £/'£>ov, cri" ' jiC/irjXa. 

M-«AAa>, fa f] R. faAAfi-,) f. pcXXfiau), &c. R. from neXXe<a. ; 



§ 117. LIST OF IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 159 

***«, to Meat , (1 R. ^ 2 _, 3 ^ f ^^ ^ R 

£o>, s. s.) 2 aor -fyaw^perf.plf,,,™, from MHKS2 
M< y >™, ,,>„,,, ^ ft, mlx .-(IB. ^ r>) f . ^ &c R from 

2 aor. totyijo from MirHMI. 
M.^«a>, to remember : (1 R. ^ j} fut . ^^ &c R from 

"^ *** to ^ e °#- ( • R - r%M f- *** &c from Mopra. 

N. 
X^, neut. to dwell: (1 R. ,,.,) f. rSm> &c . R ftom 

so aiye/Z. 
N«& to «o„4 : (1 R. vtV)) f . m>)) &c r from ^ g _ g> 

•O^, to S ,„,tf • (1 R. «, and d^, 2 «-, 3 dfc.) f. ^ r. aIso ,~ „„ 

o£»™ , p. <«£,«, &c. R. from OZEa.2perf.3fc ; with the Attic 

reduplication ofcjfc. 
Otyrio,, oiy^, to open : (1 R. rfy.,) f. B % a> &c . R from _ See .^ 

ya). 
QUaln,, o/AW ^^ <0 OT<B .. ( , R ^ £ ^.^^ R from 

1 n. s. s. ' 

Ofo.a, and J., to Ofafcj (1 R. offi .,) f. ol ^ at! &c . R from a 

the active form, is retained in some dialects 
Ol X oua h to go : (1 R. olxh) f. olxfinfmtt p . ^^ R> as if from 

MAI. 

Or^w, s. s. in the active form; (1 R. i Y 6- \ f ot V f v„ n * -,r 

' v ™ 'J r * ot %wo-6j, p. oivajKa, as if from 

Ol%00). 

•o\t*oab», aw*™, to g<a, ; (i R . dW9£S) c dXwft!ro &c _ R from A(ff 

0£O), S. S. 

■'OAXto, ftXvv***^ : (1 R. m ., 2 oH 3 oX . ., £ .^ &g r ^^ 

n -T U . , 3 ' ° H m - dAoS '" 1 '' 2 30r - ^-V""' P- "K Attic 
oAuAa. Uther forms are 

OAAa> ; dA«o), 6\i<jK0). 

P"** *"? to ~ i < T R - <, '<°-> 2 *-. '«»> QMa,) f. v ™, &c . R , 

from OMOa, commonly with the reduplication in the perfect 
f. in. tyotyai from 0M3. ' 

O wyl rf u , 4^y^«, (o wipe off: (1 R. a^ r ,) f. Ww , &c. R. s. s . as 

//Ojoyi/uco, which see. ' 

P **"""' <0 /ie ^ •• R - **•,) f- *»*>», &c. R. from ONA3. 
D mira , to rush : (1 R. 6^.,) £ ^^ &c . R from g _ g _ 

^Co,, w to e*c«e , (R. dp-,) f. ,^ ai (§ ioi. 4. (6.) ) from OPO • ' f 

feu from foa,,2perf.^ Wf ,a ; hence a new present, J>™, s . s . and 

also dpdjoo). 

f"*^ 1 "' '° S " !<? " ; (1 R - '•W"*'- ^d fc*i-,) fut. fc^^j^, R. and 
d^on^u,, &c. R. from OMPEOMAI, by epenth. from fc^,„. 
M i, irorn which <5^oo>„ ; hence also i^io,, and to^ao^,, s. s . 



16C LIST 0] (JLAH AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. §117 

• 
Oiniw, ovr - , I >Y I I l.M I, /o hit, to wound : (1 R. ot)rd-,) f. oiird- 

.■..», infill, ovr&jjicvai, Horn, for ovrdvai. 

'OtpeCXto 50.\w, foAir/cAw, /o otce : viz. money, punishment, i. e. to be 

■ guilty : (1 R. ctynXg-, and ttyXc-, 2. itycX-,) 1 f. dcpciMao and ity- 

Xfct^&C K. tVom otpeiXcu) and <tyX«o ; 2 aor. otyeAoi/, used only 

in the i xpressioD of a wish j thus, eW dxptkov, that /, eW ufa- 

/\c>, O that thou, &c. 

n. 

lldo-^a), to suffer : (1 R. tw0-, seldom naOe-, 2. 7ra0-, 3. tto»/0-,) 1 f. m. -nelao^aiy 
§ 6. 18.2perf.7r£7rov0a ; both from T1EN012 ; 2 aor. IVaGoi/, also 
flit. iraQ^ao), &c. R. from IIAQEfl. 

flAro-a), to digest : ( I R. 7rt7r-,) f. 7T£i//w, &C. R. from 7r£7rro), S. S. 

Yleravvvu), Tcrdvvvni, to expand : (1 R. rcrd-,) I f. ncTaao), R. from 7T£rda>, exc. 
p. p. ireKTajiat, whieh is from the contracted form 7rrdoj. An- 
other form is 

TliTvau) and jrfryifyit, s. s. 

HcTOnaijTTerajiaijTTeTdonaijtoJly: (1 R. 7r£r4-,) f. 7T£Triao[iai , &c. R. from 
Kerdoixai ; 2 aor. £7T7->7i> from 171T17/U ; also, p. p. TreiroTrj^at from 
-o-donac • by syncope Inerdfiriv becomes eTrrdnrjv, and so of other 
tenses. 

Qi/ywa), wfjyyvjiii £0 fasten; (1 R. ir/jy-, 2 7ray-, 3 ff^y-,) f. 7rJ7fa>, &C. R. 
from ITHTQ ;2perf.7i-£7r?7ya, 2 aor. pass. £7rdy^. 

ritXi/dcd, rfXygpc, to approach : (1 R. 7r£Xd(5-,) takes its tenses from 7r£Xd£o), s. s. 

Hi/i7rXdi/6) and nifnrXrjuiytofUl: (1 R. 7rXr?0- 3 or 7rXd-,) f. 7rXr7<r&>, &C. R. from 

IIAA&2 or ttMQo). When in composition /x comes before the 

initial * in this word, it is omitted before ttX; as, i/xTriTrA^t ; so 

also in 
tltpTrprini, to burn: (1 R. npfjO-,) f. irpfjaw, Sec. R. from irpfjda. 
Illvu), to drink : (1 R. -J-, 2. «-,) fut. ttwo-oj, &c. R. from 110ft ; 2 aor. 

IWcoy from nto Th. ; tmperat. commonly mdi t sometimes nis ; 

fut. m. niopai, probably the present used in the future sense; or 

by elision of a for irfoopai ; movfxai is also found. From this 

theme also comes 
liarfaNft, to eatue £0 rfrtnAc : (1 R. jrf-,) f. rfo>, &c. R. from xUa, 

: (1 R. rrpd-,) f. ffpara, &c. R. from IIPAO, probably 

from -:^do). ^0 transfer, 
TUmi \' ; 1 .-tic irlrva, to fall : (1 11. jrlr», and ttto-, 2. irw-, frqftj 

LTEEEQ,) f. rrfaoj, from th<; ancient IIETS2 j and jrrcu<ro), p| 
I ! ; 2 aor. JWoy, f. m. ircaovjxat, as if fromi 

HEX 
IlXd^oj, £0 lead astray: (1 R. rXlyy-, 2 - ~W-0 f. TrXdyfw, &c. R. from: 

lyoy. 

flA^aaw, /- 1 EL -Ar/y-, 2. »rXijy- for TrXay-,) f. TrXrtfw, &C. R. CXC fy 

V p. LrrXjjyrjv ; compounds regular throughout. 



§ 117. LIST OF IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 16 1 

TLvvOdvouat, to learn by inquiry : (1 R. rrevO-, 2. 7n>0-,) f. irevcopat, (poetie 
xevdopai,) &c. R. from -nsvOa) ; 2 aor. m. favOdpriv, perf. pass. 

p. 

Pf£w, gpJa), EPr&, to do: (1 R. psy-, and ?py-, 3 tyy-, from 2 'APr-,) f. 

^c|o) and spick), &c. R.2perf.£opya. 
Pew, to flow : ( 1 R. pet;-, and pv£-^) f. psvaa) and pvfiaa), p. sjjpvrjKa, &c. i\. 

from /5u£cj, 2 aor. pass. Ipfjvrjv. 
'Vriyvvo), pfjyvvpi, to break : (1 R. /$>?y-, 2 /say-, 3 jowy-, irreg.) f. /S^|&) } &c. 

R. from pfjoaa, (i. e. PHT£2,) s. s.2perf.e^coya, 2 aor. pass. 

eppdyrjif 

'Pcovj/uo), puwvpa, to strengthen : (1 R. /So-,) f. pwoa), &c. R. from POQ. 

E. 
£&rvi/£ci), cSsvwpi, to extinguish : (1 R. o-£s-,) f. cSscm, &c. R. from 

c-6£cj : also p. saSrjKa, 2 aor. iaSriv, from HBHMI. 
TtxeSavvvcjj crKeSavvvpi, cfkiSv&w, axiSvqpi, to scatter : (1 R. a^ccJa-,) f. aKedaaa), 
&c. R. from aKsSato. 
, EKfAAco, £o dry up: (1 R. <xk£A-, and ovczAs"-,) f. ckeXco. R. also o-KaA/jo-w, p. 
eatcXriKa, (by syncope for svKaXriKa), 1 aor. scw^a, 2 aor. sVkAj?*', 
from SKAHMI. 
S//aa), £o wipe .* (1 R. oyxa-, and (Fp-fjX'i) £ op? * 6 ^ &c. p. scr{jLTj^a 9 from 

apii^cd, S. S. 
U-ci/Jo), £o ??iaA;e a libation : (1 R. ottsi/J-,) f. tnrtfcra), &c. R. § 6. 18. 
Eropsvnicd, (rropsvvvpi, to Spread : (1 R. arops-,^ f. aTopeao), &C. R. from 

LTOPEG. 
Erpcovww, arpdowvfju, to spread : (1 R, orp-,) f. aTpwacj, &c. R. fromETPOQ. 
E^siV. See £%w. 
Lco^o), fo sa&e; (1 R. o-w<5-, or <rc3-,) f. ac5<7co 3 &c. R. exc. 1 aor. pass, effcj- 

0>7y instead of eoajaQnv. 

T. 
jj iTaAaw, to bear : (1 R. rXo-,) f. rAjfaa), &c. Reg. from the syncopated form 

rAdw, s. s. ; 2 aor. sVA/jy, from rAifyu. 
Tipvw, to ci/f . (1 R. rip-, also r/io-, and rprjy-, 2 ra//-, 3 ro//-,) Reg. also f. 

rpficra) and rpfi^oi, from r^aco and rp^yu • 2 aor. srapov and 

irp.avov, — sometimes eretiov* 
T'iktUj to bear : (1 R. r«c-, 2 rewt-, 3 to*-,) f. tI|o>, &c. R. from TEKQ • 

2 aor. £r£K0i/,2perf.rer0Ka. 
lit Tti/a), nvvvoj, rivvvpi, to expiate : (1 R. rf-j) f. rfaa>, &c. R. from rt», Jo 

honour, 

firpao}, Ttrpaivo), TLTpripL, to bore: (1 R. rpd-,) f. rpfi<ro), &C. R. from rpiw. 
irpwcKOJ, to wound : (1 R. rptf-,) f. rpw<xw, &C. R. from rpoco. 
pe%oi,torun: (1 R. Ope^-, and Soaps-, 2 Spa/A-,) f. 0f)£|o), p. ScSpdptiKa 
&c. R. from APAMEG ; 2 aor. Upapov, f. m. dpapovpai. 
14* 



To 



162 LIST OF IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. § 117. 

4 
,i'fi>, t? hi\ ! I R. rvgt-, and ra;^-, 2 rn^-,) f. TV^fjerco, &C. 

R. from TYXE8; 8 aor* frvgov ; fut. m. rsv^o^ai from r^w. 
. Thia verb must be carefully distinguished from the regu- 
lar verb, — 

• . to yrrpari : \ r. R. 

Y. 

'Ytkty 1 - ' ,a 'j to promise: (from wrd, and a^eco } ) f. vTroax^i (TO l iai ) & c « R 
from YHOSXEOMAI. See £ v X co. 

ft 

^ : iy<) ( /mj, pros. m. to eat: (1 R. </>ay-,) also the future for (payovpai, in the 
N. T. and later writers by the same anomaly as sSofiai ana ni- 
ofxat ; 2 aor. i^ayov. The rest of the tenses are formed from 
laOico. See e Jo>. 
(Rdoxfc). See pif/il. 

( I>fpw, to bear: used in the pres. and imperf. (1 R. oi-, IvIk-, and cpeyK-, 
2 iwy*-, 3 Ivox-,) f oiffw, (from OIQ), p. HNEXA, &c. R. from 
ENEK12 ; also, 1 f. pass. oiaOfiaroixai ; 1 aor. act. T/vsyxa for 
;>£y|a, from ENErK12, Attice commonly >>£i*a, &c. j 2 aor. 
Ijtnymw, from the same ;2perf.>>«;£ a from ENEXfi. 
<[W, to say : (1 R. <pa-,) 1 f. (pfjao; 2 aor. £0r/y. See § 112. VIII. 
<T>0di/a>, to come before, to anticipate (1 R. </>0d-,) f. ^Odaco or tpdrjacj, &c. R 

from <I>9A£2, 2 aor. £00^ from 00/7/u. 
<I>0iW, fo corrupt, to fall; (1 R. 00i-,) f. 9610-0), &c. R. from p0io>, s. s. ; 
other forms are 
,), <f>Qu'Eu, and <pQivvQ<o, used in the pres. and imperf. 
fyoayivui, (pnaywfH, to enclose : (1 R. (ppny-,) f. ^od|w, &c. R. from <2>PAr£2, 
same as fypaaau), s. s. 
tojfee, tojmJ to flight : (1 R. rfrfy-,) f. </*>|w, &c R. But2perf.7T£- 
<f>vga, formed immediately from the present. Other kindred 
form 
ind <pcvy.>, R. and it has the derivatives <pv^dw and <pv£/7//t. 

/; (1 R. <pv-,) f. <pv<ro), 1 aor. s<pvaa. But the perf. ntyvKd 
and aor. 2. £pui/, have a passive signification, to be begotte?i, to be 
to become. 
1 and ffcopaif have the same meaning and the same root. 
X. 
stand open, to contain : (1 R. %d(J-,) fut. x aO0) t 
X \AQ, (a. s. with KAZ12, which son). 2 aor. 
f^aiW and xfcra&r, 2 perf. gl^atta and KiyavSa; derivatives and 
lumerous, for which see Donnegan'i Lex. 
on the word. 
J t) fo rejoice t (1 R. %tnV>-. and yamt-, 2^™-,) f. ^apoj,&c. R. Also t. 
Xainfoo), &c. II. from XAIPEQ ; 2 aor. p. £^ap/;j/. 



§ 118, 119. INDECLINABLE WORDS OR PARTICLES. 163 

Xoivw, x^ 9KOi i X* 9 **^ 03 * ^° o a V e or yawn •* (1 R« % a fr->) £ % av w, &c.R.from 
%au>a), a derivative from X A&2 ; from which also /td£a> and %a£w ; 
which see above. 

Xew, to pour out : (1 R. %ru-,) f. %«5<ra>, &c R, 1 aor« s%F,va and £%£<*, (by 
elision for e^euo-a,) hence imperative %soi/, %£aro>, &c. infinitive 

X^acj. This verb has five different forms with as many different significa 
tions : Root of all %pa-* 

1. xpa&>, to give an oracular response: Regular. 

2. Kixpqp-i, to lend: like larrjfu. 

3. xp j h & i s necessary : partly like verbs in pe, (see impers. verbs, § 114.) 

4. xpaopai, to use : in the contracted tenses takes r> for a, § 98. Obs. 2. 

5. ciTroxprr, it suffices : pi. diroxp&vWj inf. dTroxprjvj &C. 

Xpcoyyva), xpcSvvvjju, to colour: (1 R. %po-,) f. ^pwcw, &c. R. p. pass, 

Xcoj/ww, xcowu/u, £o /jeap, £o dam : (1 R. %o-,) f. %coo-<y, &c. R. from j^fca, 

s. s. perf. pass, /c2%&J«j*ai. 

&.' 
*Q0sa>, to push : (1 R.wfl-, and <&?£-,) has the syllabic augment throughout j 

thus, imp. eojQovv, f. wo-o>, and wdrjcrco, Regular from both ; 1 f 

p. 4)odfjffO(iai. 



§ 118. INDECLINABLE Y^ORDS OR PARTICLES- 

The Indeclinable parts of speech, sometimes denominated 
Particles, are those which suffer no change of form by inflec- 
tion. They are the Adverb (which includes the Interjection) 
the Preposition and the Conjunction. 

THE ADVERB. 

An Adverb is a word joined to a verb, an ad- 
jective or another adverb, to modify it, or denote 
some circumstance respecting it. 

Adverbs may be considered in respect of Signification, 
Derivation and Comparison. 



$ 119. OF THE SIGNIFICATION OF ADVERBS. 

In respect of signification, adverbs may be arranged in 
Greek as they are in Latin and other languages, under the 
following kea< 



164 



ON OF ADVERBS. 



§119. 



1. Adverbs of Place ; comprehending those which signify, 

1st. Jicsl in a place. These generally end in £i, oi, oi/ 9 
•, ; as, dynnOi, in the field, 

2d. Motion from a place. These generally end in -Oev 
or -0J ; as, C<)ni')0fv, from the field. 

3d. Motion to a place. These generally end in de, os y 
te ; as, uyobvde, to the field. § 120. II. 6. 

4th. Motion through or by a place. These are gener- 
ally feminine adjectives in the dative singular, having 
Wq> understood; as, dllrj, by another way. 

2. Adverbs of Time; as, vvv, now ; t6ts, then; noxi, some- 
times, &c. 

3. Adverbs of Quantity; ndaov, how muck; noli), much; 
oliyov, a Utile, &c. 

4. Adverbs of Quality ; these end in o>? ; in a and ^ 
(which are properly datives of the first declension) ; also 
in 77, t, ei, dov, dijv, on, and ?. 

5. Adverbs of Manner ; (viz. of action or condition,) in- 
cluding those which express exhortation, affirmation, ne. 
gation, granting, forbidding, interrogation, doubt, &c. 

6. Adverbs of Relation ; or such as express circum- 
stances of comparison, resemblance, order, assemblage, 
separation, &c. 

7. Adverbs of Exclamation ; in other languages usually 
denominated Interjections. (See 06s. 2.) 

observations. 

Obs. I. Some adverbs have such an affinity, that begin- 
ning with a vowel they are indefinites ; with n, interroga- 
tives ; with t, redditives or responsives, as follows : 



INITE. 



:aOGATlVE. 






! which wav. 
( 



| by what 
ft J 

56c, ?'• 

nrli. 



hich way ? 
what . 



( whh 

\ by v 

$ how far ? 



for what reason ? 

• // ? 

wddif wl 

*4trw t how much ? 

woior, after what me 



REDD1TIVE. 

( this way, 1 

ravTy, \ by this mc 



rfiSc or 1 



or 
means. 
$ so far. 
' "' , I f or that reason. 
r6re t Tyjvtxa, then. 
r6Bev, thence. 
t60i, there. 
r6trt 1 , so much. 
Toiov, after that manner y 
T0T&K 6?, so often. 



§ 120. FORMATION AXD DERATION OP ADVERBS. 165 

Obs. 2. Under adverbs in Greek are classed those oartirlp, 

min e d C nd atl ° Q - Wh i Ch eXP '" eSS S ° me S,ldde » eltfof fte 
mind, and are, in the grammars of most other lan«niaees T 
nominated Interjections. The most enmm™ . J 7i? g ' , 
following, which express "^ ° f these are tht) 

Rejoicing; as, JoO, to. ConoWn* ; as, & ,»5 

fifn W ; as, m & and &. Mmiring ;%l6a6aTln a l 
Lauglnng • as 3, S. Deriding as ik 7 

Rejecting; as, «Wa" ^'^ sdence i as, i), 1}. 

§ 120. OF THE FORMATION AND DERIVATION 
OF ADVERBS. 

J^^Jl &££*»*> »■ -• «-> * 

But the greater part are derivatives, and consist of 

F e ' OI mese the following are examples- 
! * ^t^Sf' 6 " f !1 5 utei - ^jectives ; as, n^nov, ron Q ~„. 
L;.^™ "*-*>*; rd M W«, chiefly, 4, 

2. The oblique cases of nouns and pronouns ; as, 
Gen. 6pcv, fog-edbr; from ^ ^^ 
o^«.« o5j never; from oW««i6 s , no one. 
Dat. *,*/. a , ora w (i . e . ,„ a c f rc fe . ) from x6x) . 

acc. ^ and ( 4) /Ae ft .' 

from d^, f/ie beginning. h 

M*r,», as, like; from 3/*,, manner. 
3. Verbs are sometimes used as adverbs ; thus, 
The imperative; as, ?iye, m, tte, &r 
The 2d aorist active: as, ,»U, & (pi l ov . from 6 lXoK 
Hie present optative of etui; viz. efev. 



t)6 FORMATION AND DERIVATION OF ADVERBS. § 120. 

Obs. 1. To these may be added 

1st. nouns compounded with prepositions; as, tic Ttod&v, 

out of the way. 
2d. Prepositions united together; as, Trugex, abroad. 
3d. Prepositions joined with adverbs; as, BTceun, then. 

II. Such words as have undergone a change of form, and 
arc used only in an adverbial sense. These are so numerous 
and vftfried in form and derivation, that a perfect classification 
cannot be given. The following, as being the most impor- 
tant, may be noticed : viz. 

Adverbs in 

1. -ws, express a circumstance of quality or manner, and 
are for the most part formed from adjectives by changing -og 
of the nominative or genitive into -o>$ ; as, epilog from epilog ; 
awpgdyug from acogroojy, gen. o&epoovog. 

2. -*, or -f/, express a circumstance of manner, and are 
generally formed from nouns ; as, tzvcupel, without bloodshed ; 

avTo/finL with one's own hand. 

3. -ti and -tei are formed from the verbal adjectives in -rbg 
and -tso; ; thus, ovouuotI, by name; dpidocoil, without sweat- 
ing. So also those in -^/y, (the characteristic of the verb 
being changed when necessary, according to the laws of Eu- 
phony, § 6. 2.); thus, from fiurbg is formed fi&drjv, by steps, 
(from @uu>) ; from avllrjTTTog, uvllrfidi]v, collectively ; from 

7*', secretly, &c. Sometimes the termination 
is added ; as, (mooidrjv, scattered. 

4. i(tti come from verbs in -Cgj, derived from nouns sig- 
nifying a nation, party, or class, and signify after the manner, 
language, &c. of such nation, &c. ; as, 'EMrjviarl, after the 
nut /i ncr of the (\ reeks; dtvdQanodiaTl, after the manner of men. 

-dov and -rfiov are chiefly derived from nouns, and rc- 
late chiefly to external form and character; as, ayelrjddv, in 
her . resembling grapes, 

erbal adjectives they agree in signification with 
i penly* 

6. Adverbs denoting certain relations of place, are formed 
by the addition of certain syllable-; to the words from which 
they b . In a place is denoted by the termina- 

tions ')t. 0*j "<. /,. "/, %ov and %rj ; from a place, by -Oev or ; 
fdi : and to a place, by -<)*, -OS, and -£«« ' 



§ 121, 122. COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 167 

Exc. Adverbs of place, derived from prepositions, express 
the relations of in a place and to a place by the termination 
-&> ; thus, 

In a place. To a place. From a place. 

avco, above. &vco, upwards. avwdsv, from above, (fromd^d.) 
Kdro), below, xdico, downwards. x&Tadsv, from below, ( „ fcard.) 



§ 121. COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 

1. Adverbs derived from adjectives compared by -tgqoq and 
-TtxTog, are compared by changing -og of these terminations 
into -cog ; as, 

aocpwg, croq)G)TeQG)gy aogDwrdrw^, from oocpbg. 

2. Adverbs derived from adjectives, compared by -tcov and 
-MTTog, commonly take the neuter singular of the comparative 
and neuter plural of the superlative for their comparative and 
superlative; thus, 

alo%g(bg, u.iO'/l0V) aXo^ioxa^ (from odo%Qog.) 

Note 1. This mode of comparison is also used, though more rarely, for 
those derived from adjectives compared by -rspog and -rarog ; as, 

Note 2. The accusative neuter of adjectives, both singular and plural, is 
sometimes used adverbially in all the degrees. To the superlative degree 
the article is frequently prefixed : as. to k^eTctov, (sup. Kara.) 

3. Adverbs in -co, formed from prepositions, are compared 
by adding -tboo) and -Tdrw; as, &vw y dcv&Tiga), dycDTdrw. So 

. also prepositions in the sense of adverbs ; as, dm), d7rcoTeow. 

Note. Some other adverbs imitate this mode of comparison ; as, kyyvs, 
iyyvTiou), tyyvrdro) ; yet as often otherwise ; thus, comp. Zyyvrepov, ana ey- 
yiov, superl. iyyiara. 



§ 122. INSEPARABLE ADVERBIAL PARTICLES. 

Certain particles, never used by themselves, but prefixed to 
words by composition, affect the signification of the words 
with which they are compounded, as follows: 

1. The particle d (which becomes dv before a vowel) has 
three different significations • 



1 



|68 OF THE PREPOSITIONS. § 123- 

1st. It marks priration , (from &>>£», without;) as, ftvu- 
5, viihoui water* 

2,1. increase, (from fya*, much;) as, «£uAo£, mwc/i 

wooded. 
3d. ■ rinion, (from fy«a, together ;) as, alo/oc, a con- 

2. ' -/o/. , /or, &Jc, ';<x, la, ll, and sometimes vi\ and 
;.', i;- be signification; as, d^log, manifest; agldijlog, 
verij manifest, Szc. 

3. 7ViJ and >'t' generally express priwtion or negation ; as, 
r*©Sj oyz infant, from Wj and frroi, I speak ; but 

JE.rr. 7V^ sometimes increases the signification ; as, vf\xv- 
ioz, //tf// flows in a full stream, from v^\ and #u&>. 

4. 4v; expresses difficulty, trouble, or misfortune ; as, ducj- 
i«6y^, malevolent; dvoiv/io}, T am unhappy. 

Note. The contrary of Svs is ev, (which is also found by itself.) It signi- 
fies well or w it li facility ; as, svfxsvhs, benevoletit ; svrvx^, 1 am happy. 



9 123. OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 

A Preposition is a word which shows 
the relation between a noun or pronoun 
following it, and some other word in the 
sentence. 

1. The primary use of prepositions seems to have been to 
indicate the relation of one thing to another in respect of 
place. From this, by a natural and easy analogy, they are 
used to express similar relations in respect of time. 

2. From their primary and more common use to express 
in relations of place and time, they are also used by 

analogy and figure to express various other connexions and 
relations among objects, in all of which, however, the primary 
original use of the word may easily be traced. 

3. All prepositions ending with a vowel, except hiicpl, tifqI^ 
and 7to6 9 tejeci the final vowel when compounded with or stand- 
ing before a word beginning with a vowel ; u'tcfl generally re- 
tains /. hut there are many exceptions* It is always rejected 

augment ^. U<»> before* sometimes combines with 
it by contraction; thofi jy° v becomes jroovoyov. §89. 

Obi. 2. 



§ 124. prepositions 'Afuph 'Ava, 'AvtI, 'And. 169 

4. There are eighteen prepositions, properly so called, in the 
Greek language ; of these 

Four govern the Genitive only, viz. "Avil, and, £x or e|, nyb. 
Two govern the Dative only, 'Ev, avv. 

Two govern the Accusative only, Elg or eg, and avdc. 
Four govern the Gen. and Ace. <dia, Kara, ^£t&, tfzreo. 

Si.c govern the Gen., Dot., & Ace. 'Apcpl, ttsqI, enl, nagu, 

ngbg, and -vnb. 



| 124. ALPHABETICAL LIST OF PREPOSITIONS. 

1. *Aucpl, the Genitive, Dative, and Accusative. 

Primary Signification ; round, round about. 

With the Genitive ; round, round about ; at the same time proceeding 
or originating from ; of, or concerning, upon, in addition to, for the sake of, 
for the love of. 

With the Dative; round, with the idea of rest and continuance ; of or 
concerning, among, after, or near, upon, for, i. e. in defence of; for, i. e. on 
account of; with. 

With the Accusative ; round, with the idea of tendency or approxima- 
tion to; near, of, concerning, or belonging to. See also § 134. 13. 

In Composition, about, round about. 

2. "Ava, the Accusative. In poetry, sometimes the Dative. 

Primary Signification ; motion upwards, opposed to Kara. 
With the Accusative; over, up along, through, during, among, with, 
in ; in computation, up, viz. from a point backwards. 

With the Dative ; upon, on, in, with the idea of elevation and rest. 
In Composition ; motion upwards, repetition, increase, back again. 

3. 'AvtI, the Genitive. 

Primary Meaning : in front of, in a state of rest; set over against, i. e. by 
wav of exchange, comparison, equivalence, or preference. Hence, 

With the Genitive ; For, i. e. equivalent; before,'m preference; instead, 
of, against, equal to. for, in consideration of; upon. 

In Composition ; equality, substitution, reciprocity, comparison ^opposition 

4. 'And, the Genitive. 

Primary Signification ; removal /rom, viz. contact with ; opposite of npds. 

With the Genitive ; From, on, after, (from the time of,) against, by 
means of, with, upon, of i. e. proceeding from ; on account of, for, of, i. e. be- 
longing to ; e. g. ol Atto, those belonging to, viz. the Council, Plebeians, Stoics 



,, 



15 



fe 



170 PREPOSITIONS Jtu, Fig 01" ' Fg. ' E* % *E r, 2?7rl. § 12 ^- 

In Composition ; .v trfctrs, sep ration^ negation, privation, tugmenta- 

5. Jtu, the Genitive and Accusative. 

Primary Signifu ltion ; through, motion through. 

With THE (.'kmit. ;:; I. By means of, with, viz. ns an instrument; 
v 2. with regard to the space or time passed through, at, in; with numerals, 
very five. 

With THE &COUS \tiye ; For, on account of, viz. as the end, occasion, or 
avTov iyevero, all things were made by him; rwrh 
veto, all things were made for him. 
In Composition \ separation, division, arrangement, passage through, 
reciprocation, opposition, or competition, perseverance. 

6. Fig or eg, the Accusative. 

Primary Signification; to, into ; motion from without to within; the 
opposite of In. 

With the Accusative; to, toward, against, among, before, concern- 

of, in; with numerals, about. It forms distributives; as, 

si's ha, one by one ; it is used adverbially, ei$ uiraf, once ; tis SU, twice. 

In Composition; into. 

Note, when before a Genitive, an accusative is understood. 

7. 'Ex, (before a vowel '£?,) the Genitive. 
Primary Signification ; from, out, out of, motion from within to with* 
out ; opposite of els. 

With the Genitive it denotes motion from, causation, change of state ,\ 

red oft i. e. made of; of, viz. the number ; out of, by, with, according to.\ 

In Composition ; out of, it denotes division or separation, pre-eminence t 

completion or success, intensity. 

S. % Ev, the Dative. 

Primary Signification; in, with the idea of rest and being contained; 
within. 

With the Dative ; within, during, among, before, in the power of, by, 
viz., by means of; in the case of, toilA, into. 
. ion ; in or arm . 

the (lenitive, Daiivr., and Accusative. 

PR1 with motion or rest. 

With th \rnear; during, through, under \\ 

:fi, r, with, i>ij. 

id continuing upon, in the power 
of, i. <•. resting u] . besides, i. e. in addition to ; for. 

. e. in ofdV it-: afi dong, among, over, viz. in authority. 



$ 124. PREPOSITIONS KaT&, MstOl, Tlaqdi, ITsgl. 171 

With the Accusative ; on or upon, with the idea of tendency or ap- 
proach towards ; to, toivards, under, so as to be dependent upon ; in, over, 
during, against, viz.. motion towards with hostile intent. 

In Composition ; addition, increase, reciprocity, succession. 

10. Kaxa, the Genitive and Accusative. 

Primary Signification ; doicn along, (parallel) ; down to, upon, or at, 
(perpendicular) ; down through, (transverse) ; opposite of dva. 

With the Genitive ; down from, viz. originating or proceeding down 
fro. n, directed down by ; along, on, through, downwards; under, upon, at, 
as a mark ; before, respecting, by, viz., in swearing ; against, among. 

With the Accusative ; down (not from, but,) parallel to, down along, 
or to ; through, according to, in respect of; in, on, by, near to, at, opposite, ox 
before, during. Adverbially, Kara fxiicpdv, by degrees. 

In Composition; down, opposition, intensity. 

11 Msxd, the Genitive, Dative (with the Poets), and the 
Accusative, 

Primary Signification ; with, together with, not as a part of, or one 
with ; expressing a connexion less close than avv. 

With the Genitive ; with, together with, by means of, viz., as connected 
with and depending upon ; according to, and, i. e. in conjunction with, as an 
agent, or object ; with, i. e. against ; with, i. e. for, on the side of; among. 

With the Accusative ; after, i. e. following close or near to, in res- 
pect to space or time ; next to, next after, to, towards, for, or after, with a 
.view to bring ; between, in. 
. : With the Dative ; by the poets only, in, with, among. 

In Composition; participation, change, reciprocity. 

12. IIuou, the Genitive, Dative, or Accusative. 

Primary Signification : denotes motion from, close to, or towards an 
object, according to *he case with which it is joined. 
With the Genitive; from, i. e. from beside; of, proceeding from ; 
, with, near, from among, above, or in comparison with. 
With the Dative, at, with, near, among, with the idea of continuance. 
With the Accusative ; to, beyond, beside, towards, i. e. to the side of; 
hrnugh along, against, in comparison with. 
In Composition; i* retains its general meaning; also defect. 

13. ITeol, the Genitive, Dative, and Accusative. 

Primary Signification ; round, round about, nearly the same with 

but in a sense less close. 
With the Genitive ; round, round about, with the idea of origin or 
about, i. e. of, or concerning ; with, for, viz. in defence of; above or 
>efore, denoting pre-eminence or superiority. 



i 



172 PREPOSITIONS fJ$0, !/<><><, -i)r, Yntg. § 124. 

With Till Dative; wnd,round about, with rest or continuance?; /or 

■ •ii aci ount of; from. 
Withthi \(. i batiyej .■.■■'■■'/, or about, with tendency or approach to j 

fling or towards, about, i. O. near to, advancing towards ; about, 

i. a. with regard to ; in, of, against. 

Is < 0MP081 MOM ; roii/id about, also denoting increase, abundance. 

14. 77oo, Me Genitive. 

Pro iriCATioN ; before, in respect of place or time, but without 

the idea of opposition or comparison which belongs to dvri. 

With the Genitive ; before, in the presence of ; at the command of, 
through^ denoting cause or origin ; for, in defence of; for, for the advan- 
f ; before, denoting preference. 

Is Composition ; before; with verbs of motion, forth, forward 

15. JTgbg, the Genitive, Dative and Accusative. 

Primary Signification ; transition or passage, the relative direction 
being indicated by the case. 

With the Genitive ; from, i. e. transition from; from, by, denoting 
j'nt; belonging to, or the property of ; of, proceeding from; on the 
f: By, in oaths and supplications; before, to, so as to be protected j 
by. 

With the Dative ; close to, near, and continuing; besides, in addition 
to, before, occupied or busy with. 

With the Accusative ; to or towards, against, according to, loith, in I 
comparison of. 

In Composition ; motion to, addition, against, close to. 

16. 2-vv, the Dative. 

Primary Signification ; with, closely connected with another, so as in 

e to form one with it ; see pEra 
With tiii; Dative; with, together vnth, according to, besides, with 

! fairing, to, on (he side of. 
In* ( '< net in action^ association, combination, col-' 

m, or fulfilment, collision, intensity. 

17. r T.j;n. the Genitive and Accusative, 

e, viz. in respect of place, and 

lUthority, protection. 
of n 3t ; over, in a state of mo- 
. ir the place of ; for , on account of ; 
by. fc f to. 

Wi: ; i '. above or beyond, above, i. c.i 



§ 125. OF CONJUNCTIONS. 173 

In Composition ; it retains its primary signification, also sometimes 
it augments. 

18. 'Ytto, the Genitive, Dative, and Accusative. 

Primary Signification ; under, modified by its case. 

With the Genitive ; under, generally with the idea of protection, sub- 
jection, or the object, of influence proceeding from ; also by, with, i. e. un- 
der the direction of; by means of, for, i. e. under the influence of. 

With the Dative ; simply under^ completely under and continuing ; by. 

With the Accusative; under, viz., moving and proceeding under or 
coming up to the under part of a thing ; to, behind, about, on the eve of. 

In Composition; it retains its primary signification. Sometimes it 
denotes diminution, privacy, beginning. 

OBSERVATIONS. 

1. The preposition, as its name imports, usually stands before the worn 
which it governs. When it comes after it, as it sometimes does, this is m 
licated by the change of the accent from the last syllable to the first. 
\ 2. In composition, with a word beginning with a vowel, and generally 
vhen standing before such a word, the final vowel of the preposition is 
hopped, and, if the next preceding letter be a consonant, it is subject to the 
hanges required by the laws of euphony ; thus, d™ lavrov must be written 
<£' lavrov. Hsol, however, never drops its final vowel, and Ik never changes 
Is final letter except before a vowel, when it is changed into If. 

3. The preposition alone, with the accent thrown back to the first syllable, 
; sometimes used for certain compounds, of which it forms a part; thus, 
vi is used for ivsari, it is lawful ; Trepi for Trepiean, it is superfluous ; ava 
)r dvaariidi, arise ; rdpa for Trdpetrn, he is present, 

l| " 



§ 125. OF THE CONJUNCTIONS. 

A Conjunction is a word which connects 
rords or sentences. 



Jf ic 



Conjunctions, according to their different meanings, are 

ided into different classes, of which the following may be 

>ticed ; viz, 

f,ir| : Connective; as, xab, tk, and; in poetry, ^, ldk 9 tyer, 

and ; xal <H, also, &c. 

Disjunctive; as, %r { Toi-, in poetry, %e ; and sometimes fyovr, 

rptov, or. 
Concessive ; as, x&r, xalneQ, fl xul, although* 
15* 



174 tBTSBBIAL vxn CONJUNCTIVE PARTICLES. § 125 

•1. .Idvcrtdfirr : as. d drdo, bt(t; ; >\ at least ; uh\ &X- 

'>nl. truly, indeed; m n,>i. yet, &c. 
% ( s which assign a reason fors ►mething previously 

><<, "//, D.-iri;, b<pga 3 that 

. ///*//, so thai ; oflvexa, (in poetry) &e- 

[nd i 1 ■■ >■ '■. since, ifief /hat. 

<>. ('mirh;sir>\ or such used in drawing a conclusion, 

or inference from something previously said; 

as. (inn* or/', therefore; £*6, dio.iio, wherefore, 

di r llin+tnihf ; totvvP) rv or /'t>J', therefore ; to/- 

emphatic) wherefore ; ovxovv, not there. 

7 Conditional ; as, el, 8*, fey, y\ in poetry, *a, or xtr, «r 

aifce, //\* e&reo, if indeed. 
8. Expletive; as, vi, tt^, rot, <;(/, ^sr, ^i), 7rov ? ttw, #0, &c. 

ADVERBIAL AND CONJUNCTIVE PARTICLES. 

The following remarks on the signification and use of cer 
tain adverbial and conjunctive particles, will be useful for re- 
ference. For more ample information on this subject, the ad- 
vanced student is referred to the work of Hoogeveen on the 
Greek Particles, an abridged translation of which has been 
published by the Rev. John Seager, B. A. 

\AAA. 

1. 'AXXd is adversative, and commonly answers to the English but. Tt is 
sometimes used elliptically, to indicate confidence or readiness, and may be 

Well, then* therefore. Thus, dXV ev liadi, bri e£ei toW ou'rw?, 
• that this will be so, i. e. ovk dtcvfjaei, dXX', &c. / will not be 
n the contrary, know i Sec. 
- an. Thus combined y&p introduces a reason for the opposition 

i ; as, d\Xa yao Knfovra Xevaao), Travrra) rovg TrapecrToyrag \6yovg. 

But / will Hop tfu present discourse, for I sec Creon coming. Sometimes, 

is more latent, and a clause is to he supplied from 

Lto, dXXfi yuo h> aoov Siktiv Sdjvoficv, where thorn must 

plied from the preceding Bentence, ovk dgfjpiot <'nra\Xaton£v, But wt 

mishedj for we shall render satisfaction in Hades, 

lucceeding clause and sometimes to 

il remark which the connexion and souse of the passage will 

I this is not surprising, for ; But this is not im- 

ts wii'i) emphasis that which is general to something 

-. oloftai, XoiSonfjcrciav. But AT 

LSA0T they wruld noi i ■ a rude manner. 



§ 125. ADVERBIAL *AND CONJUNCTIVE PARTICLES. 1?5 

4. 'A.X/Y ovv ye. When these particles are combined, they usually intimate 
that along with the opposition expressed by d\\a a consequence of what has 
preceded is also expressed ; thus, dXX' ow tovtov ys rdv xP 6vov h TT0V Wfa 
scoiiai. "Yet I will for this reason now at least be less disagreeable. 

5. 'AXXa joined with ovSi strengthens the negative ; as, aXX' ov6l irsipaaojjiai, 
JVa?/, I will not even try. In such sentences ov [xdvov ov may be supplied, 
equivalent to, i" will not only not do it, but Twill not even try. 

6. 'AXXd is strengthened by adding tol ; as, dXX' f]Sv toi, fjv avXdg irapjj, 
Why, that is a pleasant thing enough, if, &c. 

AN, (Poet. KE or KEN.) 

r Av (Poetice ks or kev) according to Professor Dunbar, is derived from 
Am, the same as sdeo, to give, grant, or allow ; and that the primary meaning 
of the particle thus derived is granted or alloiced, which can be readily trac- 
ed in all the variety of expression in which it is employed. This particle is 
used 

1. In the sense oitdv, if, of which in this sense it is probably only an ab- 
breviated form. Thus used, it expresses a condition, and may begin a sen- 
tence ; as, av Oeds Qe\r), if (granted) Godioill. In all its other applications 
av can stand only after other words in its clause. 

2. It is used with indefinites, adding to them the force of the Latin -cim- 
que, -soever-, as, ocms av. whoever, or whosoever. 

3. It is used most generally to limit the verb to which it belongs, and 
partly or entirely takes from that verb its direct affirmative power.' 

With the indicative imperfect, pluperfect, and aorists, it is rendered by 
should, icould; should have, would have, &c. § 170. 4. and Obs. 1. ; and also 
. to express ability, and rendered by could or could have. It is sometimes 
joined to the future, and seems to soften the decisiveness of the statement ; as, 
6 cs kev KexoXajaerai ov kbv 'iKOipai, and he will perhaps be angry to whom I 
go. It is but very seldom found with the indicative present ; a few in- 
stances, however, have been produced from Aristophanes and Plutus. 

With the subjunctive it is never joined, unless accompanied with cer 
tain other words, such as os, oaog, oc-rtg, b-xorepos, ov, Sie&v, Iva, <&c. &c. except 
when used in the sense of lav as above. (1.) 

It is used with the optative of all the tenses except the future, as in 
§ 172. Obs. 6. II. 2d, 3d, 4th, 5th, 6th. 

UWith the infinitive and participles it gives a contingent signification 
(commonly in the future), which may be lesolved by changing the verb or 
B participle into the optative with av ; as, oXovrai dvajxa^EcQai av, they think that 
they could ntrieve themselves y -<?>>« a-roj7ra>, 7rdXX' av s%oiv eItteiv, I omit the 
rest, though I have much to say. 

4. It is used in positive statements with dk^ent moods to give an ex- 
pression of hesitalion and modesty to the assertion ; as, us av jxol SSktj, as it 

| seems (would seem) to me; oin av o76a, I (should) hardly know. 



176 ADVFKuML AND CONJUNCTIVE PARTICLES. §125, 

f>. r Ar Ifl frequently repeated, either on account of its standing at a great 

distance from the verb, or to give emphasis to the condition suggested t>y 

I <«r — \iyuiu Hv, having stationed myself I would say ; 

\ you, how can you say, &c. ? 
8, It l- boon times used to intimate that the verb in the preceding clause 

t <Vj t(J> OTHpcoTepog cpairjv c7vai, rovrcZ nY (sc. <pair]v clvai 

rnoti wise in any thing, it would be in this. 

'APA. 

1 . " \ | i. denoting inference or conclusion, always stands after some word 
in its clause: its proper signification is tl ef course," "in the nature of 

ommonly rendered therefore, consequently ; it is used in the 
isive steps of a train of reasoning; as, If there are altars there are 
also gods ; dXka /<>> cial fiwuoi* tioXv apa xal Osoi, But there certainly are altars; 
THEREFORE there are gods too. It is used in making a transition to what fol- 
lows in the order of time or events, or in the progress of thought. With el 
or Lav it expresses conjecture; as, ei apa dvvovrai, if indeed (i. e. in the 
course of things) they can. Sometimes it serves for an emphatic assevera- 
tion as if founded on an inference. 

2. The adverb apa is different from this, and is always placed first in a 
clause or sentence. It is merely an interrogative particle like the Latin 
num or utrum; as, ana xarabriov 8 Sov^o^ai \iyttv ; Is, then, what I wish to 

tident ? When a negative answer is expected it has generally the par- 
ticle /i>/ annexed. The Latin nonne is expressed by ap ov, and sometimes 
pa alone. 

TAP. 

1. Too, for, always follows other words like the Latin enim, which it re- 
sembles in signification, and for which at the beginning of a sentence *ai 
y'lo, like the Latin etenim, is often used. Its use is to assign a reason for 
what is said. Very otten, however, that of which it assigns the cause is 
merely implied or hinted at, and must be supplied to show the force of yap. 
It will frequently be found to refer to such expressions understood; as, Yes, 

I believe t I cannot, £cc, as, for example, in the answer so 
ion in Plato, I'm yap tfirta, Yes, or certainly, for so it is. Thus, Ho- 

I . i.1 Kiokt], rtt yap rtirrriv b6dv liyCfiovcvrrci ; Oh ClTCe, (I can- 

o thither.) i ,ii? From this interrogative 

; Bometimec to be us< d merely to strengthen a question, like the 
I . .'in nam in quisne 

2. [| ip, the former particle indii ates 
thi' omission of something of which y&p assigns a cause; thus, koi yap 
strictly translated means, and (no wonder,) for; and (it is natural,) for: 

'• for the rendering of dXXd yip. See &X\&. 2. 



§ 125. ADVERBIAL AND CONJUNCTIVE PARTICLES. 177 

CE. 

Ti (enclitic) is a particle of limitation, and signifies at least, certainly, 
however, indeed, and is used to single out an individual object from a num- 
oer ; as, el t uii b\ov [xtpos ys, if not the whole at least apart ; iyta ys, I indeed, 
I at least. In most combinations it can be rendered into English only by 
giving greater emphasis to the word with which it is connected. 

AE. 

The particle Se, but, is used both to distinguish and oppose, and always 
stands after one or more words in a clause. It often serves, however, mere- 
ly to mark transition from one proposition to another ; and, in general, every 
proposition which has no other conjunction at its commencement, takes this 
Se, whether really opposed to the preceding or not. When so used, it may 
be rendered by and, for, or any other word which the nature of the connec- 
tion may require ; or it may often remain untranslated. Its principal use, 
however, is in connexion with fxev, which see. 

AH. 

At), a particle of affirmation, signifies truly, really, icithout doubt. It is 
used in affirmative answers ; as, 8rj\ov 6f], it is certainly manifest. It is used 
ironically, especially after us ; and after relative and comparative words it 
is usually emphatical. With nov joined to it (Sijirov,) it signifies certainly, 
viz., and sometimes perhaps. It differs from \ar\v and ys, also affirmative 
words, in this, that 6n strongly asserts a thing as already established ; \nr\v 
goes on to press the assertion without relaxing as to what has preceded ; 
while ye asserts with limitation, yielding as to the past, or other things, but 
insisting upon this. 

2. A?/, from ijSr], as an adverb, signifies now ; joined with vw, this very 
moment ; as, vvv rjSrj fxa^nreov, xoe must fight this very moment. With verbs 
in the preterite, it denotes just now. As a conjunction, it is used, 1. in ex- 
horting ; as, \iye 6rj, come now, read ; 2. In questions, it indicates the earn- 
estness of the speaker, and his desire of an immediate answer ; as, ra voXa 
of] ravra ; what now are these ? 3. In expressing admiration when joined 
with -6-e ; as, ri Aft-ore rovrdv, why now these ; 4. In commencing a sub- • 
\ ject; as, r £2ce ft gkov&hsv avro, now let us consider it in this way; 5. In 
marking the successive stages of thought as they us e me above another. 
[n each of these it signifies now truly, until at the last it signifies finally. 

KAI and TE. 

Kal and re have the same significations in reference to each other as the 
Latin et and que. Both connect single ideas, and the entire parts of a sen- 
tence. With the older poets re is more common than in the Attic prose wri- 
ters, and it is commonly put not merely once between the connected parts, 
but joined to each of them; as, narhp avSpuv re Qetiv re, the father of both gods 



17^ I B IAUTICLES. § 125. 

parate clauses, the former signifies 

a ; ilu- latter, h i K*l f and alsQ) connect more closely than 

simple k.:\ : Kul~ and; as will— as; aWcos rs gal, (.specially, i.e. 

i ts) and also ) particularly td 

MA and NH. 
and N$ are particles of obtestation, and always govern the accusative 
of tli' ia always affirmative; pa, when alone, is negative, but is 

nevertheless attached hoth to affirmative and negative obtestations ; as, va\ 

•. and ov fia Aia. 

MEN and AE. 

and ci arc two particles referring to each oilier ; they are used todis- 
sh, and at the same time to connect, the different clauses of a sentence 
ter. Thus used, piv is generally placed in the first clause of a sen- 
. and e.i in each of the succeeding ones. Hence, whenever we find 
f.iev in the first member of a sentence, the thought necessarily turns to an op* 
member with Si. Sometimes, however, after piv the expected Si does 
not actually follow ; i. e. when the opposition is so clear that Si is not neces- 
sary to point it out, or when some other word, such as dXXa, drdp, &c, 
supplies its place. In like manner Si is often used without being preceded 
by i-iiv, referring to something conceived in the mind but not expressed ; or, 
without such reference, it is used simply to connect the parts of a sentence 
less closely than by fiiv — Si, or other conjunctions. In opposition they are com- 
monly renden d indeed — but. See Si. 

The distributive use ofpiv and Si with the article, relative pronoun, &,c 
will be noticed § 133. 3. and 134. 19. 

OYN and OYKOYN. 
1. ' nY, wherefore, is used, 1st. In drawing an ultimate conclusion in the 
if all that hag been said before; in this it differs from a»a, which is 

ming. 2. It commences a 
chapter or paragraph, with some reference to what has preceded. 3. It j 
continues or resumes a subject, after a digression. 4. Introduces a tran- 
sition to some new subject ; and lastly, has an affirmative force, particularly 
in rep s< ofo ovros, it is certainly »o; bene.: the compounds, 

'/>"■>!'. The former is properly a negative infer- 
Mi* times it loses its negative char- 
t " is it not there- 
fore r 

he 

irly allfed tOy«, and is used to express the idea with 
;oor<- emphasis than N would have withoul it. This is indicated in English 
merely \>\ ol the word, or by the words very, ever, and j 

like Joined with a participle it is commonly renden, d although, how 



§ 125. ADVERBIAL AND CONJUNCTIVE PARTICLES 179 

much so ever, with a relative it adds the force of the Latin cunque, or the 
English ever ; thus, arrep, quozcnnque, whatever } bairep, quicunque, whoever, 
&c. ; as, arrsp \iytir, whatever he does say ; dya$6s nep siov, excellent though 
thou art ; rjTTep £?x ei/ > j us t aS he was. 

nor. 

1. Tiov is a particle interrogative, of place, and signifies 1. where ? 2. whith- 
er ? As an enclitic it signifies motion to a place ; as, a-rrevSco nov, lam hasten- 
ing to some place, somewhither, and also indicates place indefinitely any- 
where hence it is joined with adverbs of place; as, ixsT Si ttov, somewhere 
there- abouts, 

2. From the indefiniteness of its signification arises its conjectural use to 
express a thing with a degree of uncertainty and caution expressed in Eng- 
lish by probably, perhaps, if I mistake not, &c, and hence is used in elicit- 
ing and asking consent ; as, ovvoivda -ov kclI avrds on, &c. You yourself, as 
well as I, know, if I mistake not, or doubtless, that, &c, where an affirma- 
tive reply is evidently expected. Hence also its use as a diminutive, to 
qualify what might otherwise seem too positive or peremptory. Thus used 
it may be rendered by pretty nearly, in my opinion, perhaps, &c. This 
particle, though often used, is never redundant, oi Sf\ ttov, for example, is, no 
indeed, as I think ; not truly in my opinion. 

nos. 

1. This particle with the circumflex is interrogative and signifies how '/ 
as, ntis ovk d£ids earl rovrov ; how can he but be worthy of this ? Joined 
with yap thev constitute an emphatic negative, ttco? yap notriGto ; for hoiu 
shall I do it? i. e. I will not do it at all. So also Kal ncog crico-rco ; I cannot 
be silent ; literally, and how am I to he silent ? 

2. As an enclictic -cos signifies some hovj, in some degree, &c. as, aXAws 
tco$. in some other v;ay ; cboe -ncos, somehow thus ; &c. 

fiffi. 

This particle is extensively employed, and with a great variety of usage , 
as, 1. It is used for "va, to denote a purpose; as, cos Sd^oi/xev, in order that 
we may shew ; 2. For on with the meaning of that ; as, \iyovrts «? UeTuos, 
&c, saying that he. &c. ; 3. More commonly it signifies as, expressing si- 
militude ; as, wj Sso\os, as a slave ; "He taught them — «$ l^ovaiav ly^v, as 
one having authority.'''' 4. With the acute accent and not before an enclic- 
tic nor after a word on which it depends, it has the sense of ovnas, thus ; as, 
&seitr<ov, having spoken thus. 5. In exclamations it has the sense of how ' 
igopsv, how happy v;e d^em you! hence its use with the opta- 
tative in the sense of the Latin utiuam ; as, &s p ocpeX "Exrop KreTvai ! 
Would that Hector had slain me I literally, how Hector ought to havt 
slain me! 6. B< lative adjectives and adverbs, like 8ti 9 it strength 



180 ADVERBIAL AND CONJUNCTIVE PARTICLES. § 125. 

nickly as possible* Allied to this is 
tening particle, with the positive degree, io such ex- 
V:/.///, realty, 7. Il is used for the purpose of 
limitin in it i the infinitive; a-^, togtitxiXv, 90 to spt ah i w$ sU&miylfe 

• and also in the same sense it is used before 
whole clauses and propositions; as, &? hfi rd m%6 f for the most part; uh 
\-, in proportion to the. size of the city. 8. As a par- 
dele of gnifies when, sometimes while ; as, w 61 >j\Qc, but when he 
9. With numerals it signifies about', as, u>s rpia /} rerrapa cradia, 
>r four si, alia. 10. Witli participles in the genitive absolute;, 
and also in the dative or accusative, it is rendered as % since because, inas- 
much and the participle is then rendered by the indicative; as, 
is i^vncoTiiTns ovo-rjs, because this place icas the most secure. 
11. It is often pot by the Attics for the preposition dg, nposj or M ; as, w> 
ds me ; ojg tou 6aai\ia, to the king. 

f* For the negative particles ov and /^, with their combinations and 
compounds, sec § 166. 

Obs. Though it is, in many cases, difficult to give a distinct translation of 

some of the Greek particles, or even always to feel their force, yet they 

ought never to be regarded as mere expletives. In all languages there are 

particles which are often employed chiefly for the sake of completeness, or 

in order to produce a well-sounding fulness, yet never without their own 

peculiar sense ; and though it is often difficult to define what that sense is, 

ie feels that the expression is incomplete without them. So it is 

also in the Greek language. The full and original meaning of many of 

particles has become partially lost, and they now give to the discourse 

only a slight colouring which we cannot properly feel except after lon<£ 

lintance and practice. For a more full elucidation of the force and use 

of thes' particles we refer the reader to tLe elaborate work of Hoogeveen on 

the Greek particle* 



§ 126. STNTAX. 181 



PART III, 



§ 126. SYNTAX. 

Syntax is that part of Grammar which treats 
of the proper arrangement and connexion of 
words m a sentence. 

A Sentence is such an assemblage of words as makes com- 
plete sense ; as, J\Ian is mortal. 

A phrase is two or more words rightly put together, but not 
\ making complete sense ; as, In truth, in a word. 

Sentences are of two kinds, Simple and Compound. 
A Simple sentence contains but one subject and one verb ; 
1 as, Life is short. 

A Compound sentence contains two or more simple sen- 
tences combined ; as, Life, which is short, should be well em- 
ployed. 

Every simple sentence consists o( two parts, the subject and 
the predicate. 

The subject is the thing chiefly spoken of. It is either in 
the nominative case before a finite verb, or in the nominative 
or accusative before the infinitive. 

The predicate is the thing affirm i or denied of the subject. 
>It is either contained in the verb ifc V; as, John reads; or it 
consists of a neuter verb with an adj tive or noun following 
it ; as, Time is short ; They became p. or. 

Both the subject and the predicate may be attended by other 
words, called adjuncts, which serve to restrict or modify the 
meaning of the word with which they may stand connected ; 
as, ' ; An inordinate desire of admiration often produces a con- 
temptible levity of deportment." 

When a compound sentence is so framed that the meaning 
is suspended till the whole be finished, it is called a period, 

J6 



1S2 PARTS OF SYNTAX. § 127, 128 

§ 127. GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF SYNTAX. 

U In eyery i ;> a t>«t*6 and a nominative, 

i il or uihKts! 
2, Every article* adjective, adjective pronoun, or participle, 
messed or understood with which \t 
Bgra 

9. Erery nomiitatipe has its own verb expr owo d or under- 
stood. 

4. Every i erb (except in the infinitive and participles) has- 
^.ii nominative expressed or understood. 

5. The genitive is governed by a noun, a verb, a preposi- 

in adverb; or it is placed as the case absolute with 
arficiple. 

6. The dative is governed by adjectives, verbs, and preposi- 
tions. It also expresses the cause, manner, or instrument. 

7. The accusative is governed by an active verb or preposi- 
tion. 

S. The vocative either stands alone, or is governed by an tn- 
terjecti 

9. The infinitive mood is governed by a Der&, an adjective, 
or adverbial particle. 



§ 128. PARTS OF SYNTAX. 

The parts of Syntax are commonly reckoned 
two. Concord and Government. 

Concord is the agreement of one word with 
>ther in gender, number*, case, or person. 
Government is that power which one word 
has in de termihing the mood, tense, or case of ano- 
ther word. 

I. OF CONCORD. 

Concord is fourfold ; viz. 

1. Of a substantive with a suhstantive. 

2. Of an adjective with a substantive. 

3. Of a relative with its antecedent. 

4. Of a verb with its nominative (or subject). 



§ 129, 130. AN ADJECTIVE WITH A SUBSTANTIVE. 183 

§ 129. A SUBSTANTIVE WITH A SUBSTANTIVE. 

Rule 1. Substantives denoting the same per- 
son or thing agree in case ; as, 

JJavlo; andoriolog, Paul, an apostle. 

UttXQ&Tr}; 6 cpd6aocpog, Socrates, the philosopher. 

Gea> xgi<Tri, To God, the judge. 

Substantives thus used are said to be in apposition. The second sub- 
stantive is added to express some attribute, description, or appellative be- 
longing to the first, and must always be in the same member of the sentence, 
i. e. they must, be both in the subject, or both in the predicate. A substan- 
tive predicated of another, though denoting the same thing, is not in apposi- 
tion with it. See § 139. III. Rule 6. 

Obs. 1. One of the substantives is sometimes understood ; as 9 
^orvdyrjg 6 Kva^dcgov, (sup. vlbg,)Jlstyages, the son o/Cyaxares. 

Obs. 2. The possessive pronoun in any case being equiva- 
lent in signification to the genitive of the substantive pronoun 
from which it is derived, requires a substantive in apposition 
with it to be put in the Genitive; as, z/«rjo siudg r\v xvp&mdog, 
He was the brother-in-law of me, a shameless woman". 
, See § 133. 17. 

Obs. 3. On the same principle, possessive adjectives formed 
from proper names, being equivalent to the genitive of their 
primitives, have a noun in apposition in the genitive ; as, 
]\~e<jTOQ£r{7CLioa yrjl nvli]ysveog ^aodi\og, near the ship of nestor 
a king bom at Pylos ; AOrjvalog ibr, Ttoleug v^g fAsyloTrjg, being 
a citizen o/athens, a very large city. See § 133. 18. 

Obs. 4. Sometimes the latter of two substantives signifying 
the same thing is put in the genitive ; as, nohg ^AQrjv&v, (for 
" A0r\vai^) the city of Athens. 



§ 130. AN ADJECTIVE WITH A SUBSTANTIVE. 

Rule II. An adjective agrees with its sub- 
stantive in gender, number and case; as ? 

XQrjUTog &vif[q, a good man. 

xulri ywri, a beautiful woman. 

utoivbv uyudov (/orjua), a common good. 

This Rule applies to the Article, Adjective, Adjective Pronouns, and 

Participles. 



184 coNConn or 1111; adjective. § 131 

Obs. 1. Other words are sometimes used as adjectives, and 
sequently fall under this rule; viz. 

\ substantive which limits the signification of a more 
general term ; as, '/.'/.a.;,- <,or/ r the Grreek language. 

2d. A.dverhs placed between the article and its substantive ; 
as, c pi i«$v t6nog, the intervening spat e. 

I, 2. The place of the adjective is sometimes supplied 
substantive with a preposition : as, ffiov1\ usxa d6£rjg, (for 
exalted pleasure. Sometimes by a substantive gov* 
erning the other in the genitive ; as, G&Qosyr\g, depth of earth, 
i. r. deep earth; i) rteqiOTFBla njg )flkqtT6g, abundance oj grace, 
i. e. abundant grace. For the adverbial adjective, See § 165. 
Obs. 2. 



§ 131. OBSERVATIONS ON THE CONCORD OF 
THE ADJECTIVE. 

'*/>$. 1. Two or more substantives singular, unless taken 
separately, have an adjective plural. If all the substantives be 
of the smite gender, the adjective will be of that gender. If 
of different genders, the adjective takes the masculine rather 
than the feminine, and the feminine rather than the neuter. 
But if the substantives signify things without life, the adjective 
is commonly put in the neuter gender. Not unfrequently, 
ver, the adjective agrees with one of the substantives and 
is understood to the rest; as, alel yty \oi Iqtg ie ytlij, nole. 
>)<iy(uiE ; contention to thee is always delightful, andwars 
and battles. 

Obs. 2. When the substantive to which the adjective belongs 
may be easily supplied, it is frequently omitted, and the adjec- 
ning its gender, number, and ease, is used as asub- 
tOrjvalog, the Athenian ; ot dlnauot, the righteous. 
Obs. 3. Adjectives in -**6s are used in the neuter genderwith 
rticle, and without a substantive in two di!i 
I 1 H the Singular ; as, to In- 

-\r/.n\ the cavalry; n> nolmocdy, the citizens. 2. In the plu- 
ral tii ircumstnnee which can be determined 
'/\><n ■/.;<. the Trojan war ; nY R\h]viy.i\ 
history. 
Obs. i. The adje i ally when used as a predicate, 
without a substantive, is often put in the neuter gender, X9W a i 
no, too?, &c. being understood; as, ^ nuTQig yfoxaiov 



§ 131. CONCORD OF THE ADJECTIVE. 185 

(scil. XQr\ua) figoroTg, their country is (a thing) very dear to 
men; /ocIsttop to noielv, to do is hard. 

Obs. 5. Two adjectives are frequently joined together, one 
of which by expressing negatively the sense of the other, ren- 
ders it more emphatic ; as, yvond rt ofix dyvcoTa /not,, literally, 
known and not unknown, (i. e. ivell known,) to me. 

Obs. 6. Adjectives are very often put in the neuter singular 
and plural, with and without an article, for adverbs ; as, rtowTov, 
in the first place ; to nqmov, at first ; to. fidlioTa, chiefly; xqv- 
(faXa secretly, &c. 

Obs. 7. In any gender or number, adjectives are sometimes 
used in the sense of adverbs, to express a circumstance of time, 
place, order, manner; as, ensaov ay /tjcttTvol, they fell near each 
other ; ucpixeTO devTeoaXog — ToiTaTog, he came on the second — 
third day. § 165. Obs. 2. So in Latin, qui creatur annuus. 
Goes. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc. 1. An adjective is often put in a different gender or 
number from the substantive with which it is connected, tacitly 
referring to its meaning rather than to its form, or to some 
other word synonymous with it, or implied in it ; as, 

xooior xallto-Ta, a most beantifid girl. 

& dyads ipv/i), O brave soul. 

hjOTrgiov Ttvo ertiq)8oovTcxg, a band of thieves bringing fire. 

Exc. 2. A collective noun in the singular may have an ad- 
jective in the plural, and in the gender of the individuals which 
form the collection ; as, Govlr^ ^av/Uxv elysv — ovk dyvovvTeg, the 
council kept peaceable — not being ignorant. 

So in Latin, maxima pars — in flumen acti sunt. 

Exc. 3. In the dual number the Attic writers sometimes 
join a masculine adjective with a feminine noun; as, tovtcot^ 
fyiioa, these two days. 

Exc. 4. An adjective masculine in the superlative degree 
is sometimes joined to a feminine noun to increase the 
force of the superlative ; as, at xdgm fisXtScvraw^ very black 
\\ pupils. Also, a masculine adjective is joined with a femi- 
nine noun when the plural is used for the singular, and when a 
' chorus of women speak of themselves; thus, Medea says of 
; herself, xcxl yuo ^diXTjuivoi tnyrjadfieOa, xostooovoiv viwhuevoi, 
though injured I will be silent, yielding to superior powers. 

16* 



]^G CO* Dl THK V njrcTlVE. § 131. 

/•>'■. 5, Vn adjective in the masculine gender maybe join 
ed with a noun denoting a female, if the attention is drawn to 
without regard to the sem 
. 6. I Bubstantive dual may have an adjective plural; 
i b substantive plural, when two is denoted, may 
an adjective dual ; as :'a>-)u:r, let us em- 

tvuaia i/nuhv) <\li)\h»i\ two successive chasms. 

Kaaxo;, #Mo£, in the singular, arc put 
with aouns in the plural, to intimate that the objects expre 
spoken of individually and distributively ; as, 

i dixvtj they ec ten. 

'rii- di allog &Ho, they asked some one thing 

and some another. 
So in Latin, Qitisque pro se qncrnnlur. Liv. 
Exc. S. Plural adjectives sometimes agree with their sub- 
stantives in gender and number, and govern them in the gen- 
itive case; as, 

ol 7Tuhao\ 7wr TtoirjTibV) the ancient poets. 

So also among the Attic writers in the singular; as, 
(h(cTol6u)t' rur TtnXlbv tov %q6vov 9 spending much time. 

Exc. 9. Instead of agreeing with its substantive, the adjec- 
tive is sometimes put in the neuter gender, andthe substantive 
following it in the genitive, (§ 142. R. VI.) ; as, elg tooovtov 
to/.///, ,\ (for Tixravujr M/litjp), to such a pitch of boldness. The 
tct noun is sometimes used instead of the adjective ; as, 
,. (hj)fli of earth, instead of GuOeTu yr\, deep earth. 

Exc. 10. Proper names in the singular are sometimes ac~ 

lauied by the adjectives zr^oros, nag, and others in the 

r plural, as predicates or in apposition; as, i&ftrtcov Alyi- 

L npon I he, chief of the JEginetoe; n&vtot dk i\v toXcti 

Zopyrus was evert/ thing to the Babylo- 

. LI. Demonstrative, pronouns in the neuter singular 

refer to nouns of any gender which do not express a per- 

neuter plural to p< well as things, and 

to the a3 to the plural ; as, neql to /rdaqp 

"0,a ; concerning MANLY FOR. 

titi would, you consent to be deprived op it? 

". who offend ' these, Scil. 

•.'.v and children. 
So also with the adjectives nlelov, 7il?T(», pefop, &c. ; as, 



J) 133, ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 187 

inniag (jlbv u$ei ov aeTov (hcr/LivgtcdP, he will bring not less than 
twenty thousand horse. 



§ 132. OF COMPARATIYES AND SUPERLATIVES 

1. The Comparative is used when two objects or classes of 
objects are compared; the superlative when more than two are 
compared. 

2. The positive is sometimes used in a comparative sense, 
and is followed by the infinitive ; as, ollyoi crvfiSaleZp, too jew 
to fig lit 

3. When one quality is compared with another in the same 
subject, the adjectives expressing these qualities are both put in 
the comparative degree connected by r\ ; as, nlovoiwrsgog % 
<jocp(>)TS6og, more rich than wise. So in Latin, decentior quam 
sublimior? full. Tacit. 

4. The comparative is sometimes made by joining fiallov 
with the positive; and, for the sake of emphasis, sometimes 
with the comparative; as, [i&llov oMjubxeoog, more happy. 

5. The superlative is often used to express a very high de- 
gree of a quality in any object, but without comparing it 
with any other; as, avr^g QpiloxtiJiOTaiog. a very ambitious man; 
noriyua evrfiisTttTov, a, very foolish thing. 

6. The superlative is often strengthened in signification by 
adding certain adverbial words and particles ; such as, nolly, 
f.iuzoijj. tioIv, iiu'UcjTu, Ttlelaropy o/u, <bg, o.twc, oil, ^, &c. ; as, 
tio/jS) dn-dei'sararop^ much the weakest: o% rxoiaro;, eminently 
the best ; cor ru/ovTa, as quickly as possible ; ora xleiowv /go- 
¥ov, as long time as possible. Also by the numeral efg~ as, 
etg &i'rg Selno-Tog, a man of all others the best. 

For the construction of the comparative and superlative de- 
gree as it respects government, see § 143. Rule X. and XL 



V 



§ 133. OF ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 

Rule. Adjective pronouns agree with their 
substantives in gender, number, and case. 



168 uura tivk pronouns. §133. 

///- Definite^ arm;. 

For the import and use of the Definite pronoun «ur^, see 

When used as a persona] pronoun, atobg takes the gender and 

number of die noun (or which it stands, and the ease which 
the noun would have in its place. Sometimes, however, like 
L31. fixe* 1.) it takes the gender and num- 
ber of a synonymous substantive, or of one that expresses the 
of that for which it stands ; as, (MxOrjTStoKxTB n&vxu t« 
lorieg ccvtovq, "teach all nations baptizing 
THEM," where afaotig is put for avOounovg, which expresses 
the meaning of Wry. 

. This observation applies to all adjective pronouns used without, 
and instead of the substantives, to which they refer. 

Demonstratives. 

2. The Demonstratives are used without a substantive only 
when they refer to a noun, or pronoun, or subtantive clause in 
the proposition going before ; or in that coming immediately 
after. 

3. When two persons or things are spoken of, ovrog, this, 

to the latter ; ixsXvog. that, to the former. In the same 
manner are sometimes used & fihv and o; pkv, referring to the 
former, and 6 8h and Sg ds, to the latter, sometimes rice versa. 

4. The demonstratives olrog and ode are generally distin- 
guished thus ; ovm; refers to what immediately precedes, oie 
to what immediately follows; as, juvtu &xo6<r<xg, having beard 
thesi : ^keys tiide, he announced as follows. 

5. The d inonstrative words are frequently used in a kind of 
apposition with a noun, or pronoun, or part of a sentence in 

me proposition. This is done, 1. for the sake of em- 
phasis, or, al the beginning of a sentence, to call the attention 
u] ■ to what is to be said ; as, 7/<5* tnetya (po\uev f 
' vh at sh all I say a s TO THE 8 ; ; TH1 N GS 
andinterr ivrlvvtird, ^i&Qerf* 

irtue? I pronoun is commonly in the 

n< nt . 2. [ftl mtence immediately related, 

rung clauses, the pronoun being intro- 
duced in the last part in apposition with the distant word in 
the first, bring . IXaOsotgyB roi>g 

Kal 'in MTJre ()j)?(>tg tnjfihv 7Wi^~ 



§ 133. ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. 189 

a??re, but the gods who are eternal, and whose power and in- 
spection extend over all things, and who preserve the harmo- 
ny and order of the universe free from decay or defect, the 

greatness and beauty of which is inexplicable fearing 

these, do nothing wicked. 

6. When that with which the demonstrative stands in appo- 
sition is'a sentence, or part of a sentence, it is put in the 
neuter gender, and is often connected with it by oti> or <bg ; 
as, d&X' olds tovto otv javia asv iarvi' arcana Ta/coola y.eUieva 
|j» ,'i8crcp, but he knows (this) w ell that all these places are openly 
before them. 

The sentence is sometimes so arranged that the clause with 
or* stands first; as, otl d' sl/e rcTeqa, tovt' 1'orusv, but we knew 
(this) that he had wings This construction, so common in 
Greek, is seldom if ever used in Latin. 

7. Olrog, with xal before it, is used in the latter clause of a 
sentence, in an adverbial or conjunctive sense, to call the at- 
tention more particularly to the circumstance which it intro- 
duces, and may be rendered " and that" "and truly" "in 
deed" " although r &c, as the sense may require; as, oItoo 
yuo uovvoi y I<av&v ovy. ayovoi ' Aitaioboia^ v.al ovtoi xaru cpovov 
ura ov.r^iv, for these alone of the lonians do not celebrate the 
.dpaiouria,, and that under pretext of a certain murder ; i. e. 
and these do so under pretext, &c. rvvambg xul xavT-ng 
rsv.qag, slug ley el jovvoua Ttscpgixe, if any one 'mentions the name 
of a woman? although (i. e. and that woman being) dead, 
he shudders. 

Bu^when the pronoun is less definite, not referring to any 
particular substantive in the preceding clause, but to some. 
thing expressed in it, it is put in the neuter plural, and may 
generally be rendered " especially," "although " &c. ; as, 2i) 
ds uoi doxsTg ov Tioooe/etv rbv vovv rovioig, %ul Tavia oocpbg 
&v, but you do not seem to me to gire your attention to these 
s, although being wise. Expressions of this kind are 
doubtless elliptical, novslgor some such word being understood, 
and may be rendered « and these things you do." Indeed, it 
is sometimes expressed thus, in Dem. pro Phor. After reproach- 
i i g Apollodorus with his dissolute conduct., he adds, v. a I ravra 
ywuZv.u ~i'/u)v uoieig, and these things you do, having a 
wife ; which, without rtoieTg, might be rendered " though hav- 
ing a wife" 

Vet sometimes these words seem to have no dependence on 



190 ADjr.cnvi: PRONOtFM, § 133. 

anv pait of the sentence, bu( arc thrown in to call the atten- 
i:il circumstance. 
B, The demonstrative pronoun is often joined with adverbs 
of time and place to define these circumstances with greatcf 
emphasis or precision; asj rd • just now ; iovt 1 lxn,at 

thai 

demonstrative pronouns arc sometimes used instead 
of the il pronouns fy(b and 06, and, in speaking, when 

thus used, were probably accompanied with action, so as clearly 
I i plaint out the person intended. When used instead of the 

2d person, they most commonly express contempt The ex 
bifit is equivalent to the Latin en adsum, Lo I 
here am I. 

The Indefinite rig. 

The indefinite tlg 9 § CS, added to a substantive, com- 
monly answers to the English words a, an, a certain one, any 
one, & tlgfofa a tnan, any man, some man. — Sometimes 
with a noun it is used coli as OgcaoKtav rtc xuru xv/na 
1/0,'g. myny a fish bounding through the wave. — Some- 
time- lively; as, xul ilq olxlqv ui'uttXuolcoOu), and let 
RY one build his own house. 

11. With adjectives of quality, quantity, and magnitude, ev- 
illy when they stand without a substantive expressed, or 

in the predicate it serves to temper the expression by asserting 

of the quality in a less positive and unlimited 

man nor, such as miv ; *sed by the English words some- 

, rather j as, d6o6at6g ng y somewhat 

/// to l>< . \ R.wumi hard lo^leam. 

With :. about* &c. ; as, Sixa nrlg, 

about Un. So also wil \xsd6v) nearly; uxedd* 

7tol6 ii, considerably ; w 

12. Without an a he s tseof cmi- 

y:nd rug i-lrm, hit hoasls himself lo 
I 

ii is als< d early fednn- 

>f sound. I a 

luch c d in the accu lative governed 

Qgthen th - on ; as. oifte t< 

</nii. P ALL a J>r<>!, : ] i ji y.al O^aniniov 

I I & 



§ 133 ADJECTIVE PKGNOUNS. 191 

The Interrogative tig. 

14. The interrogative rig, t/, is used in asking a direct 
question ; as, t/ g footers, who did it ? Though sometimes used 
in the indirect interrogation, ocrug is more common ; as, dav. 
au';(x), Tig (or more frequently oang) enoh](j8 3 I wonder who did 
it. Sgmetimes it is accompanied by the article 6 rig, who ; to 
tI what. ° OuTig is also used interrogatively when a person to 
whom an interrogation is put repeats it before answering it ; 
as, <7i) £' el Tig &pdg&p ; ogtvq eia sy6 ; Mst&r, who are you ? 
who am I? JMeloiu 

15. As a predicate, t(, with sot/ following it, is sometimes 
accompanied by the subject in the plural ; as, davft&tco tL tzot 7 
rCFTi TavTa, I wonder what these things are. 

16. The interrogation Tig is often used independently of 
other words in the sentence, being governed by Kara, or some 
such word understood, and may be rendered in what? as to 
what? &c. ; as, twv tL croepcop l7iiGTr\uoveg, in what sort of 
wisdom are they expert ? Sometimes it is used for dia t/, 
or TToog tI, what ? why ? on what account? enl tI, for what pur- 
pose ? n&g t/, how ? So, tL ds, but what ? 

Possessive Pronouns. 

17. The possessive pronoun is in signification equivalent 
to the genitive of the pronoun from which it is derived, and 
while, like the adjective, it agrees with its substantive in gen- 
der, number, and case, yet other words at the same time often 
regard it as the genitive of the personal pronoun. Hence the 
following modes of expression, to orbv fidvov dwgi^ua, equivalent 
to to oov uovov. &c, the gift of thee alone. ^gvvfxevog 
rraToog ts fiiyu xMog rfi iftbv avzov, where £,«6V agrees with 
y.Uog in the accusative, and yet, as if it were the genitive of 
the substantive pronoun, it is coupled with naTgog in the ge- 
tive, and followed by avrov. So also vuiTegov le/og atom*, our 
own bed ; ta vueregu uvtwv. your own property ; tt\v ocphegav 
aviow, (scil. %(bouv) their own country. 

The same construction is common in Latin ; as, i( mea ip- 
sius culpa ;." "Cum mea nemo scripta legat, vulgo recitaro 
Hmentis " " Beneficio meo et populi Romani." 

18. The same observation extends to possessive adjectives; 
as, e i b'c ue del y v v aiu's la g zt d^6Tt\g o ora i vvv lv x^gelcc eoov- 
ifu. upr / o-0r i i'(/.i. If I must also say something concerning the 
vtrltie of r H o 8 e wom e n, who are from this time to live in 



1 92 CONSTRUCTION OF THE ARTICLE. § 134 

widowhood ; where ) woMcaiac, is equivalent to the genitive 
to which 8ow refers. 
in. I'll pronouns are employed only when an 

quired; in all other cases the personal pronouns 
are used ui their stead; as, natty ^ua»% otw fitiher, literally 
But n-aTr { n ^hegog means our own father. 
. The possessive pronoun is sometimes used objectively, 
not fck thij regret" but "regret for thee ;" rd/fd 
ttj/iara, not "the lessons which 1 give" but "the lessons 
which thou gin si me. v 

This use of the possessive corresponds to the passive sense 
of the genitive, § 1 42, Ohs. 2. 

21. The possessive pronoun is sometimes put in the neuter 
gender, with the article for the personal ; as, to v^dxeoov for 
ipelQ ; tCcuu for iyco ; to ifibv for tuL Also without the article 
after a preposition ; as, tv ^/usTlgov (scil. du^aii) for iv ryimv, 
in my house. 



§ 134. CONSTRUCTION OF THE ARTICLE. 

Rule. The article agrees with its substantive 
in gender, number, and case. 

Exc. 1. In gender. The masculine article is often put 
with a feminine noun in the dual number (§ 131. Exc. 3) ; as, 
:'. the tiro won 

.2. In number. The article may be put in the plural 
when it refers to two or more nouns in the singular (§ 131. 
Ohs. 1.): as, <d Adyvarf i r- xul °Jfot]. JMinerva and Juno. 

1. In geneh ll the article is prefixed to all nouns not used 

indefinitely. Nouns used indefinitely are without the article ; 

as in a peculiar state or relation; as, 

iu aldeladau /<///, one ought to reverence an old man. 

I'h • article is prefixed to nouns when they designate a 

•■ u dvijjbg, man is mortal. 
3. it is prefixed to abstract nouns when personified, or with 

or understood ; as, if x<f.- 
'uptingsaid; ity ddrfdeiaK neoi 
■a ih concerning these I lungs. 

1. is predicated of another, the subject of 

Ine proposition is generally found with the article, and the (>re- 



§ 134. CONSTRUCTION OF THE ARTICLE. 193 

dicate without it ; as, aoxbg eyiveO* ^ xogy, the maiden became 
a wine skin. 

5. The article is prefixed to nouns to mark emphasis or 
distinction ; as, 6 Ttoleuog ovx avev xuvdvvwv, tj ds elgrfvij 
axirdvvog, war is not without dangers, bid peace is free from 
danger ; (here the opposition between o Trole/noc and f\ elgv^'v 
renders both words emphatic, which is marked by the article 
prefixed;) 6 7ioi?jTr)g, the Poet, Scil. Homer. 

6. Proper names, when frst mentioned, are without the 
article ; on renewed mention, they generally have it. But the 
article is never prefixed to a proper name followed by an ap- 
pellative with the article ; as, Kvgog 6 Saailsvg, Cyrus the king'. 

7. The article is generally placed before appellatives, and 
all words and phrases which are placed after a substantive for 
the purpose of definition or description ; such as a substantive 
in apposition, an adjective, a participle, an adverb, a preposi- 
tion with its case; as, JToxocct?/; 6 cpdoaocpog, Socrates, the phi- 
losopher ; ol rouot ol ug/aloi, the ancient laws, &c. 

S. Before a participle the article is to be translated as the 
relative, and the participle as the indicative mood of its own 
tense ; as. eial ol leyovreg, there are (those) who say. But, 

9. A participle between the article and its noun is to be re- 
garded as an adjective, and rendered accordingly ; as, ol -un&g- 
Xovtsq loiioi, the existing laws. So also other words and phrases 
between the article and its noun, like an adjective, qualify 
the noun, and frequently have a participle understood ; as, ^ 
Ttobg rahxjug ua/r/; scil. ysvorihrj, the battle against the Gauls. 

10. An adverb with the article prefixed is used sometimes as 
a noun, sometimes as an adjective ; as, ol nslag, those near, 
i. e. the neighbours ; ^ dvo) rcoltg^ the upper city. § 130. Obs. 1. 

11. Adjectives, participles, adverbs, adverbial particles and 
phrases, used in the sense of nouns, have the article prefixed; 
as, ol Oi'tjtoI, mortals; ol xolaxevovreg, flatterers; ?/ uvgiov, 
(scil. fifiiga,) the morrow; to it, the substance; to tuhov, the 
quality ; to ndcrop, the quantity ; to (bg. the manner in which, &c. 

12. The article without a substantive, before &[i<pl or negl 
with their case, denotes something peculiar to, or distinguish- 
ing the person, place, or fhing expressed by the noun ; as, ol 
ttfoI drguv, those devoted to the chase, i. e. "hunters;" to tieqi 
A&jLupaxov, the affair at Lampsacus ; to. ujufl noh aov s whalbe. 
loners to war; sometimes it is a mere circumlocution for the 
noun itself; as, t& negl tx\v duugrtuv, for ^ dfiaozLa, 

17 



. »N OP THK A RT« LB. § 134. 

13; *Oi n<jt, and ol &f*<pl, with a proper Dame, have the fol- 
lo wing peculiarities of meaning; viz. 1. the person himself; 
iafiov xal (Iavdoop, Priam and Panthous; 2. ike 
followers of thspi med; as, o ,<>t;>r. the com- 

panions qj\Brchidamus ; 3. th ned, and his com- 

pany followers; us, oi a(i<pl nBwlarqanov^ Pisisiraius 

'■ his troops. 

11. The neuter article in any cage prefixed to (he infinitive 

ives it the sense and construction of {he Latin 

gerund, or a verbal noun: as, vdv q>iloaocp6Tv id tflteXv, inquir- 

riness of philosophy; to ?*<■ ■ •>. the speak- 

15. In the neuter gender, and in any case which the con- 
struction requires, the article is placed, 1. — Before entire pro- 
positions or quotations in a sentence construed as nouns; 

rnri<<n> rnlnj diU(ponu, TO, (*>£ BXaCFTa tovi >ir iuin\(Tuno 

i ■(here is in these a third difference, viz. the man- 
ner in which one should imitate each of these objects ; tx de 
/ )' yoi to ""ioyov (T niu)h' b'veiBogf* hut according 
to these views* (he sentiment "labour is no dishonour^ 1 would be 
cornet. 2. Before single words quoted or designated in a 
sentence ; as. to d' v/uelg biav ffrrw, ii\v n6l.iv leyco. when I say 
voi , / mean the state ; to X£y<o } iheivord Myw. ftut in nouns, 
tide i- commonly in the gender of the noun ; as, to ovo/ua 
6 Aldrjg^ the name Hades. 

16. Tin 4 article is often prefixed to possessive, demonstra- 
tive distributive, and other pronouns, for the sake of greater 
emphasis or more precise definition ; thus, tfibg vlog, is mere- 
ly a son of mine; hut b hfibg vl6g, is my son. The following 
change of signification effected by the article may be noticed: 

others ; ol ullnt, the others, the rest. 

other; \ulli] ' fXIulq, the rest of Greece. 
any; ol noXXol^ the multitude. 

<>; nkt loug, the most, 
the same, 
all; ol (after numerals,) in all. 

\ the Oligarchs. 

. When the article is used with olrog or ixelvog, the pro- 
noun must stand before the article, or after the substantive; 

. this same man. 
18. Th il frequently used alone, having its sub- 

stantive understood. This is the case when the substantive to 



, 135. -OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUN. 195 

which the article refers, being apparent from the connexion 
or sense of the passage, can be easily supplied. The neuter 
article is often thus used with the genitive of another noun, 
{gquo, TTgayua, &c, being understood. 1. In the singular to 
intimate what a person has done, is wont to do, or has befallen 
him; as, xaU too dor.® /not, to tov ' I6vkeLov Itttiov rcenovdivav^ 
and I seem to be in the same situation with the ho?'se of Iby- 
cus. 2. In the plural to denote every thing that concerns, 
arises from, or belongs to, that which the substantive express- 
es ; as, r& cpllwp d'ovdip, the assistance of friends is no- 
thing: dsl cpegeii' xa tcop decor, we must hear the visitation 
of the gods. In the singular or plural, it is often merely a 
periphrasis for the substantive ; as, to or tl\ rrjc ogyrig, for -r\ 6gyr\ ; 
and an adjective, &c. put with such a periphrasis takes the gen- 
der and number of the substantive, and the case of the article; 
as. to, T(bv diaxovcov — tioiovjasvov, the messengers — considering. 

19. The article combined with fiiv and ds has in some de- 
gree the force of a pronoun, and is used in a distributive 
sense, — the article with {.dp standing in the first member of 
the sentence, and with ds in the parts that follow; as, top /usv 
£r/«« 5 top <T oii, this one, he honoured, that one not ; ol [isv 
exvSevor, ol d s stiipop, ol d s eyvfiP&toPTO, some 'played at dice, 
some drank, some exercised, themselves. When governed by 
a preposition, t uep and Ss are placed immediately after the pre- 
position ; thus, bp usp Tolg — cp ds Tolg. 

20. In the Ionic and some other writers, especially Homer 
and Herodotus, the article 6, ?), to, is very frequently used as a 
relative, and sometimes as a personal pronoun ; as, 'A%ilUa 
cpevyto top id sip ccia/TuPOjua^ I fee from Achilles whom I am 
ashamed to see ; to per eTedarcw, it (the child) was buried. 
§ 66. 2. 



§ 135. OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUN. 

Rule III. The relative agrees with its ante- 
cedent in gender , numoer, and person ; as, 

t\ yvpr/ \v sUdoaep, the woman whom we saw. 

b o\ v r\o o g ^I6e 9 the man who came. 

tu '/oy\nuTu u fl'/e, the things which he had. 

1. The antecedent is the substantive, or something equiva- 
lent to a substantive, (§ 138, Rem.) in a preceding clause to 



196 Off THS RELATIVE PRONOUN.- § 135. 

which the relative refers* Sometimes, however, a* in Latin, 
the relative and its clause is placed before the antecedent and 
it- clause. 

•J. Strictly speaking, the relative dors not qgree with the 

/. but with the same word expressed or understood 

the relative, and with which like the adjective it agrees 

nihrr and CCWfi, as well as person ; thus, 6 //."u 

which [horse) he had. Hence, in 

con nee tin d relative clause, the following 

rs : viz. 

1st. The word to which the relative refers is commonly ex- 
pressed in the antecedent clause and not with the rela- 
tive; as,o5r6$ tun 6 ur^o o v Fldeg, this is the MAN 
whom you saw. 

2d. It is often not expressed in the antecedent clause and 
expressed with the relative ; as, ovidg ton, Sv zWeg 

tirdga. 

3d. Sometimes when greater precision is required, it is ex- 
pressed in both ; as, ovzdg &vti 6 uvt]q ov eldeg ardoa. 

4th. When the reference is of a general nature, and there 
is no danger of obscurity, the word to which the rela- 
tive refers is understood in both clauses ; as, or T]6£lei, 
Ixtccvs, ov rfiilei eoMcre, whom he would he slew, whom 
he would he saved alive. All this variety is common 
in Latin as well as in Greek. 

3. The antecedent is sometimes implied in a preceding 
word; as, olxla ij v/u-thou tit ye /g^rrOe, &c. Your house who 
use, &c. where oi refers to the personal pronoun implied in 

w/://^- (§ 133. 17.) 

4. When the relative comes after two words of different 
persons it agrees with the first or second person rather than 
the third uai, 

5. Win a th< <1 between two substantives of 
different genders, if sometimes agrees in gender with the lat- 

,m- / ( v nrouuiorn/]' A\f a, the constellation which 
: cdll the Goat. 

6. Ere. The relative sometimes takes the gen- 
der and number, not of the antecedent noun, but 
of -Mine one synonymous with it, or implied in 
it : as, 



9 135. OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUN. 19' 

1St * t!tr/ £ 'r W " 0{!s IfV™ S*«7*, their childhe, 

o»S reteis to w^v, as synonymous with rivvon,. 
2d. mfa™, &r 6 Q d>no,vo g xi asv <W lift,, OF EVERY MAN 

sS' ?,n J* ^ a ! ltec , de »t> shews that the ,»«„are 
spoken ot in the relative clause individually. 
3d. fcrf § «W, S •*«*,„ S „ waT%ff Jww 

Greece, whose fathers she sleic • where &/ refers 
to theme«»,»g- of 'mi^oc in this sentence ; i e. the 
men ot Greece. 

4th. driaavoonow; d^o o« S ^ *«j ina lVB ~ c rbn%Wo S , a M4N 

SET** ? T Uh " WH ° M WeB /Ae ^ihule applaud. 
He, e , o though the antecedent 4*fe i e singular, the rela- 

man, but to the class or fcmd of men spoken of. 
7 Instead of oc the compound pronoun Sows is used as a 
relative after n« g , oi3si s , or any word in the singular express! 
nig an lndefintt numbe> . and ^ ^ ^ ^ Jj r expi ess 

plural; s ,«coa n - ere ,.y Me A . ^ g ff ft «J 

if the indefinite u not expressed in the antecedent clause foe 
use of the relative shews that it is understood, and isio beex! 
pressed m the translation; as. r& s n 6ls> s sL/aftZciUes 
which. Sometimes it is used simply f or 6'c 

thefrehuve "hall "^t C ° m6 bet - WGen the relativeand the verb, 
tne relative shall be tne nominative to the verb. 

If a nominative come between the relative and the verb the 
relative shall be of that case which the verb or nounfolWing 
or the preposition going before usually governs. But, 

Attraction of the Relative. 

9. Exc. I The relative is often attracted into 
the case of its antecedent ; as, 

Examples, 1. aiv ratg vavalv al s (for &c) the with th, 
ships w.hch he had 2. , extt « %iru ^ ^ 3 ^f^ for t\ 

No.2._4th)/, e »^ Wi „ Y //; (Zo/wHAT/ie ; / 4 4 . d*d«L*; K 

6) *0ar, I enjoy what goods T have. (No. 2. 2d.) 



17* 



ox Tin: RSLATBD &DJBCTIVB WORDS. § 1^6. 

.\* i ! ns to have its foundation altogether in 

i-iit iall v attractions will be (bond only where they 
improve the euphonj tee. 

. though very seldom, imitated in 
lib. V. II. Cir ntas ejus generis cv jus 

nil. 

10. Exe. II. The antecedent is sometimes at- 
■ted into the rase of the relative; as, 

■^r old a reC fi*» xlriu iFvyiu dv(o } I know no other 
d armour 1 could put on. Here i'dlou is 
attracted from the accusative by the relative rfu into the geni- 
tive. 

On this principle are to be construed such sentences as the 
following: o&d&ya nlvdwov urnr ov/ inifABbvav^ tor ovdiig t\v 
Klvdvvog ovTiva, there was no danger which they did not under- 
lie Hftaur or tip ov daXQvOVia CcjroaTgeqpFaOuL, for 
oaaav ov daxovoi'ta, &c. there was no one who, 
said, did not return weeping ; Tlvag Tovcrtf oow ^evovg, foi 
ilif; slcrlv ovun ol $h'oi ovg doCo ; who are these strangers whom 

I S( ' 

11. The relative plural, and in all its cases with eau be- 
tpre it. is used for, or rather is the original form of the adjec- 
tive ■ rtni. -a*, -«, some; {urrl being sometimes written IV*) ; 
as, *al ■ it t i oi. fi. c. h'lot) hTuy/avor Otojhkicwv, and some hit 

-fuhiies ; cford t&v noXiow £(jtli> wr (i. e. t v liar ,) from some 
cities. 

In this construction lari is found with Sot*?, both singular 
and plural ; ai rT Ttg, some one; Ian nlnvsg, some. 

12. In certain cases it is used adverbially, some other word 
being understood ; thus, o5, where ; rj 9 where, as far as, how, 
in what manner: and sometimes thus used, it is preceded by 
run, the two words being* used as an adverb ; as, eo~uv oh or 

. in man ij places. 



L8§. ON THE RELATED ADJECTIVE WORDS 

?j §11X0$, &c. 

l. The relative adject . f\Uxog, like the relative 

pronoun, alwa to a kindred word before them, express- 



§ 136. ON THE RELATED ADJECTIVE WORDS. 199 

ed or understood, implying a comparison of equality similar 
to talis qualis, taut us quantus, in Latin ; as, 

roiog or roiovTog, — olog, suck — as. 
rooog or Tocrouroc, — oaog, so many — as. 
T7]l[xog — f ( l(xog, of suck an age or size — as. 

2. The antecedent and relative adjectives both refer to the 
same substantive, with which they agree in gender and num- 
ber, while each takes the case required by the construction of 
the clause in which it stands. Thus, Dem. Olynth. I. " As 
for the rest they are thieves and flatterers, and tolovtov g av- 
0gd)7vovg olovg ((edvadevTag dg/eloQai, joiavza ofa iyd) vvv 
dxpa ovouaacu, such men as, when intoxicated, to dance such. 
dances as / dare not name. 

3 The antecedent word is most commonly understood, and 
the relative is translated with some variety according to the. 
connexion in which it stands. The most of the cases in 
which, e. g. olog is used for roioviog olog, may be reduced to 
three ; viz. 1st, when it stands before a substantive ; 2d, be- 
fore an adjective ; 3d, before a verb 

4. First. Before a substantive, olog elegantly takes the 
case in which its antecedent wiovrog would be, if expressed, 
and changes the substantive before which it stands into the 
same case by attraction ; thus, ovx eotiv avdo I o2co 2 wkqclt e t, 
xpevdeoOai, to lie ?s not befitting such a man as Socrates is, 
for ovk evTiv avdol toiovt(o olog 2?ojxgan]g botlv ipsydsoOoM. 
Again, /ugi':6usvov o2(d aol avdol, gratifying such a man as 
THOU ART, for avdol tolovtcd olog ov (elg^j. 

In some instances the noun after olog is not attracted into 
the same case with it ; as, tav (tolovtojv) olwvneq a-vibg ovmdv, 
they being such as lie. 

When the substantive to which olog refers is obvious from 
the connexion, it is frequently omitted, as in the preceding 
example. 

5. Sometimes olog, with the clause in which it occur-, is ap- 
parently unconnected with the sentence. In such cases the con- 
nexion is to be formed by supplying &g and ore ; as, s/uaxfau- 
'Cov n\v (iTjitoa (ort) oTd)v rexvov Zxvqijos, they blessed the mother 
(because) she gave birth to such children. 

Ofa similar nature are the Homeric expressions oV ayooet- 
eig — oT looyug. i. e. on 6F 9 &c. because you say — because 
you do such things. 



200 ON THE RELATED ADJECTIVE WORDS. § 136. 

i». The construction is the same when olog, or the substan- 
tive to which it belongs, is in the nominative, or is governed 
by ■ preposition; as, tiXrfikg uyorntg nivdog (8ti mmviog) oToc; 
og .\,'./r- /( ;, being truly grieved because such a 

THUNNl PISH kfl pcd f/iem, LuCian ; iinCorn-g -nuy/i 

KOV) i. e. o4g £g roiorera oFo xocku, cj: 
pecting total destruction since ///<// icere rowc ?///o such ca- 
lamities v- THESE. In this way that difficult sentence in 
Thucydid -My explained, *al fzdvtj (scil. *Adriv<xl<av no- 

\iq) nir /<~ i /Jinrit uyiti uxiij<ru> i/n, v(p oltHV xacxo- 

ian){n<)v olfdv fy/fis, and ice are now the on- 
/// state ich ich thus not excite indignation in an invading ene- 
my, because (or since) they suffer from such a brave peo- 

\s WE ARE. 

Ill all constructions of this kind, the idea will be readily 
perceived by considering ohg as put for 8r* or &g Toiovrog 
See numerous examples in L. Bos. Ellipses. G\\ 271. Vi- 
gerus, Cli. 3. § 8 — 9. 

7. Second. Before an adjective it may be resolved by sup- 
plyingthe infinitive elvai\ as, el (ihv yuo rig uv^o lv afaoig %axi 
olog tfineioog nolifiov, if any one among them is skilful in 
WAR, DeM. 0. 2. For Toiovrog oTo; ejrat luneioog, is such as to 
be skilful^ &c. ; olog aounog, the best, for Toiovrog ohg slvat, 
•;. such as lo be the best, &c. 
S. Olog is frequently, however, joined with an adjective in 
mi of an exclamation or interrogation, apparently with- 
out reference to the usual antecedent; as, olog ta'yag. oTog ya- 
-. how ureal I how difficult! Thus Lysias, olog idyug xal 
. xlrdvvog \\y®vloQri A how great and terrible danger was 
risked, (scil. for the liberty of Greece.) If this and similar 
sentences, however, arc thrown into the assertive form, they 
readily admit of the same resolution as the others; thus, dan- 
Such OS to be great and terrible was risked. 
9. Third. Joined with the verb sifil expressed or under- 
stood, and followed by an infinitive, it signifies t( T am of such 
a kind as, or such as; 9 * and. according to the connexion in 
h ii stands, may mean tc Iam able^^Iam wont" "i 
kuIij. or willing^ — toiovrog being always understood as 
itecedenl word: thus, od y tavtbg xt-n- 

i ob be was not (such) as tomake 

, The a!) olog /"-////, and ohg t rial, 

Nially, but not always, observe this 



§ 137. CONSTRUCTION OF THE NOMINATIVE CASE. 201 

distinction; viz. that the former signifies ^ I am ivont," the 
latter, " / am able, I can" and is equivalent to dvvauca ; as, 
oto; ts elut tovto TioiBiv, I can do this. 

In the neuter it is used impersonally ; as, olov re ean, it ts 
possible. 

11. Sometimes the verb slid is also omitted; as, r\ dvvairo 
tkxoueiv ex tov ui) otovie (sl'voti), or whether he could hear 

FROM NOT BEING ABLE TO HEAR FORMERLY. 

12. In the same manner toTo; or rowviog stands related to 
oto; following it, expressed or understood ; as, otix av 6 t uilifi<joufu 
to i out cp, (scil. olog avrog earl,) I would have no intercourse 
with such a man, (scil. as he is). 

13. The neuters olov and oF«, either alone 0.1 .omMned with 
various particles, and used in a conjunctive or adverbial sense, 
are, no doubt, elliptical expressions similar to those noticed 
above, though it may be difficult to resolve many of them in a 
satisfactory manner. The ordinary meaning of these words 
will be found in the Lexicons. 

Note. The observations which have been made on the construction of 
the related adjectives roTog or roiovrog — olog, are applicable, almost without 
exception, to roaog or roanvrog — oaog ; observing that the former relates to the 
quality of objects, the latter to their number or quantity. The same also 
may be said of rrfKUog — riXiKog, of such an age or size. 



§ 137. CONSTRUCTION OF THE NOMINATIVE 

CASE. 

The nominative case is used, 

1st. To express the subject of a proposition. 

2d. In apposition with another substantive in the nomina- 
tive, or predicated of it. See § 139. III. 

3d. In exclamations ; as, 6 dvor&laiva eyu ! O wretched 
me ! 

4th. Absolutely, or without dependence on any word in the 
sentence, § 178. Obs. 4; as. noll\ yao r\o-rQaria 
ovq-j^ov 7tf/.CTi]g lo-juv noleoK vrtodb^aGdau Uivti\v), for the 
army being numerous, it will not be in the power of 
the state to accommodate them. Or without a paiticiple ; 
as, 6 Monjnr^; ovx ol'dufiev it ykyovev wrircu, THIS MosES, 
we know not what has become of him. 



MM WITH ITS NOMINATIVE. § 158, 139. 

L8& or A VERB WITH ITS NOMINATIVE. 

Rule IV. A verb agrees with its nominative 
in number and person ; as, 

• YQ&qxO) I write. 

re 9 ye strike. 

(HfOa/.nC.) X&fijrBTOV) his eyes shine. 

Ren. The nominative to a verb may be a noun, a pronoun, 
an adjective used as a noun, the infinitive mood with the ar- 
ticle prefixed, or part of a sentence; and to all these this rule 
appli 

Obs. 1. The nominative of the first and second person is 
generally omitted, being obvious from the termination of the 
verb ; also of the third person, when it may be readily sup- 
plied from the context ; as, Myouoi, they say. 

Obs. 2. The subject is also omitted when the verb expresses 
an action usually performed by that subject; as, oalnlteu, the 
trumpeter sounds ; or when it expresses an operation of na- 
ture ; as, vfl, it rains; Ooovra, it thunders. 

Obs. 3. Impersonal verbs are usually considered as without 
a nominative ; still they will generally be found to bear a rela- 
tion to some circumstance, sentence, clause of a sentence, or 
infinitive mood, similar to that between a verb and its nomina- 
tive ; as, r'$Knl uoi dtmivat, it is lawful for me to depart, i.e. 
to depart is lawful for me ; xQr\ a£ noislv it behoves you to do it, 
i. e. to do it behoves you. 



§ 139. SPECIAL RULES AND OBSERVATIONS. 

I. Of agreement in number. 

Rule 1. A neuter plural commonly has a verb 
in the singular ; as, 

/'„' ■'/">, animals run. 

Obs. 1. Thi iction is more common with the Attic 

than with the Ionic and Doric writers. But with all there are 
many exceptio cially when the neuter plural signifies 

ins or animals ; as, roadSa Wvy darqfaevov, 90 many na- 
tions xcent to war. Homer joins a singular and a plural verb 



§ 139. A VERB WITH ITS NOMINATIVE. P03 

with the same nominative. Odyss. /u. 43. So Xen. Mem. 
amga uv&tyy\vav a r\u.Tv rd> tbgag zr\g vvmbg e {.icpav /£e *, 
the STABS SHONE FORTH WHICH shew io us the hours of the 
night. 

Obs 2. Sometimes, also, masculine and feminine nouns in 
the dual and plural have a verb in the singular ; as, ova early 
oItlvsz uTTe/oi'Tai, there are none who abstain ; h/eliai bit- 
cpal fieXiwv, the voice of melody sounds. 

Rule 2. Two or more substantives singular, 
taken together, have a verb in the plural ; taken 
separately, the verb must be in the singular ; as. 

Together, ald&g de xal cp66og e/ucpv- Shame and fear are 
joi eioi avOgdrtCd, natural io man. 

Separately, ool yag edtoxs vlxijv Zevg Jupiter and Apollo gave 
xul ' 'ArtoMwv, you the victory. 

Obs. 3. To both parts of this rule, however, and especially 
to the first, there are not a few exceptions; for it often hap- 
pens that when two or more nouns have a common verb, it 
agrees with one of them, and most commonly the one next it. 
Also, if the two nouns are of similar signification, they are in 
construction considered as one, and the verb follows in the 
singular; as, 2ol d* enl rokfiarco xagdlrj xal Ovftbg, let your 
heart and soul dare. 

Obs. 4. A substantive in the singular, connected with other 
words as the subject of a verb conveying the idea of plurality, 
has the verb in the plural ; as, c Pia 7ragala6ovaa aalrovg Kogv- 
Sui'Tag rceginolovmv, Rhea, having taken with her also the Co- 
ryb antes, wandered, about. So in Latin ; as, Juba cum La- 
bieito capti in poiestalem Cozsaris venissent. 

Rule 3. A noun of multitude expressing many 
as one whole has a verb in the singular; as, 

?£sjo laog, the people sat down. 

But when it expresses many as individuals, 
the verb must be plural ; as, 

jjfXoiTjoav avibv to nlrfiog, the multitude asked him. 

Obs. 5. To both parts of this rule there are also exceptions, 

and in some cases it seems indifferent whether the verb be in 

1 the singular or plural ; sometimes both are joined with the 



204 OF GOVERNMENT. § 140 

same nominative; ss, : ;. ro lao^, ^qrjxiOtjirap de xa0ed^ag % 
v r down and KEPT their beats. 

Rule 4. A dual nominative may have a plural verb; as, 
both spake, and a plural nominative, limited to 
two, may have a verb in the dual. 

II. Of agreement in Person. 

Rule 5. When two or more nominatives are of different 
the verb takes the first person rather than the second, 
and the second rather than the third ; as &y& xul otiei'notier, you 
I spoke. 
To this rule there are many exceptions. 

III. Of the Nominative after the Verb. 

Rule 6. Any verb may have the same case 
after it as before it when both words refer to 
the same thing; as, 

■6 u e I g i(JTs to cp co g tou xdo/iiov, ye are the light of the world. 

Note. This rule applies to the infinitive mood whether its subject be in the 
nominative or accusative; and also to the participles. § 175. Obs. 5. and 
177. 3. 

Obs. 6. Under this nominative before the verb is 

ibject, and the nominative aft t it, the predicate. § 126. 

. 7. When the predicate is an adjective or participle, 

without a substantive, it agrees with the subject before the 

verb, by R. II: — Except as noticed §131, Obs. 4. 

Obs. 8. In this construction the verb usually agrees with 
the subject ; sometimes, however, it agrees with the predicate; 
jjlv 5} o i'jc()k)l ()y.n!) in in nd'/uioi' avibun', the space between 
was eight stadia So also when the copula is a partici- 
ple; as, he usually let go, ro,): fiiyvoxa iZyuuQnjxutug — fieylortj* 
I ') n r (for b*vxa$) ()lu()iji' ndXetog, the greatest offenders 
being (or wlio are) the greatest injury to the state. 



§ 140. II. OF GOVERNMENT. 

Govern mbnt is when one word requires another which fol- 
low- it, or depends upon it, to be put in a certain case, mood or 



$ 141 ' °F THE GENITIVE. 205 

OF THE GOVERNMENT OF CASES. 

The construction of the oblique cases depends in genera! 
upon the following principles ; viz. 

1. The Genitive expresses that from which any thin* pro- 
ceeds originals or begins; or to which it belongs, as exposed 
07 the English words of, from, in regard of, m respect of, &c 
viz. as cause or origin. *.. 

2 The Dative is the case of acquisition, and denotes that 
to which any thing is added, or to or for which it is done ; hence 
trie end or remote object to which any action tends. It is 
also used to express the cause, instrument or means by which a 
thing is done in which sense it usually depends on a preposi- 
tion expressed or understood. v 

3. The Accusative expresses the immediate object on which 
tne action or influence of a transitive verb terminates; or of 
motion or tendency to, expressed by a preposition. 

4. The action of a verb may be considered in reference 
either, 1 to its immediate object, i. e. to that on which its action 
is immediately exerted, and which is always governed in the 
accusative ; as, dtd6vui $p<zvv6p 5 id give myseU; or, 2, to a re- 
mote object (i. e. to one which is not acted upon by the verb, 
out is merely that to which the action is related in the manner 
expressed by the case), and is put in the genitive or dative or ac- 
cusative, either after the accusative with an active verb, or without 
an accusative after a neuter verb ; as, knaUxxsiv tivo\ vdaov, to 
free any one from disease; didtvcu tpavefo rjj n 6Ui, to Hve 
myself to the state; cpeldsadai mv iotycov, to spare the kids; 
borfielv rrj naz Q Ld h to aid (i. e. to render assistance o) my 

■ country. ' * 



§ 141. OF THE GENITIVE. 

The Genitive is in extensive use in the Greek language, 
being used m many cases in which the ablative is used in 
Latin Its primary as well as its general and leading idea is 
, that of separation or abstraction, going forth from, or out of, 
origin, cause. So that the meaning of the words of, out of, 
from, is implied in the case itself. 

The numerous and diversified uses of this case are reduced by Matthi© 
to the following heads : 

I. In Greek, word* of all kinds may be followed by other words in tht 

18 



*306 or THE G r.xmvE. § 141 

genitive when the latter class limits and shews in what respect the meaning 

o\ tnc former is to be taken. When ased for Ibis purpose, they may usual- 

red by Bach phra villi respect to," "i« respect of;" time, 

I. Ji |q5 v ef^oy, as fast as they could run, i. e. as they 

in in PEETJ KaXwS ty^n' jieOriSjto have 
" WITH RESPECT TO intoxication ; cyaWcaOaL i A 7r t <5o ?, £o fee rfc 
' /<; BOPE ; Kaftaya rUs KcyaXij's, I am broken with re- 
n BEAD, i. c. 7 fame broken my land. 

G«yyi'(,)/uov r m v d P n (j n i v (<) v a ji it p r rj /< a r co v, 
; r to HUMAN errors ; iyyvs riis tto\cws, lttf.OT W/A 
( ITT ; y» rXala kax&v, a land full of (i. e. with respect fo) 
kvm -arpof, greater than (i. c. teilA respect to) his father. 

.>. With all words which represent a situation or operation of the mind, 
which is directed to an object, hut without affecting it ; such as verbs signi- 
fying to remember, to forget, to neglect, &c. ; and adjectives signifying experi- 
enced, ignorant, desirous, &c 

4. With all words which indicate fulness, defect, emptiness, and the like. 
Under this head fall adjectives signifying full, rich, empty, deprived of, Sec. : 
and adverbs denoting abundance, want, sufficiency, &c 

5. To tiii- principle must he referred the construction of the genitive with 
the comparative degree, § 143. Rule XI ; with all words denoting superiori- 
ty, inferiority, and where a comparison is made with respect to the value of 
a thing ; as d((os rovrov, worthy of this, i. e. equal in value with respect to 
this ; or where the idea of difference is involved. 

6. When that with respect to which a thing is done may also be consider- 
ed the cause of its being done, the word expressing it is often put in the ge- 
nitive, and may be rendered "on account of;" as, yOoveTv nvi on<p[a$, to 

ru on account of wisdom. Hence it is used with verbs signifying 
to accuse or criminate, to pray, to begin, &c. ; and also without another word 
ctamations. 

II. The genitive in Greek is put to express the relation of a whole to its 
parts ; 1. e. it is put parti! ively. Hence it is put with verbs of all kindSj 
even with | govern the accusative when the action does not refer 

Whole, but to a part ; as, dirrfitnu k pe w v, to roast some of the flesh ; 

v n \iKio»T 10 some of THOSE of my age. Hence, 

put with verbs which signify to share, to participate, &c 

this princi] ' he c instruction of th t* the p#rt 

, _ • to take, 9 ' " to seize," " to touch," &c. Hence, 

lass of which that 

irked by the itfp< dative, form i \y\-t. 

III. Thegenitr to mark the origin or cause from which any 

to which any thing belongs, 
whether it ty or quality, habit, duty, &C T Eence, alsoj verbs gov- 

ern tb > which express feelings and operations ef the mind which 



§ 142. THE GENITIVE GOVERNED BY SUBSTANTIVES. 207 

are the result of external impressions, or when they denote motions and ac- 
tions in bodies which are the effects of the operation of other bodies. Thus, 
verbs which express the sensations of hearing, tasting, touching, &c. as 
well as those which signify to admire, to care for, to desire, &c. are follow- 
ed by the genitive of the object, heard, tasted, touched, admired, or cared 
for, because it is viewed as the source, origin, or cause, of these sensations 
and operations. Hence also the common rules, that "verbs denoting 
possession, property, or duty, &c. govern the genitive ;" that " the material 
of which any thing is made is put in the genitive j" and that " one substan- 
tive governs another in the genitive" 

IV. The genitive is also governed by certain prepositions, and by verbs 
compounded with prepositions ; that is to say, when the prepositions may 
be separated from the verb and placed before the genitive without altering 
the sense. 

V. The genitive is used to determine place and time in answer to the 
question ' ; where ?" " when 1" &c. Hence the adverbs ov, xov, ottov, where ; 
which are, in fact, old genitives, and refer to part of place or time in general. 

To the general principles contained in these five heads may all cases be 
referred, which occur under all the following rules for the crenitive. 



§ 142. I. THE GENITIVE GOVERNED BY SUB- 
STANTIVES. 

Rule V. One substantive governs another in 
the genitive, when the latter substantive limits 
the signification of the former ; as 7 

6 6e(bp TTarriQ, the father of gods. 
<xva% d-vdothv^ king of men. 

This rule is founded on the general principle mentioned § 141. I and III. 

In the above examples the general term irarrip is restricted by the word Oe&v 

; governed by it. It is not any father, nor the father of men, but of the gods , 

and the word avaJ- which, without restriction, means any king, is restricted 

by the word dvty&v, to king of men. 

When a noun is restricted by another of the same signification, it is put 
same case by Rule I. 

Obs. 1. The noun governing the genitive is frequently un 
derstood ; viz. 1. after the article such words as viog, ^ttjq, 
0vy<).zr/o, &c. ; as. MiXrukdjjg o Kt t uo)vog, (sup. vtdg), JWilliades, 

Ithe son of Cimon ; toc rr { g iuxtjS, (sup. fooptj^ocra), the gifts of 
fortune. 2. Qiao; or duuu after a preposition ; as, ig ixuroog, 



20b THE GENITIVE QQ7KRNED BY SUBSTANTIVES. § 142 

(sup. d$qia\ to the house of her father; elg &dov (douov) ta 

m, tu Hades. 3. Alter the verbs el/ul, 

See § 144. R. XII. and 141. III. 

Obs, 2. When the QOUH in the genitive signifies a person, 

it ma} uftei] be taken in an active or passive sense; thus, .ij 

ypwrtg row ©eou, ffce knoioledge of Hod. In this sentence, 

God may either he the subject or the object of the knowledge 

spoken of. i. e. the phrase may denote our knowledge of God 

or his knowledge of us ; 7i66og vi 6 u ? generally, (not thcregret 

of thy w>n, viz. which he lias, but) regret for thy son; d^- 

a ToiovdF, good will TOWARDS .smc/*. a man. 

This passive sense of the genitive is more common when 
the governing noun is derived from a verb which usually 
governs the dative, and when the one substantive is in one sense 
the cause, and in another the object, of that which is expressed 
by the other substantive ; as, veot£qo)v (Kootj^ccrx, offerings (not 
of, but) to the dead ; evyuuru IJalhxdog, prayers to Pal- 
las ; ^ t6)v nluTutiiov smcTTQixieLa, the march against the 
Plat.eans. 

Nouns thus derived, however, are more frequently followed 
by the dative; as, // Movofav dooig av QQ&noi a i, the gift oj 
the Muses to men ; sometimes by the preposition elg with the 
accusative; as, Oe&v elg c\v Oputz o v g ddcrig, a gift of the 
gods to MEN. § 146. 

Obs. 3. Many substantives derived from words which 
govern the genitive, are often followed by a genitive governed 
by tlie force of the primitive contained in the derivative ; thus, 
yog norou, § 143, free from labour ; hence, HfvOfqIu tt6- 
mi from labour ; xgarelv i)<)m>C)i\ § 144. R. XV., to 
be superior to pleasures; iyxoatela fidovtbr, mastery over or mo- 
deration in pleasures; axgaiela fidovwv, subjection to or want 
oj moderation in pleasures; Inixohgrnia r^g /tovog, protection 

>sl I he snow. 

Oiis. 4. Sometimes the genitive after a substantive is jjo 
verned not so properly by the substantive as by a preposition 
understood The I of which a 

thiim is made, or the author or source from which it proceeds, 

• ■ . of flowers; 

/u'/.y.'n ftyvt'kfia lehnei <>i brass; ixivOog (<x7u)\ duifA.6. 

I sent from the gods; (ity ) " I Foag uluielui, wanderings 

i d bij Juno. 

terhaps, tl)<: examples, Obs. 3. may be resolved; as, 

:-d tt6vov. 



§ 142. THE GENITIVE GOVERNED BY SUBSTANTIVES. 209 

Obs. 5. A noun in the genitive, after another of the same 
kind, denotes either the highest pre-eminence, or the lowest in- 
feriority; as, 8aaileX fiaoiUwv, to the king of kings; dovlog 
dovicor, a slave of slaves. 

Obs. 6. A number of substantives followed by the genitive of 
a noun, or a possessive adjective formed from it, are often put by 
a kind of circumlocution for the noun itself. The chief of these 
are, 67a, tg, fiivog, strength; xr\g, the heart ; q>66og ? fear ; neT- 
gag, relog, Televrr^ the end ; deuag, a body ; xaga, xagyvdv, xe- 
qpafofj the head, &c. ; as, 6 la Kaorogog, for KaoTog, Castor ; 
6lij 'Hoaxli.?h n for c Hgaxlr\g, Hercules ; Telog Oavdrov, for 6d- 
vawg, death ; 'IoxuvTijg xdga, for ' Ioxdcrri], Jocasta, &c. 

Obs. 7. Sometimes one substantive governs two different 
genitives in different relations ; as, ^nsdvrs xlbv '16 vto p i.y\v 
tysfwvlijv t ov TTgbg dageTov ttoIsuov. he assumed the leading 
of the Ionian's in the war against Darius ; TiovolxeL* 
cor TjgoTtijlazio-eig tov j^w?, the insults OF relations to 
old age. 

Obs. 8. The Attics use a noun in the genitive, preceded by 
a neuter article, for the noun itself; as, to vf\g zu/^for f\ tvx^ 
fortune; rd xtbv 6a g6dg zov aniozd £ or* (for ol 6dg6ago^ the 
barbarians are not to be trusted. 



Rule VI. An adjective or article in the neuter 
gender without a substantive governs the geni- 
tive; as, 

to Ttollbv Tf[$ oToaTt?]c, the greatest part of the army. 
xd T7jc TV/jig, th e S\ft s of fortune. 

Obs. 9. The adjective in the neuter gender is either itselt 
considered as a substantive, (§ 131. Exc. 9.) or as having a 
substantive understood, which is properly the governing word. 



Rule VII. A substantive added to another to 
express a quality or circumstance belonging to 
it, is put in the genitive ; as, 

dvrig fisyaXrjg agsrrig, a man of great virtue. 

Obs. 1^. The substantive in the genitive has commonly an 
adjective with it. as in the example above, but sometimes not; 

18- 



21Q GENITIVE GOVERNED BT ADJECTIVES. § 143 

; A QB r UXd d Of :i 6t r // p, (l IC(U', NOT OF WEA 

. bui OF now bt. But 
06*. 11. The substantive expressing the quality or circum- 
stance of another, is more commonly put iu the accusative go- 
verned by KawJi and di ' \v M6v8atog rd-? tQ6nov 9 a 

H0U8 DISPOSITION. 



$143. THE GENITIVE GOVEllNED BY ADJEC 

TIYfiS. 

Rule VIII. Verbal adjectives, and such as 
signify an affection or operation of the mind, go- 
vern the genitive ; as, 

(xrdowTtwv dqh\uav, hurt fid to men. 
e/ujteioog /novaixr^g, skilled in music. 

Rem. The principle on which this rule is founded is contained in § 141. 
I. 1.2. But others suppose that the foundation of the principle, as well as 
of the rule, is to be sought in the ellipsis of a preposition, such as irepi, which 
is sometimes expressed ; as, irepi rdv Tcxytiv emvTfjuajv, skilled in the arts. 
However plausible this supposition may be, it militates strongly against it 
that we have the same rule in Latin in which there is no preposition that 
governs the genitive. The stronger probability is, that the rule in both lan- 
guages is to be referred to the same general principle already referred to. 

Under this rule arc comprehended, 

1. Adjectives denoting action or capacity, which are deriv- 
ed from verbs or corresponding to them, especially those in 
-tog, -t*0£, and -rjQiog. 

2. Many adjectives compounded with a privative (§ 122. 1. 

. idiccTOQ xal uvr\xoog unhvcMr, without seeing or hear' 
/' any lh\ 

Participles used in an adjective sense, especially among 
>/;', jrec from troubles ; olwvwv 
,, skilful in augury, 

D followed by the accusative ; as, ciStis 
dQciucria, skilled in wicktdm 

4. Adj« g a state or operation of mind; 



§ 143. GENITIVE GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES. 211 

as, desire, aversion, care, knowledge, ignorance, memory, for- 
getf ulness, profusion, parsimony, and the like. 

5. Adjectives derived from, or of a similar signification 
with verbs which govern the genitive; as, enlxovgog ipvxovg, 
cfxotov, x. t. I. serviceable against cold, darkness, &c« 



Rule IX. Adjectives signifying plenty or want, 
<&c, govern the genitive; § 141. 1. and 4.; as, 

juso-jog OoqvSov, full of confusion, 
egjjfiog (kvdg&p, destitute of men. 

Under this rule are comprehended, 

1. Adjectives of fulness, plenty, and want; value, dignity? 
worth, and the contrary. 

2. Adjectives expressive of power, eminence, superiority, 
and their opposites ; also, of participation, diversity, separa- 
tion, peculiarity, ox property, and the like. 

3. Adjectives followed by the genitive of the cause; as, 
udlibg rrjg Ttf/jys, miserable on account of fortune. 

Note. Adjectives of plenty and want sometimes govern the dative ; as, 
dQveids pfXots, abounding in fruits. 



Rule X. Partitives, and words placed parti 
tively, comparatives, superlatives, interrogatives, 
indefinites, and some numerals, govern the geni- 
tive plural ; as, 

1. t&v uvOg(hrcb)v ot fihv aocpol, of the men some were ivi$e 9 

old' ov, others not. 

2. ol Tiulixiol to)p 7toii]j(bv 9 the ancient poets. 

3. ev t&v ttIoLojp, one oj the ships. 

4. Tigonbg 'Adqvatwp, the first of the Athenians 

5* 6 vednegog xthv ud&cpojv, the younger of the brothers. 

6. e^Oiawg uucjlUojp, most hated of kings. 

Rem. For the principle of this rule, see § 141. II. It has also been sup 
posed that the genitive under this rule is properly governed by U or and. 
The same remark made R. VIII, Rem. is also applicable here, and for the 
same reason, viz. that the same rule holds in Latin which has no preposi- 
tion governing the genitive. 

Obs. 1. All words are denominated partitives which express 



RY ADJECTIVES. § 143. 

a pari lumber i i objects, the whole being ex- 

d by the noon following it in the - 

. 2. Tin after tbe partitive 

e<l by the preposition . ; * 01 > the 

A.nd sometimes^ instead of the genitive, 

is found a preposition with another case; us, KaXklotrj $? 

nong women; so in Latin, justissimus in 

Instead of the genitive, the case of the partitive is 
times USed; as, TOi)g cptlovg Toi>g {ukr aninjeivF, some 
of n ds he slew. 

Obs. 4. The partitives ilg and elg are sometimes omitted; 
<'oi- a t o X i] v t C) v x a X 1 1 a t o> v (sc. ular), I bring you 
a very excellent robe; ^Osle i m v iafv6vjo)v slvui (sc. elg f ) 
he desired to be one of those who remained.. On this prin- 
ciple is explained such phrases as tori tZw alayowv (sc. elg), 
for IotI alaxoug, he is base, (literally " one of the base") 

Obs. 5. Partitives agree in gender with the substantives 
which follow in the genitive. When two substantives follow 
in the genitive, the partitives, &c. commonly agree with the 
former, hut sometimes with the latter. 

Obs. 6. Collective nouns are governed by partitives in the 
genitive singular. 

Obs. 7. Adjectives in the positive form, but conveying a su- 
perlative sense, on the principle of this rule govern the geni- 
tive plural ; as, ito/ng TtdvTQv, the most excellent of all ; diet 
rodde$8 oj goddesses, (i. e. supreme goddess) ; dla 
Yvvaixfbr, most excellent of women, 4<au<>vLe apdqm>, Good 
jo nouns compounded with a in a privative sense ; as, 
u/uly.n; durnl&w, unarmed with brazen shi< I 

Obs. S. On a similar principle an adjective in the genitive 
plural sometimes accompanies substantives of all kinds, in 
>v(\<:v to mark the class to which the person or thing mention- 
ed If h £ o a ii a caw v, a wheel of the class 
TOEN, i. I . I wheel; niXexvg iZ)v i> a v- 
', an axe OF THOSE BELONGING TO SHIP*1*U1LD1 



Rule XI. The comparative degree, without 
a conjunction, governs the genitive; as, 

r than honey. 

er than pity. 



^ 143. GENITIVE GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES 213 

Rem. The principle of this rule is stated § 141. 1 and 5. There is not 
the same objection to the usual explanation of this rule, by supplying the 
preposition xpd or dvri, that is stated Rule VIII, Rem. Yet the analogy of 
ihe cases already referred to are opposed to this explanation, and seem to 
render it more proper to refer to the general principle above stated. At the 
same time it must be noticed, that after the comparative degree the genitive 
is sometimes governed by one of these prepositions expressed ; as, olciv h 
rvpavvlg Trpd sXevdepirjg rjv d ait a err 6 r e p o v, to whom tyranny loas MORE 
agreeable than libertt ; but this will not decide in favour of explaining 
the construction under this rule by supplying the preposition, any more than 
it did in the other, Obs. 2. 

Obs. 9. The conjunction % than, after the comparative is 
usually followed by the same case that precedes it ; as, ire av- 
dgag ttoIv auslvovag i] HxMag, against men much braver than 
ihe Scythians. Sometimes, however, it is followed by the 
nominative, if slut or another word can be supplied ; as, roTg 
vsojtsqol; ^ eya, to those younger than I am. 

Obs. 10. After the comparative, v is sometimes followed by 
an infinitive with or without o^ or locrrs ; as, xaxa uel^cx) 3) oocrrs 
q.vaxhxi8iV) evils too great to excite my tears ; vdorjuu /usT^op ^ 
(f£oeLi>, affliction too great to bear. 

Obs. 11. The comparative without i) {than) is followed by 
the genitive according to the rule ; as, cpwvdt ylvxsguTega ?} 
fisXixr^qo), a voice sweeter than honey -comb. 

Obs. 12. The genitives tovtov and ou, governed by a com- 
parative, are often followed by an explanation with v\ ; as, ovx 
cOtv jovds Ttuiul k6)Xiov yioag^ ?] narodgsaOXov x&yadov Ttscpvxivai y 
there is no greater honour to children than this, (viz. than) to 
be descended from a brave and virtuous father. 

Obs. 13. The infinitive mood or part of a sentence being 
equivalent to a noun, (§ 173. I.), is sometimes governed in 
the genitive by a comparative; as, to cpvM^ai t' dyada tov 
y.Trj o (jlo 6 uv /uisTtdreoov iarl^ to preserve property is 

MORE DIFFICULT THAN TO GAIN IT. 

Obs. 14. Words which imply a comparison govern the ge- 
nitive on the same principle ; these are 

1st. Such words as express difference ; as, Tteqio-abg, dsvTpgog, 

voreoog ; also, di&cpooog, bieoog, oillog, cdlolog, (/.lldroiog. 
2d. Multiplicative numbers; as, dinhxa-tog, iqmhkaiog ; as, 

d irc'hurj iov del o\xovevv t ov Xsy s iv, one should hear 

TWICE AS MUCH AS HE SPEAKS. 

Obs. 15. The superlative is sometimes used for the com- 



214 Tin: GENITIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. § 144 

parative, and is then subject to the same rules ; as, (with the 
conjunction, I ag nedlov^ better than ike plain 

.legra: (without the conjunction), veto <V oflwg Ctri)o uuxuo. 
-. no tnau is happier than you. 



§ 144. THE GENITIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. 

Rule XII. The person or thing to which 
any thing belongs, is put in the genitive after €i(u 9 
yivofiat) U7tdpxp ; as, 

ioxl tov ''am/ it belongs to the king. 

slvau ta v rod, to be kis own (master), 

tov Hal&s rcoleueiv to alacrity is necessary to figkt 

idiXskv ioTl y well; i. e. belongs to it. 

Rem. For the principle of this rule, see § 141. III. Consistently with 
this, in constructions of this kind, a substantive may be considered as un- 
tood, which is the governing word. 

Obs. ]. Yet here also we have the genitive governed di- 
rectly by a preposition expressed, indicating that from which 
the quality, &c. proceeds; as, ovx eoTL Ttoug noleojg, it is not 
. for the slate; i. e. it is not a thing proceeding from 
ate. On this principle are to be explained such se u ten- 
following ; odx uy<(U(u jovf (Ivfiobg do ta ri o g, I 
ot approve this IN a prince ; i. e. ngdg avdooq^ &c from 
a prince ; tovto irtatvta \ 7 y r t o tl <iov, I commend this in Agesi- 
; tovio ic'ihfoi'iai ii'iLuna ^aw^ this they blame ckiejly 

IN I 



Rule XIII. Verbs expressing- the operation of 
the sense-;, govern the genitive; as, 

KXvdl < Hear me. 

/// ttov Smov 9 touch me not. % 

Err. l. Verbs of seeing govern the accusative; as, Qebv 
i . f!i> ii slid !! see God. 

Err. % lii th • Lttic dialect ; ill verba of sense govern the 

rid sometimes, though very rarely, in the other 

;•',>', / heard a voice; o-rrluy/pa in&aav- 

to, ///- if hi sir (I ihe t ntrails. 



§ 144. THE GENITIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. 215 

Obs. 2. The principle on which verbs under this rule, and 
some of those that follow, govern the genitive, is that the 
word in the genitive, following the verb, is viewed as the ori- 
gin or cause, in some way or other, of the sensation, or of the 
act or state expressed by the verb, § 141. III. 

Rem. If, after verbs which usually govern the genitive, the genitive is 
governed by a preposition interposed, the preposition generally corresponds 
to the idea of origin or cause, &c. expressed by the genitive (as, dxd, npdg, 
and the like) ; and thus, instead of militating against the principles stated 
above, it adds its own force to that of the genitive, giving emphasis and dis- 
tinction to the sentence. But to suppose from this that when the genitive 
follows a verb it is always governed by a substantive or preposition under- 
stood, besides being wholly unnecessary on the principles already stated, 
serves only to destroy the original and characteristic simplicity of the lan- 
guage, and to render its construction perplexed and intricate. 



Rule XIV. Verbs signifying an operation of 
the mind, govern the genitive ; as, 

davuuta oov, I admire you, 

ausleig t&v cpll(ov, you neglect your friends. 

Verbs which come under this rule govern the genitive on the principles 
stated, § 141. I. and 3. also III It applies generally to verbs which 
signify 

1. To pity, to spare, to care for, or neglect; as, £m[is'k6Tu- 
6au, (pQOVTi'leiv, aXsyl^eiv, d/uslslv, olvyoqelv. 

2. To remember or forget ; as, uvaodai, [ivr){iovev8w, lav- 
0&vevOou } &c. with their compounds. But tiiese fre- 
quently govern the accusative. 

3. To consider, to reflect, to perceive or understand; these 
also govern the accusative. 

4. To admire, to aim at, to desire or to loathe, to revere or 
to despise. 

Obs. 3. Many of these verbs used transitively; (i.e. signify 
ing to cause the operation of mind they express) govern the 
accusative of the person with the genitive of the object , as, 
bniuvijoip t rtuToo;, he put him in mind of his father ; eysvoag 
uh etdaifiorlctg, you have caused me to taste of happiness. 
Verbs thus used are sometimes denominated causatives or in 
centives, and hence the 



VERBS. § 144. 

Rvlf. Causatives govern the accusative of 
the person with the genitive of the thing. 



Rule XV. Transitive verbs govern the geni- 
tive when they refer to depart only, and not to 
the whole of the object; as, 

£tus tov vdarog, he drank of the water. 

This construction depends on the principle stated, § 141. II., or we may 
consider the expression elliptical, and supply some such word as, fiwog, a 
par/, or rl, some, as the direct object of the verb, and which governs the gen- 
according to Rules V. and VI. 

To this rule belong more especially such verbs as signify 

1. To share, participate* or impart, which, with the genitive 
of the thing, frequently govern the dative of the person 
to whom it is imparted ; as, /LieTadtd^uv r(o ude-lyu to)v 
XQTjfMXTMv, I share the properly with my brother. 

2. To receive, obtain or enjoy ; as, Tiur\g llu/e, he gained 
honour ; iuv IhGwuev oyol^g, if we get leisure. 

3. Verbs signifying to take, to seize, and their contraries ; 
to touch, or to carry, especially in the middle voice with 
the accusative of the whole, govern the genitive of the 
part affected; D/xGovio rr\g 'Q&vyg tov " Oqovtjjv, they 
seized Orontes by the girdle. 

Exc. Some verbs such as luuO&voimi, uej^u), xhjgovoukD, 
key/". h'O). sometimes sjovern the accusative of the 

thing : KXrjQOPOfiin with the accusative of the thing, governs 
also fli< genitive of the person from whom it is received ; as, 
)v6(JU}va tov naTQOQ tu Kiri'iuTcx, he inherited his possessions 
from his father ; sometimes it governs the genitive of both. 



Rule XVI. Verbs of plenty or wemt, filling or 
depriving) separation or distance, govern the gen- 
itive; (§ 141. I. and 1.) as, 

he abounds in riches. 
i, let him fill his ship with gold. 
In hr, in want of money. 



^ 144* THE GENITIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. 217 

Under this rule there may be comprehended verbs which ex- 
press the general idea of separation, or which signify 

i. To beg or entreat ; as, diofiat ctou, J beg of you. 

2. To bereave or deprive; as, utsosoj, anooTegew. 

3. To deliver, loose, or set free ; as, elsvdegoix), Xvw, c\na 
Xdcroco. 

4. To escape; as, txcpevyw, cMvokw. 

5. To ~keep off, to hinder, or prevent, to d,esist ; as, hwAi'm, 
sgijTSiti), 6/co, (scil. tw& rt^og) eYgyofiat,, &c. 

6. To differ from, to be distant, to abstain ; as, di£%ot) 9 
(jctts/co, diulaiTO), dcacpsga), dniyoaav. But some verbs 
of differing govern also the dative ; as, diacpsgoj aot, J 
differ from you. 

7 To separate, repel, or drive away ; as, #0£/£a), diogiCo^ 
auvrv), dlul'/.a), dyelgo), di(bxw, &c. 

8. To maJcc way for, or retire from, to resign; as, si'xco, 
finoxwoeb), vnayto, ovy^ojgaoj. 

9. To err, to cause to err; vnonlav6.oi.mi, anoT.vyyui>ouai 3 
duaQTUi'O), nlurdco). 

±0. To cease, io cause to cease ; as, rtavWy navoua^driya), &c. 

11. To deceive, frustrate, or disappoint ; as, xpetidofiai,, 
Tiraioo, o(pdlXoy(/.i y &c. 

Obs. 5. Many of these are transitive : and with the gen= 
hive of the remote object, govern the accusative of the direct 
object; thus, under No; 3. as tovo elevOegti cpovov, I clear you 
of this murder; urfuioelodui, to deprive, sometimes governs 
the accusative and genitive, sometimes two accusatives, and 
sometimes the accusative and dative. 

Obs. 6. The genitive after these verbs, whether trans, or 

;. is sometimes governed by a preposition intervening, 

the effect of which is to give emphasis to the expression ; as, 

■odxrag rh-'F/u.ddu <knb MJ[d&v 9 having liberated Greece 

from the .Medes. § 144. Rem. 



Rule XVII. Verbs of ruling, presiding over, ex- 
celling^ and the contrary, govern the genitive , 
(§ 141. I. and 5.) as, 

nouZw Wr(oi> &o%eir, to rule over many nations. 

70)?' 7TQ(f.yn'/.T(j>v imoTaieXv, to have the superintendence of affairs. 

19 



218 TBI GENITIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. $ 144. 

The verbs which come under this rule are those which sig- 
nity, 

1. To rule , as. <^»/">, xoalvo), deondtyOj duraoneu), i£iov- 

KaTCtXVQU 

j. 7 - reign : as, nj^ay.ystfaij (iianlrvu}, dvdaorw. 

8. To hod ■ as, /• i'nina, fft '€[10 re rid. (noaTrffho. 

4. To preside OV6T; as, .\nnn<n;u>. 

5. fo surrire, or fo 6« <W€r ,' as, tifoIfiiu. 

6. To surpass^ or excel; as, 7i ntorFvoi, u-.iFytialrw, tifoiGuI- 

7. To begin, i. e. /o be first, to lead the way; as, wo/o- 

/m< ; a : COjJfO), vrcao'/M, kuiuo/K'). 

8. The contrary are such as signify to be ruled, led, pre- 
sided over, &ic ; to obey, to be inferior io, to be worsted 
or overcome. 

Obs. 7. Some verbs govern the genitive by the force of a 
noun implied in them ; thus, ivoavveiew is equivalent to tv- 
oavvog elvcu\ and hence izvQ&vvevs Koolvdov, he iv as king of 
Corinth is equivalent to ivquvpo; j\v Koolvdov. 

Obs. S. Many verbs under this rule sometimes govern the 
dative ; as, uruaou), crijualvoj, xqutsm, fiytofiui, rjye/uovsTuO) ojo^co. 
And sometimes the accusative. 



Rule XVIII. Verbs of buying, selling, estimat- 
ing. &c. govern the genitive of the price ; as ? 

fbrTjo&fiTjV tovto 7tivT8 d pa xfi&r 9 I bought this for five 

•RAOHMJE. 

u.tiovnti di7tlr\g zi^g, lieis estimated worthy of 

DOUBLE HONOUR. 

Rem. The genitive in this construction is properly govern- 
ed by bvt\ understood, sometimes expressed. The price is 
sometimes put in the dative with the preposition inl, and 
:usative with the preposition "jog. 

N. B. — For the construction of the genitive with the accu- 

sative, see § L51 ; also, for the genitive governed by adverbs, 

164, 165; by prepositions, § 168. and as used to ex- 

wnstances, § 156, 157. and from § 160, to 

163. 



§ 145, 146. THE DATIVE AFTER SUBSTANTIVES. 219 

§ 145. CONSTRUCTION OF THE DATIVE 

The dative has, in general, two significations : 

1. It is used to express the remote object to ivhich any quality or action, or 
any state or condition of things tends, or to which they refer ; which ten- 
dency is usually expressed in English by the words to or for. As thus used, 
it corresponds to the dative in Latin, and is subject to nearly the same rules. 

2. To this general character of the dative may be referred a use of this 
case common in the best Greek writers, when the dative of the person to 
whom the thing spoken of may in some way or other be interesting, is 
thrown in without any dependence for its construction on any word in the 
sentence, and when the sentence as regards syntax is complete without it. 
In such cases the dative is said to be redundant. But though it is so in re- 
spect of construction, it is not so in respect of effect, as it imparts a touch of 
feeling and sentiment easily felt, but not so easy to express in a translation. 
Thus, // [xriTiip ia ce TtoieXv 6,ri dv 6w\t], IV avrrj jxaxapLS rjg (Plat. L) r S.) thy 
mother permits thee to do whatever thou pleasest, in order that thou mayest be 
happy, (to her). The avrrj is added with reference to the feelings of the 
mother. The datives not and aoi are very often used in this way. Thus, 
Oedip. Tyr. 2. rivac ttoO 1 'iopag -dak jxol dodgerc, where ifxoi intimates the 
mournful interest the good king felt in the scene before him. In Xen. Cyr. 
Cyrus addressing his mother, says, ol^ai ao i ixsivovg — vtKtjaeiv &c. I have no 
dGiibt that I will easily surpass these : where aoi intimates the delightful in- 
terest an affectionate mother might be supposed to feel in the event antici- 
pated. So in Latin, Quo tantum mihi dexter abis, Virg. iEneid V. 162. 

3. It is used to express that with which any thing is connected as an ac- 
ccrmpaniment, cause, instrument, manner, means, or end. This connexion 
is usually expressed in English by such words as with, by, from, in, for, or 
o?i account of Used in this way, it corresponds to the ablative in Latin 
both in meaning and construction. 



§ 146. OF THE DATIVE AFTER SUBSTANTIVES. 

Rule XIX. Substantives derived from verbs 
which govern the dative, sometimes govern the 
dative also ; as, 

V) tov Oeov doaig vulv, the gift of God to you. 

rj lv jl) ttoUuci) toI; cciloig 8or\- the assistance of (i. e. render- 

deux, ed to) friends in war, 

iz uridoyuiv toT; Zvuu&'/oiq^ for the contradiction of your 

allies. 
Because didum, 3o>fJbu, and dprdeyo), govern the dative. 



THE DATITE GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES- § 147. 






§ 147. OF THE DATIVE GOVERNED BY ADJEC- 
TIVES. 

Rule XX. Adjectives signifying profit or 
disprofit, likeness or unlikeness, govern the da- 
tive ; as, 

Ikifiog tt { nblei, profitable to the state. 
6/iotog r<3 :r<tTQl, like his father. 

The dative after such adjectives expresses the object to 
which the quality expr< the adjective refers ; and hence 

all adjectives in which such a reference is involved, are fol- 
lowed by the dative of the object to which they relate. Inthis 
class, besides those mentioned in the rule, may be reckoned, 
1st. V ; ignifying usefulness, friendliness, equality, 

suitabht ' e, ease, ft rreement, and 

the like, with •' ntraries. Hence, 6 at&idg, the 

same, and sorn< tnd ioioi)jog % such, are 

followed by the dative; a ■. rd utixa (TadrA) Tifxa/ot 
'!"■■> • i in you. (So in La- 

tin. / idem facit occidenti. Hor. 

// ' man against his will) ads the 

• ho kills HIM) ; Sg ipol 
;t i >:. who was of thi; same (of 

ONI . Idyoug r<5 — woitovg 'Uyet,v, 

mch words is he would. 



0b9. l. The dative often follows a substantive is the sense? 
tive, for which construction with examples, see i 
. 1. 
06*. dative sometimes depends on an adjective and 

substantive joined together, bui chiefly on account of the ad- 
. •/.).' i it-i xatql, illustrious offspring to th6 

fatlu ■. 

live sometimes follows a substantive, not, 
as implying possession, but where the idea of 
tation or design is implied ; as. %6qvIv ndvog, labour for the 
U • i. B. adapted for, designed for. 
06*. 4. The dative is also put with substantives to express 
the idea of companionship, being governed probably by o6v or 
lerstood ; as, (av) -bnevOvrog el roTg cilloc c, you 
sponsible, as well as (or equally with) the rest. 



6 147. THE DATIVE GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES. 221 

Exc Adjectives signifying likeness, equality, & c . ore some- 
terns followed by the object of comparison, not in the dative, 
but in the same case with the adjective, and connected with it 
by the conjunction *«i ; as, ovtos ys 6 ttyo; tyotys doxsl ccv 
oaoto; ( tr« t xal ngAisgos (instead of rfwifl nnSreoa,), this ar- 
gument trould seem to me at least TO BE LIKE THE FORMER 
ho also the nominative is used after the adverbs *«rd t««3tA," 
ouotatg, ftn» S ; as, ai X tyolug nmo^xaai xal "Oft V Qoe, they 
Have not done like Homer; xenu javra ovrog ^rjas xal xM- 
Qu, just as a harp. These constructions are probably to be 
resolved thus, obzSg ye 6 Uyog xal ngtregog Soxel, &c. olnog xal 
xioaqa rixqae, &c. 

2d. Adjectives compounded with avv, dftoS, and /iwt&, sig- 
nifying with ; as, ovvrqocpog, ofioqog, fieialtu>gTt,vl,&c. ; 
yet sometimes these govern the genitive. 

3d. Some adjectives derived from verbs which govern the 
dative, govern die dative also ; as, dxolovdog, axolovdr,- 
Tiv.bg, dnido/og. 

Obs. 1 . There are many adjectives which govern either the 
genitive or dative ; as, B/wtog, Uke; i'oog, equal ; d^vuog, of 
the same name; tyon&TQwg, of the same father ; b.uo^rowg of 
the same mother ; oivrQoepog, educated together; <n,y^%, fami- 
l>ar ; load yoTzog, of the same jorce; xovvbg, common; nlouolog, 
topvBi»g,rich; efoogog, abundant; ivdefa poor; evo X og, in6- 
dixo;, vxU-CUyog, exposed, obnoxious ; olxeXog, familiar; <bv l0 g, 
lobe sold; dovlog, a slave; ilevdegog, free ; as, b\uowg tov n*. 
rgog, or rm naxgl, like his father; d^vfiog tov naroog, or i<5 
nargl, oj the same name with his father. 

Obs. 2. It has been observed, § 80.. Obs. 1. that the verbal 
adjectives in -x6g and -tiog have a passive signification corres- 
ponding nearly to the Latin verbals in -bilis smd-dus. Their 
construction, when thus used, is also similar ; and hence the 
following 



Rule I. Verbals in -Tog and -ra>g, signifying' 
passively, govern the dative of the doer; as, 

rovTo atQipdv 1<jtI uo h this i s not fit to ue spoken by me. 

v Tioug byelTjTia ml iqru, the city outfit to be served by thee. 

Rem. The dative, however, in this construction, when it is 
general in its nature, is commonly omitted ; as, t W t<?« i<rrlv 
n uoftt], virtue must be honoured, (viz. tya* 9 by us.) 

19* 



222 THE P1TIVB GOVERNED nv VERBS. §148. 

()I>s. 3. Verbals in -t6q 5 not signifying passively, govern 
the case of their own verbs; as, et r<3 &/*& tavdQl nru;u6; rfui, 
if I hi, tm oph. Trach. ; a.ymvoibg %yx° v Si n °l 

havi led the $wor(L § SO. 06*. 1. 



Role II. The neuter verbal in -rear, in the 
seof the Latin gerund, with the dative of the 
doer, governs also the case of the verb from 
which it is derived ; as, 

i << ■ tOtrjliov //o/, A.LL THESE THINGS fttUSt I do. 

ro r&QXOvat vdfioiQ /otjorioy, xatrovg 81 elx^ 

m\ der&oP) we, should, use the present laws, and not 

rashly enact new ones. 

Obs. 4. The doer is sometimes put in the accusative, in 
which case the necessity involved in the verbal is much weaker 
than in the ordinary construction ; as, ov dovXevrsov tovq vovv 

t'/orm; lOlQ XaXQQ (pgot'OvOi, THE PRUDENT OUgkt not to 

ubaj the unwise: Ittioxenx&ov tu azv uvrdv, tol dh yvvuTxa 
(for or^rwj yurur/.i), some thing* are to be looked to by him, 
some by his wife. Both are united by Plato, Rep. 5. ovxovv 
Hal >]aLV vevoi^ov — I) ittpvTag, 



§ 148. OF THE DATIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. 

Rule XXI. The verbs elfil, ytvomi, and vrtdp- 
£G>, signifying to be 1 or to belong to, are followed 
by the dative of the possessor; as, 

toil uot xqtyiaraj possessions are (belong) to me, i. e- I have 

})>SSCSSif)llS. 

Til'/.() naldeg \oav xulol xayaOol, good children were to Tel- 
lit s % i. e. Tell as had good chiftlren. 

Ohs. 1. On the principle of this rule m# he explained the 
numerous instances, both in Greek and Latin, in which the 
dative signifying m is used with another substantive 

apparently for tin- genitive* Thus, T&lfaa ot natdeg is equiva- 
lent 1 :. Ifir children of Tellus ; but the prin- 
ciple of • construction is different. In the latter expression, 
immediately governed by the other substantive, 
Rule V.. j uifies the children proceeding 



§ 148 THE DATIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. 223 

from, and belonging to, Tellus. In the former, the dative is 
not governed by the substantive, but depends on some part ot 
the substantive verb understood ; thus, Tekks ol Ticadeg, (ol ov- 
re;,) Tello jilii [qui sunt,) the children which are to (belong- 
ing, or added to) Tellus ; or, without a periphrasis, " the chil 
drenof Tellus." In this manner may be resolved all such ex- 
pressions as oacre de oU his two eyes; duydjrjg re ol, her daugh- 
ter ; t(5 Ardouluovi 6 racpog, the sepulchre of JLndrccmon, &c. 

Rem. 1. This mode of expression with the dative is so nearly synonymous 
with the more common construction with the genitive, that it appears often 
to have been a matter of indifference which of them was used ; so much so, 
that a sentence sometimes begins with the one construction and ends with 
the Other ; thus, >/ p l v 8e KaT£x\acr8n <pi\ov rjrop Se i <j av r a) v (pQoyyov re 6a~ 
pvv ; literally, the heart to us dreadintg his growling voice was broken down. 
In this sentence Seuraprav refers to fifiTv as if it were ripj/ in the genitive. In 
the following sentence the order is reversed ; rfjs 6' avrov \vro <pi\ov r\rop 
(Tvuara dvayvovay, her heart was moved when she e.ecognised the 
tokens. Here dvayvovarj in the dative, refers to rfjs in the genitive, as if it 
had been 7-77. 

Rem. 2. In other instances in which the dative follows a substantive ap- 
parently for the genitive, the idea of tendency towards, or of acquisition or 
addition, expressed in English by the preposition to or for, is generally ap- 
naient ; as, -frarpl rijioipdv <p6vov, an avenger of your father's murder ; plainly 
an avenger of murder to or fur your father. Indeed, the idea of possession, 
one of the meanings of the genitive, and of acquisition, the proper idea ex- 
pressed by the dative, are so nearly allied as to render the use of the one 
case for the other not unnatural. 

Obs. 2. When of two nouns in the dative the one expresses 
apart of or something belonging to the other, the latter may- 
be rendered as the genitive, and the construction explained as 
in Obs. 1 : yet it may be often better to consider them in ap- 
position, both depending on the same governing word — the 
one term being added to limit or define more precisely the 
more general idea contained in the other ; thus, in the sen- 
tence ovx 'Ay a {I & av ov 1 r\vdave Ovum ; the dative " Aynfiifivovi 
maybe considered as regularly governed by r\vdave(J{,. XXII. II. 
1.), and Buim added in apposition, more particularly defining 
the part affected ; as, he did not please Agamemnon ; viz. his 
mind (his feelings.) So also the following examples : 

xbouov op rycpiv Ihztadcv Zevg y i v e 1, an ornament which 
Jupiter gave to them, viz. their race. 

fxaojvobcc Hi 110 1 t^ yvojuTj (the oracle) bears witness for 

ME, L e. FOR MY OPINION. 



224 THF, DATIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. § 148. 

In the following sentence, instead of the second dative, we 

sative with xotTd : viz. "]ds tie /not- xctru dv^iov 

■ > but this coun ed best to me in 

.ct of mv PEELINGS ; i. e. this counsel pleased mc 

. :». The correctness of this view of the construction is also rendered 

mora probable from the fact, that the same apparent tautology is used when 

> •<! to be limited or defined is connected with words which govern the 

ri 6i a t (p p iv ag Iksto xfrdog ; what grief has invaded TOUR 

instead of saying that at is the accusative used for the geni- 

iode of resolution, or that <ppcvas is governed by 

iderstood according to another, il appears better to consider as as the 

il direct object, and (pp'svag as in apposition, defining more precisely the 

part affected as in the above examples; thus, "what grief lias come upon 

rou : viz. your mind." So in other instances ; as, 

Toioas 6e Toonog v-f]Xvde y v T a s k a a r oy, trembling came upon the Trojansy 

EVERT ONE IN THEIR LIMBS. 

t 6 v ye /\tV da r i a Bvfios dyfjvwo, the noble soul left him ; viz. nis BODY , 
to i v cd v r&fare v i o v g o p-rrri k ag, he cut the WILD FIG TREE, ITS YOUNG 
BOUGHS. 

Ohs. 3. The dative of some participles and adjectives is 
joined with the dative after the third person of elfil or ylvojuat, 
Tor the verb itself; these are such as fiovXduevog, ifiouFvoc, tk%- 
'c, ngoadexifievoQi <$x(dv, ao/uevog, &c. ; as, el oou fiovXo- 
:im\ for 'l fi '>rlr> r if y oil arc willing ; otidh «utc5 Bmovtv ^ 
nor was he unwilling ; ffiofi&voiow f[[iiv ot Xdyoi yeyhraoi, we 
were pleased with your discourse. This construction has been 
imitated in Latin; thus, Tacit. Agr. IS. quibus bellum volen- 
tibus eratj who were inclined for ivar. So Sallust, Jug. 100. 

Ohs. 4. Somewhat similar to this is the construction of the 
dative with the participle or adjective expressive of some feel- 
ing or emotion, after verbs signifying to come; as, 

&ofiii <\ 8* ■'■ he came to me delighted, (scil. with his 

tiling); i. e. / am delighted that he is come. 

vtjg, thou earnestly wishing it, 

i. e« / earnestly wished lhaf thou toouldst come. 

Obs. 5. To this rule also be! construction of such 

ivbp unl) ; what have I to 
do with thee? (literally, what common Iking is there to you 



§ 143. THE DATIVE GOVERNED BY VERBS. 225 

Rule XXII. All verbs govern the dative of 
the object to which their action is directed ; as, 

ev/oi'TO OeoTg, they prayed to the gods, 

dcya6ls7ieii> xivl, to look up to any one. 

*u40^vq /elgug aviator, they lifted up their hands to JVIinerva. 

Rtm. 4. This rule may be considered as general, applying to all cases in 
which a verb expressing action is followed by the dative, the action not 
being exerted upon, but simply directed to the object expressed in the dative. 
Hence, if the verb is trans, it will govern also its immediate object in the 
accusative (§ 152) ; ifintrans.it will be followed by the dative only. More 
particularly to this rule belong 

I. Verbs expressing action, compounded with snl, ngbg, eh, 
cb'd, &c. These prepositions serve to mark more precisely 
the direction of the action, or state of action to an object. 

Obs. 6. These verbs sometimes govern the accusative, by the 
force of the preposition with which they are compounded ; as, 
eneoTiyursvae tcoUv, he waged war against the city, § 169. 

Obs. 7. Hence the dative in this construction generally is 
equivalent to the preposition eig, nob;, sttI, &c. with the accu- 
sative. Further, to this rule belong 

II. Yerbs which signify 

1. To profit or hurt ; to please or displease ; to reverence 01 
to yield; — to shew ; to seem ; to appear. 

2. To favour or assist ; and the contrary, to pray to, or 
entreat. 

3. To command, exhort, or address; to obey or disobey ; to 
serve or resist. 

4. To fit or accommodate ; to use and resemble. 

To give to, or to trust; to approach, to meet or to follow. 
6. To reproach with, to censure, to reprimand or rebuke, to 
be angry with. 

E.rc. dia or bioaai, I ask, governs the genitive ; and A/a- 
;d Xuavei», always the accusative. 

Obs, 8. Many of these verbs sometimes govern the dative 

'.live, according as their action is 

reeled to, or exerted upon, the object. 

wed as intransive verbs ; in 

transiti 



i 



226 THE DATIVE GOVERNED Bf IMPERSONAL VERBS. § 149, 

Rule XXHI. Verbs implying connexion or 
companionship^ govern the dative ; as, 

uuilnr mi, to associate with anyone. 

In this construction the dative is considered as correspond- 
in- to the ablative in Latin. (§ 145. 3.) To this rule belong 

1. Verbs compounded with (rtv, otiov, juftu, (with) ^ as, vv^v 
tii ■/, to live in'/// any one, 

2. Verbs after which avv, ouoti, //et£, may be supplied con- 
sistently with the sense, such as those which signify 

(1.) To follow (with), to converse, to mix, to be reconciled, 

to dwell (with.) 
(2.) To contend, or strive with or against, &c. 

Obs. 9. Verbs signifying "to contend," &c. in one point of 
view may come under the principle of Rule XXII, and hence 
are sometimes followed by an accusative with Ttqbg ; but then 
they signify more properly "to attack" 

Obs. 10. If a dative of the manner or instrument (§ 158.) 
follow the verb ulyrvm, to mix, instead of the dative of the per- 
son associated with, the genitive is used, governed by the word 
in the dative; as, Mala <di,dg ev cpildTTjTt, fxiyelcra, JVIaia 

BEING EMBRACED BY JUTITER. 

. To the principle of this rule may be referred the construction of the 
dative, expressing repetition or succession ; as, QveWa 6ve\\r), storm upon 
storm ; aWov <T av aXXw npoaiSoig, l you might sec one and then another,'' (scil' 
rushing to the regions of Pluto.) 

For the dative, construed with the passive voice, see § 154. 



§ 149. THE DATIVE GOVERNED BY IMPER- 
SONAL VERBS. 

Rule XXIV. Impersonal verbs govern the 
dative ; 

'"</. if is lawful for n 

toed proper In him (i. e. he determined) . 

Obs. I. RULE, .WTta, htatyzpH, fietecrtt, 

(iiXett hfok%et<Ui and TXQoarvcei, with their com- 



§ 149. THE DATIVE GOVERNED BY IMPERSONAL VERBS. 227 

pounds, govern the dative of a person with the 
genitive of a thing ; as, 

del Txollibv <joi, you have need of much. 

fiirearl idov tovtov, I take part in that. 

tI de rcQovrixsi iuol Kogivdlav, what are the Corinthians to mc. 

For the principle of this rule, as it respects the genitive, 
see § 144. R. XV. 1. 

Rem. 1. The dative of the person is frequently omitted. 

Rem. 2. The nominative agreeing with the impersonal is 
frequently used instead of the genitive ; as, dvacpegev tL gov tovto 
or joi'Tov, how does this concern yon ? 

Exc. I. 8si and %pri frequently take the accu- 
sative of the person with the genitive of the 
thing ; as, 

ov yug ctwp ps del 0so7tLau&Tav. for I do not want your oracles, 
ovde tL us /0T]'cavT7]g acpgoavvrjg, you have no need of this folly 

Obs. 2. From analogy the derivative substantives /oscb, xgelwj 
zgeta, are often construed with the accusative and genitive ; 
as, eue de xgeti) ytyveiau cttivqg, / have need of it: rig %gela 
a J e/uovy what need have you of me? 

Exc. II. #p>7, 7tpg7i££, and Set, it behoveth, govern 
the accusative with the infinitive ; as, 

yg-ri (r^uag) noirpavOai tt\v el<jr[V7]v, we ought to make peace, 
aocpotrioovg yag del figor&v It behoves those who are 

blvui Oiovg, wiser than men to be gods. 

Obs. 3. The dative is used in certain phrases in which it 
appears to depend on an impersonal or some other verb under- 
stood : viz. 

1st. After &g to show that a proposition is affirmed, not as 

generally true, but only with respect to a certain person ; as, 

/o<xv (jjg yegovxi TtQOvaT&XrjQ bd6v, yon have travelled a 

long way for an old man ; scil. &g cpalveTai ye'govTi, 

long, as it appears to an old man. 

ineinto el yevvuToz &g I d 6 v t i,, but since thou art noble in 

appearance ; i. e. &g elxdcaai lozl l86vn, as a. person 

having seen you may suppose. 

2d. To express the opinion or judgment of a oerson with 



228 CONSTRUCTION O I- THE ACCUSATIVE. § 150 

• fOT$ qn)o rov if i r t: v, I JiClVt 
done honour to $*i DING TO THE JUDGMENT OF THI 

ro?£, &c. as i/ appears to those who arc 
imon phrase, 6s d/uoi, or &s / ipod (soil. 

•1 by adverbs 165. 



§ 150. CONSTRUCTION OF THE ACCUSATIVE. 

The accusative in Greeks as in other languages, is used 
tpress the immediate object of a transitive verb, that 
on which its action is exerted, and which is affected by it; 
as, h(u(u'uL<> rh 1 d a n Id a, I take the shield. When used to 
express the remote object of a verb, or after verbs proper- 
ly intransitive, it is governed by a preposition understood. 

Rule, XXV. A Transitive verb, in the active 
or middle voice, governs the accusative; as, 

yro)6t oeavzdp, vow thyself. 

.- Fhy n6kiv % they plundered the city. 
uyuOoy <xi(J<)u uuug. thou hononrest a good man, 

Obs. 1. Several verbs in Greek are used in a transitive 

e, and have an accusative as their immediate object, 

which in Latin are considered as int:,,^itive and followed 

by some other case. These are chiefly the following ; viz. 

1st TtelOf* ; as, ntlOeiv xiyu., to persuade any one. 

2d. v'ioij": as, v f )oi':6iy tw£, to insult any one. Some 

times elg ivy a. 
3d. uol'/.u.,)'^ as, ddixely nva, to injure, or do injustice U 

any one. 
4th. Several verbs which signify to assist, to profit, to in- 

jun )f;/.;'i<i, ori/.'t. .'rrny[.;i''<o, (ilurriti, and With 

rbs the adverbs more, very, are expressed by the 
tive neuter of the adjectives nlel&v, /nyug, viz. 

• . bvTafielSo/uai, nfMDQeo/uat,; as, uiiet- 
aOal ma. to remunerate any one; xiiuaovXadut xiva. 

it then they generally 
il idea; thus, 6pcXf f r rica, to assist any one ; axpc\eTi> 



§ 150 CONSTRUCTION OF THE ACCUSATIVE. 229 

Obs. 2. Many verbs are followed by an accusative, not 
^)f the object on which the action is exerted, but to which 
\t has an immediate reference. Verbs thus used are pro- 
perly intransitive, and the accusative is governed by the 
force of a preposition in composition with the verb, or un- 
derstood after it. These are such as the following; viz. 

1st. rcqocFKvvko ; as, itQocntvvelv tivcc, to bow the knee to any 

one, to adore. 

2d. doQvcpogsa) ; as, doqvcpooslv Tiva, to he a spearsman to 

any one. 

So also, 3d. eraTQOrtstieiv, to be a tutor or guardian. 4th. 
kavd&reiv, to escape the notice of, or to remain unknown 
to. 5th. cpddvsi,v,to come before, prevent, or anticipate. 
6th. sndeiTteiv, to be wanting to, or to fail. 7th. ano- 
didgucnceiv, to run away from. 8th. dnofiCc/soOav, to 
ward off ; ouvvvat, or ejuogxeiv xiva, to swear by any 
one. 

9th. To these may be added intransitive verbs expressing 
some emotion or feeling ; as, to be ashamed of, ox afraid 
of any one : to compassionate any one. &c. &c, which 
are followed by the accusative of the object; thus, at- 
dovvTai tov; ao'/ovTag, they respected the riders; rig av 
j&ds yr t dr[(F6iev; who would rejoice at these things? (U- 
yelv tv, to be grieved at any thing ; OuqqbZv xt, to take 
courage with respect to any thing. The accusative 
in such cases may be governed by a preposition un- 
derstood ; as, 87tl, itsQi, -auto. ; or by the participle of au 
active verb to be supplied; as, 6oaJ*> axovar, Sac. seeing, 
hearing. 

Note 2. Instead of the accusative many of these verbs are often followed 
oy a. genitive or dative, according to the rules for these cases; 

Obs. 3. Rule. The infinitive mood or part of a 
sentence is often used as the objectof a transitive 
verb instead of the accusative ; as, 

Aiyts) itdptag el(jcp£gsi,i>, I say that you should all contri- 

bute. 

deiZ&m <bg ofct o\\rfir\ Xtyu), let him show that 1 do not speak 

the truth. 

jVote. The infinitive is also used instead of the genitive and dative aftei 
rerbs governing these cases. 

20 



D 



230 CONSTRUCTION OF THE ACCUSATIVE. § 150, 

in conatructi 'his kind the object of the verb 

quentiy i /V.-*/, in a noun or pronoun 

in the case required by the verb condly, in a dependent 

clan- •:, / know 

. %q Hit y h red from love ; <<i uh 

the Ion it they revolt; \o y &ppv 

a : in<((j(wr ; , fiber VM l('ll(tt things t 

: illy common with the de- 
morJstratn sort of apposition with the clause 

I - the object of the verb, § 133. 5. 6. The English 
aires these and similar sentences to be rendered as 
follow men have suffered from h> 

" \ ( / the Ionians recolV — « Do you remember what 

things I did? 

Obs. 5. The accusative is often governed by a transitive verb 

or participle understood; as, ore dr\ — cpn? dFdqayJvoii i&ds (sc. 

. but thke, (I ask) dost thon confess thou didst these 

s ? 6 de ti)i> Ttoocpvqlda (sc. £^co^), the man with (having) 

purple robe. 

Obs. 6. In this way the words ovofia, vipog, ttAtj^oc, etioog, 
and others are frequently construed in the accusative ; as, in- 
tou t6 nldjog (sc. £#coy), a racecourse (having) 
. breadth of a stadium. 

Obs. 7. In like manner the accusative, apparently in appo- 
sition with an entire proposition, or placed in the beginning 
to express the Leading idea, may be considered 

e preposition or verb understood; as, 

..tA<j<\i\ Ictus slay Helen(sc. tig, 
in order to; or, noiovvjeq, causirtg) bitter grief to JVLenelaus ; 
I'rw (i. \ >r najdt / //// tW), as to your mother 

retm ,i. 

Obs. 8. Rule. An intransitive verb used transi- 
erris the accusative; as, 

■ ..-?•. 

1st. of a similar 

ation with the word ,s it ; as, t/j 

life. 

Not'. nstruction may be referred such phrases as 

to be i>r'n <i>o6uci (sc. ^(Ooj/^aro,) 

tmn tal. 



§ 151. VERBS GOVERNING ACCUSATIVE AND GENITIVE. 231 

2d. When they only signify to cause that state or feeling 
which they express as intransitives ; as, f^sv %elqa, he 
caused the hand to move forward, i. e. he stretched out 
the hand ; at nrjyal q sov o i yala xal /tish, the fountains 
caused milk and honey to flow ; i. e. the fountains 
flowed with milk and honey. So Virgil ; 
"Et duroe quercus sudabunt roscida mella." 
Obs. 9. A passive verb used in an active sense governs 
the Accusative, § 74. Obs. 5. § 154. Obs. 4. ; as, ^ovvvjat 
n:ogetai'y they refused a conveyance. 



§ 151. VERBS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE 
AND GENITIVE. 

Many active verbs, together with the accusative of the di- 
rect object, govern also another word to which the action has 
an indirect or remote reference, in the genitive, dative, or ac- 
cusative, as the nature of that reference may require. 

Rule XXVI. Verbs of accusing, condemning, 
acquitting, and the like, govern the accusative 
of the person with the genitive of the crime; as, 

8i(oxouai us dedtag, T accuse you of cowardice. 
drroAt'O as ttj; ah lag, I acquit you of this blame. 

The genitive after verbs of accusing, is often governed by 
a preposition or some other word interposed, by which the ex- 
press ion is rendered more emphatic ; as, 

tyouipaTO (we) tovto)v avzwv sveua, he accused me of these same 

things, 
dubx® as neol Ouvutov, I accuse thee of a capital 

crime, 
cptvyeiv in' alrta cpovov, to be accused of murder. 

Obs. 1. Verbs of accusing, &c. are such as &nil;s*fu 9 yoa- 
rfo'iai, di())x<j). in a it KAouao, to accuse or criminate ; cpevy®, to be 
ed, or to defend ; otlqito. to gain one's suit ; alaut,, to lose 
one's suit; diz&Cju, to judge; lay/aw. to commence a suit; 
$7iihtfi6(XPOjxai and dLVTiXccfiB&vofia*, to blame, &c. unolvw, uyl- 
r h UL. dcnoipTjcpltoficti, &c. to acquit. 

Obs. 2. Verbs of this signification compounded with xuzb 
take the person in the genitive, and the crime or punishment 



OOVBRNING LC< rs.vTIVE AND DATIVE. § 152, 

in the accusative; as, uemiyooovat 01*6 rata**, //*<>// cfcerg-* 
sedition againti you* Sometimes the crime or punishment is 

: Stive: as, xidiyi'i'JO^) oor Ouiuiov or Oiauior: 

but the punishment seldom with any word except fap&ret/, and 
the crime only after leanyyo^w; as, Jtaoav6fiav uvtov umttflooeTv. 
06*. :*. Verbs of accusing sometimes govern the dative ; 
i rtQOvdootcLV) I accuse thee of treason. 

Rule XXVII. Verbs of hearings enquiring, 
learning, «c. govern the genitive of the person 
with the accusative of the thing; as, 

]\xovo6 tov uyyilov ravra, he heard these things from the 

messenger. 
rtvvO&vsaOat it Ttrog, to hear any thing from any one. 

The genitive under this rule is probably governed by a pre 
position understood ; as, uno, £x. 



§ 1 >2. VERBS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE 
AND DATIVE. 

A transitive verb governs the accusative and dative when, 

together with the immediate object of the action, it is followed 

by the person or thing in relation to which it was exerted. 

The more common constructions o£ this kind are compre- 

ded under the following rule: viz. 

Rule XXVIII. Verbs of comparing, giving, 
declaring, promising, and taking away, govern 
the accusative and dative; as, 

T%p£opalGOi <):'x<i luhtrra, [promise you, ten talents. 

ioXq fiiXloig, to avert t hi plague from others, 

. 1. After verbs of pro mi and the like, 

or declaration, forming part of a sentence and 
number - . often stands as the accu- 

sative with the dative of the p< rsou ; as, 

/A - " . ■■',')( debv UVTOV \p TjfplfT a (J. 

. Alexander Ordered //■ Greeks to vote him a god. 
n, tell me what you would do 
with HIM. 



§ 153. VERBS GOVERNING TWO ACCUSATIVES. 233 

Obs. 2. Instead of the dative of the person the accusative 
with ngbg is often used, and sometimes without it. 

Obs. 3. In all constructions under this rule, both in Latin and Greek, tne 
verb together with the accusative after it, are to be regarded as expressing 
the amount of what is done to the remote object in the dative. Thus in the 
expression narras fabulam surdo, the words narras fabulam express the whole 
amount of what is done (surdo) to the deaf man. With verbs of taking away, 
the English idiom requires the dative to be rendered by from; as, eripuit mihi 
gladium, he forced the sword away from me. On this account, some have sup- 
posed that the dative in such expressions in Latin is governed by some such 
word as existent em understood ; and others, to obviate the difficulty, have 
given the Greek an ablative. All this perplexity arises evidently from over- 
looking the principle of the construction. While the English idiom expres- 
ses that from ivhich a thing is taken away, the Latin _and Greek, with no 
less elegance on the general principle of the rule, express in the dative that 
to which the act of taking away is done. Thus in the above expression, eri- 
puit gladium together, expresses what is done (mihi) to me. So also Te- 
rence : Seni animam extinguerem ipsi ; — adolescenti ocidos eriperem, to 
the old max, I would put out the breath ; — to the young man, I would 
tear out the eyes. In Greek, Qs[xl(tti 8£kto Senas, to Themistis, he took 
away the cup ; i. e. taking away the cup was what he did to Themistis; ac- 
cording to the English idiom, he took away the cup from Themistis. [See 
Hunter's Notes on Liv. B. I. Chap. I. line 2. iEneae Antenorique, &c] 

Obs. 4. Yerbs of giving, govern the genitive and dative 
when their direct object is in the genitive, according to Rule 
XV. ; as, usiadlduuL uol tcqv /q^ucitojv, I share the property 
tvith you. 



§ 153. VERBS GOVERNING TWO ACCUSATIVES. 

Many verbs have the accusative not only of the nearer and 
more immediate object of the action, but also of the more remote 
object ; i. e. the person or thing to ivhich the action with its 
immediate object passes, usually preceded in English by the 
preposition to ; hence, 

Rule XXIX. Verbs of asking and teaching, 
clothing, concealing, depriving ; sjoeaking or 
doing well or ill, and some others, govern two 
accusatives, the one of a person the other of a 
thing ; as, 

20* 



234 M-RBS GOVERNING TWO ACCUSATIVES. §153. 

theif sought money from the 
Theban*, 
niifon. they teach their you f hs 
• \ r, probity. 

what shall I do to In ni t 

()hs. i. {mediate object of verbs which signify " fo 

>r « to speak" is the action done or the word spoken ; tho 
remote object is the person or thing to which it is done or 
ken ; thus, 

noieTv &yadd\ (soil $Qya) nva, io do good lo any one. 
ir y<cy.<\ (sc. c':rtj) lira,, to spc.dk evil of any one. 

Instead of theee adjectives with verbs of this signification, 
the adverbs ei and KctH&g are frequently joined;; thus, xwxws 
noielv tu<x, to do a ; ev X&yetv uru, to speak well of 

Lines these words are in composition with 
:rv\): as. evXpyelv, xaxoXoyeZr, epegyexeTv, uaxovoyelv — in 
which the accusative becomes the direct object, and is govern- 
ed by the compound transitive verb; as, -wtxQvfxf&v tivu, tomal- 

On the same principle several verbs, such as fetdooiofia*, Iv- 
uahnttai, &c. which are usually followed by a dative, frequent- 
ly take an accusative. 

Qbs. 2. When a verb admits of either of the words that fol- 
low it ;i< its immediate object, they are both put in the accusa- 
tive; thus ivdietv uru ibv yixwru, io clothe a person with a 
. and, to put a tunic on a person, convey the same idea. 
Obs. 3. A transitive verb, besides the accusative of the imme- 
diate object, may be followed by the accusative of a noun of 
si in iS Scatipn with itself; as, or Zeus (piXsv navtolyv 

rjta, whom Jupiter loves with great affection; Mxrjoe iovg 
ifaqadibvi (idxyv, he conquered the barbarians 
in the battle of JSlaratho.n. 

Obs* -1. When noisToda^ with a in rived from atrath- 

us< (1 as a circumlocution for the verb itself, it 

will of course be followed by two accusatives ; thus, xotelaOai 

fkQjzayty for tionCifcew ; 

"-. plundering the 

liture and si . making plunder of, &c. 

Obs. ">. \<im- which to call • e, to make, to 

the ac< rson, may be followed 

tive of an adj< ttive being ,the pre- 



§ 154. CASES CONSTRUCTED WITH THE PASSIVE V#ICE. 235 

dicate which the verb affirms of its immediate object. In this 
construction the verb etvcu is frequently interposed; thus, oocpia. 
tj)p droua^ovai ror atdga. or ror avdga 6lvcu 3 they call the man 
a philosopher. 

Obs. 6. The accusative neuter of pronouns and adjectives 
is often admitted in this construction, as well as with verbs 
which govern the genitive or dative, when the accusative of 
the substantive could not be used ; as, 

tovto us rfiLxrjoe, he has injured me in this* 
ii xQ&imi ctvTcp: for what may I use it? 

Obs. 7. Instead of the second accusative, many verbs under 
tin's rule frequently take the genitive or dative : and, on the 
other hand, some verbs which are usually followed by an accu- 
sative with the genitive or dative, sometimes take the double 
accusative; thus, og di] Troika xax' avOobmoicn (for ctpOoomovg) 
iihgyei. who verily inflicted many evils on men; d.TiocneoeXv tivo, 
zu /o^'jutcc, and %w /qijuoctcop, to deprive a person of his goods. 

Obs. 8. The second accusative is often to be explained by 
a preposition after such verbs as Tcooxaleu, dfcayxefc^ct, uttoxqLvo- 
ftai, and verbs which signify to divide, as, dmig&a), d(k£oj, &c; as ? 
TTQQxuletodal Tiva (eg) o-Ttovdag. to invite a person to a treaty ; 
Kvgog to uioaTEvau Kuriveius (elg) d&dexu [leqifo Cyrus divided 
the army into twelve parts. 

Note. With verbs of dividing, the whole which is divided is sometimes 
put in the genitive, and the word pepog fiolpa, &c, referred to the verb ; as, 
iaSena Uemrtoiv <f>v\al Stvorjirat, the tribes of the Persians were divided into 
twelve, for, the Persians mere divided into twelve tribes ; poipag SS sTXev ?| xal 
h-eoiv Kid o-W'oz/, literally, he divided the parts of cavalry and infantry into 
six- i. e. he divided the cavalry and infantry into six parts. Thus imitated 
in Latin, Cic. de Orat. Deiride eorum generum quasi quaidam membra disper- 
tiat, for ea genera quasi in quecdam membra, &c. 



§ 154. CONSTRUCTION OF CASES WITH THE 
PASSIVE VOICE. 

The passive voice is usually followed by a genitive of the 
doer, governed by the prepositions vnb, ix, naoa. nooc, and con- 
sequently, the government of the case falls under the rules for 
prepositions; as, /./rj vixib i5tto tov xaxov, be not overcome of evil. 
Sometimes, though very seldom, it follows the preposition in 
the dative ; as, fmb trarfdntaig dwixsTadat, to be governed by 
viceroys. But instead of this, and equivalent to it, the dative 



286 CASH* CONSTRUCTED WITH THE PASSIVE VOICE. § 154. 

without a preposition is common; hence the two following 



Rule XXX. Passive verbs frequently govern 
the dative of the doer ; as, 

/oiV tu jy^ red- the affairs of the city were con- 
Xs\ dueled by them. 

r <il //o*, it has been clone by me, 

Note. This construction most commonly takes place with tho perfect 

dative is equivalent, lo the genitive with {>to, which if in 
common use ; as also xpds, and sometimes jrapi, sk or c|, and dnd. On the 
same principle, the verbal adjectives in t6s and riog y having a passive signifi- 
cation, govern the dative of the doer. See § 147. Obs. 2. 



Rule XXXI. When a verb in the active voice 
governs two cases, in the passive it retains the 
er case ; as 7 

xa j r. yogiofiai KAoTnjs, J am accused of theft. 

idoOij fiot itfboa l$ovo(cc 9 all power is given to me. 

imvnizi\r uhv tfrro Aa/unoov being taught music by Lam- 
noudevdelg, jnn'Z. 

Obs. 1. Any passive verb may be followed by an accusative 
of similar signification with itself, on tho principle; laid down 
3. Obs. 3. ; as, tvtztstul TxXijydig 7roM&£, he is struck with 
many blows, 

Obs. 2. When a verb in the active voice governs the accu- 
Wlth the dative oj aperson, the passive frequently retains 
r case, the latter being used as the subject of the 
verb. Thus, the same ide.i may be expressed in three differ- 
ent I i/. 

1st With the active ^ xlexevoe Avxoiqyy 

m/ '/.Mr;r, the people committed the care 
'/?/ to Lycur \ 

2d. By the ■ with the latter cast ■ ... AvxoCg- 

yoj 4lei(X) the 

trusted to Lycurgus. 

3d. ive voici with the fwmer case, according 

to the Obs.: as, ApkoCq] 'q; v6fo&s imptleiav 



§ 155 CONSTRUCTION OF CIRCUMSTANCES. 237 

tf/ro tov di'iuov BTtKTTsvdrj, Lycurgus was entrusted with 
the management of the city by the people. 

The following are examples of this construction : ol zuitb- 
xoaanivoi j}]v yvlaxty, those entrusted with the ivatch ; for ofgi) 
tyvXcxxi) eniisTQuriTO : ttji' d' lx %sio(bi> don^ouav, she is torn 
from my hands ; for ^ & sx /stgCor dynaset at. 

Hence, also, such phrases as the following : Aldloneg nag. 
dalsa; bvoluusvol, the Ethiopians girded with panthers' shins ; 
XeLnei diliov syyeyqajjiiievTJv ^vpOriuara, he leaves a tablet in- 
scribed with writings ; because in the active voice it would 
have been Evdrcieiv AlQioixeoi naodaXeag — syyoacpsiv tvvOr\iiaja 
SUtcd. The accusative, in almost all such cases, may be ex- 
plained by supplying xaTu. This construction is imitated in 
Latin in such expressions as "inscripti nomina regum flores," 
flowers inscribed with the names of kings. 

Note. This construction used in Latin only as a Grascism, is comraoh in 
English with such verbs as, to ask, teach, offer, promise, pay, tell, allow, deny, 
and the like ; as, He allowed me great liberty ; passively, great liberty was 
allowed me, or, I ivas allowed great liberty. So, they were offered (to) me, 
or I was offered them. See English Grammar, § 49. Obs. Crombies' Ety- 
mology, p. 270. 

Obs. 3. On the same principle the part affected, (§ 144. 3.) 
is often put in the accusative after the passive voice; thus, in- 
stead of to roavud t aov bTtidelTav, my wound is bound up, the ge- 
nitive is changed into the nominative to the verb, and the no- 
minative or part affected into the accusative ; thus, (tyti) stcc- 
deouui to loavua, I am bound up as to my wound ; Ugo/urjOe-ug 
exelgero to tjttwo, literally, Prometheus ivas torn out as to his 
liver ; i. e. his liver was torn out. See also § 157. Obs. 1. 

Obs> 4. When the passive is used in a middle sense, 
(§74- Obs. 5.), it becomes deponent, and may be followed 
by an accusative in the same manner as the active voice ; as, 
7tuoeo-v.Eva(ji.itvoi tiuvtu tnleov, having provided every thing, 
they sailed ; y\ovqviai Ttooelav, they refused a conveyance. 



§ 155. CONSTRUCTION OF CIRCUMSTANCES. 

Words and phrases are often thrown in between the parts 
of a sentence in an adverbial manner, to express some cir- 
cumstance connected with the idea of the simple sentence, 
and which do not depend for their case on any word in the 



LUBE OR ORIGIN. § 156. 

> Dtence to which they belong, but on a preposition or adverb, 
ther word tmdersfo 

i elg * Iauo$$i x<<) drrtovda f^flvbv 
r' t t< }8tg y hi advanced two days' journey to 

lined there three days. 

// l ■ ) •nvdri ;v'unt l.inaiTFin, every thing was done 

Wl V 

general name of circumstances maybe included 
words which indicate 1. The remo or origin, § 156. 

2. A particular qualification or direction of a general expres- 
sion. § 157. 3. ( lause, manner, or instrument, § 158. 4. 
159. 5. Time, § 16J. 6. Measure, § 161. 7. 
Price, <$ 162. 8. Exclamation, § 163. 



§ 156. I. THE REMOTE CAUSE OR ORIGIN 

Rule XXXIT. The cause, source, or origin, 
and the ))art affected^ arc put in the genitive; as, 

iK'Yj'jLnm; rij; tv/j,;, happy from his fortune, 

<f tkei u u iov i ij g dog rrjc , he lo v cs h im o n account of his virtue. 
Xv uroj^, to take a wolf by the ears. 

Obs. 1. Instead of the genitive the accusative is often used, 
rned by kxt&, fod, &c. understood. 

Ohs. 2. The circumstance of cause expressed by the geni- 

;n that expressed l>y the dative ; the genitive ex- 
mote or moving cause ; — the dative, the imme- 
diai 

Obi ] of which a thing i s made is expressed 

ry;)i<a dupdeQibv, rafls made of skins. 
See § 142, Ob$. 4. 

"•!" ( Frammanans 
too i : and u rat in favour of this 

ircumstance of h or and 

contain a more di- 

n could b mm on construc- 

• ' il Mftavros 

for the 
of which an^ m ide may be considered 

cat rercvxarai, ai 



§ f57. CIRCUMSTANCES OF LIMITATION. 239 

§ 157. II. CIRCUMSTANCES OF LIMITATION. 

A particular qualification of a general expression, made in 
English by the phrase i( in respect q/J" "iviih regard to" is 
expressed by the genitive and dative; or, more briefly, as 
follows: 

Rule XXXIII. Respect wherein is expressed 
in the genitive, sometimes in the dative. § 141.1. 
I. In the Genitive ; as, 

iyyvvara avm elui yirovg, I am very near him in respect 

of kin, 
daovg dei'dgoov, thick with trees. 

nXnalov allr[lojp, near (in respect of) each other. 

The genitive is thus used. 

1. After £/£*>, in the sense of tohe(se habere\with. such ad- 
verbs as si)y a;, O7ro£, ttcoc, ovrwg, tfaXok, &c. ; as, ivatdetag 
ovrojg ^X B h he is so in respect of learning ; xaltig e%ew [i&- 
dijg. to be pretty drunk; t^co is used in the same way; 
as, T&llog tov 6lov el) r\xo)v. Tellus being well advanced 
in (respect of) life. 

2. After other verbs ; as, livelyeioQai aotjog, io be in haste 
with respect to the battle. 

3. After adjectives; as, aitaig tigyipcov ivaldav, childless 
with respect to sons. 

4. With adverbs ; as, ivoooco o\oeTr\g o\v^evv y to carry it far 
with respect to virtue. 

5. With substantives ; as, ayyelta xr\g Xlov, the relation con- 
cerning Chios. 

6. With entire propositions ; as, el itaTobg vifiev tw> &qav 
tov y.aUog nohoueiv doxelv, if he possesses any care of his 
father, in respect of his appearing to prosper. 

Obs. 1. Respect w herein is also put in the accusative govern- 
ed by y.ujdi understood ; viz. when the idea expressed by a 
verb or adjective is to be more accurately determined by an 
additional circumstance; as, xbv ddiervlop dJyti, I am pained 
in my finger; xsqefov oti difiag, odds cpoepag. inferior neither 
in body nor mind; itodug uxvg \4%illevg. Achilles swift of 
foot. 



CUM CES OF LIMITATION. § 157, 

rhisia the construction bo often imitated by the Latin poets; 

:i\(> in this construction is in signification adverbial, 

! as an adverb ; thus, dpxfii , above all, originally; 

t finally; rh* wpurriv, at first, &c j Kara being under- 

So also SQch rd ivavriov, on the cuntrcry ; to Xsy- 

II. Ill the Dative. 

This case is used m a sense nearly similar, to 
express that with respect to which a thing is 
affirmed to be or take >dacc. The extensive 
use oC this construction in Greek may be illus- 
trated by the following examples: 

1. &£io; i]v Our&Tov t rj 7t6lei, he was worthy of death, with 
respect to the state; i. e. he was guilty of a capital 
crime against the state. 

2. xui d^ tiedlei' yalenolo yoloio Ti]l&: uu yy, and now they 
laid aside their grievous anger against (with respect to) 
TELEMACHUS; so lywye liaaouai >y1yillr\'i /uediusv 
yblor, I will pray him to lay aside his anger against 
Achilles. 

3. to ah' t^mdev urtTO/uevco o(b t ua o^n (kyav deojubv fy 9 the 
surface of the body was not very hot when one touch- 
v. i) it, (with respect to one touching it.) 

4. y Enldajiv6$ £(m rrolu iv drSia i onlio vtl ror ^Ibviov x6X- 
rror. Epi la m nus is a cily on the right hand as you enteb 
(with respect to one entering) the Ionian bay. 

5. dvovhxuTij dk nl fybg xsiftivy, the twelfth day since hf 
In if (to him lying.) 

6. Hpaxlit fiir d^[ Sera uvrol Alyimuol <puoi elvat ersa eg 

ifiaow, the Egyptians themselves tell how many years 
(I from HERCULES (or, since the death of Hercules) 

~- I for the advantage (or 

pleasure) of Wi i 

8. ooy'/f'c- -/z, dancing in honour of the gods. 

['""- R metimes expressed in the 

dative governed by fr understood ; as, 

l utyv; % swift of foot. 



§ 158. THE CAUSE, MANNER, AND INSTRUMENT. 241 

§ 15S. III. THE CAUSE, MANNER, AND INSTRU. 

MENT. 

Rule XXXIV. The cause, manner, and in- 
strument are put in the dative ; as, 

q>66(p E71QUTT0V) I did it from fear. 

tyei'STo tuSs t<5 tootto), it happened in this manner. 

Tcax6i(j(jBiv gaSdcp, to strike ivith a stick. 

Obs. 1. The cause or motive may be considered as internal 
or external. The internal cause represents the act as proceed- 
ing from some particular state or disposition of the subject, or 
quality residing in it, and contains the answer to the question 
from what? or whence? and consequently may generally be 
rendered from : svvoia *f atidcb, I speak from good-will. 
The external cause represents the action as caused by some- 
thing without the agent, and may generally be rendered u for," 
" on account of," sometimes " according to," " in conse- 
quence of;" as, /g^uaaip ertaigouevog, elated ivith, or in conse- 
quence of riches ; Atovxlvwv xaTOMloei, for, i. e. in order to 
the re- establishment of the Leontines, the motive being derived 
from the end ; Bavfjuktj® r^ anoxlelosL [uov tcqv 7tvX(bv,I am as- 
tonished at the shutting up of my gates. 

Obs. 2. In this construction the dative expresses the nearer 
or immediate cause, the more remote being usually expressed 
by the genitive, or by dux with the accusative, (§ 156. Obs. 1 
2.) ; as, aoOevela ogouutcov dux t\v auodsiav -brcextyovv, they (the 
Lacedemonians) gave way, from the weakness of their bodies 
induced by want of provisions. 

Obs. 3. The dative of the cause is probably governed by the 
preposition uucpl, Ttsol, or enl understood. Sometimes they 
are expressed ; but whether with or without a preposition, the 
whole expression is adverbial in its nature; and hence, disre- 
garding its case, a neuter adjective or pronoun is sometimes 
put in the same construction with it, in the accusative ; as, 
el Tiro; usyu r\v to otbua cpvaev, t\ Toogo^, ^ d^cpdrcoa, if the 
body of a person ivas large naturally, or by nourishment, or 

BOTH. 

Obs. 4. The dative of the manner is governed by iv or crvv 
understood, and maybe considered as adverbial. Hence, per- 
haps, verbs of punishing are fallowed by the punishment in the 

21 



CIRCUIM OF PLACE. § 159. 

uovv int( dctp&xo*, (pvy^ 9 &c. to punish any one 
toith deaths with banishment, &c. 

Obs. 5. The dative of the instrument or mean may be a 

n : as, '■ . he built the wall by means 

of those who were present. It is also put with substantives; 

"h<u, motions made with the bod if. 

. Hence the construction of \'n;<nOai with the dative ; that which wo 

msidered as an instrument. On the same principle the dative is 

put after other verbs which imply the idea of using; rsKftatpeoBai rots KpoaOcv 

frtm what was granted, i. e, to use as proofs the things 

Obs. 6. Instead of the dative, the prepositions zv, tind, didc, 
aiV, with their cases are sometimes used. 



§ 159. IV. CIRCUMSTANCES OF PLACE. 

The circumstances of place respect motion to, or from, or 
through a place, and motion or rest in a place; in all of which 
the Greek writers generally use a proper name with a preposi- 
tion; thus, e"! \46r\vL>)v, from Alliens; fig Bonawlav, to Bri- 
tain ; lr livid, in Pylos ; did, vr\g TidXewg, through the city. 
But, 

Rule XXXV. The place icliere, without a 
preposition, is expressed in the genitive or da- 
tive; as, 

MctQctd&TH, at Marathon ; *A.Qyeog, at Argos. 

Obs. 1. In this construction the genitive may be governed 
: and the dative by &v understood. The prepo- 
sition is also often understood before common nouns denoting 
plao >/f ffOoi' xlia(iji\ they two came to the tent. 

Obs. 2. The genitive after Big, to a place, or &v, in a place, 
ted by a substantive understood ; as, *-ig udou, (sc. 
fsc. 7t6%6i) 9 at ArgQS. § 142. 
Obs. 1. 

Obs. 3. The terminations -ft -\\\<] -a*, added to a noun, de- 
note \t a plo I, in the country ; Vrfiycn, at Thebes; 

KNpraode, to Athens; xholrjvde, 

I -i -" . | 'i; m ii place,; ns, -Aiolrflev vlveII&to 
ty/o;, he tool: a sp/nrj'rom the tent. § 120. 6. 



§ 160, 161. CIRCUMSTANCES OF MEASURE. 243 

§ 160. V. CIRCUMSTANCES OF TIME. 

Rule XXXVI. Time token is put in the da- 
tive ; time how long, in the accusative ; as, 

whex; wtyty T Qt T % on the third day. 

how long ; TQslg olovg /wqvag Ttaqkuzivsv, he, remained three 

ivhole months. 

Obs. 1. "When the reference is to a fixed time at which a 
thing took place, the dative is used as in the rule ; but if the 
idea of duration is implied, it is put in the accusative ; as, t&£ 
i)uioa; xal rag vvxtag, by day and by night; sometimes in the 
genitive ; as, exaxcoae 6(ij c Hoaxlrjelrj xwv nooTeouv hsoov, Her- 
cules distressed us in former years. 

Obs. 2. Time how long, may respect the time during ivhich 
since which, or after which some event took place. The first 
is put in the accusative as above ; the second is more com- 
monly expressed in the genitive; as, nollov avxovg ov% s6gaxa 
%gorov, I have not seen them for a longtime; the third, gene- 
rally in the dative ; as, ov nollaig r^ieqaug vcrregov, not many 
days after. But sometimes in the genitive, when protracted 
and indefinite; as, exeZoe ovx dq>ixp sTim iitor {uvglcop, he comes 
not thither in ten thousand' years. In this, however, there is 
some variety. 



§ 161. VI. CIRCUMSTANCES OF MEASURE. 

The circumstances of measure respect magnitude, distance, 
and the measure of excess, as follows : 

Rule XXXVII. The measure of magnitude 
is put in the genitive; as, 

avdgict; du&dexa titi/suv, a statue of twelve cubits. 



Rule XXXVIII. The measure of distance is 
put in the accusative, sometimes in the dative ; 
as, 

"Ecpeao; uni/eo tqimv ^u^oaw 6dbv Ephesus is distant three 
or 6Jq>, days' journey. 

TTSvxexaLdey.u it^'/eig -bijj(hdi] ib the water rose fifteen 
vdow, cubits. 



\ OF ID VERBS. ^ 162, 163, 164. 

(>!><. When measure of magnitude or distance is found in 
tlu> nominative after a substantive verb or in the accusative 
after an infinitive, the construction is according to § 139. III. 

Rule XXXIX. The measure of excess is pu* 
in the dative alter the comparative degree; as, 

i)-rn(Viu .in: (TdurFoog, older by a year. 

()h\\ Hence the expressions nolUa, dltyco, ft>«/£r, & c « with 
the, comparative, it is, however, sometimes put in the accusa- 
tive; as, itoki) (/L8ltpi ■, much greater ; noklbv uuelrojv > much better. 



§ 162. VII. CIRCUMSTANCE OF PRICE. 

Rule XL. The price of a thing is put in the 
genitive ; as, 

do; tovto 8oayji7\g^ give this for a drachma. 

Ohs. The price is put sometimes in the dative, with the pre- 
position t:rl expressed or understood ; as, snl /utoOQ [ueyuXcp, 
for a great reward. Sometimes in the accusative ; as, thuq&oxsl 
o xuxb; n&vjot rtoog tigyvoiov, the icic&ed sell all things for silver. 



$ 163. VIII. EXCLAMATION. 

Rule XLI. Exclamations of praise, indigna- 
tion, compassion, &c. are put in the genitive, 
sometimes in the accusative; as, 

T7j,~ braid slag, O the impudence ! 
tpev row ardg6g 9 Alas! the man. 
ui dellaioy, O wretched me! 

Obi. Sometimes with the genitive there is an addition of 
the nominative ; as, ot/noi i y&xaxi&y, ah! my miseries, 

ivern the Dative ; as, lot fioi : woe is me. 



§ 161. CONSTRUCTION OF ADVERBS. 

V- joined to adjectives, verbs, and other adverbs, 

>me circumstance, quality, or manner of their sig 



§ 165. ADVERBS AS PREPOSITIONS. 245 

Many adverbs in Greek have the force of prepositions iu 
Latin and English. These are often joined with substantives, 
ks will appear in the following rules. They are also some 
times used as substantives or adjectives ; as, and tote, from 
that time ; 6 £ico ardgurtog, the outward man, § 130. Obs. 1. 2d. 

Rule XLII. Derivative adverbs commonly 
govern the case of their primitives; as, 

uzioj; fifmv, in a manner worthy of us. 

i.iaKiGia ktirzTGiv, most of all. 

ouolu); toIq alloig, in a manner similar to the rest. 

Tiagex rr\a, without the ship. 



§ 165. ADVERBS AS PREPOSITIONS. 

Adverbs having the force of prepositions govern the same 
case with the prepositions which, in meaning, they resemble ; 
thus, ouov, uuu, together, having the force of ovv, govern the 
dative ; svex<z, on account of resembling dice, governs the ge- 
nitive. This general principle authorizes the two following 
rules : 

Rule XLIII. Some adverbs of time, place , 
and quantity, likewise of number, order, and ex- 
ception, govern the genitive ; as, 

a/oi xr\c ay\u6gov 7\ueoag, to this day. 
ov yr\g ei/u ; where am I ? 

Obs. 1. To these may be added adverbs of cause, compart- 
son, distinction, concealment, separation, or exclamation ; and 
also nouns used adverbially, as, '/Aqiv, dlxrjv, Iv&niov, &c. ; as, 
dlXTjv Tioi a tmv, like rivers. 

The adverbs which come under this rule are the following : 

iavev, uieo, dl/u, /cooig, without ; uvtlxov, ocvTixqvg, unavnxov, 
against, opposite; ^/ql, u&'/qi, to, even to; ei'sxa, Ivsxev, on' 
account of; lyyvg, nl^o-lov, ay/i, uuoov, near ; ixiog, £?w, %x- 
ToaOev, without; tpro;, loo, ti'ooj, svioaOev, within; nl^v^ naq- 
txrdg, except, but; '.istu$6, among; bnlao, onioOev, behind; 
nqoodev, before; rcinav, LtlLxcivu, beyond, &c. 

Exc. 1. ciy/o and 8Xiq sometimes govern the dative. 
Exc. 2. Ttlqy, except, has sometimes the nominative after it; 

21* 



ADVERBS AS PREPOSITIONS. § 165. 

S&p did&axaloi, except the teachers 

the final cause are frequently omitted; as, lypaxpa 
up. IvtKa. 

. 2. Adverbs of time, place, &c, are frequently changed 

Lto adjectives; as, \<ft9& 7ta^iffiiftpi /uolnrj (h-uv 

iX&axorTO, they propitiated the god with &oftg*THE whole day. 

rtain adverbs are joined sometimes with one case and 
« ith another ; as follows ; 

1st. rdsv, TcdgFYyvQ, vvrFyyug, 

&£ijg, &ye£vig 9 <r/ed6i', or/edoOey^ uvroG/edoy^ are put with 

the GENITIVE 01* DATIVE. 

2d. &fZ*i ^Y/odi^ ixTtodiov, nlrjolov, inlngoodev, oftener with 
the genitive. 

3d. urujTulir, eiiTtufov, oftener with the dative. 

1th. etao), ntcrcfu, TTuosx or nageS, nigiS, with the genitive 
or accusative. 

6th. devgo, with the dative or accusative. 

6th. &/qi, «/?'?, P&XQh peXQis* xv "h the genitive, dative, 
or accusative. 



Rule XLIV. Adverbs of accompanying gov- 
ern the dative ; as, 

. a/ua ttj fytQq, at day-break. 



Rule XLV. Adverbs of swearing govern the 
uisative ; as, 

dta y by Jupiter ; jtcd v68e Q%inxqov^ hij this sceptre. 

Obs. 3. In - of this kindffiA commonly denies, un- 

joined with raij and w| affirms, unless joined with a ne- 

Ofcti 4. Adverbs of shewing are put with the nominative; 
-. behold the man: tdi ^ w\xr$ fiov xal oi 
&delv>ol ii<)i\ I, ' mother and my brethren* 



§ 166. OF NEGATIVES. 247 

§ 166. OF NEGATIVES. 

The Greek language has two simple negatives, oti and /utj, 
from which all the compound negative terms are formed, and 
to which, in their use and manner of construction, they are 
similar. Between these two negatives and their respective 
compounds there is a total difference of use, the foundation of 
which is as follows : 

1. oi> is the direct and independent negative, which express- 
es a positive den ial without reference to any thing else; as, 
ovx edslcx), I will not; ovx dyadov bo~ti, it is not good; ovdelg 
Tragr^, no one was present. A direct negation of this kind 
can never be expressed by (it\ or its compounds. 

2. (ufo on the other hand, is uniformly a dependent nega- 
tive. It is therefore used in all propositions in which the 
negative is represented, not as a fact, but as something depend- 
ent on the conception, as a condition, supposition, &c. ; and 
hence it is used in the manner following: 

1st. After the conditional conjunctions si, edv, \v, oxav, 
STTeidav, swg, av, and those which intimate an end, de- 
sign, motive ; as, h'a 3 6)g, onwg, &ctts ; as, si {ir\ dyOwg 
heyoj, if I do not speak correctly; &7redr[Uiicre Iva yir\ 
avayxaody], x. t. I., he (Solon) icent away that he might 
not be compelled, &c. 

2d. Without any such particle fi^ is always put with the im- 
perative mood in all the tenses, with the subjunc- 
tive in the aorists used imperatively, and with the op- 
tative when it expresses a wish ; as, /urj /us fi&lle, or fi^ 
{is fidlyg, do not strike me ; fir\ ykvoixo, may it not be. 

3d. Mri is used after relatives, and with participles when 
they express a condition or supposition ; as, rig de 
dovvuu dt^arat It^og) a {jlt\ avrbg e %sl ; ivho can give a 
thing to another, if he has it not himself ? a otix afirbg 
s'xsl would mean, that which he has not himself. So 
also, 6 firi TiiaxevMv, if a person does not believe. But, 
6 otf tuotevojv, is, one who does not believe. 

4th. Mr\ is used with infinitives whether they be dependent 
upon another verb or used with the article as a verbal 
noun, § 173. I. ; as, dvdyxi] tovto /utj Ttoieiv, it is ne- 
cessary not to do this ; to ^rj noieZv, the not doing. 

5th. With verbs which signify to fear, to warn, and the like, 
iurj is used, like ne in Latin, where a positive expres- 



248 DOUBLE NEGATIVES. § 167 

■lOD U Wed 111 English ; as, didoixa ^ ti yhrjTai, 
vercor no quid accidat, / am afraid thai soinething may 
happen. Sometimes the preceding verb is under- 
stood ; ;i-. (Iho; I'/ij, (gcil, fiidoixa), 1 fear lest 
this he olhen 

So also after verbs which signify to forbid, deny, pre- 
/. refrain, disbelieve, to he cautious, and the like, it 
is frequently put with the infinitive where the negative 
is not used in English; as, unuv d& rouior fiTj TTugiet'ict, 
I for bid this man to enter. 
6th. Wfj is sometimes merely an interrogative particle like 
num in Latin, giving, however, greater emphasis to the 
question ; as, //rj dpeleXv /ae avdiXeig; will thou kill me? 
3. A negative placed between the article and its noun, con- 
verts it into a sort of compound negative term; as, r\ ov di&lv- 
en; tC))> yeepvour, the not destroying of the bridges ; i] ^r\ e/iM8t,- 
Q(a, the inexperience. 

Rem. In the same manner it is used with certain verbs; 
thus, ov (fi^'u. I deny, contradict ; ovx idco, I forbid; oti/ timcr- 
ta* 9 I refuse; thus, otix lepavav tovto elvav does not signi- 
fy they did not say that this was, but, they denied that this 
was, or. they said this was not. 



§ 167. DOUBLE NEGATIVES. 

When to a proposition already negative, and also to verbs 
which signify to deny, to contradict, to hinder or oppose, and 
the like, other qualifications of a general nature are to be at- 
d; such as ever, any body, any where, &c. ; it is usual to 
do this by compounds of the same negative. Hence the fol- 
lowing rules : 

Rile XLVI. Two or more negatives, joined 
to the same verb, strengthen the negation ; as, 

ovx bjtotrj&i iovio ov()u'i'iu oddelc, no one any where did this. 

Obs. 1. T<< ttion of the whole is joined in the same 

nee the negation of the parts ; as, od'ddvcaai ovra Xayeiv 

wr act. 

Note. uently, in translating such propositions into English, only 



^> 167. DOUBLE NEGATIVES. 249 



Rule XLVII. But two or more negatives 
joined to different verbs, destroy the negation, 
and are equivalent to an affirmative ; as, 

ov dvvfaieQa ui] laXsTv, we cannot but speak. 

oddslg oarig ov ysldosTuv, there is nobody ivho iv ill not laugh, 

i. e. Ci every body will laugh ;" sa- 
%L being understood with ovdslg. 

Obs. 2. Indeed, so common is the ellipsis of £o~tL in this ex- 
pression, that it is lost sight of, and the antecedent ovdslg, 
which should be its nominative, is often attracted into the case 
of the relative which follows ; as, ovdsvl otco od% dosansi, there 
is nobody whom it does not please, for otidslg otco, &c. ; otidsva 
hvxiva ov xaTsxlavasv, he caused every one to weep, for ovdelg 
icrTD' oi'Tiva, &c. " there is no one whom he did not cause 
to weep." 

Obs. 3. It is also proper to observe the use of the negative- 
in such sentences as the following : xal od javxa /usv yqdcpsi 6 
flMUnno; jolg d 7 eqyoig od noisX, Philip does not write these 
things and not perform them; i.e. think not that Philip ivrites 
these things and does not execute them; where the first ou 
does not affect the verb yqdcpsv. but the two propositions to- 
gether. It denies an assertion which might be thus expressed ; 
yoacpsL usv ov noisl ds, he ivrites but does not execute. So also 
ov drj tZw /usv ysiqoTS'/vMV sent tv nsqag Tr\g sgy a a lag tov d' o\v6q(d- 
tcIvov Stov ovx scrn, " it cannot be that there is some object in 
the labours of the artist, but none in the life of man." 

Note. In phrases of this kind, the two propositions as here, are usually 
distinguished by ^Iv and Si ; and the second is negative. 

Obs. 4. In some phrases ov and ,w»j are united ; as, o-d /utf 
and {.n\ ov. Ov ar { is a stronger and more emphatic negation 
than ov, and is used in the same way, § 166. 1. Ml] ov, in 
general, is only a stronger expression of /utj, and is used in the 
same manner, subject, however, to the following modifications : 
1st. In dependent propositions, when the verb of the prin- 
cipal proposition is either accompanied by a negation, 
or contains a negative idea in itself, [iv\ ov destroy each 
other, and may generally be rendered " that ;" as, oix 
dovovuui ur { ov ysvsvOui, I do not deny that it has taken 
place; tzsLOouui yo\o ov togoviov ovdlv (qotp ur^ ov xutibg 
OuvsZv, for I am persuaded that there will nothing hap- 
pen to me so bad but that I shall die nobly. 



TRF POSITIONS. § 168. 

2d. Mf) ; <>i' after verbs signifying to fear, to warn, &c. as 
above, § 16< th« render the sentence negative 

which with juij alone would bo positive; as, didotxa at) 

ov u ;/;/,/<./. / am afraid lest something m.wnot Imp- 
pen : tyofiov/uou or otJ xulbr ?/, vereor ne non honestuin 
>it. / fear that this may not be proper. 
3d. In independent propositions with the subjunctive mood, 
omed with tw8 makes the negative expression less posi- 
tive; as, dJULd /// orx ?j dtdaxttSy ?/ (k>£T7j, 6«i virtue may per- 
h \rs Ar a f&ittg 1 not to be taught. This sentence may be 
explained by supplying an omitted verb, as oo«, or the like, 
ami be rendered literally. But see whether virtue may net 
be. &c. 



§ 168. PREPOSITIONS. 

Prepositions are used to express the relation in which one 
tying stands to another. For the primary and various derived 
meanings of prepositions in different constructions, see § 124. 
The influence they exert over the words with which they are 
joined, as far as it respects their case, is regulated by the fol- 
lowing rules : 

Rule XLVIII. 3 Avt\, dno, ex or !£, and 7ip6, 
govern the genitive only ; as, 

ocpOulubg o\vtI ocpdaljuov, an eye for an eye. 



Rule XLIX. 5 Ev and civ govern the dative. 



Rule L. Elg (or eg) and dvd govern the accu- 
sal ive. 

Ohs. J. f >u. among the poets, also governs the dative. 



Rule LI. Aec^ «yrdj (Merd, vm^ govern the ge- 
nitive or accusative. 

Ob$. 2. H i ■'.. among tip also governs the dative 

of a plural noun, or a noun of multitude; as, perti tqh&toloi 






§ 169. PREPOSITION IN COMPOSITION. 251 

Rule LII. 'Afupi, 7tspl 9 S7tl, 7tapd, 7rpog, and vnb, 
govern the genitive, dative, or accusative. 

Note. For the meaning of the prepositions as modified by the case with 
which they are joined, see § 124. 

Obs. 3. Prepositions are often used as adverbs, their case 
being understood. This is the case especially with sv in the 
Ionic, and rrooc in the Attic. Hence, in the Ionic writers they 
are often put twice, once abverbially without a case, and again 
with a case or in composition with a verb ; as, sv d£ xal sv 
Mifupiy in Memphis also. 

Obs. 4. Prepositions are sometimes separated from their 
case; as, sv yog oh rrj vvxrl t«tjt^ dvalgo/uoa. In Attic this 
takes place according to rule, with the conjunctions /ukv^ds, y&g, 
ohv ; as, sv /uev yag, eJoTJ^; — sg fisv oZv rdcg ' Ad^vag ; and with 
5to6c with the genitive when it signifies per. 

Obs. 5. Prepositions are often put after their case, particu- 
larly by the Ionic and Doric writers and the Attic poets ; as, 
vs(bv arco xal xliaidajv. In the Attic prose writers it takes place 
only in negl with the genitive. When so placed the accent is 
always thrown back to the first syllable ; thus, ano nigi, &c. 

Obs. 6. When a preposition should stand twice with two 
different nouns, it is often put only once by the poets, and that 
too with the second noun ; as> 3) albg iq inl yr\g, Horn, by sea 
or land. 

Obs. 7. A preposition is frequently understood. 



§ 169. PREPOSITION IN COMPOSITION. 

Rule LIII. A preposition in composition some- 
times governs the same case as when it stands 
by itself; as, 

£%r[lds xr\g olxlug, he went out from the house. 

Obs. 1. This is done when the preposition can be separated 
from the verb and joined with the substantive, without altering 
the sense. 

Obs. 2. In Homer, Herodotus, and other old writers, the 
preposition is frequently found separated by one or more words 
from that with which it may be considered in composition ; 



OF THE INDICATIVE MOOD. § 170, 

<j.ULi(<i. (11. 1. 67.) tor fyteZ v urtouuj'ai loiybv j 
-I. 3, 36.) tor onovinr uhv a/icoAe- 

trag. Hence when the verb is to be repeated several times, af- 
ter the fust time the preposition only is often used; as, dbio- 
pa. Grammarians, however, consider 
the preposition in such eases as used adverbially, and not 
properly in composition. Instances of the proper tmesis are 
specially in the Attic prose writers. 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 



§ 170. OF THE INDICATIVE MOOD. 

The indicative mood is used in Greek when any thing is to 

be represented as actually existing or happening, and as a 

thing independent of the thought and ideas of the speaker. 

Hence it is often used where, in Latin, the subjunctive would 

used ; as, 

1. Alter negative propositions with the relative. 

2. In indirect interrogations. 

3. In quoting the language of another after on, <bg, &c. 

4. In conditional propositions after bI, implying a supposi- 
tion in the statement, but a certainty in the fact; i. e. 
when the thing supposed is neither contingent nor fu- 
ture, but present and certain ; as, si alert ^coao/, tlal xul 

. if there are altars, there are also gods. Or, when 

the condition and consequence are both past actions; 

Efts, - x / / / iir] intoiBvaev uhtfii-vijtiv , he would 

not havi foretold if, unless he had believed it would prove 

true. This able to the ordinary construction in 

Latin. 

Obs. 1. The indicative is put with &v in the conclusion, 

it is put with si in the condition, when it refers to the 

lit tine-: ;is. si u i /'/.' ' :<)i<)ou <lv, " if lie had any thing 

nit! gim i$, n Here, however, a denial of the condition 

is always understood : tlms, "but he has not." 



I 171, 172. SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE MOODS. 253 

Obs. 2. The indicative is sometimes used in suppositions 
where, in other languages, the subjunctive would be put; as, 
T&OvTjxa T7? (77j dvyargl, xal /»' aTtdlscre, suppose that I /tad been 
slain by thy daughter, and that she had made an end of me. 



§ 171. IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

The imperative in Greek is used as in other languages, in 
addresses, entreaties, commands, &c. The pronouns (being 
the nominative) are omitted, except where emphasis or distinc- 
tion is required. In the use of this mood the following pecu- 
liarities of construction may be observed ; viz. 

1. The second person sometimes stands for the third ; as, 

&).la cpvhxTxe nag xig, but let each one watch. 
nelag xvg fflt, let some neighbour go. 

2. As in English, the plural is sometimes used for the sin- 
gular ; as, ngovelOsxe, 5 nal Ttargl, come, O my child, to thy fa- 
ther. 

3. In prohibitions with fitf, the present imperative is most 
commonly used. If the aorist is used, (m\ must be put with 
the subjunctive. 

4. The imperative after olud 1 otv, oloQ> o, oTod' &g, seems to 
be used elliptically, and to have arisen from a transposition of 
the imperative ; as, olcrd' wg noirjuov ; knoivest thou in what 
way thou must act ? (i. e. act, knoivest thou in what way ?) 
oloO' olv o dgaaov ; knoivest thou what to do? (i. e. do, knoiv- 
est thou what?)* 

5. Sometimes the imperative is used for the future ; as, tc 
olv ; xeiado) vofiog ; what then? shall a law exist? i. e. What 
then? do you say, let a law exist? On the other hand, the 
future is still more frequently used for the imperative ; as, yvd^ 
oeui \4Toetd7]v Ayauefjivova, (for yvwOi), recollect Agamemnon, 
Jltr ells' son. Especially is this the case with a negative in- 
terrogatively ; as, otixovv ^ eacrsvg ; will you not leave me 
alone ? i. e. leave me alone. 



$ 172. SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE MOODS. 

The subjunctive and optative moods represent an action, 
not as actually existing, but rather as dependent upon, and 

22 



254 SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE MOODS. §> 172 

connected with, the ideas and feelings of the speaker. The 
subjunctive represents this dependence as present; the opta- 
tive represents it as past, (§ 75. 2.) Hence the following 

ml rule : 
1. The subjunctive and optative in dependent propositions. 

Kile L1V. In dependent clauses, the subjunc- 
tive mood is used in connexion with the primary 
tenses; the optative with the secondary; (§77. 

Ohs. :].) as. 

>■(( Rfo», 1 am present that I may see. 
p\v lv* \'dot, t ui, I was present that I might see. 

On this general principle the whole construction of these 
moods depends, as may be illustrated by the following obser- 
vations : 

Obs. 1. These moods are used after conjunctions whose 
use is to introduce a subordinate or dependent clause, in which 
actual existence is not definitely expressed; as, 2W, ogooa, ona*s, 

ouc ; do you wish that you 
self may kavi areward? ,'<'./< iqid^'Ci ua^reqog&g hb vtycu, 
provoke me not thai yon may return, the safer. This sentence, 
which contain i ct address (oratio directa) of Agamem- 

non t« • v Jhrj es, his the subjunctive after &$ 9 in connexion with 
the }>: . When this is afterwards related as Kjxtst 

idirect address (oratio obliqua), the 
subjunctive is changed into the optative; thus, tim&vai IxiLtvs 

'"'n, HE < OMMANDED Mm to 

depart and not provoke him that he might return safe. 

In like manner when a person relates what was said by ano- 

. without quoting his language, as the reference must be 

ii;it is past, 1 -:1 with on or &g prefixed ; 

"<>(. <>'( \ 6ddg <i l not n6h,v i &c. ; he told mc 

that I he road !(d into the City, &,C 

When 8n has been alrea , it is often omitted 

needing clauses in the same construction. 

Obs. 2. When a past event is related in the present time, 

erb m the dependent clause may still be in the optative j 

and in like manner, after the historical tenses, the subjunctive 

. (I when the event, though past, yet continues in its effects 

and operation, to and through the present time. Thus, m the 

address of Minerva to Diomede, " I removed the mist from 



§ 172 SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE MOODS 255 

your eyes that you may distinguish (ocpya yivtiaxrig) a deity 
from a man in the field of battle." Here, however, there 
may be a change of reference, i. e. the subjunctive ywucrxrig 
may refer, not to the time of the removal, but to the time of 
the address, as if she had said, "I removed the mist from your 
eyes that you may from this time forward distinguish," &c. 
Such changes of reference are not uncommon in all Ian- 
guages. 

Obs. 3. It was noticed, § 75. Obs. 3. that the future indic- 
ative is used in a subjunctive sense. Accordingly it is often 
found in a dependent clause, especially after onwg, in the same 
construction as the subjunctive; as, "Cyrus deliberates (onag 
firiTzoie sxv sotou) that he may no longer be subject to his broth- 
er, but, if possible (fiao-dsuoei), may reign in his steadc 
JZytemeov — onog uo cp ale o rai a anlw/UEV, (subj.) %al onwg to. em. 
irfieia e$ouev, (fut.) We ought to consider how we may get 
away most safely, and obtain the necessary supplies, 

Obs. 4. After adverbs of time, when the precise point ot 
time is not determined but left indefinite, the subjunctive and 
optative are used These are ercr^v, snsid&v, orav, onoxav, refer- 
ring indefinitely to the present, and so followed by the subjunc- 
tive, artel, eneidri, ore, dnoie, refer indefinitely to the past, and 
are followed by the optative; as, "JVLenelaus entertained him 
when (from time to time) he came from Crete" onoxe KQrjTijdev 
ixono. Here orcoxe KgrirrjOsv Ixsto would mean, when he actu- 
ally came from Crete. The primary part of the sentence, then, 
may be considered as understood, as, when it happened, that he 
came from Crete. 

Obs. 5. When the relatives og and oaxvg refer to definite 
persons or things, and to what actually took place, they are 
followed by the indicative mood. But if the person or thing 
to which they refer be indefinite, and the whole proposition af 
firms of past time, then the verb is in the optative without up ; 
as, ovxiva utv Guai)»r[u xi/slr], whatever monarch he found ; 
Tcuvrag onp h'xvyoisv — xTeLrorieg, slaying all whomsoever they 
might meet. On the other hand, if the proposition affirms 
something of present or future time, the verb is in the sub- 
junctive with civ ; as, lv \ d' av t«j> cpvXibv nleiazoi (hen, &c. 
in whichsoever of the tribes there may be the greatest number, 
&c. ; bTtsode onov uv xtg rjyrjTat, follow where (it is possible 
that) any one may had the way. In such sentences the pri- 
mary part may be understood, such as "it is possible that," 
"it happened that," &c. 



256 subji wnivr. and optative moods. § 172. 

•J, The Subjunctive and Optative in Independent Propositions. 

Obs, 6. Both the subjunctive and optative are used without 
being preceded by another verb, and bo apparently in inde- 
pendent clauses. In all such instances, however, there is an 
ellipsis of the verb on which they depend. 

I. 'The subjunctive is thus used, 

1st. To command in the first person ; as, Vw/uev, let us go, 

i. e. it is necessary thai we go ; and so of others. 
2d. In fori) "aiding, with ur\ or its compounds in the aorist, 

not in the present; as, /utj uaoorig, swear not. 
3d. In deliberating with one's self; as, noT Tgdna/uut,, 

whither shall 1 turn ; eXnwiiev i) aiyw/Liev, shall we speak 

or be silent. 

II. The optative is thus used, 

1st. To express. a wish or prayer; as, tovto /u^ yevono, 
O that this might not be. In this case effle, el, <bg, 
>S go', are often used with the optative. 

Rem. A wish relating to what is past, or that cannot be 
realized, is expressed by the indicate. histori- 

cal tenses, with el yd^ i 6c, prefixed ; as, 

dvvaxbv fy 9 would that it icerc possible. — Or, by the 
2 aor. ind. of 6q>eiha (&q>ekoP 9 -eg, -e, §78. 8.) with the 
infinitive; as, pr\noT } ticptlov noitlr, would that I had 
never done it ! el yu^ fapeke QaveXv y Othat he had di 
2d. In connexion with a*/ to express doubt, conjecture, ban 
possibility ; and in volitions, to express, not a fixed 
' resolution, but only an inclination to a thing; 'as.rivzg 
d? elep vofieig, tJieij were perhaps (or, it is probable thai 
they were) shepherds; y)r(o; ii.v O&uouluijv, I woidd 
hem, 
3d. T<> ( x press a definite assertion with politeness or mo- 
de- / iv.< 'i <> u d ' u v r\ ? o i devpo, he has not come, 
/ will :: back; i. e. I lather think it was 
his purpose thai he would not come back. 
4th. Sometimes it is used for the imperative to convey a 
mmand or request in milder terms; as, x&ooig &v 
■ •I. you ww in. 
5th. It is sometimes used for the indicative to give an air 
of indeterminate tances of .an action 
which is determinate in itself; as, tw*> vetiv &g xuTudi- 



§ 172. CONSTRUCTION OF THE INFINITIVE. 257 

creiav, the ships -which they may (or might) have stink ; 
i. e. which they have sunk. 
6th. It is also used in a potential sense, to denote power or 
volition ; as, otix av dh ^sivsiag afodv ; could you not 
withstand him ? e6sli\o8iev civ ; ivoidd he be uniting ? 

III. The Subjunctive and Optative in Conditional Propositions. 

Obs. 7. The use of the indicative in conditional propositions 
has been noticed § 170. 4. The subjunctive and optative are 
also used in conditional propositions, as follows : 

1st. Uncertainty in the condition, with an actual result, is 
expressed by edv with the subjunctive ; as, edv n syw- 
(uev d(ocro{Li8v, if ice have any thing we will give it. The 
result in this case will be in the indicative future or the 
imperative. 
2d. A mere hypothetical supposition with a determinate re- 
sult, puts the condition in the optative with el, and the 
result in the indicative ; as, " if these things should 
seem (donohi) to be very aggravated crimes, none of 
them are chargeable on me." On the contrary, an ac- 
tual case supposed in the condition with a hypothet- 
ical result, would require the first in the indicative with 
el, and the last in the optative. 
3d. When the case is altogether hypothetical, the condition 
is expressed by the optative with el, and the result by 
the optative with &>; as, el' rog ravra itodxToi, /niyafi &v 
(bcpelrio'eie, if any one should do this he would great- 
ly assist me. 

Sometimes the subjunctive with tav or &v, instead of 
the optative, is put in the condition. 
Obs. So All conditional propositions in Greek may be turn- 
ed into the infinitive or participle with &v\ as, oXovxai avafia- 
A /eo6ai av, ovuuu/ovg ngocrlaSopreg, " they think they might 
retrieve their fortune in war by obtaining allies." 



CONSTRUCTION OF THE INFINITIVE. 

The infinitive mood expresses the meaning of the verb in a 
general and unlimited manner, without the distinctions of num- 
i ber or person. § 75. 4. In construction it maybe considered 
' under the four following divisions: viz. as a verbal noun; — 

22* 



THE INFINITIVE WITHOUT A SUBJECT. § 173, 174. 

without a subject, as the subject of a verb, or the object of a verb 
or adjective; — with a subject; — absolutely alter certain particles. 

73. I. THE INFINITIVE AS A VERBAL NOUN. 

The infinitive, with an article, is used as a verbal noun, in all 

flw ( p1 &e vocative; and, as such, is subject to the same 

rules of construction as the noun, being- used in the nominative as 

' of a verb, and governed, in the oblique cases, by verbs 

or prepositions. 

06*. 1. When the infinitive with or without a clause is used 
a< the nominative to a verb, or the accusative governed by it, 
it is frequently without the article; very rarely so after a pre- 
position; as, rcuenv i)uZv Kuidai'eZv bcpellBiai, dying is due to 
all of us. 

Obs. 2. Not only the simple infinitive, but the infinitive 
with the whole clause to which it belongs, may often be regard- 
a substantive, and stand in almost every variety of con- 
struction in which a substantive can be placed; as, Nom. to 
7<)v; ujOoiorrnv; u.uuot('xvfiv ovdev Oavaaarov (^crri), that men 
should err is nothing wonderful ; Gen. into tov ptydiva &no- 
dfijcrx&w, tliat no one might perish; Dat. Iva umcn&cn tw i/uk 
imuriadai tfrro daiuovQv, that they may disbelieve my having 
been honoured by the gods; Ace. sxqlvu to /u^ n&hv ekdeiv, 1 
determined not to come again. 

Obs. 3. With the article alone the infinitive is generally 
equivalent to the Latin Gerund; as, svexa tou l&yew^ causa di- 
cendi ; ir rc3 liyeiv, dicendo; rtQbg to ltysu>, ad dicendum. 

Obs. 4. Without the article it has often the force of the 
Latin Supine; as, fyde Jj/Ttjaa^ venit quozsitum i\8v clxovt-iv^ 
Snare audita; uXo'/ktio; fopfltj^cu, turpissimus visit. 



174 II. THE INFINITIVE WITHOUT A SUBJECT. 
Rule LV. One verb, being the subject of 
another, is put in the infinitive; as, 

to fhj ii safer for them. 

Rule LV1. One verb governs another as its 
object, in the infinitive ; as, 

iyiiv, he began to say. 

RbH< Both t!. the infinitive with a subject, § 175 



§ 174. THE INFINITIVE WITHOUT A SUBJECT. 259 

Rule LVII. The infinitive mood is governed 
by adjectives denoting fitness, ability, capacity, 
and the contrary ; as, 

deivdg leyeiv, 'powerful in speaking* 

ft£iog Oavp&aou, toorthy to be admired. 

Note. It is also used after substantives ; as, i^ovaiav yiveaOai, power to be" 
come. 

Obs. 1. The infinitive under these rules is in the same 
clause with, and expresses the cause, end, or object, of the ac- 
tion, state, or quality expressed by the verb or adjective that 
governs it. The verbs that govern the infinitive directly in 
this way are such as denote desire, ability, intention, endeav- 
our, and the like ; as, idilst ygdopscv, he wishes to write ; deo- 
fjtai aov eldsiv, I beg of you to come. 

Obs. 2. The infinitive is sometimes placed after verbs to 
express the design or consequence of that which they affirm. 
Thus used it is governed not by the verb but by some such 
word as coots understood ; as, ey&v ode 7t(kvra naQacrxeTv, i. e. 
coots Ttavxa naoaoyziv, I am here (so as) to furnish all things ; 
r^ouev (coots) iiavdaveiv, we have come (in order) to learn. 

Obs. 3 A verb denoting an incidental object not directly in 
view, is put in the infinitive with coots after a verb or adjec- 
tive : as, cpilonuoxaTog t\v coots ti6lvtol -brtof-ieivav, he was very 
ambitious, so as to endure all things, &c. This construction 
takes place especially after such words as roooviog, Towvxog^ 
outgo;, and the like. 

Obs. 4. The infinitive is sometimes put after verbs and ad- 
jectives which indicate some state or quality, in order to ex- 
press the respect in which that state or quality obtains, and 
would be expressed in Latin by the supine, or gerund in -do, 
and in English by the substantive ; as, 

fi>g IdsXv bfputpsTo, as it appeared to the sight. 

Oeleiv dLviuoiutv ouolot, like the winds in running, 
ovde noov(faiv8T IdeoOac, nor did he appear to the sight. 

Obs. 5. The infinitive active is used very frequently in 
Greek in the sense of the latter supine, or infinitive passive in 
Latin ; as, 

tW/o ()ao)v (pvl&ioBw, a man is more easy to be guarded 

against, 
oadta tzolbIv, things easy to be done. 



THE INFINITIVE WITH A SUBJECT. § 175. 

III. THE INFINITIVE WITH A SUBJECT 

1. A subordinate or dependent clause, containing a yerb and 

ibject, is connected with the leading or primary dause, in 

First, by a conjunctive particle, such ns St*, &g, 

and the like ; as, Xiyovoi 8ti 6 rj*e 9 tkev say thai 

our companion is dead. In this case the verb is in a finite 

mood and its subject in the nominative. Second, without a 

conjunction; as, Xiyovoi tbv ixatoov zeOvdvcu,, they say thai our 

I is <lt <t(l. In this case the verb is in the infinitive 

L and its subject usually in the accusative. 

Sometimes both modes of expression are united in the 
same sentence ; as, 8crw loyog g> c JT i ^ | ?/ g exo (Jt IX^ex o ig i^v 

I 7i hoop tol di flip a v s f.io v ^TQVfiovirjv -6 n o X a 6 s I v . 

times a sentence begins with the one form and ends with 
the other ; as, liyovou d y ?/,««£, coc axipdvpop 6lov ^cbuev, they 
say that ire live a life free from danger ; as if it had been in- 
tended to say, Xiyovov <5' ^ t uag dxlvdvpov 6iov Xjf{v ; this is called 
anacolouthon, § 175. Rem. 

The construction of the subordinate clause connected by 
the first of the above methods, is subject to the rules § 138, 
139. ; connected by the last, it comes under the rules that fol 
low: 



Rule LVIII. The infinitive mood in a depen 
dent clause has its subject in the accusative; as, 

Tovg Oeovg tvxvtu eld&voa, he said that the gods know 
rev, all things. 

Exc. When the subject of the infinitive is the 
same with the subject of the preceding verb, it 
is put by attraction in the same case ; as, 

/ UTOaxTjybg, he said that he was a general. 

onstruction til*' subject of the infinitive is gene- 
rally omitt ! when emphasis is required; as, %?/ afobg 
lvovg % hf said that neval, that 
they "" v - This construction has been freqi 

lv imitated in Latin; thus, Sensu \edio8 (hdapsus in hosted 
Vn ri( li Jo h IIor. 

Obs. 1. In a few instructions vary both from the 



§ 175. THE INFINITIVE WITH A SUBJECT. 261 

rule and the exception. Occasionally the subject of the in- 
finitive is in the nominative when it signifies a different thing 
from the subject of the preceding verb, and in the accusative 
when it signifies the same. 

Obs. 2. If the subject of the infinitive be the same with 
the object of the preceding verb, it may either be in the accu- 
sative according to the rule, or stand before the infinitive, in 
the case governed by the preceding verb ; thus. 



y.slevo) oov tovto ttoisTp, or 
v.elsvoj oe tovto noielv. 



> / command you to do this. 



In either case tnere is an ellipsis ; — in the first form, of oe, 
the immediate subject of the infinitive ; and in the second, of 
aoi, the remote object of the preceding verb. Both these 
modes of construction are common, and sometimes they are 
intermixed in the same sentence ; thus, Lysias, diouau -6imv 
T« dlxaia ijjricplvaodai, evdvfiov^isvovg ort, k, t, X, I beg OF 
you to determine, justly considering that, &c. Here ti/u&v 
stands before the infinitive governed in the genitive by dioftai, 
and yet trdvuovuevovg follows in the accusative, evidently 
agreeing with i\uag the subject of the infinitive understood. 
It might have been with equal propriety put in the genitive. 

Rem. Constructions of this kind in which the end of a 
sentence does not grammatically correspond with the begin- 
ning, are called Anacoloutha, For other examples of this see 
§ 148. Rem. 1., § 175. 2. The most common form of these 
appears to be when the speaker commences a period in the 
manner required by the preceding discourse, but afterwards, 
especially after a parenthetic clause, passes over into another 
construction. The Anacolouthon, however, is never adopted 
by Greek writers unless something is thereby gained in con- 
ciseness, perspicuity, smoothness, or emphasis. 

Obs. 3. When used in the passive voice, the subject of the 
infinitive is changed into the subject of the preceding verb, 
or it remains unchanged in the accusative, the passive verb 
being used impersonally; as, 

H'/ZTUL KvQOg ) , a rr P, 

AcySTUL Kvoov } ' J 

Cyrus is said to have been ) , 7 v ~ , 

r : } . . 7 ., , r , > the son of Cambyses. 

It is said that Cyrus was } J J 

Obs. 4. The same observation is true of the verb doxsT , 
thus, doxel (xuto; elvuL, he seems to be; or doxel v&thv ?ivou, it 



262 THE INFINITIVE ABSOLUTE. § 17G. 

seems thai he is. The following sentence unites the two, xai 

' / >, i<>/< ^ i ollovg red. 

(! 11 w 18 BAID TIMT THE RATTLE IMS ()!)- 

</ in v r mani died. In like manner the adjectives 
dlxm . &c. with the verb eiul^ arc used for 

the neuter gender with dari»aa impersonate ; thus, dlumtig elfu 
■>. &c« it is just that /, 6^c. ; #tjX6g iaxw 9 for ^jM* 
1 > — it is manifest that he — . § 177. Obs. 3. 
Obs, 5. The case after the infinitive of substantive or neu- 
ter verbs, or passive v'erbs of naming, must be the same with 
the case before it, if the words refer to the same thing ; as, 
Nom. < ; '<r>, (<(vn)~) etpai uxQfxjTjybg^ lie said that he was a gene- 
ral; Gen. Kareyv(tix6TMv Jjtfjy {iTjxirt xqeiv a6v wv el pom, having 
Lamed that they are no longer superior; Dat. eq? fifilv tail 
1 elvai, it depends upon ourselves to be rea- 
BLE. See § 139. III. And this observation holds good 
whether the word before the infinitive be its proper subject, or 
(that being omitted, see num. 3.) the subject or the object of the 
preceding verb. 

Obs. 6. Whatever case is required before the infinitive by 
the preceding rules, it continues the same though preceded by 
to; or Sore, or a preposition, because the preposition affects not 
the subject of the infinitive, but belongs to the infinitive itself 
or to the whole clause; thus, otidelg iqlixouiog tcnuimxQ tiiuv, 
&<Jit aoaS&g in\ dovvai 8{xrjv % Let no one be so 

' omong you that breaking the lairs he can go unpunish- 
ed] fni&Qtavov ') 1 u 1 <> ;i i { ercKfol eTpui, they erred because 

THEY WERE NOT WISE. 



§ 176. IV. THE INFINITIVE ABSOLUTE. 

Rule LIX. The infinitive is often put abso- 
lutely with the particles togA'dare, npiv, ^z9 L -> f^Zp^ 
before h : as, 

mov % when the man saw. 

na< • ■. before the child died. 

<jai t to compare hnall with great. 

Obs. 1. -'-- with the infinitive is frequently used to limit a 
osition i.i . / : el /»-//- 

tinctly ; (')c yi. fioi doxetv, as it 



§ 177, OF THE PARTICIPLE. 263 

seems to me. But tig is frequently omitted ; hence such ex- 
pressions as, ov txoIIQ Xoyco elnelv, in few words ; /ulxqov delv, 
little is wanting, almost ; nollov delv, much is wanting, 

Obs. 2. The infinitive is often used for the imperative 
mood, ooa, Skene, oxoneX, &c. being understood; as, /aloe iv 
/listu /aigovicov, xlale iv /usxa xXaiovTwv, rejoice with them that 
do rejoice, and weep with them that weep. Sometimes, also, 
for the optative, dog, delw, or evxo<.iai. being understood ; as, 
d) Zev exy ev e ad at fioi * Adrjvalovg Tiaaodai, O Jupiter, MAY IT 
be granted to me to punish the Athenians. 

Obs. 3. The infinitive elvai is sometimes absolute and re- 
dundant, both with and without the article; viz. 

l?t. After adjectives, adverbs, and prepositions ; thus, ex&v 
elvai for exihv, iviWng ; as, ex&v av elvai tovto noit\-> 
aaiui, I woidd ivillingly do this. So the phrases to 
av/nnav elvai, generally ; oe f elvai, with respect to you; 
to /usv Ti\ueqop elvai, to-day at least; xaxdc tovto elvai, 
with respect to this ; to vvv elvai, now ; to en ixelvovq 
elvai, as far as depends on them. 

2d. After verbs of calling, choosing, making, &c. ; as, ao- 
(piaxriv, ovoaa^ovot ye tov dvdga elvai, they call the mail 
a philosopher ; ol de avfi{ua%6v /niv elXovTO elvai, they 
chose him as an ally. 



§ 177. OF THE PARTICIPLE. § 79. 

Rule LX. Participles like adjectives agree 
with their substantives in gender, number, and 
case. 



Rule LXI. Participles govern the case of 
their own verbs ; as, 

ol nolepioi to Xoylov eiddxeg, the enemies knowing the 

oracle. 
tovtojv tfiov deoixe'vov, T being in want of these 

things. 
The Greek language having a participle in every tense of 
every voice, uses it much more extensively than the Latin. 
The principal purposes for which it is employed are the fol- 
bwing r 



264 OP THE PARTICIPLE. § 177. 

1. A participle is joined with another verb agreeing with its 
subject in orderj 

1st. Simply to conned an accompanying with the main 
ion in the same subject. 'Thus used, the participle 
and verb are to be rendered as two verbs with a con- 
junction; as, nctQ&Wm* Tig deiS&TM, let any one come 
•icard and shew. 

2d. To combine the accompanying with the main action as 
the cause, manner, or means of accomplishing it ; in 
which use it is equivalent to the ablative gerund in 
Latin. Cause ; as, tC non\octg xareyrwdrj duvenov ; 
for having done what (quid faciendo) was lie con- 
demned to die ? Means ; -<\s, stiegy et&v h^tovq txrrj- 
a&fUT]*, I gained them by kindness, (benefaciendo) ; 
Xrji £ 6u e voi t&air, they live, BY plunder (populando). 
Manner ; as, cpevyuv exysuyev, he escapes by flight 
(fugiendo) ; ToX(ni\aag 8lor[kd8^ he went in boldly 
(audendo). This construction is found also in Latin 
writers ; thus, Hoc faciens vivam melius ; Hor. by 
doing this I shall live better ; as if, hoc faciendo , &c. 

Note. The participle thus used agrees with the agent in any case ; e. g. 
in the dative; as, a roXg dvQ pcoiro i j edcoxav ol Oeol /iaOovcri SiaKpiv£iv t 
Which the gods have put it in the power of men to find out by study ; the ac- 
CUBath <:<7tiv dpidjifjvavras ») [xerpfiaaprag n arfiaavTas eiduai, which we 

may know by counting, by measuring, or by weighing. 

3d. To limit a general expression by intimating the action 

in respect of which the assertion is made ; as, tidixelTS 

rtoltuov (xQ/ovTe g, ye do ivrong in beginning the 

war, 

Ohs. 1. Iii this way it is used with verbs that signify any 

tion of the mind to show the cause of the emotion; as, 

ytofuxi u; v n 8 I (j i dot v, I am rejoiced at seeing you ; ovdtTtois 

i r (j a v t iy you will never repent of hav- 

BSS. 

* 

2. It is used for the purpose of further describing a person 
ing mentioned in and may be rendered by 

cting with a statement 

r condition, expressed in En- 

/. while after thai ; — because, since, 

-if. although, &C. : — the relation intended, and of course 

the proper lendering of the participle, will generally have to 

lined from the nature of the sentence itself, or from 



§ 177. OP THE PARTICIPLE. 265 

the connexion in which it stands; thus, sTteaxsmofuvv xbv kiai. 
gov roaovvTa, may signify according to the context; 1 visit- 
ed my comrade who was sick ; or when, or because, he ivas 
sick; dirdoa t usv i arjQivxa ra/ioog cpiuSTcu,, trees, though 
lopped, (which have been lopped, after they have 
been lopped, when lopped) of their branches quickly grow 
again. 

Obs. 2. When the article precedes the participle referring 
to a word already expressed or easy to be supplied, they may 
be rendered by the relative and the indicative ; as, 6 eg/ofievog, 
he that cometh, § 134. 8. 

Note. The participle, with the article before it, is frequently equivalent to 
a noun designating the doer of the action expressed by the ve-.b ; as, ol 
ypaipapevoi HoiKpdrnv, the accusers of Socrates. There is, however, this dif- 
ference ; the participle expresses the doer in a state of action, the substan- 
tive does not ; thus, 6 Sov\og is a man in the condition of a slave ; 5 6ov\evo)v 
is one, at the time referred to, performing the part of a slave, 

The Participle as the Infinitive. 

3. The participle in Greek is often used as the infinitive, 
^nd has for its subject, according to the sense, either the subject 
or the object of the preceding verb, with which it always agrees 
in gender, number, and case. Hence the following varieties. 
The participle takes as its subject and agrees : — 

1st. With the subject of the preceding verb either in the 

nominative or accusative. Nom. as, otf navoonai yg&cpcov, 

I to ill not cease to write ; olda Ovr^g lov, I know that 1 

am a mortal. Ace. VLS^iyovaiv crvibv /ue/Lip^adao novi\aav. 

ra, they say thai he remembers having done it, or, that 

he did it. 

2d. With the immediate object of the preceding verb in 

the accusative ; as, aaqi&g xaiifxadov (pdgjuaxa atirov 

■biMv tyztavzu, I plainly perceived that he had infused 

poison for you. 

3d. With the remote object in the genitive or dative. Gen. 

as, r { od6urv u-uiwv olouivtav slvai voym&TOv, I perceived 

that they fancied themselves to be very ivise; Dat. 

uijdtTTOie /lists uskrj at fiot oiyr^o-avji, I never repented of 

having been silent, or, that I was silent. 

4th. When the verb is followed by a reflexive pronoun, the 

participle may agree either with the pronoun or the 

nominative to the verb ; as, crvvoida b/uuvto) d/uagravwv 

or a^ayidtvovT i, I am conscious that lam doing iDr on g ; 

23 



266 OF THE PARTICIPLE. § 177 

laviiii I Kaxodgyos lor, or, xuxovoyov ovia, 

nobody confesses that he himself is wicked, 

ObSi .*>. The verba after which the participle is thus used, are 
1st Verba of sense; as, to see, hear, &c. 2. Verba denoting 
any act or feeling of the mind; as, to know, perceive, discern, 
consider, observe, experience, shew, recoiled. 3. Verbs signi- 
fying to overlook, to permit, to happen, to persevere, bear, en- 
<lnr<. to he phased or contented with, io cease, and to came to 

kfao with adjectives signifying clearness, as, difiog el avxo- 
i . it is dvor that you are a Sycophant, Sometimes on 
With the indicative is used ; as, evdrjlo; Ihv bit ^(77i(£££to, by its 
being manifest that he loved. § 175. Obs. 4. 

Obs. 4 Instead of the participle with the above mentioned 
\f rbsthe infinitive is sometimes used; but in that case, the idea 
expressed is usually different; e. g., 1. ala/vrouai noi7\oag, 1 
am ashamed to have done it ; alayyvoiiai noii\oai, lam ashamed 
to do it, and therefore will not. 2. 6 /etu.&v t\o£uto yevo/uevog, 
the winter was come on, had actually commenced; o xeiuwv 
:<> ytypsodat, the winter was beginning to come on, but had 
not vet arrived. 3. r\xovoa xbv sdrjuoaOevn liyorTu, I heard 
/)< mosthenes speak ; \xovoa ibv dt]/uoodit'i] liyeiv^ I heard, 
(ft e. I am told,) that Demosthenes says. 4. icpalveio xlaiuv, 
he evidently wept; .'Vr alvexo xlalsiv, he seemed to weep. 5. With 
to declare, to announce, the participle represents the thing 
announced as a fact, the infinitive, as matter of report, but not 
ted as a fact. With many verbs, however, it is indiffer- 
ent which construction is used ; as, Zvucpogdv ton tcxvtu noa/- 
u, or Ticvra Zroffnou ton nguydivxa, it is unfortunate that 
tins' things were done. 

Obs. 5. After verbs of motion the future participle is used to 

point out the design or oJ)ject of the motion expressed by the 

and is rendered by the English phrase lt in order to;" 

n i <) 4 £ ou v &Qfi7j[tcu, I have hastened forward in order 

, 1 W II 1 

Iii this construction 6$ is often interposed before the parti- 

xoh a,' nnnr-Q, they prepared to 
make war. 

nt participle is used in this way; as, 

me to carry. The future participle 

r <//<.</'/ fa only a circumlocution for the future tense; as, 

/. fur <(')<ah), I will Speak} ;'fr/nu(uo\nnf)uvov^ievog 
I shall (I)', or, / am about to < 



^ 177. OF THE PARTICIPLE. 267 

4. Joined with luvdavti, cpQavo), Tvyxavw, diccrsXtoo, &c. the 
participle is used to express the main action or state, and ren- 
dered in the indicative, while the verb with which it is joined, 
expressing a subordinate circumstance, is often rendered as an 
adverb; thus, eladsr tiTTEXQpvycbv, he escaped unperceived; ibv 
cpov&a lavdavei Ooaxuv, he unconsciously feeds his murderer ; 
eqpOtjv acpefobr, I took it away just before ; 8Tv%ev ani&v, he hap* 
pened to be going away ; stv%ov itaQovjsg, they were accident- 
ally present ; duxTsXeT tt(xqo)p, he is continually present. 

Note. The participle uv is wanting with adjectives and sometimes with- 
out them ; as, rvyyavzi Ka\r\ (sc. ovaa,) she happens to be beautiful. With 
a negative, <p6ava) may be rendered scarcely, no sooner ; as, ovk Z<pQrioav t:vQ6~ 
nevoi, they no sooner heard. Sometimes it is followed by the infinitive in- 
stead of the participle; as, novripdg av (pOdcreu rsXevrfiaai -rrplv, k. t. A., a wretch' 
ed man would sooner die than, &c. 

06s. 6. In the same sense these verbs stand sometimes 
in the participle with other finite verbs ; as, and rsl/Bog ZXto 
luO(bv, he sprung unobserved from the wail ; \v7tsq Tvy%avwv 
t5n£a/o'tf?7*', which I happened to promise. 

5. A participle with the verbs sl/ul, ylvo/uai,, {tnag/oj. e%oj, and 
r|*co, is often used as a circumlocution for the verb to which it 
belongs, aud these verbs take the place of auxiliaries ; thus, 
TtgoSeSjjxoTeg ijcrav for ngoeSeSrixeioav, they had gone forward; 
ytyuxg tysig for eyii/uag, you have married; Oav/btdaag e%a for 
TsdavfAaxa, I have admired, &c. 

06s. 7. Instead of a simple verb signifying " to go away," 
the verb oX%ouai is frequently joined with a participle ; the for- 
mer to express the idea of departure, the latter to connect with 
it the idea of the manner, both of which may generally be ren- 
dered by a simple verb; thus, co^st drtonrduevog, he departed 
flying, i. e. he flew away; $/£to cpevywv, he departed fleeing, 
he escaped ; &yovxo unodsovxeg, they ran away ; oY'/sjai Qavthv, 
he is dead. Horner uses Salvo) in the same manner. 

6. The participle in definitions of time is often joined wittt 
the adverbs uvxlxu, stidug fieia^v, upa, the last with the dative; 
as, &; avxl'/.a yevouevog, as soon as he was bom ; fxexa^v dgvo- 
<7GU', during the digging ; afxa to t\qi evdvg dg/ouevco, on the 
first commencement of spring, 

7. The participles of some verbs when joined with other 
verbs appeared to be used in an adverbial sense, or at least to 
denote a circumstance which in our language is better express- 
ed by an adverb; as, uo/ouevog elJtor, I said in the beginning , 



268 THE CASE ABSOLUTE. § 178. 

. especially; tshsvrwj lasth Sict'kin&v yq6vov y 
tome tim i and tfycw with vef. « (o give, to place, 

and the like, are redundant; as, eplovv tints, he gore; — with 
verba of motion ipiowi expresses zealj (juiciness, &c. with their 
eases they are equivalent to the Latin at t, with. A participle 
joined to its own verb, or to one of s : /rilar signification, ap- 
pears to be redundant ; as, uani- torre* they went; ^cprj teyuv, 

he said ; he says. 

Gt/=* For the dative of the partic Ac with a personal pro- 
noun alter the verb IcjtI, sec § 148 Obs 3. 



§ 17S. THE CASE ABSOLUTE. 

Rule LXII. A substantive with a participle 
whose case depends on no other word, is put in 
the genitive absolute ; as, 

Gfov diddi'iog, otidhv la/vei cpddvog, when GOD gives, envy 
avails nothing, 

Rem. The genitive is said to be absolute in this construction, because it is 
neither governed by, nor is dependent on, any word expressed or understood, 
in the Bentence with which it is connected, and might be separated from 
it without affecting its construction. Yet, strictly speaking, it is not really 
' m 3ucb a sense as to be without government, or that there is no 
more reason for its being in the genitive than in any other case ; for the ab- 
solute clause will generally be found to express a circumstance of time, 
and so may come under § 160. Obs. 2 ; as, 

Kvpov 8aai\cvovTo$, in the reign of Cyrus, (sc. im.) 

Ocayvr]<i cajgtrai Oecof OeXdvruv, Theagncs is safe from THE GODS WIL- 
LING IT. 

Obs. 1. The participles of elfit, ylroiuu, and some others, arc 
frequently omitted ; as, $ftov fidvrjg, sc. ouV//;, I being alone. 

Ohs. 2. The infinitive mood or part of a sentence is used 
absolutely with the participle as if it were a noun; as, tivq 
oloyrjde'vTog, that bulk breathe fire, being 
a story , 

Obs. :;. The DATIVI ABSOLUTE is used to express the fixed 

L6 ■. Obs. I.); ' Sk t(5 inavToj, after the 

had elapsed ; and also when the subject of the participle 



§ 179. CONSTRUCTION OF CONJUNCTIONS. 269 

may be considered as that in reference to ivhich the aciion of 
the verb takes place. 

Obs. 4. The nominative and accusative are sometimes 
used absolutely. These instances, however, probably arise from 
an omission of some words, which, being supplied, complete 
the construction ; as, uvolt, avreg tov o6/uaTog nogovg, n6Xvv yl- 
veTav to tivq, when they have opened the pores of the body, there 
is again fire ; i. e. <bg avoltavjeg qoi, &c. ; Tavra yevo/Lieva, 
these things being done ; i. e. /hbtcc tocvtcc, &c. 

Obs. 5. The participles of impersonal verbs, and other verbs 
used impersonally, are put absolutely in the nominative or ac- 
cusative neuter ; as, sBov, it being permitted ; deov, it being 
necessary; doxovv, since it seems proper*, thus, dia it {i&veig, 
b£oi> uTxievai, ivhy dost thou remain, it being in thy power 
to depart ? 

Obs. 6. The construction with the participle is often pre- 
ceded by the particles &s ©ore, cas, ola, dr\, ofov, when a reason 
of something done by another is expressed ; as, louhnu <bg 
ndviag eldoiag, or tt&vtcov eWotcdv, he held his peace because 

ALL KNEW. 



§ 179. CONSTRUCTION OF CONJUNCTIONS. 

Conjunctions serve to connect words and sentences toge- 
ther ; this connexion is of two kinds : 

I. Of the parts of a sentence which are complete of them- 
selves and independent of each other. These are connected 
by conjunctions, simply connective or disjunctive, § 125. 1.2; 
and the parts thus connected have a similar construction ; 
hence 

Rule LXIII. Conjunctions couple the same 
moods and tenses of verbs, and cases of nouns 
and pronouns; as, 

i\ldov xul effiov, they came and saw. 

jluu to*> Ttaxioa xai tt\v [ZTjiiga, honour thy father and 

thy mother. 

Obs. 1. To this :ule there are many exceptions as it re- 
spects the tenses of verbs ; see an example § 76. Obs. 3. 

II. But the parts of a compound sentence are often various- 

23* 



170 CONSTRUCTION OF CONJUNCTIONS. § 179 

\y reiated, and haw a certain dependence upon each other, the 
Datlire of which is indicated by the conjunction employed and 

the mm>d of the verb with which it is joined. The general 
principles of this connexion are expressed in the following 
rules 



Role L XIV. Conjunctions which do not im- 
ply doubt or contingency, are for the most part 
joined with the indicative mood (§ 170.); as, 

joot/.fyey si u i) in I a- he would not have joretoldit 

T 8 V a 8 V uXrflsvOBVV^ UNLESS HE HAD BELIEVED 

it tvoidd prove true. 



Rule LXV. Conjunctions which imply doubt 
or contingency, or which do not regard a thing 
as actually existing, are for the most part joined 
with the subjunctive and optative moods (§ 172.) ; 
as, 

el' Tig aloeolv fioi dot?], if any one should *give me the 

choice. 

Obs. 2. As the meaning of a conjunction varies indifferent 
connexions, the same conjunction is often found with different 
moods. On this subject no very definite or satisfactory rules 
can be given. 

For further remarks on conjunctive and adverbial parties 
see § 125. 



§ 180, 181. prosody. 271 

PART IV. 



PROSODY. 

Prosody, in its common acceptation, treats of the quantity 
of syllables in the construction of verses. In the ancient 
grammarians ngoaadla applies to accents. 

§ ISO. QUANTITY OF VOWELS. 

1. The vowels s, o, are naturally short; as, leyo^iev. 

2. t] 9 o, are naturally long ; as, Atjtqo. 

3. a, t, v, are doubtful ; as, afivraj. 

4. Diphthongs and contracted syllables are long ; as, Inei, 
tyXeg, contr. ocpTg. 



§ 181. POSITION. 

SPECIAL RULES. 

Rule I. A short or doubtful vowel, before two consonauts 
or a double letter, is almost always long ; as, 

nolXag, ngo'taipsv, tors Zevg. 

This rule holds good in Epic poetry, except in proper names and in words 
which could not he used in any other situation in the verse. In dramatic 
writers observe the following exceptions : 

Exc. A short or doubtful vowel before a mute and a liq lid 
is common ; as, naigoxlog, or Uaxgoxlog. 

Obs. 1. A short vowel before a mute and liquid is generally short. But 
before a middle mute (6, y, 6,) followed by p in tragedy, is mostly long; and 
followed by X, p, i>, is almost always long, both in tragedy and comedy. 

06s. 2. A short vowel before two liquids is always long, and sometimes 
before a single liquid, which in this case should be pronounced as if doulle ; 
thus, l\aSe ) pronounced e\\a6e. 

Note 1. A short vowel in the end of a word before p in the beginning of 
the word following, is long in the dramatic poets; ijxl piirov. 

Note 2. "We sometimes find a short syllable before two consonants (both 
mutes), but this is rare and should not be imitated. 

* In the Prosody the accents are omitted, as they often interfere with the 
mark for the quantity. 



272 prosody. § 182, 183. 

$ 182. II. ONE VOWEL BEFORE ANOTHER, 

Ruli: II. V vowel before another vowel is short, unless 
lengthened by poetic license; as, TwXvfcxog. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

1 . a is long in the penult of nouns in -ao)i>, -aovog ; d3, Ma^Acoy, Ma^aovoj. 

And sometimes when the genitive ends iii tovog ; as, TloaeiSaaiv, 
Yloffeu'aoivog. 

in feminine proper names in -aig; thus, Bfii'j. 

2. i is long Ul the penult of nouns in -taw, -iovog, and sometimes -tuvog ; as, 

£2|cian', 12pjoj/oj or i2j0io)i/os ; except x^ 0}Vm 

in the penult of verbs in -to> ; as, riw: but the Attic tragic 

writers have -Tto. 

3. i is common in the penult of nouns in -ia and -in ; as, tcakTa and KoXta, 

4. v is common in the penult of verbs in -vo ; as, la^Sco or Kr^fcw. 

Rule III. Long vowels and diphthongs are mostly short at 
the end of words when the next word begins with a vowel; as, 

y A$(D elXwp o de \ xev xe^oUcoasrat I ov x£V VxIw/zaT. 

Obs. 1. A vowel in the end of a word, before a word beginning with a 
vowel, does not suffer elision, as in Latin, unless an apostrophe is substi- 
tuted, § 5. 4. 

Obs. 2. Two vowels, forming two syllables, frequently in poetry coalesce 
into one; as, gpwfy, Ih d. 15, where cm form a short syllable. This fre- 
quently takes place though the vowels be in different words ; as, tTovk akts, 
II. i. 349. § 1S9. 2. 



§ 183. III. THE DOUBTFUL VOWELS IN FIRST 
AND MIDDLE SYLLABLES. 

Rule IV. A doubtful vowel before a simple consonant is 

short : BS xofxog. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

1. a is Ion ; as, rcdoS'i/iow, dyavoip, fivadtf . 

in nomeralfl is ~o9iot \ as, SiOKoatog. 

in derivatlvef from v< rba in -aa> pure and -paw; thus, dv rog 

from di'iaft) ] u ; Karap&roi from Karapdnfiai' dta- 

mg and r > n <■' from $*iofMi' t ntptUrtfioi from irtpdoi ; 7rpd<ri f /rorr 

're- -^aw. 



§ 184. prosody. 273 

2. i is long in the penult of nouns in -ivv, -ityi, -itw, -ins ; thus, frvri, A^- 

poSTTTj, tto\Ttt]5 , ttq\Ttis. 
in the penult of verbs in -i6a), -ivcj ; thus, rplSco, 7t7j/co ; so ai- 

SO KivecOj fovea), &C. 

3. v is long in verbals in -v[xa, 'V(xog, -vrrip, -vtos, -vrwp ; as, Xv/xa, %5/xoj, 

pvrayp. 

in pronouns ; as, 'v^sis. 

in the penult of verbs in -wco, -vpa, -v%&>, -v/u; as, 7tXvvcj. 

atU.oo), tfpC^o), ^Ufitj gsvyvv/xi* 
in adverbs in -vSov ; as, SorpvSov. 



§ 1S4. IV. THE DOUBTFUL VOWELS IN FINAL 
SYLLABLES. 

Rule V. a, v, v, in the end of a word are short; as, (iovg&, 
uelX, ylvxv. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

1. A in the end of a word is long, viz. 

— In nouns in -ea, -Ja, -da ; as, Osa, ArjSa, Mapda ; exc. aKavddi. 

— In the dual number ; as, 7ipo<pr]Ta, [xovaa. 

— In polysyllables in -aia ; as, EcXiji/aia: 

in -eia, derived from verbs in svo) ; as, $ov\eta, 6aat- 

\eia : from SovXeva), SatnXsvto. But SaaiXeLa 4 , a queen, has the final 
a short. 

— In -ia ; as, Ka\ia, except verbals in -rpi a ; as, xpaXrpia'j and Sid, /act, 

TOTVld. 

In the vocative of nouns in -as of the 1st declension ; as, Aipeia from 
Aiveias. 

— In feminines from adjectives in -os ; as 5/-toi5, rj/^rspa. 

— In nouns in -pa not preceded by a diphthong ; as, nfispa, %*7pa. Ex- 

cept dyKVpa, yrfvptt, 'KspKvpa, o\vpoi, GKGkoTrevdpoi) atyvpa, ravaypd, and 
compounds of /xcrpo) ; as, yeco/^rptf. 

— In poetic vocatives ; as, LTaXXa for IlaXXaj. 

2. i final is long in the names of letters ; as, 7rT. 

3. v final is long in the names of letters ; as, p.1, vQ. 

in verbs in -vfxi ; as, tyij, 

in /jtera^ and ypv. 

Rule VI. A doubtful vowel in the final syllable, followed 
by a simple consonant, is short; as, /uelav, Xa/unoig. 

EXCEPTIONS. 
1. -av is long in masculines ; as, Tirav ; and -ndtv when not in composition. 



: 74 prosody. § 185. 

In atvu-aiivcs when their nominatives are long; as, 'Aiveiav 

from 'An 

in adverbs ; a<, dyto. 

in yap it is either long or snort. 
long m nounfl of the first, declension ; as, Aivcias, povo-flj. 

— in words haying -avrog in the genitive ; as, rvxpus, rvxpavTo*,. 

also in >';/<a?, fyaj, *p&s. 

4. -iv is long in nouns in -iv which have -ivog in the genitive ; as, prjyfnv t 

fay pivot. 

in nouns which have two terminations in the nominative; 



aBj (XktTv or aKTig. 

also in fytly, tytv. 

b. -is is long in monosyllables ; as, At?; but the indefinite rts is common. 
in nouns which have two terminations in the nominative ; as, 

clktTs, clktTv. 

in feminine dissyllables in -is, -iSos, or -iOos ; as, wr^xis, kvtj- 

fxiros ; dpvTs, dpvidos ; except acnrts, eptsj x a P?s, and a few others. 

in polysyllables preceded by two short syllables ; as, tt^SkS- 

pis. 
(?. -Di/ is long in nouns which have -wos in the lenitive ; as, ^oacrvv, fxoaawos, 

in nouns which have two terminations in the nominative ; as, 

(popxvs, Or (popxvv. 

in accusatives from -vs in the nominative ; as, 6<ppvv from d$pvs» 

in the ultimate of verbs in -vpi ; as, l<pvv from fvpi. 

in vHv, now ; but in vvv, enclitic, it is short. 

-vp in the end of a word is always long; as, [iaprvp. 
7. -vs is long in monosyllables ; as, [its. 

in nouns which have two terminations in the nominative; 

. 'POOKAS, (pOpKVV. 

in nominatives which have -wios or -og pure in the genitive; 

■iKvvi, (Xikvvvtos ; o^pflf, dtypvos. 

in kmjjvs, Kcj/ivdos ; and 

in the last syllabic of verbs in w . , as, 2pB?. 



§ 185. V. DOUBTFUL VOWKLS IN THE INCRE 

IMKNT OF NOUNS. 

Rule VII. The quantity of the nominative remains in tho 
oblique Ca&68 ; thus, 7***5?, Tn&vog; xvij/uTg, xv^fuldog. 

EXCEPTIONS. 
1. -Sf> in the nominative shortens the crement ; as, naprVp, fiaprv'poi,. 



§ 186. prosody. 275 

2. A vowel 3 long by position, in the nominative shortens the crement in 
the oblique cases ; as, <™Aa|, av\cLxos. But nouns in -a£ after a vowel have 
the crement long ; as, vsa%, veaxog. 

Likewise Qcopat;, lepa£, xvcoSa%, xopSa£, \a6pa^, oia|, pal;, avp<pa£, (pevat;, with 
many words in -i\l, -ixos, and -if, -cyos or -ixo$ ; to which add ypvip, yvip, 
and generally 'BcSov^, 6oiSv£, 6prv£, capSvt-. 

3. -os pure in the genitive, from a long syllable in the nominative, varies 
the crement ; as, Spvs, Spvos, or Spvog- 

4. The dative plural, after a syncope, has the penult short ; as, irarpfot, 
avSpSai, 



§ 186. VI. DOUBTFUL VOWELS IN THE INFLEC- 
TION OF VERBS. 

The doubtful vowels, a, i, v, are short in verbs, unless it be otherwise spe- 
cified in the Rules. 

Rule VIII. « and v before -ox in participles, and always 
before -ot in verbs, are long ; as, vvipacra, deixvvcra, zeTvyavL, 
deixvvoi. (§ 6. 18.) 

FUTURE. 

Rule IX. The first future in -«aw, -law, -vo-co, from -«co af- 
ter a vowel, or from -oaa), ^w, -t#co, -vco, lengthen the penult ; 
as, 

lad), soloo)\ $o«o), Joacrco ; tlco, Ttaco; oot^co, o^oTaco; luyyta, lo%vo~(*). 

But the first future in -ao-co, -law, -vaco, from -a£ca, -t£w, -u£w, 
shorten the penult; as, 

dojra^co, uotiugo) ; 07rAt£w, OTt)Jta(x) ; xav£co, xXvaco, 

Rule X. Liquid verbs shorten the penult in the first future; 
as, xqtpo), xqXvw. 

Rule XL The second future shortens the penult ; as, rep- 

vG), tuuo) ; (fuivoj, cpocPd). m 

THE OTHER TENSES. 

Rule XII. The doubtful vowels have the same quantity in 
the tenses as in their roots ; thus, 

1 Root. xoTv — koTvo), ckoIvov, KpTvo/xai^ eKpTvojiriv. 

2 Root. KfTv, — KpXvoi, xexpTxa, exexpixeiv, Kpivovfiai, KpTOriaoiiai, IxpXBinv, xcx- 

pTftaij ZKiKpX\)*\v. 

2 Root. T$7r, — HJtto), Itvttov, TVTTOVjJiai, IrvnofXTrfv, r\jirr)ffO[xat, crtJ7rrj^. 

3 Root. r07r, — rervTca, ereriJTreiv. 



276 prosody. § 187. 

. 1. Liquid verbs in the prat future active and middle, as in fL X. 
rhfi initial i and i in the augmented tenses and moods arc longj 

The quantity of a doubtful vowel in the root is ascertained as follows: 

I. Verbs in -oca pure, or in -quo) -im, -iOw, and -vco, have 
the final vowel of the first root long, unless followed by a vow- 
el ; it" followed by a vowel, it comes under R. II. All others 
ore usually short. 

II. The final syllable of the second root is always short, 
ji&lesfl made long by position. 

III. The first root of liquid verbs is shortened in the 1st 
future, § 97. 1. 

SPECIAL RULES FOR VERBS IN /Ufr. 

Rule XIII. The proper reduplication is short, unless made 
long by position ; as, tXOj^ul. The improper reduplication is 
common ; as, c Xjjul or 'Ttj/lu. 

Rule XIV. a, not before -aa or -at, is every where short ; 

. IOTU.LIEV, 1<JTUTS. 

Rule XV. v is long in polysyllables, only in the singular 
of the indicative active ; every where else it is short; as, deix. 
, diucvvTto, deixvvfiai, &c. 

In dissyllables it is every where long ; as, %it, Svtov, fo^ai, &c. 



§ 187. VII. DERIVATION AND COMPOSITION. 

Rule XVI. Derivatives follow the quantify of their primi- 
tive a ; and compounds that of the simple words of which they 
are composed ; 01 

tTjit) — ari/ioj, ojwTTfwi, Tl//aycjp, &C. 
X<pi — Xtyiycvaa, \<ptK\riq, I^troj, &C 

Atfa>, AiJcroj — AvaavSpog, ^HmKaKQS, &C. 
• °' a f> oi'iKog — ottKOtrrpoQuff 0l&K0VOUO£ t &c 

7r6p — H^avmff, ccc. 

'oTs or l>\v — /'u'qAamoj, no\\v(Hvos y &C 






§ 18S > 1«». x-ROSODY. 277 

™fnth?uZ IL ap _ ri I at j ve before two short syllables is fre 
quently long ; as, axa/uurog. 

Also riv in composition is sometimes long; as, o*,*^. 



§ 1S8. VIII. DIALECTS. 



ATTIC. 



aoSs L Fn X I! IL T f A f cs le °g th ^ « m the accusative of 
aouns in .ev S ■ as , 6W £l , ? , acc< 6aadeS> contrarv toRu)e y 

Also , instead of., c, o ; as, ravri for ™vr«; 5<Jr for ifc 

is Ion! Pa a rag ° S,C .' m pr ° n0uns ( the dati ™ Pl«al excepted) andin adverbs, 
is long ; as, oDrort, «««, Dat. pi. rowoiat. 

IONIC. 

.s ^ C r P r tiV ! ^ """' Sh ° rtenS the neuter 5 the Attics lengthen it ; 

as, KaAAioy, 1. KaWiov, A. & l 

2. In adjectives of time « is long ; aS; d^Twy. 

3. In verbs the Ionic a, ac not following it, is short ; as, tSrai for Wau 

DORIC AND JEOLIC. 

W^ 6 ^ 00131 ! 112 ' theiEolicis s hort; as, A^a, D. for A„„ „ ; 

<v?rora, ill,. lor nrirorris, &c. ' 

§ 189. IX. POETIC LICENSE. 

1. The last syllable of a verse is common, except in Iambic, Trocnaic, 
Anapaestic, and Greater Ionic. ' 

2. The &£«£$ unites two syllables into one; as, 

x I I II '| 

A P mu am «**W ^ £ cAterwro 7ra*ra<r A^atoi*, 

R> a ! — ' ' I I 

n. Aaver r\ ovk evoqaev aaaaro 6e \uya 9v/xa), 

3. The Arsis makes a short syllaSle in the end of a word long; as. 

Actios re p< ctrai 0iAg i KV pz Seiv^s «, 
Knroi* <J» A*r 0/ ««h„ra 0oo>? ^evyvvfxev avuye. 

^j^ ^ •«* * He**™. 

<- efd !f a fi? tt We " S ° " t,!nGS ' "' "^ VGry T' Ie ^ hened « 

1 d m /!£»/ I o^yw 6\o<rvpwirU eareAavuTo. 

24 



278 



PROSODY. 



$ 190 



i;al rules of quantity, the Poets, 
I. J. \ doubling or inserting a consonant; as, 

-.. By changing a vowel into a diph- 
thong; as, dcVQfUM fbt -. c-paOov for tirapBov. 

' v rejecting one vowel of a diphthong ; an, l\ov 

III. I the number of syllables, 1. By resolving a diphthong; as, 

. By inserting or adding a letter or syllable; as, aao-^sroy for 

r >i\iog ; (5nj<t( for Sty. 

I \' Lessened the number of syllables, 1. By apha>rcsis , as, i^fo: for evepO*. 
2, By syncope; as, gyptro for cyecjpST«. 3. By apocope and apostrophe; 
as, Jo> for (!a)ua ; pvpc* for /tvpia. 

will be learned by practice. Many conjectures have been 
I to the ancient orthography, and the principles of vcrsifi- 
pending upon it. But the best of them deserve the credit of in- 
genuity alone; for, as they rest on no unquestionable authority, they are 
of little or no use. 



§ 190. OF FEET. 

A foot in metre is composed of two or more syllables strictly regulated 
by time ; and is either simple or compound. Of the simple feet, four are of 
id eight of three syllable-. There are sixteen compound feet, each 
of four syllables. These varieties are as follows . 



Simple feet of two Syllables. 


Pyrri chins - ^ 


066$. 


Spondens — — 


TVTTTO). 


[ambus »*.' — 


X£yo>. 


Trochaeus — w 


oenjia. 


Simple feet of three syllables. 


Tribrachya w ^ 


rru'Xcu'.g. 


\1ol<> — — 


cvx^n. 


Ins — ^ ^ 


/innrvpos. 


\li:ij>. ^ w 


6a<ri\cvs. 


Boh ^ — 


l-T]Tf}£. 


Antibachius — — — 


delKvvfii. 


Amphibrachys **» — %.* 


Ti()r]\ki. 


— w — 


6tlKvf>TtO. 



§ .191. 



PROSODY. 



279 



Compound jeet of four syllables. 



Choriambus 
Antispastus 
Ionic a majore 

a minore 

First Pagon 

Second 

Third 

Fourth 

First Epitrite 

Second 

Third 

Fourth ~ 

Proceleusmaticus v 
Dispondeus 
Diiambus v 

Ditrochaeus 



- ccx)(ppo<rvvrj a trochee and an iambus. 

- andprrjua an iambus and a trochee. 
KOGixiiropa a spondee and a pyrrich. 

■ tt\eov£ktyis a pyrrich and a spondee. 
d<rrpo\6yo$ a trochee and a pyrrich. 
aval-tog an iambus and a pyrrich. 
dvadrj^a a pyrrich and a trochee. 
deoyevrig an iambus. 

■ afxaprwXfi an iambus and a spondee 

■ dvSpo<p6vT7is a trochee and a spondee. 
evpvadevijs a spondee and an iambus*- 

\(x)6rjrripa and a troche* . 

TToXcfxiog two pyrrichs. 

<tvv$ovXsv<703 two spondees. 

eTTiardms two iambi. 

SvaTv^nua two trochees. 



§ 191. OF METRE. 

Metre, in its general sense, means an arrangement of syllables and feet 
in verse, according to certain rules ; and in this sense applies, not only to an 
entire verse, but to part of a verse, or to any number of verses. A metre, in 
a specific sense, means a combination of two feet (sometimes called a syzy- 
gy) and sometimes one foot only. 

Note* The distinction between rhythm and metre is this : — the former re- 
fers to the time only, in regard to which, two short syllables are equivalent to 
one long; the latter refers both to the time and the order of the syllables. 
The rhythm of an anapasst and dactyl is the same ; the metre different. 
The term rhythm, however, is also understood in a more comprehensive 
sense, and is applied to the harmonious construction and enunciation of 
feet and words in connexion ; thus, a line has rhythm when it contains any 
number of metres of equal time, without regard to their order. Metre re- 
quires a certain number of metres, and these arranged in a certain order. 
Thus, in this line, 

Panditur interea domus omnipotentis Olympi, 

there is both rhythm (as it contains six metres of equal value in respect of 
time) and metre, as these metres are arranged according to the canon for 
Hexameter heroic verse, which requires a dactyl in the 5th, and a spondee 
in the 6th place. Change the order thus, 

Omnipotentis Olympi panditur interea domus, 

and the rhythm remains as perfect as before, but the metre is destroyed; it 
is no loneer a Hexameter heroic line. 



280 rnosoDY. § 192. 

§ 192. OF THE DIFFERENT KINDS OF METRE. 

1. Metre, in the general Bense, i< divided into nine species : 

1. Iambic. I. Dactylic 7. Ionic a majore. 

Trochaic. 5. Choriambic 8. Ionic a minora. 

6. Anuepastic. 9. PsBonic or Cretic. 
Those Dames are derived from the feet which prevail in them. Each spe- 
iginally composed of those feet only from which it is named; 
hut others, equal in time, were afterwards admitted under certain restrictions. 
It often happens thai two species, totally dissimilar, arc united in the same 
, which is then termed J&syrutrMes. When the irregularity is great, 
and it cannot be reduced to any regular form, it is called Polyschematistic 
or anomalous. 

. The invention or frequent, use of any species of metre by a particu- 
lar port, or its being used m some particular civil or religious ceremony, or 
appropriated to some particular subject or sentiment, has been the occasion 

tin kinds of verse receiving other names than those specified above. 
Thus, we have the . hell piudran, Glyconian, Alcaic, Sapphic, and others; 
named from the poets, Asclepiades, Glycon, Alcceus, Sappho, Phalozcus, So- 

ArchUockuSy JUcman, Pherecrates, Anacrcon, Aristophanes, &c. So 
also the Prosodtacua (from Trpoaodoi,), so called from being used in the ap- 
pro eh to the altars on solemn festivals ; and the Parcemiacus, a kind of 
verse much used in the writing of proverbs, (napointai.) 

In the iambic, trochaic, and anapaestic verse, a metre consists of two feet; 
in the others, of one only. 

2. A verse or metre is farther characterized by the number of metres (in 
the specific meaning of the term) which it contains, as follows : 

A verse containing one Metre is called Manometer 
two M et res Dimeter. 

three Metres Trimeter. 

four Metres Tetrameter. 

five Metres Pentameter. 

six Metres Hexameter. 

en Metres Heptameter. 

. be complete, having precisely the number of metres which 
i.»n requires; or it may be deficient in the last metre ; or it may be 
n dundant To express this, a verse is farther characterized as follows : viz. 
1. i . when com pl< 

. one syllable. 

t Brai ii.' \i ! wanting two syllables or one whole foot. 

"». Ii ic, when there is fine or two syllables at the end 

thus, 

ch, I >epf. Theb. 

»adenomin;i [ai< DfMSTfiB CATALBOTIC ;** the first term referring 



§ 193, 194, 195. prosody. 281 

to the species, the second to the number of metres, and the third to the apo- 

thesis or ending. 

Note. The two last terms, viz. that designating the number of metres and 
that which refers to the ending, are sometimes reduced to one ; thus, when 
a verse of a given species consists of two feet and a half, it is called Penthe- 
mimer; of three and a half, Hephthemimer, (five half feet, seven half feet) ; 
and when it consists of one metre and a half, it is called He miholius. 

The respective situation of each foot in a verse is called its place (sedes). 
The rules or canons of the different kinds of metre are briefly as follows . 



§ 193. I. IAMBIC METRE. Scheme, § 204. I. 

An iambic verse admits in the first, third, and fifth place, an iambus or -a 
spondee. 

In the second, fourth, and sixth, an iambus only. 

Variation 1. The iambus in the odd places may be resolved into a tri- 
brach ; the spondee into a dactyl or an anapaest. 

Variation 2. The iambus in the even places (except the last) may be 
resolved into a tribrach. An anapaest is substituted for it in the case of a 
proper name only. 

Observe, however, 1st. that a dactyl should be avoided in the fifth place ; 
and, 2d. that resolved feet should not concur. 

Of this verse there are all varieties of length, monometers, dimeters, tri- 
meters (called also senarian, each line having six. feet), and tetrameters 



§ 194. II. TROCHAIC METRE. Scheme, § 204. II. 

A trochaic verse admits in the odd places a trochee only ; in the even pla- 
ces, a trochee or a spondee. 

The trochee may in any place be resolved into a tribrach, and the spon 
dee into a dactyl or anap&st. 

A dactyl in the odd places occurs only in the case of a proper name. 

Trochaic verses are mostly catalectic. A system of them generally con- 
sists of catalectic tetrameters ; sometimes of dimeters, catalectic and acata* 
lectic intermixed. 

In tetrameters the second metre should always end a word. 



§ 195. III. ANAPAESTIC METRE. Scheme, § 204. III. 
An anapaestic verse, without any restriction of places, admits either an 
anapcest, spondee, or dactyl. 

24* 



282 prosody. § 196. 

. I. The dimi b l eataleetie, railed panemiacus, requires an anapaest 
in the last place but our ; and is incorrect when a spondee is found there* 

J. In some instances the proper foot is resolved into the proceleus- 

Aiiapa-sii' oetimes intermixed with other species, but are 

oftener in i tf< m by themselves. 

Stem is chiefly composed of dimeters under the following circum- 
stanc 

1. When each foot, or at least each metre, (syzygy), ends a word. 

Vhrn the last verse hut one of the system is monomcter acatalectic, 
and the last dim! tic, with an anapaest in the second metre. 

In a s\stem this peculiar property is to be observed, that the last syllable 
of each verse is not common (as in other species), but has its quantity sub- 
ject to the same restrictions as if the foot to which it belongs occurred in any 
other place of the verse. 

A series, therefore, of anapaestic verses, consisting of one or more senten- 
ces, is to be constructed as if each sentence was only a single verse. 

Note. The monomcter acatalectic is called an anapecstic base. This is 
sometimes dispensed with in a system; in the parozmiacus, rarely. 

To this metre belong the Jlristophanic, being catalectic tetrameters ; and 
the proceleusmatic, consisting of feet isochronal to an anapaest, and, for the 
most part, ending with it. 



§ 196. IV. DACTYLIC METRE. Scheme, § 204. IV. 

A dactylic verse is composed solely of dactyls and spondees. In this 

foot constitutes a metre. 
The common heroic is hexameter acatalectic, having a dactyl in the fifth 
place and a spondee in the sixth. 

aetimes m a solemn, majestic, or mournful description, a spondee 

of the dactyl in the fifth foot; from which circumstance 

are called spondaic* 

The elkg i ac i er consists of five feet. The first and second 

may I- dactyl or a al pleasure; the third must always be 

,<](■<• ; the fourth and fifth atKip 

Though a keroU \. confined to a smaller number of admissible 

are allowed which are not used 

most considerable of I 
1. The lengthening of a short final syllable in certain cases, viz. «t the 



§ 197, 198. prosody. 283 

caesural pause, and where its emphasis is increased by its beginning 
a foot. 
2. The hiatus, or the concurrence of two vowels, in contiguous words. 
That irregular sort of dactylics which Hephaestion calls JEolics, admits, 
in the first metre, any foot of two syllables ; the rest must be all dactyls, 
except, where the verse is catalectfc, and then the catalectic part must be part 
of a dactyl. 

A second sort of dactylics, called by the same author Loga&dics, require 
a trochaic syzygy at the end, all the other feet being dactyls. 



§ 197. V. CHORIAMBIC METRE. Scheme, § 204. V. 

The construction of an ordinary ehoriambic verse is very simple. Each 
metre, except the last, is a choriambus, and the last may be an iambic syzy- 
gy, entire or catalectic. 

The iambic syzygy (two iambic feet) is sometimes found at the beginning 
and, in long verses, in other places ; but this happens less frequently. 

If any other foot of four syllables is joined with a choriambus, the verse 
is then more properly called epichoriambic. Of this there is a very great 
variety, and they sometimes end with an amvhibmch, sometimes with a ba- 
cillus. 



§ 198. VI. ANTISPASTIC METRE. Scheme, § 204. VI. 

An antispastic verse, in its most usual and correct form, is constructed 
as follows : 

In the first place, beside the proper foot, is admitted any foot of four syl- 
lables ending like an antispastus in the two last syllables ; i. e. either 
w — , w, ~ ^ — ^, or — w — w. 

In the intermediate places only an antispastus. 

In the last, an iambic syzygy, complete or catalectic, or an incomplete 
antispastus. 

There is scarce any limit to the varieties in this species. 

The following are the most usual : 

1. In short verses, the proper foot frequently vanishes, and the verse con- 
sists of one of the above-mentioned feet and an iambic syzygy. 

2. All the epitrites, except the second, are occasionally substituted in the 
several places in the ver?e, particularly the fourth epitrite in the second. 

3. If an antispastus begins the verse, and three syllables remain, what 
Ever those syllables are, the verse is antispastic ; because they may be con- 



2S4 prosody. § 199, 100 

I portion of some of the admissible feet, or of some of them re- 
solved. 

B iambic 83 an in t lie second place, 

then the third place admit- the same varieties as the first* 
In antispastus, with an additional syllable, is called Dochmiac. 

ntispastus, followed by an iambic syzygy, is called Glyconian. 
Two antispasti, with an iambic syzygy, is eal led Asclepiadean. 
Antispastic dim. catalectic, is called Pherecratian, 



§ 199. VII. IONIC METRE A MAJORE. Scheme, 
§ 204. VII. 

An Ionic verse admits a trochaic syzygy promiscuously with its proper 
foot. The verse never ends with the proper foot complete, but cither with 
the trochaic syzygy or the proper foot incomplete. The varieties of this 
metre are numerous, among which observe the following: 

Var. 1. The second pozon is sometimes found in the first place. And 

Var. 2. A molossus ( ) in an even intermediate place with a tro» 

chaic syzygy following. 

Var. 3. The second pozon is occasionally joined to a second or third epitnte, 
so that the two feet together are equal in time to two Ionic feet. This is call- 
ed an AvaK^acig; the defect in time of the preceding foot being, in this case, 
supplied by the redundant time of the subsequent ; and the verse sodispos- 
called Ava*Ac5^ci>o<;. 

Var. 4. Resolutions of the long syllable into two short ones are aM^wed 
in all possible varieties. 

If the three remaining paeons, or the second pseon in any place bu' the 
first, without an AvaxXams : — Or, 

If an iambic syzygy or third epitrite — a choriambus, or any of the dis- 
cordant feet of four syllables, be found in the same verse with an Ionic foot, 
erse is then termed Epi-ionic. 



. VIII. IONIC METRE A MINORE. Scheme 
§ 204. VIII. 

1 minore is oftei entirely composed of its own proper feet. 
• iambic ivzy r y promiscuously , and begins sometimes 
with the third p(T(,n followed by one of the epitrites for an Ai/okA^i?. 

oi< times occurs in the beginning of the verse, and also in 
the od itfa an iambic lysygg preceding. 



v 2 01, 202. prosody. 285 

In the intermediate places a second or third pason is prefixed to a second 
qntnte ; and this construction is called AwwW., as before 
J^«**"" of tl^ long syllables are allowed in this, as in the other Ionic 

An Epionic verse a minore is constituted by intermixing with the Ionic 
toot * double trochee, second epitrite, or paaon without an A^»W«. 

PROSODIAC VERSE. 

When a choriamb™ precedes or follows an Ionic foot of either kind, the 
name Epionic is suppressed, and the verse called Prosodiacus. And in 
general, ' m 

This name is applied to a verse consisting of an alternate mixture of cho- 
namb.c and Ionic feet, or of their respective representatives. 

vefs'e 3 ' Thetwos P eciesof Ionic are not to be intermixed in the same 



§ 201. IX. PHONIC METRE. Scheme, § 204. IX. 

A pteonie verse requires all the admissible feet to have the same rhythm 
with its proper foot ; i. e. to consist of five times, or be equal to five short syl- 

lables. J 

The first and fourth pason are mostly used, but not in the same verse. 
The construction of this verse is most perfect when each metre ends with 
the several words of the verse as was before remarked of the anapaestic me- 

To this head may be referred those verses which are called by some au- 
thors Bachiac and Cretic verses. 



§ 202. OF THE CLESURAL PAUSE. 

Besides the division of the verse into metres and feet, there is another d* 
vision, into two parts only, owing to the natural intermission of the voicein 
reading ,t, and relevant to the rhythmical effect. This is called the pause 
wnich necessarily ends with a word ; and its distance from the beginnings 
generally, though not invariably, determined by the length of the verse " 

Heroic verses and trimeter iambics are esteemed most harmonious when 
the pause falls upon theirs/ syllable of the third fool. This is the penlhc 
numeral aesura. When it falls upon the first syllable of the fourth, it is 
called the hephthemimeral. In iambic and trochaic tetrameters its place is 
at the end of the second metre. These rules are more observed by the 
Roman than by the Greek poets. In anapaestic verse and pasonic, no place 
is assigned to the pause ; because, since the metres (if rightly constructed) 



286 prosody. <§ 203, 204. 

vnd with a word, the effect o( a pause will he produced at the end of each 
metre. The boom may be observed of the [onic a minorc. 



§ 203. COMPOUND METRES. 

Besides the preceding nine species of metre, the compositions and modi- 
fications o\ these are wry numerous. Of these ohscrvc the following : 

1. A. long syllable is sometimes inserted hetween the parts of a verse 

; of similar metres. 

2. In some species the portions of an admissihle foot of four syllables are 
tied by the intermediate metres. 

?>. It happens not unfrequently that two species, totally dissimilar, aro 
united in the same verse ; which is then denominated Asynartetes ; 

1. Dactyl Tetram. + Troch. Hemihol. 

2. Iambic Penth. + Troch. Hemihol. 

3. Dactyl. Dim. + Troch. Monom. or Logaaedic. 

4. Iambic syzygy -j- Troch. Syzygy, and vice versa. 
This last is called Periodicus. 

4. When a verse is so irregular as to contain in it some glaring violation 
of the preceding rules, it is called Polysciiematistic or anomalous ; thus, 
To this title may be referred, 

1. A verse otherwise iambic, having a spondee in the second or fourth 
place. 

2. An iambus in a trochaic verse, &c., &c. 
These rules are exemplified in the following tables. 



§ 204. METRICAL TABLES. 

The following table exhibits a scheme of the different feet allowed in each 

kind of Metre ; and the place which they occupy. If a line has the exact 

Dumber of feel in the scheme, it is called JJcatalectic, (A. C), if it want a 

syllabi Uectic ; (C.) ; if it want two syllables or a fooj, it is Bra- 

' ; (B.C.); if it have one or two syllables more than the scheme, 

it.ulcctic ; (II. C); V S 19-2. 3. In Ictmh'ic, Trochaic, and Ana- 

I and is followed in the table by 
In .all til-' other kinds i k h foot is a metre 

i ame. 



§ 204 



PROSODY. 



287 






I. IAMBIC METRE. § 193. 

Monometer Base. Dimeter ^catalectic. 



1. 2. 



1. 


o 


3. 


4. 


) ) 1 
1)1)) 
) ) 1 1 ) 


- - - 


( 1 1 ( ( 

((1(1 
1 ( ( 





THmeter Acatalectic. 



1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 



P. N. 



II. TROCHAIC METRE. § 194. 

Explanation of the Scheme. 

In this verse each metre is alike. If from the trimeter scheme exhibited be- 
low, the first and second metre be taken away, the remainder is a scheme of 
the Monometer, which is always hypercatalectic or acatalectic. If the first- 
is taken away, the remainder will be a scheme of the dimeter ; and if a metre 
be prefixed, it will be a scheme of the tetrameter, which is always catalectic 

Trimeter Acatalectic. 



1. 2. I 3. 4. | 5. 6. 



III. ANAPAESTIC METRE. § 195. 

Explanation of the Scheme. 

This scheme is dimeter. The removal of the^rs^ metre leaves it Mono- 
meter (which is called an anapaestic base) ; by prefixing one metre, it be- 
comes trimeter ; and by prefixing two it becomes tetrameter, which is 
always catalectic. A catalectic dimeter is also called Parozmiac. 



N6 PROSODY. 

Dimete r Ac ate: 



§ 204. 
Parccmiac or Dim. Cat. 



1. 


-. 


3, 






1. 


o # 


3. 


4. 




- 3 


— ww 


-w3 








w w 


— WW 









IV. DACTYLIC METRE. § 196. 

Trimeter. 



1. 


2. 


A. C. 
H. C. 


l. 


o 


3. 


- - - 








— ww 


= r~| 





- - - 


— 








— 





— 


• 


— ~w 





Adonic. 











A.C. 

h.c. 



Tetrameter. 



1. 2. 3. 4. 



— ww iEc-LIC. 



Pentameter. 



1. 


2. 


9. 


4. 


5. 






















(1(1 

1 ( ( 1 


-w w 








^_, ^s 


W 


I 


w W - 


ww — 



A. C. 

iEOLIC. 

Elegiac. 



Hexameter. 



pi. 2. 


3. 


•1. 


5. 


<>. 


i _ 








- 


W | W ^ 




w 






w I — W 


















— W 


















1 

















pure. 



t' 



mpure. 
Heroic 



$ 204. 



PROSODY. 



289 



Logacedics. 
called also Choriambic Dim. Cat. 

Alcaic, (the most common.) 

jLogaaedicsonly. 



M. I. 


II. 


III. 









V. CHORIAMBIC METRE. § 197. 

Tnmeter. 

Cat. 

pure A. C. seldom occurs. 

impure do. in which also other feet 

are intermixed, as the Paeons and 

Epitrites. 

Monometer is the same as Dact. Dim. Dimeter removes the first Me- 
tre. Tetrameter prefixes a Metre, and is always Catalectic. 

VI. ANTISPASTIC METRE. § 198. 

An Antispastic metre 

Iambus. Trochee. 

In the varieties of this verse any of the simple 
w ^ w feet under the Iambus may precede any of those 

under the Trochee. Dimeters. Trimeters, and 

Tetrameters, are formed as directed § 198, and 
w w — are Cat. A. C. and H. C. 

The Dochmiac dimeter and trimeter is formed 
by repeating the Doch. mon. The Doch. also 
-~ w sometimes precedes, and sometimes follows, the 
— ww Antispastus. 



pure 



(— 



Antispastic Varieties, 



Metres I. 



II. 



Any form of j 
an Antispas- , 
tic metre. 



Cat. is called Pherccratic. 



A. C. is called Glyconic. 



H. C. is called Sapphic. 



A. C. is called Glyconic Polyachcmatiptic, 
25 



290 



PROSODY. 



§ 2U4. 



VII. IONIC METRE, a majors, § 199 



Metres I. 



Trimeter, 

II. 



pure <! 



r~ 



as above. 



III. 



ns above and 



Cat. 



1™ } A.C. 



nil the paeons. 
Dimeter may be formed by joining I. and III. 

VARIETIES OF THE IONIC A MAJORE. 

"3 s " J3"^3! -^--^ Alcaic. 



— — w ^ \— ^ ^ -, or - - ^ — 1 ^ — ^ ^ sPros 
Ionic a majore tetram. B. C. is called Sotadic. 



odiacus, 



VIII. IONIC METRE, a minore, § 200 

Dimeter. Tetrameter. 

"■' is formed by joining a Dim. Cat. to a 

■ — C. Dim. A. C. A Molossus (— ) 

\ 21 ~ Z ) m tne odd places must always be pre- 

_ r A. C. ceded by an iambic syzygy. 

The Ionic a minore, preceded or followed by a choriambus, is another 
form of Prosodiacus. For the Epi-Ionic, see § 199. 

IX. PHONIC OR CRETIC METRE, § 201. 

A Paonii Dimeter, Trimeter, & Tetrameter, 

— www ^ arc formed by a repetition of the metre; a resolution 

*■'"" ^ w «t "" "" w of — into w w is common. 



§ 205, 206. accents. 291 

§ 205. SCANNING. 

To those who are accustomed to the scanning of the Latin poets, the or- 
dinary hexameter and regular systems of the Greek poets will present no 
difficulty. After a little exercise in these, the best praxis is furnished by 
the Choruses in the Dramatic writers, and the odes of Pindar ; as almost 
every line furnishes a different kind of verse, and the student is compelled 
to make himself thoroughly acquainted both with the rules of quantity and of 
metre in order to discover it. 

In scanning, for example, the Proodus in the Medea of Euripides, begin- 
ning at the 131 st. line, after ascertaining the quantity of each syllable, and 
comparing the whole line with the preceding tables, they will be as follows • 

131 Anapaestic 

132 Dactylic 

133 Anapasstic 

134 Dactylic 

135 Paeonic 

136 Antispastic 

137 Dactylic 
133 Antispastic 

Proceeding in the same way with the second Olympic ode of Pindar, it 
will b# as follows : 

1. Periodicus, or circulating dimeter. 

2. ionic Dimeter Catalectic. 

3. Paeonic Dimeter Hypercatalectic. 

4. Choriambic Dimeter Catalectic. 

5. Iambic Dimeter Brachycatalectic. 
G. Dochmiac — and so on of the others. 

Note. In the choruses of the dramatic writers, and the odes of Pindar, 
each line of the antistrophe is the same kind of verse, and often, though not 
always, the same order of syllables with the corresponding line of the pre- 
ceding strophe. 



Dim. 


Ac. 


Trim. 


do. 


Dim. 


do. 


Trim. 


H. C. 


Dim. 


Ac. 


Dim. 


Ac. 


Dim. 


Ac. pure. 


Dim. 


Ac. 



§ 206. ACCENTS. 

In the proper modulation of speech, it is necessary that one 
syllable in every word should be distinguished by a tone or 
elevation of the voice. On this syllable the accent is marked 
in the Greek language. The elevation of voice does not 
lengthen the time of the syllable ; so that accent and quantity 
are considered by the best critics as perfectly distinct, but 
by no means inconsistent with each other. These can be of 
no use to us now, as far as regards the pronunciation of the 



292 accents. § 206 

language, however useful in this respect they may have been 

to those by whom it was spoken. Still, however, the study 
of these is useful in two respects; they serve to distinguish 
between words which are spelled alike but have different sig- 
This difference was doubtless marked in the lan- 
guage as originally spoken by a different intonation which, 
by the different marks called accents, it was intended to con* 
vey to the eye. Thus, in English, the words des'ert, and de- 
sert', though spelled with the same letters, differ both in sound 
and meaning; and this is marked by the accent. So in 
ad <""•-:, spelled with the same letters, differ in 
meaning; and the difference of the accent would doubtless 
lead the Greek to express this by a difference of tone which is 
now lost. Scapula has given a list of more than four hundred 
words which are thus distinguished. The accents also indi- 
cate, in many cases, the quantity of one or more syllables of a 
word . 

The accents in form are three: the acute ('), grave Q, and 
circumflex (~). Strictly speaking, however, there is in reality 
but one accent, the acute, which is placed over a vowel to mark 
the emphatic syllable. When the accent is marked on a diph- 
thong, it is placed over the subjunctive vowel ; as, BaoMvg. 

The accent is placed over one of the last three syllables 
only, and words are denominated accordingly 

Oxytons, when accented on the final syllable ; as, Oeog. 
Paroxytons, when accented on the penult ; as, dvOQibnov. 
Propavoxytons, when accented on the antepenult ; as, uv- 
dowtog. 

The two last kinds are called barytons, because the final syl- 
lable is not accented; for every syllable that is not accented, 
is called grave (Sagtig); but the grave accent is never marked, 
such, upon a syllable. 

J n the structure of a sentence, when any oxyton is followed 
by another word in continued discourse, the grave is used in- 
stead of the acute ; as, debs \nm> \ but the word is still consi- 
d an oxyton. 
When two syllables, the first of which is accented, are con- 
'1 into one, the circumflex is used to denote that an acute 
er accented syllable, and a grave or unaccented, an; united; 
as, 7 : <ft/.:'»,n>, ifihniu. ] fence, if there 

i en] on the first of the syllables to be contracted, there 
will be no circumflex on the contraction ; thus, (piUolpnv, cpi- 
lolftip< But m contr. for 6u in the ace. sing, of nouns in oi have 
renin flex. 



§ 207. accents. 293 

It is evident, also, that as the accent must be upon one oi 
the last three syllables, the circumflex must be upon one of the 
last two: and words are denominated accordingly 3 

Perispomenons, when the last syllable is circumflexed ; as, 

qpdw for g>i)*io). 
Properispomenons, when the penult is circumflexed ; as, 
q-Uovuev for (fileousv. 

N. B. Of many words, both the uncontracted and contract- 
ed forms are in use ; but of others, the contracted form only 
remains, and we must conjecture from analogy what the un- 
contracted was ; as. %ag%ov, f\qyov ; sW, ovv. This reasoning 
from analogy, however, proceeds on the assumption that all 
syllables having the circumflex were originally two, now unit- 
ed by contraction. Whether this was so or not, cannot be 
satisfactorily ascertained ; nor, if it could, would the know- 
ledge be of much value, as the rules for the accentuation of 
words would still continue the same. 



§ 207. PLACE OF THE ACCENT IN THE NOMI- 
NATIVE, &c. 

No rule can be given for ascertaining the proper place of 
the accent in the nominative of nouns and adjectives ; this h 
best learne'd from practice and the use of a good Lexicon. 
The following observations, however, may be of use : 

1. The articles, pronouns, and prepositions, have the place 
of the accent marked in their inflexion in the grammar. 

2. In verbs, it is thrown as far back as possible, except elfii 
and cpr L uL 

3. The following have the acute accent on the last syllable, 
and are therefore oxytons : viz. 

1. All monosyllables which are not contracted; as,^£/o, og 
When they have suffered contraction, they take the circumflex; 
a>. /rj. (/£«), <jp®s, (qxkog). So also «£, vvv, abv, hg 9 dgvg, (uvg, 
vuvg, ovc, 7Tai; y tivq, most or all of which are contractions. 

2. All nouns in -evg ; as, Suadevg. 

3. All verbals in -t^o ; as, '/uguxxrg. 

4. Yerbals in -tt^ ; as, uudrjjrig; but those from verbs in 
-ui, on the penult ; as, dij^g, 

5. Verbals in -utj and - t uog, (from the perfect passive) ; as, 
yquuur^ anuouog. 

25* 



294 accents. § 207. 

6. Verbals in .rog, from the 3d singular perfect passive 5 as, 
to$yx6e\ except some compounds; as, (knooelurdg. 

Verbals in -\ and -a from the 2 perf. active; as, orol^ 

S. Diminutives, patronymics, and other derivative nouns in 

9. Compounds of rrot&i, &y& % q-ioi<>, olgog, %qyov\ as, 7touda- 

j"tneoy6g, (but naod and tteqI throw 
back the accent : as, og, j 

1". Adjectives in -17s not contracted; as, al^Ofe. 

11. Compound adjectives in-vs ; as, ftfgnu?},; ; except com- 
pounds of 7(dog and uoxtco; as, xuxorft^g, noduox-qg. 

12. Adjectives in -i/$, -em, .u; as, ?^u£, ^er«, ^. 

13. Adjectives in -oog ; as, ala/gog. 

14. Adjectives in -*xog, from verbals in -to?; as, noi^xtxdg 
from rr 0/7,1-0;. 

15. The adverbial terminations -v and -£oV ; as, aQsel, ojlm- 
Ovuudov. 

Accent on the Penult. 

4. The following have the accent on the penult: 

1. Diminutives in -kjkoc, -dog, -imv ; as, veavlcntog, naidl(j- 
xrj, ruvillog, /uojqIwv. 

2. Nouns in -eiop, denoting a place ; as, AvxeTov. 

3. Nouns in -vvi] ; as, dixouoavvi]. 

4. Nouns in-i«, if derived from Adjectives in -og; as, cpvlta. 
If derived from substantives, the accent varies; as, o-rocmd 
from OTQaidg. 

5. Nouns in -*«x derived from verbs in -evqj; as, (fao-dsla 
from ftuailefoi. 

6. Almost all nouns denoting national relation ; as/Pw/ualog. 

7. Verbals in -to;o ; as, (njrojo, xrrjrwo. 

8. A(i| 11 nrr -Evaou -ev ; as, ?O0fo*f 

9. Adjective- in -"> l) ' l ;: as, liOtadrjg. 

1". Verbal adjectives in -•<>-: as, yqantiog t 

1 1. Comparatives in - '/or. 

12. Adverbs of quantity in -"*/g; as, TQiouxig, noXldxig. 

13. Adverbs in -O'^'i as, (Tviyftdrjv, 



§ 208, 209. accents. 295 

Composition. 

5. Compound icords in many instances, especially in ad- 
verbs, retain the accent on the syllable where it stood in the 
simple; as, aviocpi, ovoavoOev. In the following cases, how- 
ever, the accent is drawn back to the antepenult. 

1. Words compounded of particles, a, tu, dvg, Jt, 6/uo, do?^. 
avil^ ttsqI, 7tocq&, find, &c, ; as, amarog from moxdg, dlipv%og 
from V /u / 7 ]* 

2. Words compounded of two adjectives ; as, cpdoaocpog ; of 
two substantives ; as, vavxlrjqog ; of adjectives and substan- 
tives ; as, cpilouToqyog, 



§ 208. GENERAL RULES. 

I. 

If the final syllable is long, the penult has the acute accent; 
thus, <jt.vdQihnov, dovcra, (dual,) oyewg, nrjle'iadew, TVTtTQ^TVTCiioOo). 

Obs. The Attic terminations -ewv and -sag, in the 2d and 
3d declensions, and the Ionic -soj in the first, are considered 
as forming one syllable ; as, uvayeav, nolswg 

II. 

If the final syllable be short, then 

1. In dissyllables the penult, if short, has the acute accent ; 
as, rime ; if long, with the final syllable short, the circumflex ; 
as, #eroa, dovoa, (sing.) 

2. In polysyllables the antepenult has the acute; thus, av- 

6o(s)7lOg, OLvdoWTlOl) TVJlTOfjLBV) Tl)7TTOU(Xl. 

Obs. 1. The diphthongs o^ and «t final, and syllables long 
by position only, are considered short in accentuation; thus, 
a3Xa£, avlaxog. 

Obs. 2. These rules apply to the inflexions of nouns, and to 
all the parts of verbs except as in the following, 



§ 209. SPECIAL RULES. 

I. IN THE DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 

1. The first declension has the circumflex on the ultimate of 
the genitive plural ; thus, {lovcrtir, from /uovoa. 



2 ^ ACCENTS. § 209. 

E •. The feminine of baryton adjectives in -og follows the 
first genera] rul from fy«&, (net d^ifo;) l^co^, from 

•J. Oxytonsof the Jural and second declensions, circumflect 
the last syHable in the genitive and dative ; thus, t*^, T //%, 

., ",'/>>, ////,■„•; XaM?, KaAoiJ ; Xulol, XaloiQ. 

3. In the f&srd declension the acute accent on the last sylla- 
ble of tile nominative is transferred to the penult in the oblique 
"U'* owtyeoQi avvfavvi (R. I.;) mxr^, naisoog - 

JEse. 1. The final syllable of vocatives in -ov and -o* change 

the acute into the circumflex; as, (iuadeig, <W/UH3 ; xlM 
xlwOoT. 

Exc. 2. Mijtjjq and 6vydT V Q, though barytons, accent the 
penult ; as, /u^regog. 

^ Exc 3. Genitives and cfatwe* of two syllables, have the 
circumflex on the final syllable long, and the acute on the final 
syllable short; as, pyrbg, ^W, urjvolv, (irjVihv, fir]al,dv(br 9 dvGL 
But r/; and participles follow the general rule; as,r/>w, Oivwg] 
ovoi ; also, d&datr, fyiofow, ddwp, xoutmv, nalduv, 7£c6a^, ovtuv, 
qx&TWV, [of lights,) ttuvtlov, nacre. 

Also syncopated nouns and yw^ except the dat. pi. ; as, 

rfa^obg, 71(xtoq)p, TtuTQcbcn ; yvvoLLXog. 

Also, a short vowel of the genitive from a long vowel in the 
nominative, throws back the accent in the vocative; thus. 
'hi\o, dtrigog, dveo; eidat/mv, etidalfiovog, etidaiuov. Except 
when thepenultislongnot by position; as, Ma/uov, SaQn^dov. 

II. IN VERBS. 

1. Monosyllables, being long, are circumflexed ; as, 5, elg, 
a%, Gr\ for Idty. 

2. A long syllable after the characteristic is circumflexed, 
let In Ihe (trim and middle voices, in the first future of 

liquid verba : and in the second future of all verbs. 
2d. In thepassivt voice, in the subjunctive of the aorists, 
and in the subjunctive of the present of verbs in pu\ 
tmi ^- •<", i tsoovpai — nmo), 

" W "''• lV7toZfUi limovfMk — CKfOdj — jvnr\g tiOu 

'iici. 

Exr vhen the last syllable ends in -^ ; as, tvnroi- 

it)v, (see 1st gen. rule). 



§ 210. ACCENTS. 297 

3. The third person of the optative in -ot and -a* has the 
acute accent on the penult; as. zexvcpoo, cxqeoav. 

Except in the futures mentioned rule 2d. 

4. The imperatives elds, sine, stye, Ids, lu6e, have the acute 
accent on the final syllable. 

But the imperative circumflects the last syllable in the 2d 
pers. sing, in the 2d aorist middle ; thus, tvttov. Except y£- 
vov, tq&tzov, evsyxou. 

5. The infinitive of the second aorist active circumflects the 
final syllable ; thus, TVTtsZv, viz. as if contracted from xvne'- 
fievai, TVTzeuev, xvniev, xvtcbIv, 

The infinitive of the first aorist active — of the second aorist 
middle — of both aorists passive — of all the perfects — and of 
the active voice of verbs in -,ut, have the accent on the penult ; 
viz. the circumflex on the long penult, and the acute on the 
short; thus, %oivai, eldocxo, axovaou — xvnkoQai — xvopOr^vai^ xvit- 
r\vui — TSTvopBvai) xbxvti&voli, xsxvcpQai, necpiXriodai — loxavav. 

6. The participles of the second aorist active, of the pres- 
ent active of verbs in -«*, and all ending in -cog or -sig, have 
the acute accent on the final syllable ; thus, zvTtcbv, loxdg, didovg, 
TSTvqxbg, xvcpdslg. 

The participles of the perfect passive have the acute accent 
on the penult;, as, Texvfi/uevog. 

Except when abbreviated ; as, deyfisvog for dedeyfievog. 

7. Elul I am, and cprj/ul, I say, have the acute accent on the 
final syllable of the indicative, (except the 2d sing.) ; thus, £a- 
rly cpaoi. 

Obs. When earl is emphatical, or forms the copula between 
the subject and its predicate, it throws back the accent ; thus, 
avOoumog I'oxu y j$ov, man is an animal; %vxi avdoonog xt d y eoxv % 
This is commonly though improperly, classed under enclitics. 



§ 210. IN CONSTRUCTION. 

1. Words accented on the last syllable, when that is lost by 
apostrophe, throw the accent back ; as, dsiva — de lv J %n^. 

Exc. 1. <UXd and the prepositions are excepted, which lose 
their accent. 

Exc. 2. Prepositions placed after their cases (civa and di& 
excepted) throw back the accent : thus, neql — yvyr\g niqv. 



298 is. § 211, 212. 

§ 211. PROCLITICS OR ATONICS. 

The following ten words, when written by themselves or before another 

aove no accent, bat seem to rest upon and form, as it wore, part of 

the word following; viz. the articles, &, h, °<\ <*< ; the prepositions iv, ^j, {£$), 

the conjunction rod the negative adverb ri, (oi«f, ^x*) 

Bui tin se words have the accent when it is thrown back on them from an 

enclitic following; as, eiyc ; in the end of a sentence; as, jt<3s yap o$, tuAjf 

ifter the word on which they rest : as, Ocug cog, like s god; kok&v ££, in 

causa; > rils. Also the article, used as a personal pronoun, often 

lias the accent ; as, S yap 7i\Qc. 



§ 212. ENCLITICS. 

Enclitics (from eytcXivco) are so denominated, because, like the Latin que, 
they lean or rest their accent upon the preceding word as forming a part of 
it, and have no emphasis on themselves. They are 

1. Alou, fiev, fioly fd, — crov, (rev, vol, as, — ov, of, t, — /hi/, v\v, ocftlv, — a<ptdl, a(f>l, 
<r$eag, atpiaij <r<picop, and the indefinite rig, in all cases and dialects. 

2. Ei/u and </>^i in the indicative present, except in the 2d person sing. 

3. II?7, ~ov, 7tc3, ncog, ttoQIv, totI, not interrogative. 

4. Yl, r£, KB, K£J/, 1/U1', 7T£jO, /5a, roi. 

RULES. 

I. Enclitics throw back their accent on the last syllable of the preceding 
word when its antepenult has the acute accent, or its penult, the circumflex , 

as, avOpcoTog can — %\d£ poi, o-to/xti fxov, ov n. 

Note. In this case the acute accent is always used, though the enclitic 
may have a circumflex. 

Note 2. When the preceding word ends in a double consonant, and will 
not easily coalesce with the enclitic following, the accent remains unchang- 
ed ; as, fyir}Ai£ fjiov. 

l\. Monosyllabic enclitics lose their accent when the preceding word has 
any accent on the final syllable, or the acute on the penult ; as, ayairyg us, 
- 

vllabic enclitics lose their accent when the preceding word has an 
■ circumflex in this instance regarded as an acute) on the final 
, for v«Ark iariv f koXov ri-6q. But they 
d their accent when the penull ins the acute ; as, \6y t $ rtv6i. \6yo$ e<rr(v. 
principle of these rules is, that two successive syllables in the 
I crime, t : i. and that a circumflected syllable is equi- 

valent to oil I followed by another unaccented. 

III. [f several enclitics follow each other, the last only Is without the ac- 
cent, the accent of each being thrown hack on the word which precedes it; 

as, ci — cl rig rt'ra (prjai /ioi. 

I ,'. The i nclitic pronouns retain their accent after prepositions, and after 

i and i) ; as, Sid of. 

V. All the enclitics retain their accent, when they are emphatic, and when 

V. >E*rl : vllable when it begins a sentence or is emphati- 

Cal, or follow- riXX\ cl, ovk, cog or tovt'' ; as, ovk Inn. 



^ 213, 214 TERMINATIONS. 299 



APPENDIX. 

§213. THE TERMINATIONS OF THE VERB. 

[The following contains a more extended view of the terminationsof 
the verb than is presented § 91.] 

The terminations are adder! immediately to the Tense-root, 
and consist of two parts : 1st, the vowel or diphthong which 
indicates the mood, and hence denominated the mood-vowel ; 
and 2d, the final letters ox personal-endings, which indicate the 
number and person. 

§ 214. I. OF THE MOOD-VOWELS. 

The mood-vowels of the indicative are either short or doubt- 
ful. (Except in the plup. active) ; — of the subjunctive always 
long ; — of the optative always a diphthong. More particularly, 

1. MOOD VOWELS IN THE ACTIVE VOICE. 

1. In the Indicative, the mood -vowels in the pres. imperf. 
fut. and 2 aor. are, in the singular o, s, s, — in the dual s, s, in 
plur. o, £, o. — In the 1 aor. and 1 and 2 perf. a, (except in the 
3d sing, g,) and in the 1 and 2 pluperf. si. 

2. In the Subjunctive the mood- vowels in all the tenses are 
a in the first pers. sing, and in the first and third person pi. ; 
and rj in all the rest. 

3. In the Optative, the mood- vowels are oi, — in the 1 aor. at. 

4. In the Imperative, the mood-vowels are s. But in the 1 
aor. 2d sing, o, — in the other persons, and numbers a. 

5. In the Infinitive, the mood- vowel is s : — in the 1 aor. a. 

6. In the Participles the vowels are o: — 1 aor. a. 

2. MOOD-VOWELS IN THE MIDDLE AND PASSIVE. 

In the middle and the passive voice, the mood-vowels are 
the same as in the corresponding moods and tenses in the 
active voice : Except as follows. — 

Exc. 1. The first person dual — wanting in the active voice 
— has the same mood-vowels as the plural, in all the moods 
in the middle and passive. 

Exc. 2. The indicative and imperative of the 1 aor. mid. 
have the mood-vowel a throughout. 

Note. The mood-vowels in each person and number, as also in the 
infinitive and participles, will be distinctly seen in the following inflec- 
tions § 216 ; and in the tables of terminations § 92. 



300 ONS. § 215 

x n 215. 11. OF THE FINAL LETTERS. 

The final letter* or personal-endings, which serve to distin- 
gh toe numbers and persons, and which with the mood- 
vowels form the termination, are as follows. — 

I. ACTIVE VOICE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Primary lenses (§ 77. Obs. 3.) 

1 2 3 

Sing, -o Opt. fii -ig -t 
Dual. -tov -tov 

Plur. -flSV -T£ -VT(J 



Secondary tenses (§ 77. Obs. 3.) 
12 3 



-TOV -TT(V 

(iev -T€ -v, plup. -aav. Opt. -ey. 



Exc. The 1 and 2 perf. Indicative, in the singular, instead of 
-o, -*c, -t, have — , -c, — : and the 1 aor. instead of -v, -g, — , has 

— * -g, —• 



IMPERATIVE. 
2 3 

Sing. — -to 
Dual, -tov -tcov 
Plur. -T€ -Twaav 



INFINITIVE. 

Pres. -tv : Perf. and Plup. -vat : 1 Aor. -t. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Pres. etc. -ov -vToa 
1 Aor. -vxg -vxaa 



:( 



II. MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICES. 



INDICATIVE. 



Primary tenses. 
1 2 



3 

Sing, -//at -oat -Tat 
Dual, -ps&ov -(Txrov -a&ov 

Plur. -fA£&a -(ids -VTU.I 
IMPERATIVE. 

2 3 

Sing, -do) -a&co 

Dual, -cr&ov -a&ov 

Plur. -QxTE -(TxTOiUaV 



1 

-fitjV 
-{IS&OV 



Secondary tenses. 
2 3 



-GO -TO 

-G&OV -G&1]V 

-G&S -VTO 

INFINITIVE. 



PARTICIPLES. 

-fisvog -fievn -fievov 



Obs. 1. The subjunctive mood takes the final letters of the 
primary tenses, — and the optative, those of the secondary. 

Exc. In the optative, active voice, the final letters of the 
1st pers. sing, are -yn — of the 3d pers. pi. tv. 

Obs. 2. The imperative of the 1 aor. active has the final 
letter v, — middle, *. 



§ 216 



nows. 






Obs. 8. The filial letters of the 2 sing., middk 5sive, 

usually drop g after the mood-vowel, and the remaining vowels 
are contracted into ?/, Attic ei, in the primary tenses ; and 
into ov in the secondary, §101,8. The optative only drops g. 



§ 216. INFLECTION OF THE ACTIVE VOICE. 

1. INDICATIVE MOOD. 

• The terminations of the indicative mood are formed by 
prefixing the mood-vowels to the primary final letters in the 
primary tenses ; and to the secondary in the secondary 
tenses; §77, Obs. 3. 







Primary tenses. — Pres. and Put. 




M- vowels and fin. 

1 


letters divided. 
2 3 


| The 

1 


same combined. 
2 3 


Sing. 


0-0 


s-ig 


e-t, 


-to 


-eig 


-u 


Dual. 




S-TOV 


E-TOV 




-STOV 


-S70V 


Plur. 


0~fl£V 


E-TE 


O-VTffl 

1 and 


-OflSV 

2 Perfect, 


-STS 


-ovai, § 6. 18. 


Sing. 


a- 


a-S 


E- 


-a 


-ag 


-€ 


Dual. 




a-Tov 


a-xov 




-CCTOV 


-ctrov 


Plur. 


a-fisv 


a-ts 


a-vTOi 


-afisv 


-ars 


-aot,, § 6. 18. 



Obs. In the first person o~o, and ro-o are combined (not con- 
tracted) into w. 

Secondary tenses. — Imperf. and 2 Aor. 



M-vowels and fin 


letters divided. 




The 


same combined. 




1 


2 


3 




1 


2 


3 


Sing. 


o-v 


e-c 


£- 




-OV 


'H 


-8 


Dual. 




E-TOV 


E-TTjV 






-STOV 


-hip 


Plur. 


O-flSV 


E-TE 


O-V 




-OflSV 


'STB 


-ov 








1 Aorist. 








Sing. 


a- 


a-g 


S- 




-a 


-ag 


-0 


Dual. 




a-Tov 


a-TTjV 






-azov 


-aT7\V 


Plur. 


a-fisv 


a-TE 


a-v 




-afisv 


-«TS 


-av 








1 and 2 Pluperfect. 






Sing. 


si-v 


u-g 


u- 




-elv 


-ELQ 


-si 


Dual. 




EL-TOV 


U-TT(V 






-EITOV 


-dxrp 


Plur. 


8L-/JIEV 


8L-Tt 


EL-UCiV 




-eLfie 


V -SITE 


-EMTttV 



30*2 






§ 216 



1. i [VE MOOD. 

The terminations of the subjunctive mood, through all the 
tenses, are formed by prefixing its mood-vowels to the final 
letters of the primary tenses j thus, 



M-vowels and fin. betters divided. 
1 2 3 

Sing. g>-o 7]-ig t\-i 

Dual 1}-T0V 7J-TOV 

PJur. co-fisv Tfie (o-vtvi 



The same combined. 

1 2 3 

-b) -yg -)] 

-rjTov -rpov 
-(Ofiev -t}ts -covi § 6. 18. 



3. OPTATIVE MOOD. 

The terminations of the optative mood, through all the 
tenses, are formed by prefixing its mood-vowels to the final 
letters of the secondary tenses. 



M-vowels and fin. letters divided. 
12 3 

Sing. 0L-fii oi-g oi- 

Dual. Olr-TOV OL-TTjV 

Plur. oi-fisv ol-te oi-ev 



The same combined. 
1 2 3 

-OtyU -OLQ -01 

-ouov -ohrp 

-OLfASV -OLTE -OLEV ' 



Exc. — 1 Aorist 
Sing, ou-fic ctL-g ai- 
Dual. aixov al-xrjv 

Plur. cu-uev cll-ts cu-ev 



-aijM -ceig -vcl 

-cllxqv -alxrjv 
-otiiiEV -cults -aiEv 



4. IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

The terminations of the imperative in all the tenses, are 
made by prefixing the mood-vowels to the final letters ; thus, 



M-vowels and fin. letters divided. 

2 3 

Sing, s- i-TO) 
Dual, b-tov i-xwv 
Plur. e-xe e-xowuv and 6-vxojv 



The same combined. 
2 3 
-s -exco 

-870V -8T(i)V 

-exe -ixwcrav and -ovxwv] 



1 Aorist 



Sing. 


o-v 


rx-ro) 


-ov 


-UTM 


Dual. 


a-xov 


(X-XO)V 


-axov 


-(XXO)V 


Plur. 


a-iE 


(X-XO)(JfXV 


-axe 


-uTwaav 



§ 217. TERMINATIONS. 303 

5. INFINITIVE. 

M-vowels and fin. letters divided. The same combined. 
s-iv, perf. i-vat, 1 aor. a-i -siv, perf. ~ivai, 1 aor. -ou. 

6. PARTICIPLES. 

M-vowels and fin. letters divided. The same combined. 
M. F. N. M. F. N. 

o-ov, o-vraa, o-v. -aw, -ovaa, -ov. 

Excep. Terminations of the perfect -tag, -via, -og : — of the 
1 aor. ~ag, -aaa, -av. 

6 217. INFLECTION OF THE MIDDLE AND 
PASSIVE VOICES. 

The terminations of all the tenses and moods .in the middle, 
and in the passive voice, are made by prefixing their respective 
mood-vowels to the final letters in the same manner as in the 
corresponding tenses of the active voice. 

Exc. 1. The 1st and 2d aorists passive have the termina- 
tions of the second conjugation. 

Exc, 2. The perfect and pluperfect passive have no mood- 
vowels; but annex the final letters (which in this case are 
the termination), immediately to the root. § 101, 10. 



8(»4 



PARADIGM OP 



§218 



§ 218. CONTRACT VERBS. ACTIVE. 



Preterit. 


TIU- 


</ iK- 


()7jl- 




s, 






it& 


-0) 


6o) -<?) 








•ft 


ccis 


-cTg 


dsis -otg 






(UL 


-a 


est 


-cT 


6ci -OL 




D. 












1ml. 








tcr iv 


-CLTOV 


octov -oijrov 










cctov 


-UTOV 


6STOV -OVTOl> 




P. 


doflSP 




cojtcv 


-ovpev 


dojisv -ovftci' 






dCTZ 




ecte 


-eXte 


dr.TS -ovts 






down 


-l?i(Tl 


covert 


-ovai 


driven -oven 




8. 


do) 


-<■) 


Kb) 


-(7) 


00) -d) 






ape 


"?$ 


cilS 


-5$ 


6i,s -ols 






"V 


-2 


h 


-j? 


01] -01 




D. 












Subj. 




ar]TOv 


-Stop 


erjTov 


-fJTOV 


drjrov -cotov 






drjrov 


-arov 


CT]T0V 




utjtov -cotov 




P. 


dtoficv 


-ajfiev 


CO)UCV 


-olfxev 


OCOfJiSV -cjfiEP 






dr\re 


-are. 


ET]TE 


-iJTE 


drjTE -core 






dd)ffL 


-d5<ri 


£a)(Tt 


-dial 


6(j)(TI -wen 




S. 


doiia 


-&Ui 


eoij.it 


-.Tin 


OOlfXl -oljiL 






dots 


-Cog 


eoig 


-oTs 


6otg -oT$ 






dot 


-it 


COL 


-oT 


001 -OL 




D. 





— 











Opt. 




doiTOV 


-IOT0P 


EOITOV 


-oTtov 


O0LT0V -OLTOV 






aoirrjv 


-ayrrjv 


soirrjv 


-OLTTJV 


OOlTT}V -OLTTjV 




P. 


doifxEv 


-(ZfiCv 


eoijizv 


-oTjicv 


do I HEP -oT[XEV 






doiTE 


-UT£ 


SO ITS 


-oTts 


OOLTE -OTTS 






UOICV 


-tZcv 


eolcv 


-oup 


oolev -oTep 




S. 


ac 


-a 


se 


-£L 


OS -ov 






airo) 


-droi 


ecTO) 


-CLTb) 


OCTO) -OVTb) 




D. 


aerov 


-arov 


cctov 


-CLTOV 


OETOV -OVTOP 


Imp. 




alro)* 


-droju 


£zto)v 


-CLTOJP 


OLTCJV -OVTCOV 




P. 


acre 


-arc 


SSTS 


-cXte 


OETE -OVTE 






aEroaav 


-UToaav 


ccroxjav -eiTOaav 


ocTOxrav -ovTCoaap 


Inf. 




dciv 


-av 


cciv 


-eXp 


dciv -ovv 




M. 


dcov 


-cov 


cojv 


-OiV 


dov -d)v 


Part. 


P. 


dovaa 


-idea 


rovora 


-ovoa 


dovaa -ova a 




X. 


dov 


-<J>1> 


iov 


-ovp 


dov -ovv 


Impe 








£(pd- 


tfrjl- 




s. 




-r,)V 


cov 


•ovv 


oov -ovv 






ar. s 


-as 


ccg 


-Cig 


ocs -ovs 






as 


-a 


cc 


-CI 


OE 'OV 




h. 

















bid 




dcrnv 


Stop 


CCTOV 


-cTtop 


dcrov -OVTOP 






aimv 


-drr\v 


CCTTJV 


-CITTJV 


octt]v -otfrijp 




P. 




-<7\\tcv 




-OVjKCV 


6op& -OV/lEV 








-arc 


icTc 


-cTtc 


6crc -ovts 






a ,v 


-OiV 


rOV 


-ovv 


oov -ow 



§ 218. 



CONTRACT VERBS. 



305 



CONTRACT VERBS. MIDDLE AND PASSIVE. 



Tl/U- 


cpiX- 


d V l- 


do/xai 


-cofxac 


sofxai 


-ovfiai 


ooLxai 


-oijuai 


ay 


-a 


h 


-3 


fy 


-oX 


de-at 


-arai 


ssrai 


-sXrat 


osTai 


-ovrai 


aoLisBov 


-colisBov 


solisOoz 


-ovpsOov 


oolisQov 


-ovjxsBov 


dsaBov 


-daBov 


ssaBov 


-sXaBov 


osaBov 


-ovaBov 


dsaBov 


-dadov 


ssaBov 


-sXaBov 


dsaBov 


-ovaBov 


aousBai 


-coLtsBa 


sdjxsBa 


-ovLieQa 


ooLisBa 


-ovLxsBa 


deads 


-daBs 


ssaQs 


-sXaBe 


dsaBs 


-ovaBs 


dovrai 


-covrai 


sovrai 


-ovvrai 


QOVTai 


-ovvrai 


dcofj.ai 


-cofxai 


sa)[xat 


-tofxai 


6o} li at 


"cofxai 


<% 


-a 


h 


-0 


6rj 


-oX 


drjTdi 


-arai 


erjraL 


-rjTai 


6r]Tai 


-co rat 


acousBov 


-colisBov 


scolxsBov 


-co\xsBov 


oojjxsBov 


-ojlxeBov 


drj-Qov 


-aadov 


sr\aBov 


-rjaBov 


6r\aBov 


-cZaBov 


drjaBov 


-daBov 


stjgBov 


-rjaBov 


6r\aBov 


-oiaBov 


aojixsBa 


-6f.is.Qa 


SCOLXsBcb 


-coicsBa 


ocoiisBa 


-toLxtBa 


an ads 


-dads 


srjaBs 


-rjoBs 


dyads 


-waBs 


ddiVTOLl 


-lovrai 


SCOVTO.I 


•tovTai 


ocovrai 


-covrai 


aoiLirjv 


-(Ofxrjv 


soifxrjv 


-oi[xr)v 


ooiixr\v 


-Olf.lT]V 


doco 


-coo 


SOLO 


-010 


0010 


-oXo 


doiro 


-coro 


SOITO 


-OLTO 


OOLTO 


-oXto 


aniiisBov 


-cofxsdov 


soifxsOou 


-oifxsBov 


ooiiisBov 


-oiixsQov 


doiadov 


-coaBov 


soiaBov 


-oXaBov 


SoiaBov 


-oXaBov 


aoiodrjv 


-coaBrjv 


soiaBrjv 


-oiaBriv 


ooicrBrjv 


-oiaBjjv 


aoiasBa 


-cpiisBa 


soijxsBa 


-oijjisBa 


ooifxsBa 


-oifxsQa 


do tad e 


-coaBs 


soiaBs 


-oXaBs 


ooioBs 


-oXaBs 


doLi/ro 


-WJTO 


SOLVTO 


-oXvto 


OOLVTO 


-oXvto 


dov 


-co 


SOV 


-ov 


00 V 


-ov 


asaBo) 


-daBco 


ssaBco 


-siaBco 


oeaBco 


-ovaBai 


dsaBov 


-ao-Qov 


ssaBov 


-sXaBov 


osaBov 


-ovoBov 


aifjfjoiv 


-daBcov 


ssoBcov 


-sio-Qcov 


osaBcov 


-ovaQayv 


deaBs 


-dads 


ssa&s 


-sTaBs 


osoBs 


-ovaBe 


asaBcoaav 


-daBcoaav 


sscrBcoaav 


-siadcoaav 


osaBcoaav -ovaBcoaav 


dsaBai 


-dcBai 


ss-aBai 


-sXadai 


osaBai 


-ovaBai 


adfxsvog 


-taiiBvos 


SOjXSVOS 


-ovLisvog 


odjisvog 


-ovLisvog 


aou.ivrj 


•COfXSVTf 


so\\svr\ 


-ovfxsvr) 


ooixsvrj 


-OVfXSVTf 


ad/xsvov 


-COjXSVOV 


SOfXSVOV 


-OVLXSVOV 


oofxsvov 


-OViXSVOV 


£tiu- 


icpd- 


£d V X- 


aofxrjv 


-CO[XT]V 


sOfjrjv 


'•ovjxrjv 


oofxrjv 


"0VjX7}V 


dov 


-CO 


SOV 


-ov 


6ov 


-ov 


isro 


-a.ro 


SSTO 


-sXto 


Ssto 


-OVTO 


a6ixsBov 


'COjXsOov 


sofisBov 


-ovlxz&ov 


OOLXSBOV 


-ovixsQov 


dsaBov 


-aadov 


ssaBov 


-sXaBov 


ocaBov 


-ovaBov 


aicOrju 


•daBr]V 


seaBrjv 


-siaBr\v 


osaBov 


-ovaBr\v 


aoixsBa 


-co/xsBa 


so/xsBa 


-ov/xsBa 


odjxsQa 


-ovLxsBa 


dsaOs 


-dads 


ssoBe 


-sXaBs 


6sa0s 


-ovoOe 


&OVTO 


-a5i TO 


GOV TO 


-OVVTO 


6ovto 


-OVVTO 



306 ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION. § 219 

s s 21& ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION. 

[Mh'i fud from Moi^. De Sacy's Principles of General Grammar.] 

Kverv person, in expressing his ideas by speaking or writing, performs 
the operation of composition, or constructing sentences out of the simple 
elements thai compose them. The reverse of this, or the reducing of sen- 
a into their simple elements, is Analysis. Now, as in constructing 
sentences, dm regard must be paid to certain established rules of speech 
called the rules of syntax, so we must be guided by the same rules in ana- 
lyzing them* 

In translating from one language into another, both operations are car- 
ried on at the same time. The sentence to be translated is analyzed, and 
then combined into a new sentence in the translation. It is obvious, there- 
fore, that without correct analysis there can be no correct translation, and 
to these a knowledge of the rules of construction in both languages is in- 
dispensable. 

Analysis. 

The constituent parts of simple and compound sentences have already 
been mentioned, § 126., and need not be here repeated. But for the further 
illustration of the subject, it may be noticed that simple sentences may be 
combined into a compound sentence in four different ways. 1. The subject 
may be compound and the predicate simple, but common to both parts of 
the subject ; as, " time and tide wait for no man," i. e. u time waits for no 
man," " tide waits for no man." 2. The subject may be simple and the 
predicate compound; as, "time is fleeting, and should be diligently im- 
proved ;" i. e. u time is fleeting;" ic time should be diligently improved." 
3. Both the subject and the predicate may be compound, and then the com- 
pound sentence will contain as many simple sentences as there are distinct 
10 both: as, "luxurious living and high pleasures produce languor 
and satiety;" i.e. "luxurious living produces languor," " luxurious living 
produces satiety ;" " high living produces languor, 1 ' " high living produces 
sail' tv." 4. Simple sentences consisting of separate subjects and separate 
predicates may he conjunctively united into one compound sentence; as, 
" the ox knoweth his owner, and the ass (knowcth) his master's crib, but 
Israel doth not know, my people do not consider." 

Note* It must be noticed, however, that two or more nouns combined, 

be regarded ss one subject when the predicate can be affirmed of 

them only as combined, and not separately; thus, "three and two make 

five;" — "virtue and vice are opposite qualities," — "He and I are of the 

ill simple propositions, bavins each but one subject and 

-though the predicate consists of two nouns. 

2. [n every simple proposition we must distinguish between the Gram- 
ma predicate, and the Logical subject and predicate. The 
cal subject is the simple name or thing spoken of, without, or 
ited from all modifying words or clause s. The Logical subject is the 
word in connexion with all qualifying or restricting expressions which 
make up the full idea of the thing spoken of. The Grammatical pre- 
oicate is the word containing the simple affirmation made respecting thr 



§ 219. ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION. 307 

subject ; tne Logical is that word combined with all those that modify it in 
any way. Thus, in the sentence — " An inordinate desire of admiration 
often produces a contemptible levity of deportment,"' — the Grammatical 
sjubject is " desire" the grammatical predicate is "produces*" The Logical 
subject is, " An inordinate desire of admiration ;" the Logical predicate is 
"produces often a contemptible levity of deportment." All those circum- 
stances, qualifications, restrictions, &c, connected with either subject or 
predicate in whatever manner expressed, are called adjuncts. If a subject 
or predicate has no adjunct, it isincomplex, and there is no difference between 
the grammatical and the logical ; as, life is short. But when a subject or 
predicate is combined with its adjuncts, it is then said to be complex, and 
the Grammatical and Logical subject or predicate must be distinguished as 
above. 

3. The adjuncts of a subject or predicate may be an adjective, participle, 
adverb, phrase, or a restrictive or descriptive proposition, joined with it by a 
relative or other conjunctive term. When the predicate is an active verb, 
then the noun or pronoun, or whatever else it governs as its object, with all 
that belongs to its construction in the sentence, is its adjunct, and is called 
the complement of the verb ; and this like the subject or the predicate is 
grammatical or logical, complex or incomplex, according as it consists o! 
single term, expressing a simple idea, or has other modifying adjuncts con- 
nected with it. 

In addition to the illustration of these principles by the examples already 
furnished, we may exemplify them in the following sentence from Cicero 
pro Arch. 1. 

" Omnes artes qua ad humanitatem pertinent, habent quoddam commune vin- 
culum, et quasi cognatione quadam inter se continentur," "All the arts which 
pertain to civilization have a certain common bond, and are connected to- 
gether as it were by a certain affinity between them." 

The subject or thing here spoken of is artes, and of this two things are af- 
firmed. The sentence is, therefore, compound, having a simple subject 
and a compound predicate, and may, therefore, be resolved into two simple 
propositions ; thus, 

1. Omnes artes qua humanitatem pertinent habent quoddam commune 
vinculum; and, 

2. Omnes artes quae, ad humanitatem pertinent quasi cognatione quadam 
inter se continentur, 

1. The first simple proposition may be analyzed thus, 

I. THE SUBJECT. Here the logical subject is " Omnes artes qua aa 
hwnaaitatem pertinent." It is complex, containing the grammatical subject 
artes which is the nominative to the verb in the predicate, and, connected 
with it as adjuncts ; 1. the qualifying adjective omnes in concord with it ; 
and 2. the restrictive subordinate sentence, qua ad humanitatem pertinent, 
restricting the meaning of artes by its relation to humanitatem. This re- 
strictive proposition is connected with artes by the relative quae agreeing 
with it, and which, as itstaiflfc IRAeiB^f the* noun infihe nominative case 
without an adjunct, is incomplex, and is both^he grammatical and logical 
subject of the proposition. Again, the logical predicate in this restrictive 
proposition is complex, consisting of the grammatical predicate pertinent, 
and its adjunct, ad humanitatem. 

II. THE PREDICATE. The logical predicate is, habent quoddam com- 
mune vinculum. It is complex, consisting of the grammatical predicate hd- 






LLTSI8 AND TRANSLATION. 



fa lft 



b 



xnl agreeing with its nominative or Bubiect artea and hs>iri n <, ;** i • * 

1,1 ,»»y 'ts adjunct ,,»,„/,/,„„ commune, and these i«,fc '£ » 

plementofthev^rbAa*«nt. ' ♦ 

ntepce may be analysed thus, 
'• ' P. TMsisthesa. sin the first 

? ZWSM5 ff-333 

£ VwfaM, the ,„„„„ by which the connexfo^predicated bv 

■jjdM. bj th. phiaae .nfer*, expressing the mnw of the connexion in' 

two simple sentences are combined into one comwrand 

tenceb, U, e conjunctive particle et-This mode of analysis may be °em 

ployed by the student m any sentence whether EnalUh l ..tin „? r> 7 

and wffl generally be found 'a pleasant, J^J^t^^^' 

Translation. 

From these remarks it is obvious that in translating a sentence it is no 

oaring wrtfa the analysis of simple sentences the firs" hh ^ e c CS sa lv is? to' 



713 4WMIM 


















Deacidified using the Bookkeeper proces 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: July 2006 

PreservationTechnologie* 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATIOI 
' 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 

<ry Township, PA 16066 
(724)779-2111 













•7* 



A*' 



- 













V, 



^> 



- 



^ v* 






Ilium, 



l 'BRa^ 



OF 



°ONG Rl 



! ii-n 



ESS 



003 



037 



644 



